rtn 980 maintenance guide(u2000)-(v100r003c03_02)
TRANSCRIPT
![Page 1: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemV100R003C03
Maintenance Guide (U2000)
Issue 02
Date 2012-01-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
![Page 2: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
![Page 3: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
About This Document
Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX RTN 980 V100R003C03
iManager U2000 V100R006C00
Intended AudienceThis document provides the guidelines to maintaining the OptiX RTN 980. It also describes thealarms and performance events that are required for troubleshooting during the maintenance.
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineerl Data configuration engineerl System maintenance engineer
Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,which if not avoided, will result in death orserious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low levelof risk, which if not avoided, could result inminor or moderate injury.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) About This Document
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
![Page 4: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
Symbol Description
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,which if not avoided, could result inequipment damage, data loss, performancedegradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve aproblem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasizeor supplement important points of the maintext.
General ConventionsThe general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.
Command ConventionsThe command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) About This Document
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
![Page 5: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
Convention Description
{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI ConventionsThe GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue containsall updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03
This document is the second issue of the V100R003C03 product version.
Compared with the first issue, the updated contents are follows.
Update Description
A Alarm Reference Added the DBMS_DELETE alarm, anddeleted the DBMS_ABNORMAL alarm.
A.2 Alarm List (Classified by LogicalBoards)
Added the ETH_EFM_EVENT alarm toIFU2,IFX2,ISU2, and ISX2.
Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03
This document is the first issue of the V100R003C03 product version.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) About This Document
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
![Page 6: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Safety Precautions.........................................................................................................................11.1 General Safety Precautions.................................................................................................................................21.2 Warning and Safety Symbols.............................................................................................................................31.3 Electrical Safety..................................................................................................................................................41.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.........................................................................................................................71.5 Storage Batteries.................................................................................................................................................71.6 Radiation.............................................................................................................................................................9
1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers.....................................................................................................................91.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure.......................................................................................................................111.6.3 Forbidden Areas......................................................................................................................................111.6.4 Laser........................................................................................................................................................111.6.5 Microwave...............................................................................................................................................12
1.7 Working at Heights...........................................................................................................................................131.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects...........................................................................................................................131.7.2 Using Ladders..........................................................................................................................................14
1.8 Mechanical Safety............................................................................................................................................161.9 Other Precautions.............................................................................................................................................17
2 Notices for High-Risk Operations...........................................................................................192.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.................................................................................................202.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper...................................................................................................................222.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable.....................................................................................................................232.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board.....................................................................................................................24
3 Routine Maintenance..................................................................................................................26
4 Emergency Maintenance............................................................................................................294.1 Definition of Emergency..................................................................................................................................304.2 Purposes of Emergency Maintenance...............................................................................................................304.3 Procedure for Emergency Maintenance............................................................................................................30
5 Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................................375.1 General Troubleshooting Procedure.................................................................................................................395.2 Troubleshooting Service Interruptions.............................................................................................................41
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
![Page 7: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.......................................................................................................................475.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services..................................................................................................555.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications.............................................................................................................615.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment............................................................................655.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment............................................................................685.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults..............................................................................................725.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane..........................................................................785.10 Troubleshooting MPLS Tunnels....................................................................................................................845.11 Troubleshooting CES Services.......................................................................................................................885.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services.....................................................................................................................935.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs......................................................................................975.14 Troubleshooting Orderwire Faults................................................................................................................101
6 Part Replacement.......................................................................................................................1046.1 Removing a Board..........................................................................................................................................1066.2 Inserting a Board............................................................................................................................................1096.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board..................................................................................................1116.4 Replacing the PDH Interface Board...............................................................................................................1126.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.......................................................................................................................1136.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board..........................................................................................................1146.7 Replacing the IF Board...................................................................................................................................1156.8 Replacing the CF Card...................................................................................................................................1176.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.............................................................................1186.10 Replacing the Auxiliary Board.....................................................................................................................1206.11 Replacing the Fan Board..............................................................................................................................1216.12 Replacing the Power Board..........................................................................................................................1236.13 Replacing the SFP........................................................................................................................................1246.14 Replacing the ODU......................................................................................................................................1256.15 Replacing the IF Cable.................................................................................................................................126
7 Database Backup and Restoration.........................................................................................1287.1 NE Database...................................................................................................................................................1297.2 Backing Up the Database Manually...............................................................................................................1297.3 Setting the Database Backup Policy...............................................................................................................130
7.3.1 Setting the User-Defined Backup Policy...............................................................................................1307.3.2 Enable the Backup Policy of the Device...............................................................................................1317.3.3 Disable the Backup Policy of the Device..............................................................................................132
7.4 Restoring the Database...................................................................................................................................132
8 Supporting Task........................................................................................................................1348.1 Hardware Loopback.......................................................................................................................................1378.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters.......................................................................................................137
8.2.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Cartridge Cleaners.....................................................................1378.2.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Lens Tissue................................................................................139
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
![Page 8: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
8.2.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters by Using Optical Cleaning Sticks.................................................................1408.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and Performance Events.....................................................................141
8.3.1 Checking the NE Status.........................................................................................................................1418.3.2 Checking the Board Status....................................................................................................................1428.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms......................................................................................................................1428.3.4 Browsing Abnormal Events...................................................................................................................1448.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events.................................................................................................1458.3.6 Browsing History Alarms......................................................................................................................1458.3.7 Browsing History Performance Events.................................................................................................1468.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records...........................................................1478.3.9 Browsing UAT Events...........................................................................................................................1478.3.10 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs....................................................................1488.3.11 Setting Severity and Auto Reporting Status of Alarms.......................................................................1498.3.12 Suppressing Alarms for Monitored Objects........................................................................................1498.3.13 Suppressing Alarms for NEs...............................................................................................................1508.3.14 Reversing Alarms for Service Ports....................................................................................................1508.3.15 Setting Trigger Conditions of AIS Insertion.......................................................................................1518.3.16 Setting Trigger Conditions of UNEQ Insertion...................................................................................1528.3.17 Setting Bit Error Thresholds for Service Ports....................................................................................1528.3.18 Setting Monitoring and Auto-Report Status of Performance Events..................................................1538.3.19 Setting Performance Thresholds..........................................................................................................1538.3.20 Resetting Performance Registers.........................................................................................................154
8.4 Using the RMON............................................................................................................................................1548.4.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of a Port........................................................1548.4.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for a Port................................................................................................1578.4.3 Configuring a Historical Control Group................................................................................................1598.4.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the Historical Group of a Port.......................................................160
8.5 Querying a Report..........................................................................................................................................1638.5.1 Querying the Board Information Report ..............................................................................................1638.5.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information Report ......................................................................1638.5.3 Querying the Microwave Link Information Report...............................................................................1648.5.4 Querying the Network-wide License Report.........................................................................................165
8.6 Software Loopback.........................................................................................................................................1658.6.1 Setting Loopback for the SDH Optical Interface Board........................................................................1658.6.2 Setting Loopback for the Tributary Board............................................................................................1678.6.3 Setting a Loopback for the Smart E1 Processing Board.......................................................................1698.6.4 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board......................................................1708.6.5 Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Interface Board.............................................1728.6.6 Setting Loopback for the IF Board........................................................................................................1758.6.7 Locating a Fault by Performing Loopback Operations.........................................................................177
8.7 Reset...............................................................................................................................................................1788.7.1 Cold Reset..............................................................................................................................................178
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
![Page 9: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
8.7.2 Warm Reset...........................................................................................................................................1798.8 PRBS Test.......................................................................................................................................................179
8.8.1 Performing a PRBS Test for the Tributary Board.................................................................................1798.8.2 Performing a PRBS Test for the IF Board.............................................................................................182
8.9 Querying the License Capacity.......................................................................................................................1838.10 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser...........................................................................................................1848.11 Setting the ALS Function.............................................................................................................................1848.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function......................................................................................................1858.13 Querying Power Consumption of Boards.....................................................................................................1868.14 Querying the Impedance of an E1 Channel..................................................................................................1868.15 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port Mirroring.................................................................................1878.16 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet Port.................................................................................................1888.17 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports.......................................1898.18 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet Ports...................................1898.19 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet Port..........................................................1908.20 Using the Ethernet Test Frames....................................................................................................................1918.21 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit................................................................1938.22 End-to-End Management on Fibers, Tunnels, and PWE3 Services.............................................................193
8.22.1 Expanding/Collapsing Fibers and Cables............................................................................................1938.22.2 Querying Optical Power of Fibers and Cables....................................................................................1948.22.3 Querying the Radio Link Information.................................................................................................1958.22.4 Querying the Radio Link Performance................................................................................................1958.22.5 Managing E-Line Services Transmitted in Native Ethernet Mode.....................................................1968.22.6 Managing MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode.............................................................................1968.22.7 Managing and Maintaining PWE3 Services........................................................................................1978.22.8 Verifying Native Ethernet Services.....................................................................................................1978.22.9 Verifying MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode.............................................................................1998.22.10 Verifying PW Configurations in an End-to-End Mode.....................................................................2018.22.11 Verifying PW-Based E-Line Service Configurations (in an End-to-End Mode)..............................203
A Alarm Reference.......................................................................................................................207A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order)...............................................................................................................208A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards)....................................................................................................226
A.2.1 CSHN....................................................................................................................................................227A.2.2 IF1.........................................................................................................................................................228A.2.3 IFU2......................................................................................................................................................228A.2.4 IFX2......................................................................................................................................................229A.2.5 SL1D/SL1DA.......................................................................................................................................230A.2.6 EM6T....................................................................................................................................................230A.2.7 EM6TA.................................................................................................................................................231A.2.8 EM6F....................................................................................................................................................231A.2.9 EM6FA.................................................................................................................................................232A.2.10 EFP8...................................................................................................................................................232
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
![Page 10: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
A.2.11 EMS6..................................................................................................................................................233A.2.12 SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................................................................233A.2.13 AUX....................................................................................................................................................234A.2.14 PIU......................................................................................................................................................234A.2.15 FAN....................................................................................................................................................234A.2.16 ISU2....................................................................................................................................................234A.2.17 ISX2....................................................................................................................................................235A.2.18 ML1/MD1...........................................................................................................................................236A.2.19 SL4D...................................................................................................................................................236A.2.20 EG2D..................................................................................................................................................237A.2.21 ODU....................................................................................................................................................237
A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures..................................................................................................................238A.3.1 A_LOC.................................................................................................................................................238A.3.2 ALM_E1RAI........................................................................................................................................239A.3.3 ALM_GFP_dCSF.................................................................................................................................239A.3.4 ALM_GFP_dLFD.................................................................................................................................240A.3.5 ALM_IMA_LIF....................................................................................................................................242A.3.6 ALM_IMA_LODS...............................................................................................................................243A.3.7 ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE......................................................................................................244A.3.8 ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE......................................................................................................246A.3.9 ALM_IMA_RFI...................................................................................................................................247A.3.10 AM_DOWNSHIFT............................................................................................................................249A.3.11 APS_FAIL..........................................................................................................................................250A.3.12 APS_INDI...........................................................................................................................................251A.3.13 APS_MANUAL_STOP......................................................................................................................253A.3.14 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC..................................................................................................254A.3.15 AU_AIS..............................................................................................................................................254A.3.16 AU_LOP.............................................................................................................................................255A.3.17 B1_EXC..............................................................................................................................................256A.3.18 B1_SD.................................................................................................................................................259A.3.19 B2_EXC..............................................................................................................................................261A.3.20 B2_SD.................................................................................................................................................263A.3.21 B3_EXC..............................................................................................................................................265A.3.22 B3_EXC_VC3....................................................................................................................................267A.3.23 B3_SD.................................................................................................................................................270A.3.24 B3_SD_VC3.......................................................................................................................................272A.3.25 BD_NOT_INSTALLED.....................................................................................................................274A.3.26 BD_STATUS......................................................................................................................................275A.3.27 BIOS_STATUS..................................................................................................................................277A.3.28 BIP_EXC............................................................................................................................................277A.3.29 BIP_SD...............................................................................................................................................279A.3.30 BOOTROM_BAD..............................................................................................................................281
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
![Page 11: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
A.3.31 BUS_ERR...........................................................................................................................................282A.3.32 CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN...................................................................................................................284A.3.33 CES_JTROVR_EXC..........................................................................................................................285A.3.34 CES_JTRUDR_EXC..........................................................................................................................286A.3.35 CES_LOSPKT_EXC..........................................................................................................................287A.3.36 CES_MALPKT_EXC.........................................................................................................................288A.3.37 CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC.............................................................................................................289A.3.38 CES_RDI............................................................................................................................................290A.3.39 CES_STRAYPKT_EXC....................................................................................................................291A.3.40 CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT......................................................................................................291A.3.41 CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI.................................................................................................................292A.3.42 CFCARD_FAILED............................................................................................................................293A.3.43 CFCARD_OFFLINE..........................................................................................................................294A.3.44 CHCS..................................................................................................................................................295A.3.45 CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE................................................................................................................296A.3.46 COMMUN_FAIL...............................................................................................................................298A.3.47 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT....................................................................................................................299A.3.48 DBMS_DELETE................................................................................................................................302A.3.49 DBMS_ERROR..................................................................................................................................302A.3.50 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE...............................................................................................................303A.3.51 DCNSIZE_OVER...............................................................................................................................304A.3.52 DDN_LFA..........................................................................................................................................305A.3.53 DOWN_E1_AIS.................................................................................................................................306A.3.54 DROPRATIO_OVER.........................................................................................................................308A.3.55 E1_LOC..............................................................................................................................................309A.3.56 E1_LOS..............................................................................................................................................310A.3.57 ETH_APS_LOST...............................................................................................................................311A.3.58 ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH.......................................................................................................312A.3.59 ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL...............................................................................................................313A.3.60 ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH........................................................................................................314A.3.61 ETH_CFM_LOC................................................................................................................................315A.3.62 ETH_CFM_MISMERGE...................................................................................................................318A.3.63 ETH_CFM_RDI.................................................................................................................................321A.3.64 ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI....................................................................................................................323A.3.65 ETH_EFM_DF...................................................................................................................................326A.3.66 ETH_EFM_EVENT...........................................................................................................................327A.3.67 ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK...................................................................................................................328A.3.68 ETH_EFM_REMFAULT...................................................................................................................329A.3.69 ETH_LOS...........................................................................................................................................330A.3.70 ETH_NO_FLOW...............................................................................................................................332A.3.71 ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL..........................................................................................................333A.3.72 ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT.......................................................................................................334
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
![Page 12: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
A.3.73 ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP....................................................................................................................336A.3.74 ETHOAM_RMT_SD.........................................................................................................................337A.3.75 ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP...................................................................................................................339A.3.76 ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP.........................................................................................................340A.3.77 EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS...................................................................................................................342A.3.78 EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT.......................................................................................................343A.3.79 EXT_SYNC_LOS..............................................................................................................................345A.3.80 FAN_AGING.....................................................................................................................................346A.3.81 FAN_FAIL.........................................................................................................................................346A.3.82 FCS_ERR...........................................................................................................................................348A.3.83 FLOW_OVER....................................................................................................................................349A.3.84 HARD_BAD.......................................................................................................................................350A.3.85 HP_CROSSTR...................................................................................................................................352A.3.86 HP_LOM............................................................................................................................................353A.3.87 HP_RDI..............................................................................................................................................354A.3.88 HP_REI...............................................................................................................................................355A.3.89 HP_SLM.............................................................................................................................................356A.3.90 HP_TIM..............................................................................................................................................357A.3.91 HP_UNEQ..........................................................................................................................................358A.3.92 HPAD_CROSSTR..............................................................................................................................359A.3.93 IF_CABLE_OPEN.............................................................................................................................360A.3.94 IF_INPWR_ABN...............................................................................................................................361A.3.95 IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED............................................................................................................363A.3.96 IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN................................................................................................................364A.3.97 IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN...............................................................................................................365A.3.98 IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH..............................................................................................................366A.3.99 IN_PWR_ABN...................................................................................................................................367A.3.100 IN_PWR_HIGH...............................................................................................................................369A.3.101 IN_PWR_LOW................................................................................................................................370A.3.102 J0_MM..............................................................................................................................................371A.3.103 K1_K2_M.........................................................................................................................................372A.3.104 K2_M................................................................................................................................................374A.3.105 LAG_BWMM...................................................................................................................................375A.3.106 LAG_DOWN....................................................................................................................................376A.3.107 LAG_MEMBER_DOWN................................................................................................................377A.3.108 LAG_PORT_FAIL...........................................................................................................................379A.3.109 LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL...................................................................................................................381A.3.110 LAN_LOC........................................................................................................................................383A.3.111 LASER_CLOSED............................................................................................................................384A.3.112 LASER_MOD_ERR.........................................................................................................................385A.3.113 LASER_MOD_ERR_EX.................................................................................................................386A.3.114 LASER_SHUT.................................................................................................................................387
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
![Page 13: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
A.3.115 LCAS_FOPR....................................................................................................................................388A.3.116 LCAS_FOPT....................................................................................................................................390A.3.117 LCAS_PLCR....................................................................................................................................391A.3.118 LCAS_PLCT....................................................................................................................................393A.3.119 LCAS_TLCR....................................................................................................................................394A.3.120 LCAS_TLCT....................................................................................................................................396A.3.121 LCD..................................................................................................................................................397A.3.122 LCS_LIMITED.................................................................................................................................399A.3.123 LFA...................................................................................................................................................401A.3.124 LICENSE_DIFF...............................................................................................................................402A.3.125 LICENSE_LOST..............................................................................................................................406A.3.126 LINK_ERR.......................................................................................................................................407A.3.127 LMFA...............................................................................................................................................408A.3.128 LOOP_ALM.....................................................................................................................................409A.3.129 LP_CROSSTR..................................................................................................................................411A.3.130 LP_R_FIFO......................................................................................................................................412A.3.131 LP_RDI.............................................................................................................................................413A.3.132 LP_RDI_VC12.................................................................................................................................414A.3.133 LP_RDI_VC3...................................................................................................................................415A.3.134 LP_REI.............................................................................................................................................416A.3.135 LP_REI_VC12..................................................................................................................................417A.3.136 LP_REI_VC3....................................................................................................................................418A.3.137 LP_RFI.............................................................................................................................................419A.3.138 LP_SLM...........................................................................................................................................420A.3.139 LP_SLM_VC12................................................................................................................................420A.3.140 LP_SLM_VC3..................................................................................................................................421A.3.141 LP_T_FIFO.......................................................................................................................................422A.3.142 LP_TIM............................................................................................................................................423A.3.143 LP_TIM_VC12.................................................................................................................................424A.3.144 LP_TIM_VC3...................................................................................................................................425A.3.145 LP_UNEQ.........................................................................................................................................427A.3.146 LP_UNEQ_VC12.............................................................................................................................428A.3.147 LP_UNEQ_VC3...............................................................................................................................429A.3.148 LPS_UNI_BI_M...............................................................................................................................430A.3.149 LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT.................................................................................................................431A.3.150 LPT_INEFFECT...............................................................................................................................432A.3.151 LPT_RFI...........................................................................................................................................434A.3.152 LSR_NO_FITED..............................................................................................................................435A.3.153 LTI....................................................................................................................................................436A.3.154 MAC_EXT_EXC.............................................................................................................................438A.3.155 MAC_FCS_EXC..............................................................................................................................439A.3.156 MOD_COM_FAIL...........................................................................................................................440
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xii
![Page 14: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
A.3.157 MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH.............................................................................................................441A.3.158 MPLS_PW_BDI...............................................................................................................................443A.3.159 MPLS_PW_Excess...........................................................................................................................443A.3.160 MPLS_PW_LOCV...........................................................................................................................444A.3.161 MPLS_PW_MISMATCH................................................................................................................446A.3.162 MPLS_PW_MISMERGE.................................................................................................................447A.3.163 MPLS_PW_SD.................................................................................................................................448A.3.164 MPLS_PW_SF.................................................................................................................................449A.3.165 MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN.................................................................................................................450A.3.166 MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI.....................................................................................................................451A.3.167 MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess.................................................................................................................451A.3.168 MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI.....................................................................................................................452A.3.169 MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV.................................................................................................................453A.3.170 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH......................................................................................................455A.3.171 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE.......................................................................................................456A.3.172 MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL..........................................................................................................456A.3.173 MPLS_TUNNEL_SD.......................................................................................................................458A.3.174 MPLS_TUNNEL_SF.......................................................................................................................458A.3.175 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN.......................................................................................................459A.3.176 MS_AIS............................................................................................................................................460A.3.177 MS_CROSSTR.................................................................................................................................461A.3.178 MS_RDI............................................................................................................................................463A.3.179 MS_REI............................................................................................................................................464A.3.180 MSAD_CROSSTR...........................................................................................................................465A.3.181 MULTI_RPL_OWNER....................................................................................................................466A.3.182 MW_AM_TEST...............................................................................................................................467A.3.183 MW_BER_EXC...............................................................................................................................467A.3.184 MW_BER_SD..................................................................................................................................472A.3.185 MW_CFG_MISMATCH..................................................................................................................476A.3.186 MW_CONT_WAVE........................................................................................................................477A.3.187 MW_E1_LOST.................................................................................................................................478A.3.188 MW_FEC_UNCOR..........................................................................................................................479A.3.189 MW_LIM..........................................................................................................................................483A.3.190 MW_LOF.........................................................................................................................................485A.3.191 MW_RDI..........................................................................................................................................490A.3.192 NESF_LOST.....................................................................................................................................491A.3.193 NESOFT_MM..................................................................................................................................493A.3.194 NESTATE_INSTALL......................................................................................................................496A.3.195 NO_BD_SOFT.................................................................................................................................497A.3.196 NP1_MANUAL_STOP....................................................................................................................498A.3.197 NP1_SW_FAIL................................................................................................................................499A.3.198 NP1_SW_INDI.................................................................................................................................500
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
![Page 15: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
A.3.199 NTP_SYNC_FAIL...........................................................................................................................501A.3.200 OCD..................................................................................................................................................502A.3.201 OUT_PWR_ABN.............................................................................................................................503A.3.202 PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT...............................................................................................................504A.3.203 PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT..........................................................................................................505A.3.204 PATCH_PKGERR...........................................................................................................................506A.3.205 PG_LINK_FAIL...............................................................................................................................506A.3.206 PG_PRT_DEGRADED....................................................................................................................507A.3.207 PLA_CFG_MISMATCH.................................................................................................................508A.3.208 PORTMODE_MISMATCH.............................................................................................................510A.3.209 PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC....................................................................................................................511A.3.210 PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE...........................................................................................................512A.3.211 POWER_ABNORMAL...................................................................................................................513A.3.212 POWER_ALM.................................................................................................................................514A.3.213 PW_DROPPKT_EXC......................................................................................................................516A.3.214 PWAPS_LOST.................................................................................................................................517A.3.215 PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH.........................................................................................................517A.3.216 PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL.................................................................................................................518A.3.217 PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH.........................................................................................................519A.3.218 R_F_RST..........................................................................................................................................520A.3.219 R_LOC..............................................................................................................................................521A.3.220 R_LOF..............................................................................................................................................522A.3.221 R_LOS..............................................................................................................................................524A.3.222 R_S_ERR..........................................................................................................................................526A.3.223 RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF...........................................................................................527A.3.224 RADIO_MUTE................................................................................................................................529A.3.225 RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH............................................................................................................530A.3.226 RADIO_RSL_HIGH........................................................................................................................530A.3.227 RADIO_RSL_LOW.........................................................................................................................531A.3.228 RADIO_TSL_HIGH.........................................................................................................................533A.3.229 RADIO_TSL_LOW.........................................................................................................................534A.3.230 RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL........................................................................................................535A.3.231 RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE...........................................................................................................535A.3.232 RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR.............................................................................................................536A.3.233 RELAY_ALARM_MINOR.............................................................................................................537A.3.234 RMFA...............................................................................................................................................538A.3.235 RPS_INDI.........................................................................................................................................539A.3.236 RS_CROSSTR..................................................................................................................................541A.3.237 RTC_FAIL........................................................................................................................................542A.3.238 S1_SYN_CHANGE.........................................................................................................................543A.3.239 SCCDATA_BACKUP_FAIL...........................................................................................................544A.3.240 SEC_RADIUS_FAIL.......................................................................................................................546
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiv
![Page 16: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
A.3.241 SECU_ALM.....................................................................................................................................547A.3.242 SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD..................................................................................................................548A.3.243 SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT..................................................................................................548A.3.244 SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH..........................................................................................................549A.3.245 SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH.....................................................................................................550A.3.246 SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL..................................................................................................................551A.3.247 SWDL_INPROCESS.......................................................................................................................552A.3.248 SWDL_NEPKGCHECK..................................................................................................................552A.3.249 SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT..............................................................................................................553A.3.250 SWDL_PKGVER_MM....................................................................................................................554A.3.251 SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL.............................................................................................................555A.3.252 SYN_BAD........................................................................................................................................556A.3.253 SYNC_C_LOS.................................................................................................................................557A.3.254 T_ALOS...........................................................................................................................................558A.3.255 T_F_RST..........................................................................................................................................559A.3.256 T_LOC..............................................................................................................................................560A.3.257 TEMP_ALARM...............................................................................................................................561A.3.258 THUNDERALM..............................................................................................................................562A.3.259 TR_LOC...........................................................................................................................................563A.3.260 TU_AIS.............................................................................................................................................564A.3.261 TU_AIS_VC12.................................................................................................................................566A.3.262 TU_AIS_VC3...................................................................................................................................568A.3.263 TU_LOP...........................................................................................................................................570A.3.264 TU_LOP_VC12................................................................................................................................571A.3.265 TU_LOP_VC3..................................................................................................................................572A.3.266 TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED.........................................................................................................574A.3.267 UHCS................................................................................................................................................575A.3.268 UP_E1_AIS......................................................................................................................................576A.3.269 VC_AIS............................................................................................................................................577A.3.270 VC_LOC...........................................................................................................................................579A.3.271 VC_RDI............................................................................................................................................580A.3.272 VCAT_LOA.....................................................................................................................................582A.3.273 VCAT_LOM_VC12.........................................................................................................................583A.3.274 VCAT_LOM_VC3...........................................................................................................................585A.3.275 VCAT_SQM_VC12.........................................................................................................................586A.3.276 VCAT_SQM_VC3...........................................................................................................................588A.3.277 VOLT_LOS......................................................................................................................................589A.3.278 VP_AIS.............................................................................................................................................590A.3.279 VP_LOC...........................................................................................................................................592A.3.280 VP_RDI............................................................................................................................................594A.3.281 WRG_BD_TYPE.............................................................................................................................596A.3.282 XPIC_LOS........................................................................................................................................597
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
![Page 17: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
B Abnormal Event Reference.....................................................................................................599B.1 Major Abnormal Performance Event List......................................................................................................600B.2 Abnormal Performance Events and Handling Procedures.............................................................................600
B.2.1 IF 1+1 Protection Switching.................................................................................................................600B.2.2 N+1 Protection Switching.....................................................................................................................603B.2.3 SNCP Switching...................................................................................................................................605B.2.4 Linear MSP Switching..........................................................................................................................607B.2.5 Ring MSP Switching.............................................................................................................................609B.2.6 Status Change of an APS Protection Group.........................................................................................613B.2.7 Reporting of PW APS Switching Events..............................................................................................614B.2.8 System Control Board Switching..........................................................................................................616B.2.9 RMON Performance Value Below the Lower Limit............................................................................617B.2.10 RMON Performance Value Above the Upper Limit..........................................................................618
C Performance Event Reference................................................................................................620C.1 Performance Events (by Event Type)............................................................................................................621
C.1.1 SDH/PDH Performance Event List......................................................................................................621C.1.2 Radio Performance Events....................................................................................................................624C.1.3 Other Performance Events....................................................................................................................627
C.2 Performance Events (by Logical Board)........................................................................................................628C.2.1 CSHN....................................................................................................................................................628C.2.2 IF1.........................................................................................................................................................629C.2.3 IFU2/ISU2.............................................................................................................................................632C.2.4 IFX2/ISX2.............................................................................................................................................636C.2.5 SL4D.....................................................................................................................................................640C.2.6 SL1D/SL1DA.......................................................................................................................................642C.2.7 EM6T....................................................................................................................................................644C.2.8 EM6TA.................................................................................................................................................645C.2.9 EM6F....................................................................................................................................................645C.2.10 EM6FA...............................................................................................................................................646C.2.11 EFP8....................................................................................................................................................646C.2.12 EMS6..................................................................................................................................................647C.2.13 SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................................................................649C.2.14 EG2D..................................................................................................................................................650C.2.15 ML1/MD1...........................................................................................................................................650C.2.16 ODU....................................................................................................................................................651
C.3 Performance Events and Handling Procedures..............................................................................................652C.3.1 AUPJCHIGH, AUPJCLOW, and AUPJCNEW...................................................................................653C.3.2 TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW, and TUPJCNEW....................................................................................654C.3.3 RSBBE, RSES, RSSES, RSCSES, and RSUAS..................................................................................655C.3.4 RSOOF and RSOFS..............................................................................................................................656C.3.5 MSBBE, MSES, MSSES, MSCSES, and MSUAS..............................................................................657C.3.6 MSFEBBE, MSFEES, MSFESES, MSFECSES, and MSFEUAS.......................................................658
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvi
![Page 18: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
C.3.7 HPBBE, HPES, HPSES, HPCSES, and HPUAS.................................................................................659C.3.8 HPFEBBE, HPFEES, HPFESES, HPFECSES, and HPFEUAS..........................................................661C.3.9 IF_BBE, IF_ES, IF_SES, IF_CSES, and IF_UAS...............................................................................662C.3.10 LPBBE, LPES, LPSES, LPCSES, and LPUAS..................................................................................663C.3.11 LPFEBBE, LPFEES, LPFESES, LPFECSES, and LPFEUAS..........................................................664C.3.12 E1_LCV_SDH, E1_LLOSS_SDH, E1_LES_SDH, and E1_LSES_SDH.........................................665C.3.13 TSL_MAX, TSL_MIN, TSL_CUR, and TSL_AVG.........................................................................666C.3.14 RSL_MAX, RSL_MIN, RSL_CUR, and RSL_AVG........................................................................667C.3.15 FEC_BEF_COR_ER, FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT and FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT........................667C.3.16 QPSKWS, QAMWS16, QAMWS32, QAMWS64, QAMWS128, and QAMWS256.......................668C.3.17 ATPC_P_ADJUST and ATPC_N_ADJUST.....................................................................................669C.3.18 FB_AMDCNT and FB_AMUCNT....................................................................................................670C.3.19 RLHTT, RLLTT, TLHTT, TLLTT....................................................................................................671C.3.20 TPLMAX, TPLMIN, and TPLCUR...................................................................................................671C.3.21 RPLMAX, RPLMIN, and RPLCUR..................................................................................................672C.3.22 BDTEMPMAX, BDTEMPMIN, and BDTEMPCUR........................................................................672C.3.23 XPIC_XPD_VALUE..........................................................................................................................673C.3.24 PG_IF_BBE, PG_IF_ES, PG_IF_SES, PG_IF_CSES, and PG_IF_UAS..........................................674C.3.25 E1_BBE, E1_ES, E1_SES, E1_CSES, and E1_UAS.........................................................................675C.3.26 IF_SNR_MAX, IF_SNR_MIN, and IF_SNR_AVG..........................................................................677C.3.27 OSPITMPMAX, OSPITMPMIN, and OSPITMPCUR......................................................................677
D RMON Event Reference..........................................................................................................679D.1 List of RMON Alarm Entries........................................................................................................................680D.2 List of RMON Performance Entries on the Packet-Plane.............................................................................681D.3 List of RMON Performance Entries on the EoS/EoPDH Plane....................................................................692D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures......................................................................................................695
D.4.1 ETHDROP............................................................................................................................................695D.4.2 ETHEXCCOL.......................................................................................................................................696D.4.3 ETHLATECOL....................................................................................................................................697D.4.4 RXBBAD..............................................................................................................................................698D.4.5 TXDEFFRM.........................................................................................................................................699D.4.6 ETHUNDER.........................................................................................................................................700D.4.7 ETHOVER............................................................................................................................................701D.4.8 ETHFRG...............................................................................................................................................701D.4.9 ETHJAB...............................................................................................................................................702D.4.10 ETHCOL.............................................................................................................................................703D.4.11 ETHFCS.............................................................................................................................................704D.4.12 ATMPW_LOSPKTS..........................................................................................................................705D.4.13 ATMPW_MISORDERPKTS.............................................................................................................705D.4.14 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS..........................................................................................................706D.4.15 ATM_CORRECTED_HCSERR........................................................................................................707D.4.16 ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR..................................................................................................707
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvii
![Page 19: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
D.4.17 CES_MISORDERPKTS.....................................................................................................................708D.4.18 CES_STRAYPKTS............................................................................................................................709D.4.19 CES_MALPKTS................................................................................................................................709D.4.20 CES_JTRUDR....................................................................................................................................710D.4.21 CES_JTROVR....................................................................................................................................711D.4.22 CES_LOSPKTS..................................................................................................................................711
E Alarm Management..................................................................................................................713E.1 NE Alarm Management.................................................................................................................................714E.2 Board Alarm Management.............................................................................................................................714
E.2.1 Setting the Alarm Severity....................................................................................................................714E.2.2 Alarm Suppression................................................................................................................................714E.2.3 Alarm Auto-Report...............................................................................................................................714E.2.4 Alarm Reversion...................................................................................................................................715E.2.5 Setting of the Bit Error Alarm Threshold.............................................................................................715E.2.6 AIS Insertion.........................................................................................................................................716E.2.7 UNEQ Insertion....................................................................................................................................717
F Performance Event Management...........................................................................................718F.1 NE Performance Event Management.............................................................................................................719F.2 Board Performance Event Management.........................................................................................................719
G Alarm Suppression Relationship..........................................................................................720
H Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................724
I Glossary.......................................................................................................................................741I.1 0-9....................................................................................................................................................................742I.2 A-E..................................................................................................................................................................742I.3 F-J....................................................................................................................................................................751I.4 K-O..................................................................................................................................................................756I.5 P-T...................................................................................................................................................................762I.6 U-Z..................................................................................................................................................................771
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) Contents
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xviii
![Page 20: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
1 Safety Precautions
About This Chapter
This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating, andmaintaining Huawei devices.
1.1 General Safety PrecautionsThis topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuringand testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.
1.2 Warning and Safety SymbolsBefore using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.
1.3 Electrical SafetyThis topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,power cables, fuses, and ESD.
1.4 Environment of Flammable GasThis topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
1.5 Storage BatteriesThis topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.
1.6 RadiationThis topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.
1.7 Working at HeightsThis topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.
1.8 Mechanical SafetyThis topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,and carrying heavy objects.
1.9 Other PrecautionsThis topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,and routing cables.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
![Page 21: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
1.1 General Safety PrecautionsThis topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuringand testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.
All Safety PrecautionsTo ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safetyprecautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device.
The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all thesafety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.
Local Laws and RegulationsWhen operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safetyprecautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws andregulations.
Basic Installation RequirementsThe installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training andbe familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation.
l Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device.l Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot
and maintain the device.l Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or
change the device or parts of the device (including software).l The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety
problems to the person in charge.
Grounding RequirementsThe grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded.
l When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removingthe device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last.
l Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.l Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.l The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. Before operating the device,
check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the device is properlygrounded.
Human Safetyl When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the
cables.l When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the
fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
![Page 22: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
NOTEThe preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.
l To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits totelephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits.
l Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurtby laser beams.
l Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wriststrap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches,to prevent electric shock and burn.
l In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press thefire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning buildingagain in any situation.
Device Safetyl Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as
on a wall or in a rack.l When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked.l When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required.l After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.
1.2 Warning and Safety SymbolsBefore using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.
Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 980 and their meanings.
Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 980
Symbol Indication
This symbol is for ESD protection.A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wearan ES wrist strap or glove when you touch a board.Otherwise, you may cause damage to the board.
CLASS 1LASER
PRODUCT
LASERRADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLYWITH OPTICALINSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASERPRODUCT
This symbol is for the laser class.A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser.Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams. Otherwise, it maydamage you eyes or skin.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
![Page 23: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
Symbol Indication
A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack isgrounded.
ATTENTION 警告
CLEAN PERIODICALLY定期清洗
A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter shouldbe cleaned periodically.
严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片
DON'T TOUCH THEFAN LEAVES BEFORETHEY SLOW DOWN !
This symbol is for fan safety.A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leavesshould not be touched when the fan is rotating.
1.3 Electrical SafetyThis topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,power cables, fuses, and ESD.
High Voltage
DANGERl A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact
with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal.l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or
both.
ThunderstormThe requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.
DANGERDo not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weatherconditions.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
![Page 24: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
High Leakage Current
WARNINGBefore powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the devicecannot be ensured.
If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you mustconnect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/Cinput power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device.
Power Cables
DANGERDo not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core ofthe power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire oreye injury.
l Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device.
l Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable iscorrect.
Device with Power On
DANGERInstalling or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.
DANGERDo not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.
Short Circuits
When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments inaccordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
![Page 25: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
CAUTIONTo avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver), do not place the tool on theventilation plate of the subrack.
CAUTIONPrevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits.
Fuse
WARNINGIf the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications toensure safe operation of the device.
Electrostatic Discharge
CAUTIONThe static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitivecomponents on the board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI).
l The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations:physical movement, clothing friction, friction between shoes and the ground, plastics inthe hand. Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable time.
l Before operating a device, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strap that is properlygrounded. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components frombeing damaged by the static electricity in the human body.
Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
![Page 26: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap
1.4 Environment of Flammable GasThis topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
DANGERDo not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas.
Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.
1.5 Storage BatteriesThis topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.
DANGERBefore operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiarwith the method of connecting a storage battery.
l Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any short-circuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage.
l If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte maycorrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards.
l A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit,which leads to human injuries.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
![Page 27: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
Basic Precautions
To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery:
l Use special insulation tools.l Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures.l Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing
electrolyte.l When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or
reversing the storage battery is prohibited.l Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is
disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.
Short-Circuit
DANGERA battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary batteryis low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy.
Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the workingbattery before performing other operations.
Hazardous Gas
CAUTIONDo not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix itproperly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or deviceerosion.
Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofingmeasures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.
Battery Temperature
CAUTIONIf a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte mayoverflow.
When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60°C, you need to check whether theelectrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
![Page 28: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
Battery Leakage
CAUTIONIn the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately.
When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. Whenyou find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb theleaking electrolyte:
l Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3)
l Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended bythe battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal.
If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyteimmediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospitalimmediately.
1.6 RadiationThis topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.
1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical FibersThe laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when usingoptical fibers.
DANGERWhen installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers, avoid direct eyeexposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface board or fiber connectors. Thelaser beam can cause damage to your eyes.
Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces
CAUTIONIf fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriouslyaffected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned beforethe fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an optical interfaceon the equipment.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
![Page 29: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the followingspecial cleaning tools and materials:
l Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can alsobe used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin.
l Non-woven lens tissue
l Special compressed gas
l Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
l Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent
l Special magnifier for fiber connectors
For cleaning steps, see Task Collection "Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters" in the OptiXRTN 980 Radio Transmission System Maintenance and Troubleshooting.
Replacing Optical Fibers
When replacing an optical fiber, cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with aprotective cap.
Connecting Optical Fibersl Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. A high received optical power
damages the optical interface.
l Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. Install the attenuator on theIN port instead of the OUT port.
l Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. Use the opticaldistribution frame (ODF) to connect an attenuator to a level optical interface.
Figure 1-2 shows a slanting optical interface, and Figure 1-3 shows a level optical interface.
Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface
Slanting opticalinterface
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
![Page 30: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
Figure 1-3 Level optical interface
Level opticalinterface
1.6.2 Electromagnetic ExposureThis topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.
If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmitdirections of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.
CAUTIONEnsure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.
1.6.3 Forbidden AreasThe topic describes requirements for a forbidden area.
l Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range,the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction.
l A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbiddenarea.
1.6.4 LaserThis topic describes safety precautions for lasers.
WARNINGWhen handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directlywithout eye protection.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
![Page 31: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The lasertransmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and therefore it hasvery high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes, theeyes may be damaged.
In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eyeprotection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur,however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to viewan un-terminated optical fiber.
Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers
To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions:
l All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed therequired training courses.
l Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.
l Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.
l Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not surewhether the optical source is switched off.
l Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical sourceis switched off.
l Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are notexposed to laser radiation.
l Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe toview the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.
Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling
Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers:
l Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers.
l Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the opticalsource. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.
1.6.5 MicrowaveWhen installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions ofmicrowave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.
WARNINGStrong radio frequency can harm the human body.
When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multipleaerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
![Page 32: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
1.7 Working at HeightsThis topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.
WARNINGWhen working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down.
The requirements for working at heights are as follows:
l The personnel who work at heights must be trained.l Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling
down.l Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken.l Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.l Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are
intact.
1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy ObjectsThis topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow wheninstalling, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.
WARNINGWhen heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects.
l Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations.l Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good
condition.l Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or
wall with good weight-bearing capacity.l Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations.l Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the
lifting, as shown in Figure 1-4.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
![Page 33: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects
1.7.2 Using LaddersThis topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.
Checking Laddersl Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder
is in good condition, you can use the ladder.l Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid
overweighing the ladder.
Placing LaddersThe proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladderwith an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 1-5. When using a ladder, to prevent theladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take protectionmeasures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
![Page 34: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder
Climbing Up a Ladder
When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points:
l Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the twolong sides.
l Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks.l Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).
If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than theroof, as shown in Figure 1-6.
Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
![Page 35: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
1.8 Mechanical SafetyThis topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,and carrying heavy objects.
Drilling Holes
WARNINGDo not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complyingwith the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet anddamages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter thecabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited.
l Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet.
l Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured bythe splashing metal scraps.
l Wear protection gloves when drilling holes.
l Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling,clean up the metallic scraps.
Sharp Objects
WARNINGWear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injuredby the sharp edges of the device.
Fansl When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This
is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device.
l When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operatingfans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boardsare damaged.
Carrying Heavy Objects
Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
![Page 36: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
WARNINGl The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent
the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects.l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on
the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, whichmay hurt you.
l Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one personcarries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs andmove stably to avoid being strained.
l When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not holdthe handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules,and boards.
1.9 Other PrecautionsThis topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,and routing cables.
Removing and Inserting a Board
CAUTIONWhen inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently toavoid distorting pins on the backplane.
l Slide the board along the guide rails.l Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage.l When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors,
or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body tothe electrostatic-sensitive components.
Binding Signal Cables
CAUTIONBind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.
Routing CablesIn the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skinof the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
![Page 37: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
l When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0°C.l If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0°C, transfer
them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours beforeinstallation.
l Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not performany improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.
High Temperature
WARNINGIf the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the
flag may exceed 70°C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment,you must wear the protection gloves.
IF Cables
WARNINGBefore installing or removing an IF cable, you must turn off the power switch of the IF board.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
![Page 38: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
About This Chapter
This chapter provides notices for the operations that may cause bodily injury or equipmentdamage if they are not performed properly during the commissioning and maintenance ofmicrowave equipment.
2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever SwitchThe ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and offas per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.
2.2 Operation Guide for the IF JumperBefore removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injuryor damage to the IF board and ODU.
2.3 Operation Guide for the IF CableBefore removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injuryor damage to the IF board and ODU.
2.4 Operation Guide for the IF BoardBefore removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injuryor damage to the IF board and ODU.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
![Page 39: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever SwitchThe ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and offas per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.
Position and Description of the Toggle Lever SwitchThe toggle lever switch is located on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the ODU,as shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch
Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch out.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
![Page 40: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
2. Turn it to the left.
3. Release the toggle lever switch.
Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
![Page 41: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
2. Turn it to the right.
3. Release the toggle lever switch.
2.2 Operation Guide for the IF JumperBefore removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injuryor damage to the IF board and ODU.
Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for theToggle Lever Switch.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
![Page 42: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
DANGEREnsure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF jumper.
Step 2 Remove or install the IF jumper.
----End
2.3 Operation Guide for the IF CableBefore removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injuryor damage to the IF board and ODU.
Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for theToggle Lever Switch.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
![Page 43: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
21
DANGEREnsure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF cable.
Step 2 Install or remove the IF cable.
----End
2.4 Operation Guide for the IF BoardBefore removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injuryor damage to the IF board and ODU.
Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for theToggle Lever Switch.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
![Page 44: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
321
3
DANGEREnsure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF board.
Step 2 Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable.
Step 3 Remove or install the IF board.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
![Page 45: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
3 Routine Maintenance
Routine maintenance operations are performed to detect and rectify hidden faults before thehidden faults cause damage to equipment and affect services. Routine maintenance operationsare preventive measures.
For the OptiX RTN 980, routine maintenance items are classified into routine maintenance itemscarried out on the network management system (NMS), field maintenance items for indoorequipment, and field maintenance items for outdoor equipment.
Routine Maintenance Items Carried Out on the NMSMaintenance Item Recomm
endedMaintenanceCycle
Remarks
Checking the NE Status Every day -
Browsing Current Alarms Every day -
Browsing History Alarms Everyweek
-
Browsing Abnormal Events Everyweek
-
Browsing Current Performance Events Everyweek
-
Browsing History Performance Events Everyweek
-
Browsing History Transmit Power andReceive Power
Everyweek
-
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 3 Routine Maintenance
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
![Page 46: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
Maintenance Item RecommendedMaintenanceCycle
Remarks
Testing IF 1+1 Switching Half ayear
Applies only to the equipment that isconfigured in 1+1 protection mode.During the 1+1 protection switching,the protected services are interrupted.Hence, it is recommended that youperform the 1+1 protection switchingwhen the traffic is light.
Testing the IF N+1 Switching Half ayear
Applies only to the equipment that isconfigured with N+1 protection.
Field Maintenance Items for Indoor EquipmentMaintenance Item Recommended
Maintenance CycleRemarks
Checking theTelecommunications Room
Every two months -
Field Maintenance Items for Outdoor EquipmentMaintenance Item Recommended
MaintenanceCycle
Remarks
Checking the ODU Half a year Carry out acomplete checkafter a level-8 orhigher hurricane,an earthquake, orother exceptionalcircumstances.In an area close toa pollutionsourcea, thecoating may becorroded. In thecase of anycoatingcorrosion,contact Huaweirepresentative
Checking the Hybrid Coupler Half a year
Checking the Antenna Half a year
Checking the IF Cable Half a year
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 3 Routine Maintenance
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
![Page 47: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
Maintenance Item RecommendedMaintenanceCycle
Remarks
Checking the LOS Condition Half a year offices formaintenance.
NOTEa: An area close to a pollution source refers to the area that covers a radius within any of the followingvalues: 3.7 km away from salty waters (such as an ocean and salty water), 3 km away from severe pollutionsources (such as iron refinery works, and coal mines), 2 km away from intermediate pollution sources (suchas chemical plants, rubber processing works, and electroplating workshops), and 1 km away from lightpollution sources (such as food processing works, leather working plants, and heating boilers).
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 3 Routine Maintenance
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
![Page 48: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
4 Emergency Maintenance
About This Chapter
Emergency maintenance operations are performed in the case of emergencies or natural factorsthat may result in emergencies during the operation of the equipment.
4.1 Definition of EmergencyFor microwave equipment, an emergency refers to interruption of microwave services.
4.2 Purposes of Emergency MaintenanceEmergency maintenance operations are performed to restore the services quickly. This isdifferent from troubleshooting, whose purposes are to locate and rectify the faults.
4.3 Procedure for Emergency MaintenanceThe procedure for emergency maintenance consists of a main procedure and a sub-procedurefor field troubleshooting.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 4 Emergency Maintenance
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
![Page 49: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
4.1 Definition of EmergencyFor microwave equipment, an emergency refers to interruption of microwave services.
4.2 Purposes of Emergency MaintenanceEmergency maintenance operations are performed to restore the services quickly. This isdifferent from troubleshooting, whose purposes are to locate and rectify the faults.
4.3 Procedure for Emergency MaintenanceThe procedure for emergency maintenance consists of a main procedure and a sub-procedurefor field troubleshooting.
NOTE
In the case of emergency events, the customers in China can contact the 24-hour technical support center ofHuawei at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 4 Emergency Maintenance
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
![Page 50: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
Main Procedure for Emergency Maintenance
Figure 4-1 Main procedure for emergency maintenance
Start
Service interruoted byexternal causes?
Yes Contact tealted departmentsto handle the problem
No
NE access successful andalaarms cleared?
Query NE status andalarms by using the NMS
YesClear the alarm
No
Rectify the fault on site
Is there an incorrectoperation?
Cancel the operation1 Yes
No
Is the service restored? Contact Huawei engineersNo
Proceed with the next step Is the servicerestored?
No
End
Yes
Check the troubleshooting result
5
4
Yes
2
3
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 4 Emergency Maintenance
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
![Page 51: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
Table 4-1 Description of the main procedure for emergency maintenance
CommentNo.
Description
1 The common incorrect operations are as follows:l Modifying data configurationl Performing loopback operationsl Shutting down the laserl Muting the ODUl Replacing boards/cablesl Loading the software
2 Faults owing to external factors, including the power supply, cables,environment, and terminal equipment (such as switch devices)
3 The procedure is as follows:1. Check the NE status.2. If the NE is unreachable to the NMS, perform field troubleshooting
according to Figure 4-2. If alarms are reported on the NE, browse thecurrent alarms.
4 Generally, the following alarms can be cleared on the NMS:APS_MANUAL_STOP, APS_FAIL, BD_NOT_INSTALLED,DBMS_ERROR, ETH_APS_LOST, ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL,ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ,IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN, IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN, J0_MM,LOOP_ALM, LPS_UNI_BI_M, LP_SLM, LP_TIM, LP_UNEQ,NESOFT_MM, NESF_LOST, RADIO_MUTE, WRG_BD_TYPE,ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI, ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK,MW_CFG_MISMATCH.
5 After the fault is rectified, proceed as follows:1. Check the alarms, and ensure that the system is running properly.2. Assign personnel to monitor the operation of the system during the peak
service hour, ensuring that subsequent faults can be handled in time.3. Fill in the field maintenance operation sheet, record the fault symptoms
and troubleshooting results, and then send them to Huawei. Table 4-2shows the field maintenance operation sheet.
Table 4-2 Field maintenance operation sheet
Maintained on Maintained by
Actual Step Step in the EntireProcedure
TroubleshootingResult
Remarks
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 4 Emergency Maintenance
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
![Page 52: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
Maintained on Maintained by
Actual Step Step in the EntireProcedure
TroubleshootingResult
Remarks
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 4 Emergency Maintenance
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
![Page 53: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
Field Troubleshooting Sub-Procedure
Figure 4-2 Field troubleshooting sub-procedure
Equipment alarm?
3
No
4
YesClear the alarm
YesClear the alarm
No
5 YesClear the alarm
No
6 YesClear the alarm
No
End
Proceed to the next step
Is the service restored?
Yes
No
Start
Obvious equipment damage?
Yes Repair or replace the equipment
No Troubleshoot the power input
Browse alarms locally by using the
LCT
2
1
No
Yes Troubleshoot the inter-connection
faulty
Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by
section
7
Yes Troubleshoot the packet service fault
8
Radio link alarm?
No
Yes
Is the PWR indicator on the PIU on?
High order path alarm?
Low order path alarm?
Faulty inter-connection with
SDH/PDH equipment?
Packet service fault?
No
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 4 Emergency Maintenance
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
![Page 54: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
Table 4-3 Description of the field troubleshooting sub-procedure
CommentNo.
Description
1 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:1. Check whether the circuit breaker for the input power is off. If the circuit
breaker is automatically turned off, find the cause (such as short circuitsor insufficient fuse capacity), and rectify the fault accordingly.
2. Check the power cables, especially the connectors of the power cables. Ifthe power cables or connectors of the power cables are incorrect, replacethe power cables or re-prepare the connectors of the power cables.
3. Check the voltage and polarization of the input power. If the voltage orpolarization of the input power does not meet the requirements, contactpower engineers for troubleshooting.
NOTEl The fuse capacity should meet the requirement of actual power consumption. The
following formula can be used to calculate the fuse capacity:
Fuse capacity = (Total power consumption x 1.5) / (Rated voltage x 87.5%).
l The rated voltage of the input power is -48 V/-60 V and the permitted voltage rangesfrom -38.4 V to -72.0 V.
2 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:1. Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU.2. Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.3. Logging In to an NE.4. Checking Alarms.NOTE
If you fail to log in to the created NE, ensure that the operations you performed arecorrect, and then locate and rectify the fault according to the indicators of the systemcontrol, switching, and timing board. For details about the indicators, see the OptiX RTN980 IDU Hardware Description.
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l HARD_BADl POWER_ALMl FAN_FAILl BD_STATUSl NESF_LOSTl TEMP_ALARMl RADIO_RSL_HIGHl RADIO_RSL_LOWl RADIO_TSL_HIGHl RADIO_TSL_LOWl IF_INPWR_ABNl IF_CABLE_OPENl VOLT_LOS
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 4 Emergency Maintenance
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
![Page 55: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
CommentNo.
Description
4 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l PG_LINK_FAILl PG_PRT_DEGRADEDl MW_LIMl MW_LOFl R_LOSl R_LOFl R_LOCl MS_AISl AU_AISl AU_LOPl B1_EXCl B2_EXCl MW_BER_EXC
5 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l HP_LOMl B3_EXCl HP_UNEQ
6 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l TU_AISl TU_LOPl BIP_EXCl LP_UNEQl T_ALOSl E1_LOC
7 See 5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment or 5.7Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment.
8 See 5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults, 5.9Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane, 5.11Troubleshooting CES Services, 5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services, and5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 4 Emergency Maintenance
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
![Page 56: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
5 Troubleshooting
About This Chapter
This guide describes the general troubleshooting procedure and the methods of rectifying thecommon faults.
5.1 General Troubleshooting ProcedureWhen handling a fault, make a detailed record of the fault phenomena. The customers in Chinacan contact our 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areasoutside China can contact the local Huawei offices.
5.2 Troubleshooting Service InterruptionsThe service interruption fault indicates the service transmission failure due to an equipment faultor a link fault.
5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio LinkWhen an NE reports MW_LOF, MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD or MW_FEC_UNCOR dueto failure or performance deterioration of a radio link, there is a radio link fault.
5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM ServicesWhen an NE reports an alarm or a performance event on the IF board, regenerator section (RS),multiplex section (MS), higher order path (HP), or lower order path (LP), there are bit errors inservices.
5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer JustificationsWhen an NE reports a large number of justification events about the administrative unit (AU)pointer or the tributary unit (TU) pointer, there are pointer justification faults.
5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH EquipmentAn interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting SDH services with other SDHequipment.
5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH EquipmentAn interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting PDH services with other PDHequipment.
5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service FaultsAn Ethernet service fault may be the Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet servicedeterioration.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
![Page 57: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH PlaneThe Ethernet services transmitted on the EoS/EoPDH plane can be transmitted over a TDMnetwork. The faults of the EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services include service interruption andservice degradation.
5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS TunnelsThis section describes how to troubleshoot MPLS tunnels by using the MPLS OAM function orMPLS Ping/Traceroute function.
5.11 Troubleshooting CES ServicesThis section describes how to troubleshoot CES services that are interrupted or degraded.
5.12 Troubleshooting ATM ServicesThis section describes how to troubleshoot ATM services that are interrupted or degraded.
5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWsThis section describes how to troubleshoot Ethernet services that are carried by PWs andtransmitted in the PSN. These Ethernet services are considered faulty when they are interruptedor deteriorate.
5.14 Troubleshooting Orderwire FaultsIf orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal, there is an orderwire fault.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
![Page 58: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
5.1 General Troubleshooting ProcedureWhen handling a fault, make a detailed record of the fault phenomena. The customers in Chinacan contact our 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and the customers in areasoutside China can contact the local Huawei offices.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
![Page 59: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
General Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-1 General troubleshooting procedure
Start
Record the fault phenomena
Analyze fault causes and locatethe fault
Is the faultrectified?
Report to Huawei
Make a solution together
Attempt to rectify the fault
Is the service restored?
Observe the operation
Is the faultrectified?
Fill in the troubleshootingreport
End
Other troubleshootingprocedures
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Caused by external factors?
Yes
4
3
2
1
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
![Page 60: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
Table 5-1 General troubleshooting procedure
CommentNo.
Description
1 When recording the fault phenomena, make a true and detailed record of theentire process of the fault. Record the exact time when the fault occurs andthe operations performed before and after the fault occurs. Save the alarms,performance events, and other important information.You can use the click-to-collect function on the U2000 to collect data.
2 Faults owing to external factors, including the power supply, cables,environment, and terminal equipment (such as switch devices)
3 If the fault is caused by the equipment, see 5.2 Troubleshooting ServiceInterruptions.
4 To provide feedbacks or obtain technical support, customers in China cancontact the 24-hour technical support center at 400-830-2118, and thecustomers in areas outside China can contact the local Huawei offices.
5.2 Troubleshooting Service InterruptionsThe service interruption fault indicates the service transmission failure due to an equipment faultor a link fault.
Fault Causesl The operation is improper.
The configuration data changes, the loopback is performed, the cable is replaced, or theboard is replaced.
l The transmission NE or link is faulty.
l The interconnection is improper.If the transmission equipment functions normally and the connection is normal, checkwhether the interconnection between the transmission equipment is proper and whether theswitch equipment is faulty.
Fault Locating Methods1. Check the operations before the service interruption to determine whether the service
interruption results from an incorrect operation.2. Query alarms on the centralized NMS or the NMS that is used on the site, and then locate
the fault based on the alarm analysis.If multiple NEs report alarms, analyze the alarms in the following order: equipment alarm,line alarm, higher order path alarm, and lower order path alarm.
3. If the fault cannot be located through the alarm analysis method, locate the fault byperforming loopback section by section or replacing the corresponding parts.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
![Page 61: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
CAUTIONIf the fault cannot be rectified immediately, restore the services quickly by adjusting the serviceroute or performing a forced switching.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-2 General procedure for troubleshooting the service interruption
Cancel the operation
Contact relateddepartments to solve
the problem
Proceed with thenext step Service restored?
Yes
No
Clear the alarm
Start
Incorrectoperation?
Service interruptedby external causes?
End
Query NE status and alarmsby using the centralized NMS
NE access successfuland alarms cleared?
Rectify the fault on site
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
4
3
2
1
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
![Page 62: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
Table 5-2 Description of the general procedure for troubleshooting the service interruption
CommentNo.
Description
1 The common incorrect operations are as follows:l Modifying the data configurationl Loopbackl Shutting down the laserl Muting the ODUl Replacing the board or cablel Loading the software
2 Faults owing to external factors, including the power supply, cables,environment, and terminal equipment (such as switch devices)
3 For details, see 8.3.1 Checking the NE Status and 8.3.3 Browsing CurrentAlarms.
4 Generally, the following alarms can be cleared on the NMS:APS_MANUAL_STOP, APS_FAIL, BD_NOT_INSTALLED,DBMS_ERROR, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ, J0_MM, LOOP_ALM,LPS_UNI_BI_M, LP_SLM, LP_TIM, LP_UNEQ, NESOFT_MM,NESF_LOST, NESTATE_INSTALL, MW_CFG_MISMATCH,RADIO_MUTE, and WRG_BD_TYPE.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
![Page 63: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
Figure 5-3 Field troubleshooting sub-procedure
Equipment alarm?
3
No
4
YesClear the alarm
YesClear the alarm
No
5 YesClear the alarm
No
6 YesClear the alarm
No
End
Proceed to the next step
Is the service restored?
Yes
No
Start
Obvious equipment damage?
Yes Repair or replace the equipment
No Troubleshoot the power input
Browse alarms locally by using the
LCT
2
1
No
Yes Troubleshoot the inter-connection
faulty
Locate the fault by performing loopback operations section by
section
7
Yes Troubleshoot the packet service fault
8
Radio link alarm?
No
Yes
Is the PWR indicator on the PIU on?
High order path alarm?
Low order path alarm?
Faulty inter-connection with
SDH/PDH equipment?
Packet service fault?
No
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
![Page 64: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
Table 5-3 Description of the field troubleshooting sub-procedure
CommentNo.
Description
1 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:1. Check whether the circuit breaker for the input power is off. If the circuit
breaker is automatically turned off, find the cause (such as short circuitsor insufficient fuse capacity), and rectify the fault accordingly.
2. Check the power cables, especially the connectors of the power cables. Ifthe power cables or connectors of the power cables are incorrect, replacethe power cables or re-prepare the connectors of the power cables.
3. Check the voltage and polarization of the input power. If the voltage orpolarization of the input power does not meet the requirements, contactpower engineers for troubleshooting.
NOTEl The fuse capacity should meet the requirement of actual power consumption. The
following formula can be used to calculate the fuse capacity:
Fuse capacity = (Total power consumption x 1.5) / (Rated voltage x 87.5%).
l The rated voltage of the input power is -48 V/-60 V and the permitted voltage rangesfrom -38.4 V to -72.0 V.
2 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:1. Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU.2. Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.3. Logging In to an NE.4. Checking Alarms.NOTE
If you fail to log in to the created NE, ensure that the operations you performed arecorrect, and then locate and rectify the fault according to the indicators of the systemcontrol, switching, and timing board. For details about the indicators, see the OptiX RTN980 IDU Hardware Description.
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l HARD_BADl POWER_ALMl FAN_FAILl BD_STATUSl NESF_LOSTl TEMP_ALARMl RADIO_RSL_HIGHl RADIO_RSL_LOWl RADIO_TSL_HIGHl RADIO_TSL_LOWl IF_INPWR_ABNl IF_CABLE_OPENl VOLT_LOS
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
![Page 65: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
CommentNo.
Description
4 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l PG_LINK_FAILl PG_PRT_DEGRADEDl MW_LIMl MW_LOFl R_LOSl R_LOFl R_LOCl MS_AISl AU_AISl AU_LOPl B1_EXCl B2_EXCl MW_BER_EXC
5 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l HP_LOMl B3_EXCl HP_UNEQ
6 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l TU_AISl TU_LOPl BIP_EXCl LP_UNEQl T_ALOSl E1_LOC
7 See 5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDH Equipment or 5.7Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDH Equipment.
8 See 5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service Faults, 5.9Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDH Plane, 5.11Troubleshooting CES Services, 5.12 Troubleshooting ATM Services, and5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWs.
Experience and SummaryThe maintenance personnel need to perform the routine maintenance operations periodically, todetect and rectify faults before the faults affect the services and thus to reduce the equipmentfault rate.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
![Page 66: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio LinkWhen an NE reports MW_LOF, MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD or MW_FEC_UNCOR dueto failure or performance deterioration of a radio link, there is a radio link fault.
Context
The key to locating a radio link fault is to check whether the transmit power and the receivepower are normal and whether there is an external interference.
In the following two cases, the transmit power is abnormal. The first case is that the transmitpower exceeds the range that the ODU supports. The second case is that the difference betweenthe actual transmit power and the preset value is more than 2 dB when the ATPC is disabled.The relevant alarms and performance events are as follows:
l RADIO_TSL_HIGHl RADIO_TSL_LOWl TSL_CURl TSL_MAXl TSL_MINl TSL_AVG
NOTE
For the range of the transmit power, see the OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System ProductDescription.
In the following two cases, the receive power is abnormal. In the first case, the receive poweris lower than the normal value (Normal value = Planned value - 3 dB). In the second case, thereceive power is lower than the receiver sensitivity or higher than the free space receive powerdue to fading. The relevant alarms and performance events are as follows:
l RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFFl RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTHl RADIO_RSL_HIGHl RADIO_RSL_LOWl RSL_CURl RSL_MAXl RSL_MINl RSL_AVG
NOTE
In the case of the radio link whose AM function is enabled, the receiver sensitivity is the specific receiversensitivity at the guaranteed capacity.
For details on the receiver sensitivity, see the OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System ProductDescription.
Generally, external interference is classified into co-channel interference and adjacent channelinterference.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
![Page 67: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
l Co-channel interference refers to crosstalk from two different radio transmitters that usethe same frequency channel. Hence, the entire spectrum may be affected.
l Adjacent channel interference refers to signal impairment to one frequency, due to presenceof another signal on a nearby frequency. Hence, a part of the spectrum is affected.
Interference is closely related to the frequency. Hence, the radio link may be faulty in onedirection if interference exists on the radio link.
Fault Causes
Table 5-4 Causes of radio link faults
Fault Common Fault Cause
The transmit power is abnormal. The ODU is faulty.
The receive power is always lower than thenormal value.
l The antenna direction is not adjustedproperly.
l The antennas have different polarizationdirections.
l There is a mountain or building in thetransmit direction.
l The antenna is faulty or the connectionbetween the antenna and the ODU isabnormal (for example, the waveguideinterface of the ODU is wet or the flexiblewaveguide is not connected properly).
l The ODU is faulty.
The receive power is abnormal due to slowdown fading.
The fading margin is insufficient.
The receive power is abnormal due to fastfading.
The multipath fading is fast.
The receive power is normal or slow upfading occurs, but the signal-noise ratio(SNR) is abnormal.
There is external interference.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
![Page 68: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
NOTE
Based on the RSL, fading is classified into up fading and down fading.
l Up fading
The RSL is higher than the RSL in the free space. The difference can be 10-odd decibels.
l Down fading
The RSL is lower than the RSL after free space fading. The difference can be tens of decibels.
Based on the fading time, fading is classified into fast fading and slow fading.
l Fast fading
The fading lasts from several milliseconds to tens of seconds.
Generally, fast fading is caused by multipath fading. It occurs periodically. To be specific, fast fadingoccurs in the period from 18:00 to 20:00 of a day or in a certain season of a year.
l Slow fading
The fading lasts from tens of seconds to several hours.
Generally, slow up fading is caused by interference. Slow down fading is caused by rain, and thereforeis also called rain fading. Rain fading occurs on links working at a frequency of 10 GHz or in areaswhere heavy rain occurs.
Generally, slow down fading and fast fading are caused by factors related to the transmission link. Hence,the radio link may be faulty in both directions in the case of slow down fading or fast fading.
Fault Locating Methods1. Check whether the ODU is muted, powered off, or looped back. Check whether the data
configuration is correct.2. Check whether the ODU and the IF board are faulty.3. If the transmit power is abnormal, replace the ODU.4. If the receive power is abnormal, analyze and locate the causes according to the fading
type.5. If the receive power is normal but the SNR is abnormal, check whether there is interference
before you proceed.6. If the preceding methods cannot locate faults, perform loopback operations.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
![Page 69: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-4 Procedure for troubleshooting the radio link
Start
ODU or IF related alarm?
Yes
Clear the alarm
No
Proceed to the next step
Is the fault rectified?
End
Yes
No
Transmit power normal?
Yes
No
2
Rectify the fault
Perform loopback operations
9
No
Rectify the fault
YesRectify the fault
No
4
Cancel the operation
1
5
6Yes
No
Rectify the fault
8Yes
Yes
No
No
Rectify the fault
7Yes
Incorrect operation?
RSL always lower than the normal
value?
Slow down fading causes abnormal
RSL?
Fast fading causes abnormal
RSL?
Radio link faulty in one direction?
Query the receive/transmit power
and SNR
3
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
![Page 70: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
Table 5-5 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the radio link
Comment No. Description
1 Rectifyincorrectoperations.
Check the following points:l Check whether the ODU is powered off.l Check whether the ODU is muted.l Check whether the IF board is looped back.l Check whether the data configuration at the transmit end is the same
as the data configuration at the receive end.l Check whether the data configuration matches the types of the ODU
and the hybrid coupler.
2 Rectifyequipment faults.
Pay special attention to the following alarms:l VOLT_LOSl CONFIG_NOSUPPORTl HARD_BADl TEMP_ALARMl IF_INPWR_ABNl RADIO_MUTEl RADIO_TSL_HIGHl RADIO_TSL_LOWl RADIO_RSL_HIGHl RADIO_RSL_LOWl IF_CABLE_OPENl MW_CFG_MISMATCH
3 Query thereceive/transmitpower, and theSNR
Query the receive/transmit power, and the SNR in the latest one week.For details, refer to Querying the Historical Transmit Power and ReceivePower and Querying the SNR Values of a Radio Link.
4 Troubleshootthe anomaly ofthe transmitpower.
Replace the ODU.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
![Page 71: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
Comment No. Description
5 Troubleshootthe anomaly thatthe receive poweris lower than thenormal value.
The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:1. If the receive power decreases sharply and does not recover, check the
installation of the antenna. Ensure that the azimuth angle of theantenna meets the requirement.Check whether the antenna is aligned properly. Check whether thereceived signal is from the main lobe.If the antenna direction is not aligned properly, adjust the antenna ina wide range.
2. If the difference between the receive power of the main ODU andstandby ODU at one end of the 1+1 HSB radio link is beyond the rangefrom 0 dB to 9 dB (in the case of an unbalanced hybrid coupler) orbeyond the range from 0 dB to 5 dB (in the case of a balanced hybridcoupler), perform 1+1 HSB switching or replace the ODUs and hybridcoupler to narrow down the fault to a specific part.
3. If the difference between the RSL at the receive end and transmit endis larger than 10 dB, replace the ODUs to check whether the main orstandby ODU is faulty.
4. Check whether the setting of the polarization direction of the antennais correct. Rectify the wrong polarization direction.
5. Check whether the cable connector is made in accordance withspecifications. If any cable connectors do not comply with thespecifications, see the Installation Reference and remake cableconnectors.
6. Check whether the IF cable is soggy, broken, or pressed. If yes,replace the IF cable.
7. Check whether there is a mountain or building in the transmitdirection. If the line of sight (LOS) is unavailable, adjust the height orposition of the antenna.
8. Replace the ODUs and hybrid coupler to narrow down the fault to aspecific part.
9. Check whether the gains of the antennas at the receive and transmitends comply with the specifications. Replace the antenna whose gaindoes not comply with the specifications.
6 Troubleshootslow downfading.
Contact the network planning department to make the following changes:l Increase the fade margin on links.l Use low-frequency ODUs.l Use vertical polarization instead of horizontal polarization.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
![Page 72: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
Comment No. Description
7 Troubleshootfast fading.
Contact the network planning department to make the following changes:l Adjust the position of the antenna to reduce the multipath fading.
1. Adjust the height of the antennas at both ends to increase the heightdifference between the antennas.
2. In the case of strong reflection surfaces such as water surfaces,plains, and smooth mountaintops, adjust the antenna to removereflection points. Alternatively, use the actual terrain to masksurface reflection.
3. Lower the antenna height to reduce the path margin with LOSconditions guaranteed.
l Adjust the RF configuration to change the radio link to the 1+1 SDmode.
l In the case of a 1+1 SD radio link, adjust the height difference betweentwo antennas to ensure that the receive power of one antenna is higherthan the receive power of the other antenna.
l Increase the fading margin, by replacing the original antennas withantennas of a larger diameter or increasing the transmit power of theoriginal antennas.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
![Page 73: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
Comment No. Description
8 Troubleshootinterference.
The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:1. There is co-channel interference.
1. Mute the ODU at the opposite end.2. Check the RSL at the local end. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it
indicates that there is co-channel interference that may affect thelong-term availability and performance of the system.
2. There is adjacent channel interference.1. Mute the ODU at the opposite end.2. Adjust the microwave working mode at the local end and use the
minimum channel spacing.3. Decrease the receive frequency at the local end by a half of the
channel spacing.4. Test and record the RSL.5. Increase the receive frequency at the local end, with a step of 0.5
MHz or 1 MHz. Record the RSL accordingly until the receivefrequency is equal to the original receive frequency plus a half ofthe channel spacing.
6. Compare the recorded RSL values, and check whether the RSL ina certain spectrum is abnormal if the received frequency is withinthe permitted range.
3. Use Huawei frequency scanning scripts or a spectrum analyzer toanalyze the interference source.
4. Contact the network planning department to modify the networkingplanning and design.1. Plan Tx high sites and Tx low sites correctly to avoid using them
at the same time.2. Plan frequencies or polarization modes correctly to avoid the same
polarization direction for microwave signals and interferencesignals. Plan routes correctly.
5. Contact the spectrum management department to clear theinterference spectrum.
9 Performloopbackoperations tolocate the fault.
The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:1. Perform an inloop at the IF port.
If the fault persists after the inloop is performed, replace the IFboard.
2. Replace the ODU.If the fault is rectified after the ODU is replaced, it indicates that theODU is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
![Page 74: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
Experience and Summaryl During the commissioning, ensure that the antenna is aligned properly, to prevent possible
incipient faults.
l Periodically collect and analyze the data about the changes in the transmit power and receivepower so that you can detect and then rectify the incipient faults accordingly in time.
5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM ServicesWhen an NE reports an alarm or a performance event on the IF board, regenerator section (RS),multiplex section (MS), higher order path (HP), or lower order path (LP), there are bit errors inservices.
Fault Phenomena
The IF bit errors refer to the bit errors that the IF board detects through the self-defined overheadbyte in the microwave frame. The related alarms and performance events are as follows:
l MW_BER_EXCl MW_BER_SDl MW_CFG_MISMATCHl MW_LOFl IF_BBEl IF_ESl IF_SESl IF_CSESl IF_UAS
The RS bit errors refer to the bit errors that the line processing unit or the IF board that worksin SDH mode through the B1 overhead byte in the RS overhead. The related alarms andperformance events are as follows:
l B1_EXCl B1_SDl RS_CROSSTRl RSBBEl RSESl RSSESl RSCSESl RSUAS
NOTE
The IF board that works in PDH mode may also detect the previous RS bit error alarms and performanceevents. In this case, the IF board detects bit error alarms and performance events in the PDH microwaveframe through the self-defined B1 byte.
The MS bit errors refer to the bit errors that the line board detects through the B2 byte in the MSoverhead. The related alarms and performance events are as follows:
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
![Page 75: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
l B2_EXCl B2_SDl MS_CROSSTRl MSBBEl MSESl MSSESl MSCSESl MSUAS
The HP bit errors refer to the bit errors that the line processing unit or the IF board that worksin SDH mode through the B3 byte in the HP overhead. The related alarms and performanceevents are as follows:
l B3_EXCl B3_SDl HP_CROSSTRl HPBBEl HPESl HPSESl HPCSESl HPUAS
The LP bit errors refer to the bit errors that the tributary board or IF board detects through theV5 byte in the VC-12 overhead. The related alarms and performance events are as follows:
l BIP_EXCl BIP_SDl LP_CROSSTRl LPBBEl LPESl LPSESl LPCSESl LPUAS
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
![Page 76: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
Fault Causes
Table 5-6 Causes of bit errors
Fault Common Fault Cause
There are IF bit errors. l The radio link is faulty.Check whether the MW_BER_EXC,MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR,MW_LOF or RPS_INDI alarm isreported. If yes, the radio link is faulty.
l The services are incorrectly configured.Check whether theMW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm isreported. If yes, the number of E1 servicesis inconsistent on both ends of the radiolink.
l The IF board at the local end or oppositeend is faulty.
There are RS bit errors. l The line is faulty.– The common causes for bit errors on
the optical line are as follows: theoptical fiber line, the optical power isabnormal, the fiber performancedeteriorates, or the fiber connector isnot clean.
– In the case of bit errors on the radiolink, check whether theMW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD,MW_FEC_UNCOR or RPS_INDIalarm is reported. If yes, the radio linkis faulty.
l The line processing unit or IF board isfaulty.
l The clock unit is faulty.l The quality of the clock over the network
declines.When the quality of the clock over thenetwork declines, a pointer justificationevent occurs.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
![Page 77: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
Fault Common Fault Cause
There are not any RS bit errors but there areMS bit errors or HP bit errors.
l The line processing unit or IF board isfaulty.
l The quality of the clock over the networkdeclines.When the quality of the clock over thenetwork declines, a pointer justificationevent occurs.
l The working temperature of the lineprocessing unit or IF board is excessivelyhigh.
There are only LP bit errors. l The tributary board is faulty.l The cross-connect unit is faulty.l The working temperature of the board is
excessively high.l The working temperature of the cross-
connect unit is excessively high.l There is a power surge or an external
interference source, or the equipment isnot properly grounded. (This cause doesnot need to be considered during thetroubleshooting of an IF board.)
Fault Locating Methods1. Analyze the equipment alarms and performance events that are related to service
configuration errors and bit errors.2. When there are many types of alarms and performance events on a service path, first analyze
RS bit errors, then MS bit errors, HP bit errors, and finally LP bit errors.3. When multiple paths have bit errors, first check whether the overlapping part of the service
paths is faulty.4. If you fail to locate the fault by analyzing the alarms and performance events, perform
loopback operations section by section.5. Replace the parts whose performance may deteriorate with new ones.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
![Page 78: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-5 Procedure for troubleshooting bit errors
Start
Is there anequipment alarm?
No
Yes Clear the alarm
Is there an RS bit error alarm or a
performanceevent?
Yes
Troubleshoot RS bit errorson the IF board
No
Is there anMS/ HP alarm or
performanceevent?
Yes Troubleshoot MS/HP biterrors
No
Is there an LPalarm?
Yes Troubleshoot LP biterrors
Locate the fault by performingloopback operations section
by section
No
Proceed with the next stepIs the faultrectified?
End
Yes
No
Is there a pointerjustification event?
Yes Troubleshoot the pointerjustification
No
If thealarmingboard is
Troubleshoot RS bit errorson the SDH optical interface
board
IF board
SDH opticalinterface board
2
3
4
5
6
1
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
![Page 79: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
Table 5-7 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting bit errors
CommentNo.
Description
1 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l TEMP_ALARMl HARD_BADl MW_CFG_MISMATCH
2 See 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications.
3 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:1. Check whether the line board reports the B1_EXC, B1_SD, or
RS_CROSSTR alarm.2. Interchange the Tx fiber core and the Rx fiber core at both ends of the
service path. If bit errors change after the exchange, it indicates that thefiber is faulty. Otherwise, the equipment at both ends of the service pathis faulty.
3. In the case of a fiber fault, check whether the fiber between the equipmentand the ODF and the section of the fiber that is led out of thetelecommunications room are pressed. In addition, check whether the fiberconnectors are clean.
4. In the case of faults at both ends of the service path, use a fiber jumper toloop back the optical ports. If the fault persists after the loopback, the lineboard may be faulty.
5. In the case of faults at both ends of the service path, you can also replacethe board where the line unit is located or interchange between the boardand another board of the same type that is working normally. If the alarmchanges after the exchange, it indicates that the board is faulty.
4 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:1. Check whether the IF board reports the MW_BER_EXC,
MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR, MW_LOF, RPS_INDI,B1_EXC, B1_SD, or RS_CROSSTR alarm.
2. If any of the alarms are reported, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the RadioLink and rectify the fault.
3. If none of the alarms occurs, replace the IF board.
5 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:1. Perform a loopback on the line board that reports the alarm.
If the fault persists after the loopback, replace the line board.If the fault is rectified after the loopback, replace the line board at thetransmit end.
2. If you fail to rectify the fault by replacing the line board, check whetherthere is a power surge or an external interference source or whether theequipment is not properly grounded.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
![Page 80: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
CommentNo.
Description
6 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:1. Replace the board where the services are configured based on how the
service paths that have bit errors overlap each other.2. If you fail to rectify the fault by replacing the board, check whether there
is a power surge or an external interference source or whether theequipment is not properly grounded.
Experience and SummaryNOTE
The TDM services mentioned refer to Native TDM services.The handling procedure applies when the STM-1e port. is faulty
l During the routine maintenance, check bit error performance events periodically and handlethem in time.
l To locate a fault, prefer the method of analyzing alarms and performance events to themethod of performing loopback operations and the method of replacing the parts.
5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer JustificationsWhen an NE reports a large number of justification events about the administrative unit (AU)pointer or the tributary unit (TU) pointer, there are pointer justification faults.
Fault PhenomenaWhen the position of the first byte of the VC-4 in the AU-4 payload changes, the AU pointermakes a justification accordingly. The performance events related to the AU pointer justificationare as follows:
l AUPJCHIGHl AUPJCLOWl AUPJCNEW
NOTE
The AU pointer justification is made at an upstream NE but is detected and reported at a downstream NE.
When the service is configured to be at the VC-12 level, apply the reframing process to terminatethe AU pointer justification. The terminating method is to transform the AU pointer justificationinto the TU pointer justification. The performance events related to the TU pointer justificationare as follows:
l TUPJCHIGHl TUPJCLOWl TUPJCNEW
NOTE
The TU pointer justification is made at the NE where the AU pointer is transformed into the TU pointer,but is detected and reported by the tributary board of the NE where services are terminated.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
![Page 81: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
Fault Causesl The clock sources or the clock source levels are configured incorrectly. As a result, there
are two clock sources on the same network or a timing loop occurs.l The fiber connections are incorrect. As a result, a timing loop occurs.l The quality of the clock source declines, the clock unit is faulty, or there are other clock-
related faults.l The tributary board is faulty (only for the TU pointer justification).
Fault Locating MethodsWhen there are both AU pointer justifications and TU pointer justifications on a service path,first handle the AU pointer justifications and then the TU pointer justifications.
Fault Fault Locating Method
AU pointer justification 1. Analyze and clear clock alarms.2. Rectify the incorrect data configuration
and incorrect fiber connections.3. Change the clock configuration to locate
the station whose clock is asynchronouswith the entire network.
4. Replace the parts whose performance maydeteriorate with new ones.
TU pointer justification 1. Analyze and clear clock alarms.2. Rectify the incorrect data configuration
and incorrect fiber connections.3. Change the clock and service
configuration to locate the station whoseclock is asynchronous with the entirenetwork.
4. Replace the parts whose performance maydeteriorate with new ones.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
![Page 82: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-6 Procedure for troubleshooting pointer justifications
Start
Is there a clock-relatedalarm?
No
YesClear the alarm
Incorrect fiberconnection?
YesReconnect the fibers
No
An AU pointerjustification event?
Yes
No
A TU pointerjustification event?
Yes
Proceed with thenext step Is the fault rectified?
End
Yes
No
Incorrectconfiguration?
Modify the dataconfiguration
No
Check the clockconfiguration
Yes
Check the fiberconnection
Locate the faulty boardLocate the NE whose clockis out of synchronization
Locate the faulty boardLocate the NE whose clockis out of synchronization
No
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
![Page 83: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
Table 5-8 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting pointer justifications
CommentNo.
Description
1 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l TEMP_ALARMl HARD_BADl LTIl SYNC_C_LOSl S1_SYN_CHANGEl EXT_SYNC_LOS
2 Check the following points:l Check whether there are two clock reference sources on the entire network.l Check whether a timing loop is generated.
3 Query ECC routes to check whether the fibers are connected correctly. Checkthe fiber connections in the east and west directions of the NE that reports thepointer justification event.
4 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:1. Locate a VC-4 channel that reports an AU pointer justification event.2. Along the service source direction of the VC-4 channel, locate the source
NE of the entire VC-4 service (not the source NE of a timeslot in the VC-4).3. Set the clock of the source NE to the free-run mode. Set the other NEs to
trace the clock of the source NE along the direction of the VC-4 service.4. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the line board that is the first to
report the AU pointer justification of the VC-4 path.The clock of the remote NE to which the line board is connected isasynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board on the remoteNE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signalto the remote NE, and the clock unit of the remote NE, may be faulty.
5. Set the clock of the sink NE to the free-run mode. Set the other NEs totrace the clock of the sink NE along the direction of the VC-4 service.
6. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the line board that is the first toreport the AU pointer justification of the VC-4 path.The clock of the remote NE to which the line board is connected isasynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, the line board on the NEthat receives the clock signal, the line board that sends the clock signal tothe NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty.
7. Compare the results and find out the common points.
5 Replace the possibly faulty boards.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
![Page 84: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
CommentNo.
Description
6 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:1. Modify the service configuration to ensure that the NE where the clock
reference source functions as the central NE and that the other NEs havethe E1 services of the central NE.
2. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the NE that is the first to reportthe TU pointer justification event.The clock of the NE is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, theline board on the NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sendsthe clock signal to the NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty.
3. Modify the configuration data to ensure that all the NEs trace the clockalong the other direction.
4. Along the clock tracing direction, locate the NE that is the first to reportthe TU pointer justification event.The clock of the NE is asynchronous with the reference clock. Hence, theline board on the NE that receives the clock signal, the line board that sendsthe clock signal to the NE, and the clock unit of the NE, may be faulty.
5. Compare the results and find out the common points.NOTE
This method is also applicable to locating an AU pointer justification event.
7 Replace the possibly faulty boards. In the case of a TU pointer justificationevent, check whether the line board, the clock board, and the tributary boardare faulty.
Experience and Summary
On a properly synchronized network, there are few pointer justifications (less than six per dayon each port). Hence, monitoring the pointer of an SDH transmission system is an effective wayto check the synchronization status of the system.
5.6 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with SDHEquipment
An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting SDH services with other SDHequipment.
Fault Causesl The VC-12 numbering method of the OptiX equipment is different from the numbering
method of the equipment of certain vendors.
The OptiX equipment applies the timeslot numbering method. The numbering formula is:VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + (TU-12 number - 1) x 21.This method is also called as the method of numbering by order.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
![Page 85: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
Certain equipment applies the line numbering method. The numbering formula is: VC-12number = (TUG-3 number - 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + TU-12 number. Thismethod is also called as the interleaved method.
l The overhead bytes at both ends are inconsistent.l The indexes of the SDH interfaces do not meet the requirements.
NOTE
In the case of interconnection with ATM or Ethernet equipment, the common cause for an interconnectionfailure is that the service is not set to the VC-4 pass-through service and thus the overheads are processedin the terminating mode instead of the pass-through mode.
Fault Locating MethodsAnalyze the fault phenomena and alarms that are generated on the equipment. Check the possiblefault causes one after another.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
![Page 86: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-7 Procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with SDH equipment
Start
Is theinterconnected equipmentthe ATM/IP equipment?
No
Yes Set the interconnectionservice to be the VC-4 pass-
through service
Is there an overheadsetting related alarm?
YesHandle the alarm
No
Is the interface theSTM-1 electrical
interface?
Yes
No
Go to the nextstep Is the fault cleared?
End
Yes
No
Is thenumbering mode the
line numbering?
Modify the data configuration.Use the line numbering
method to set the VC-12
No
Query the VC-12 numberingmethod of the interconnected
equipment
Yes
1
Check the grounding
2
Test the indexes of interfaces
Do the interfaces meetrelevant standards?
Handle the faults of the localequipment
Handle the faults of theinterconnected equipment
Yes
No
3
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
![Page 87: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
Table 5-9 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with SDHequipment
CommentNo.
Description
1 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l J0_MMl HP_TIMl LP_TIMl HP_SLMl LP_SLM
2 Check the following points:l Check whether all the equipment and the DDF in the equipment room are
jointly grounded.l Check whether the shielding layer of the coaxial cable connector on the
DDF is connected to the protection ground.l Check whether the shielding layers of coaxial cables are grounded in the
same way.NOTE
Disconnect all the signal cables between the interconnecting equipment. Use amultimeter to measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at thereceive and transmit ends of the SDH equipment. In addition, measure the level betweenthe shielding layers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the oppositeequipment. If the potential difference is large (about 0.5 V), the fault may be caused bythe grounding.
3 Common indexes of the optical interfaces are as follows:l Mean launched optical powerl Receiver sensitivityl Overload optical powerl Permitted frequency deviation of the input interfaceCommon indexes of the electrical interfaces:l Permitted frequency deviation of the input interfacel Allowed attenuation of the input interface
Experience and SummaryTo rectify an interconnection fault, you must be familiar with the characteristics of the interfaceson the interconnected equipment.
5.7 Troubleshooting the Interconnection with PDHEquipment
An interconnection fault occurs when the NE fails in transmitting PDH services with other PDHequipment.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
![Page 88: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
Fault Causesl There is an impedance mismatch between interfaces.l The equipment is not grounded properly.l The cable performance deteriorates.l The indexes of the PDH interfaces do not meet the requirements.
Fault Locating MethodsAnalyze the fault phenomena and alarms that are generated on the equipment. Check the possiblefault causes one after another.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
![Page 89: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-8 Procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with PDH equipment
Start
Is there animpedance mismatch?
Yes Replace the cable or thetributary board
Check the cables
Is in good conditions?No
Yes
Proceed with the next step Is the fault rectified?
End
Yes
No
Is the cable acoaxial cable?
No
Check the impedance ofthe interfaces
Yes
Adjust the cables
Test the indexes ofinterfaces
Do the interfacesmeet standards?
Troubleshoot the faultson the local equipment
Troubleshoot the faults onthe interconnected
equipment
Yes
No
Check the grounding
No
1
2
3
4
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
![Page 90: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
Table 5-10 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting the interconnection with PDHequipment
CommentNo.
Description
1 Check the impedance of the E1 path. Ensure that the impedance of the E1path is consistent with the cable type.
2 Check the following points:l Check whether all the equipment and the DDF in the telecommunications
room are jointly grounded.l Check whether the shielding layers of the coaxial cable connectors on the
DDF are connected to the protection ground.l Check whether the shielding layers of coaxial cables are grounded in the
same manner.NOTE
Disconnect all the signal cables between the interconnecting equipment sets. Use amultimeter to measure the level between the shielding layers of the coaxial cables at thereceive and transmit ends of the PDH equipment and the level between the shieldinglayers of the coaxial cables at the receive and transmit ends of the equipment at theopposite end. If the potential difference is large (about 0.5 V), the fault may be causeddue to the improper grounding.
3 Check the following points:l Check whether the wires of the cable are correctly connected.l Check whether the cable is broken or pressed.l Check whether the cable signal is interfered (for example, when the trunk
cable is bound with the power cable, the cable signal is interfered by thepower signal).NOTE
Checking the cables involves checking the cables from the DDF to the client sideand checking the cables from the DDF to the transmission equipment side.
4 Check the following indexes:l Input jitter tolerancel Permitted frequency deviation of the input interfacel Output jitterl Output frequency deviation
Experience and SummaryNOTE
The PDH services mentioned refer to Native E1 services.
In the case of interconnection with PDH equipment, improper grounding is the most commoncause for an interconnection failure.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
![Page 91: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
5.8 Troubleshooting Native Ethernet Service FaultsAn Ethernet service fault may be the Ethernet service interruption or Ethernet servicedeterioration.
Prerequisites
The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is completely interrupted.The Ethernet service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. For example,the network access speed is low, the equipment delay is long, the packet loss occurs, or incorrectpackets exist in the received or transmitted data.
Fault Phenomena
The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is completely interrupted.The Ethernet service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. For example,the network access speed is low, the equipment delay is long, the packet loss occurs, or incorrectpackets exist in the received or transmitted data.
Table 5-11 Common faults of Ethernet services
Symptom Alarm Board
Ethernet services areinterrupted.
HARD_BAD,TEMP_ALARM,WRG_BD_TYPE, orBD_STATUS
EG2D, EM6TA, EM6FA,EM6F, EM6T
COMMUN_FAIL,LAG_DOWN
ETH_LOS,ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK,or LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR EM6F, EG2D
Ethernet services aredegraded.
HARD_BAD orTEMP_ALARM
EG2D, EM6TA, EM6FA,EM6F or EM6T
FLOW_OVER orLAG_MEMBER_DOWN
EG2D, EM6TA, EM6FA,EM6F or EM6T
AM_DOWNSHIFT ISU2, ISX2, IFU2 or IFX2
Fault Causesl The possible human factors are as follows:
– An Ethernet board loopback or a transmission line loopback occurs.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
![Page 92: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
– The parameter settings of the Ethernet ports, such as the port enabled state, workingmode, and flow control, are different from the parameter settings of the Ethernet portson the interconnected equipment.
– The service configuration is incorrect.l The equipment at the local end is faulty.l The line board is faulty or has bit errors.l When the AM function is enabled, the Ethernet service bandwidth decreases due to the
downward AM switch.l The interconnected equipment is faulty.l The network cable is faulty.l The external electromagnetic interference is severe.
Fault Locating Methods1. Rectify the human-caused faults such as a loopback and a data configuration error.2. Locate the fault cause according to the equipment alarms.3. Locate the fault cause according to the RMON performance events and alarms.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
![Page 93: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-9 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults
Any abnormal RMON performance
events?
Clear the alarm
6
No
YesAn equipment alarm or alarm on
the radio link?
An Ethernet alarm?Yes
No
YesTroubleshoot the fault
according to the flow of handling RMON
performance events
3
2
Troubleshoot equipmentfaults by performingloopbacks section by
section or replacing boards
Proceedwith the
next stepIs the fault rectified?
End
Yes
No
A loop formed by the E-LAN service
trails?
No
No
YesRelease the loop
Start
Incorrect operation?1
Cancel this operation
No
Yes
44
3
2
1
Query the port and service traffic and analyze the fault
causes
Clear the alarm
5
No
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
![Page 94: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
Table 5-12 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults
CommentNo.
Description
1 Check the following points:l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet portl Whether a loopback is set for the transmission linel Whether the parameter settings of the Ethernet port, such as the port
enabled state, working mode, and flow control, are the same as theparameter settings of the Ethernet port on the interconnected equipment
l Check whether the Ethernet protocol and the Ethernet serviceconfiguration (especially the attributes of the Ethernet port) are correct.
2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms:l POWER_ALMl FAN_FAILl HARD_BADl BD_STATUSl NESF_LOSTl TEMP_ALARMl RADIO_RSL_HIGHl RADIO_RSL_LOWl RADIO_TSL_HIGHl RADIO_TSL_LOWl IF_INPWR_ABNl AM_DOWNSHIFTPay special attention to the following line alarms:l MW_LIMl MW_LOFl MW_BER_EXCl MW_BER_SDl MW_RDIl MW_FEC_UNCOR
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l ETH_LOSl ETH_NO_FLOWl LAG_DOWNl LAG_MEMBER_DOWNl FLOW_OVER
4 Follow instructions in Detecting E-LAN Service Loops to check whether E-LAN services are looped back. Release the loops if any are formed.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
![Page 95: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
CommentNo.
Description
5 Query the rate of an Ethernet port and locate faults based on the analysisof Ethernet port rates.l If the Ethernet port connecting the peer equipment has a too high or too
low receive rate, the peer equipment is faulty.l If the rate of the Integrated IP radio port approaches or reaches the license
capacity of the IF port, the license capacity is too low and you need toapply for a license allowing for a higher capacity.
l If the transmit rate of the Integrated IP radio port approaches or reachesthe maximum Ethernet bandwidth of the IF port, the bandwidth of the IFport is too low and needs to be increased by the network planningpersonnel.
l If the transmit rate of the Integrated IP radio port is much lower than thereceive rate of the Ethernet port, or if the receive rate of the Integrated IPradio port is much higher than the transmit rate of the Ethernet port, thelocal end is faulty. Locate the fault as follows:– Check the Ethernet service configuration and QoS configuration.– By querying QoS packet loss data in RMON events on the NMS,
check whether QoS settings are correct according to the packet lossdata.
– Check the Ethernet interface board, IF board, and system control,switching and timing board by means of board replacement.
If the transmitted traffic is equal to the received traffic, query the traffic onthe same port in each VLAN to check whether bandwidth preemption occurs.
6 For RMON performance events, see the D RMON Event Reference.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
![Page 96: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
Figure 5-10 Procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event
Is it a MTU settingproblem?
Yes Modify the MTUvalue
No
Proceed withthe next step
Is the faultrectified?
End
Yes
No
No
Is the test passed?
No
Yes
Use a meter to perform the test
Rectify the fault of theinterconnected equipment
Rectify the equipment fault byloopback section by section or
replacing the board
5
Are broadcast packetsexcessive?
No
Yes Handle the problem onexcessive broadcast
packets
4
Start
Rectify the fault of line biterrors
No
YesIs there any FCS error?
Is there any collisionor fragment?
Yes Check the working modeof the port
2
3
View the statistics groupperformance on an Ethernet port
1
Table 5-13 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event
No. Description
1 8.18 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization ofEthernet Ports to obtain the real-time performance statistics data of theEthernet port.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
![Page 97: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
No. Description
2 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:l Check the Ethernet cable. If the Ethernet cable is not qualified, replace it
with a new one.l Change the Ethernet port that accesses the services on the Ethernet board.
If the new port does not have the RMON performance of an FCS error, itindicates that the hardware of the original port is faulty. Otherwise, thehardware of the Ethernet port on the equipment at the opposite end isfaulty.
3 Check the following points:l Whether the port operating rates on the equipment at both ends are the
samel Whether the working modes (full duplex or half duplex) of the Ethernet
port on the equipment at both ends are the samel Whether the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end and
the Ethernet port is set to full duplex mode at the opposite end (When theEthernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end, the Ethernet portmust not be set to full duplex mode at the opposite end.)
4 Check for the cause for excessive broadcast packets (for example, you haveset the loopback for the Ethernet interface board or set the VB filteringtable incorrectly) and solve the problem. If the problem is caused on theequipment at the opposite end, set the threshold of broadcast packetsuppression for an Ethernet port to reduce broadcast packets.
5 Test the MTU of the network by using a test meter. The maximum framelength that is set for a port should be longer than the MTU of the network.
Experience and Summary
To troubleshoot an Ethernet service fault, you must be familiar with the characteristics, workingmode, and configured protocols of interfaces on the Ethernet equipment.
5.9 Troubleshooting Ethernet Service on the EoS/EoPDHPlane
The Ethernet services transmitted on the EoS/EoPDH plane can be transmitted over a TDMnetwork. The faults of the EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services include service interruption andservice degradation.
Fault Phenomena
The Ethernet service interruption indicates that the Ethernet service is completely interrupted.The Ethernet service deterioration indicates that the Ethernet service is abnormal. For example,the network access speed is low, the equipment delay is long, the packet loss occurs, or incorrectpackets exist in the received or transmitted data.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
![Page 98: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
Table 5-14 Common faults of Ethernet services
Symptom Alarm Board
Ethernet services areinterrupted.
HARD_BAD,TEMP_ALARM,WRG_BD_TYPE, orBD_STATUS
EMS6/EFP8
ALM_GFP_dLFD orALM_GFP_dCSF
ETH_LOS or LOOP_ALM
LAG_PORT_FAIL,LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL,LCAS_TLCT, orLCAS_TLCR
Ethernet services areabnormal.
HARD_BAD orTEMP_ALARM
FLOW_OVER
LCAS_FOPT,LCAS_FOPR,LCAS_PLCT, orLCAS_PLCR
Fault Causesl The possible human factors are as follows:
– An Ethernet board loopback or a transmission line loopback occurs.– The parameter settings of the Ethernet ports, such as the port enabled state, working
mode, and flow control, are different from the parameter settings of the Ethernet portson the interconnected equipment.
– The configuration of the encapsulation/mapping protocol or the LCAS protocol isinconsistent on both ends of the link.
– The timeslot binding of VCTRUNKs is inconsistent on both ends of the link– The service configuration is incorrect.
l The equipment at the local end is faulty.l The line board is faulty or has bit errors.l The interconnected equipment is faulty.l The network cable is faulty.l The external electromagnetic interference is severe.
Fault Locating Methods1. Rectify the human-caused faults such as a loopback and a data configuration error.2. Locate the fault cause according to the equipment alarms.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
![Page 99: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
3. Locate the fault cause according to the RMON performance events and alarms.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-11 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults
Any abnormal RMON performance
events?
Clear the alarm
5
No
YesAn equipment alarm or alarm on the radio
link?
An Ethernet alarm?
Yes Query the port and service traffic and analyze the fault
causes
No
Fault on theopposite
equipment?
Yes Troubleshoot the fault according to the flow of handling RMON
performance events
Yes Troubleshoot faults on theopposite equipment
No
3
2
Troubleshoot equipmentfaults by performing
loopbacks section bysection or replacing boards
Proceedwith thenext step
Is the fault rectified?
End
Yes
No
A loop formed by the E-LAN service trails?
No
No
YesRelease the loop
Start
Incorrect operation?1
Cancel this operation
No
Yes
Clear the alarm
4
5
4
3
2
1
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
![Page 100: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
Table 5-15 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet service faults
CommentNo.
Description
1 Check the following points:l Whether a loopback is set for the Ethernet portl Whether a loopback is set for the transmission linel Whether the parameter settings of the Ethernet port, such as the port
enabled state, working mode, and flow control, are the same as theparameter settings of the Ethernet port on the interconnected equipment
l The configuration of the encapsulation/mapping protocol or the LCASprotocol is inconsistent on both ends of the link.
l The timeslot binding of VCTRUNKs is inconsistent on both ends of thelink.
l Check whether the Ethernet protocol and the Ethernet serviceconfiguration (especially the attributes of the Ethernet port) are correct.
2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms:l POWER_ALMl FAN_FAILl HARD_BADl BD_STATUSl NESF_LOSTl TEMP_ALARMl RADIO_RSL_HIGHl RADIO_RSL_LOWl RADIO_TSL_HIGHl RADIO_TSL_LOWl IF_INPWR_ABNPay special attention to the following line alarms:l MW_LIMl MW_LOFl R_LOSl R_LOFl MS_AISl AU_AISl AU_LOPl B1_EXCl B2_EXC
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
![Page 101: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
CommentNo.
Description
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l ETH_LOSl FLOW_OVERl ALM_GFP_dCSFl ALM_GFP_dLFDl FCS_ERRl LCAS_PLCTl LCAS_TLCTl LCAS_PLCRl LCAS_TLCRl LCAS_FOPTl LCAS_FOPR
4 If the LOOP_ALM alarm is reported after the configuring the AdvancedAttributes of Ethernet Interfaces operation is performed, it indicates that thenetwork to which Ethernet ports are connected has loops.
5 For RMON performance events, see C Performance Event Reference.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
![Page 102: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
Figure 5-12 Procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event
Start
Rectify the fault of line biterrors
No
YesIs there any FCS error?
Is there any collisionor fragment?
Yes Check the working modeof the port
Is it a MTU settingproblem?
YesModify the MTU value
No
2
Proceed withthe next step
Is the faultrectified?
End
Yes
No
Is there anyPAUSE frame?
3
No
No
Yes Handle the flow controlproblem or increase the
bandwidth
View the statistics groupperformance on an Ethernet port
Is the test passed?
No
Yes
Use a meter to perform the test
Rectify the fault of theinterconnected equipment
Rectify the equipment fault byloopback section by section or
replacing the board
1
4
6
Are broadcast packetsexcessive?
No
Yes Handle the problem onexcessive broadcast
packets
5
Table 5-16 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting an RMON performance event
CommentNo.
Description
1 View the statistics group performance on an Ethernet port to obtain thereal-time performance statistics data of the Ethernet port.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
![Page 103: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
CommentNo.
Description
2 The troubleshooting procedure is as follows:l Check the Ethernet cable. If the Ethernet cable is not qualified, replace it
with a new one.l Change the Ethernet port that accesses the services on the Ethernet board.
If the new port does not have the RMON performance of an FCS error, itindicates that the hardware of the original port is faulty. Otherwise, thehardware of the Ethernet port on the equipment at the opposite end isfaulty.
3 Check the following points:l Whether the port operating rates on the equipment at both ends are the
samel Whether the working modes (full duplex or half duplex) of the Ethernet
port on the equipment at both ends are the samel Whether the Ethernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end and
the Ethernet port is set to full duplex mode at the opposite end (When theEthernet port is set to auto-negotiation mode at one end, the Ethernet portmust not be set to full duplex mode at the opposite end.)
4 Check the following points:l Whether the flow control method is the same.l Whether the Ethernet service traffic exceeds the bandwidth of the
VCTRUNK.
5 Check for the cause for excessive broadcast packets (for example, you haveset the loopback for the Ethernet interface board or set the VB filteringtable incorrectly) and solve the problem. If the problem is caused on theequipment at the opposite end, set the threshold of broadcast packetsuppression for an Ethernet port to reduce broadcast packets.
6 Test the MTU of the network by using a test meter. The maximum framelength that is set for a port should be longer than the MTU of the network.
Experience and SummaryTo troubleshoot an Ethernet service fault, you must be familiar with the characteristics, workingmode, and configured protocols of interfaces on the Ethernet equipment.
5.10 Troubleshooting MPLS TunnelsThis section describes how to troubleshoot MPLS tunnels by using the MPLS OAM function orMPLS Ping/Traceroute function.
Fault PhenomenaCommon faults of MPLS tunnels are as follows.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
![Page 104: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
l MPLS tunnels fail to be created, and services are unavailable.l MPLS tunnels are faulty, and services are interrupted.l MPLS APS switching fails, services are interrupted, and packet loss or bit errors occur.
Table 5-17 Common faults of MPLS tunnels
Symptom Alarm Board
MPLS tunnels are faulty. HARD_BAD,TEMP_ALARM,WRG_BD_TYPE,BUS_ERR, BD_STATUS,MPLS_TUNNEL_OAM-FAIL,MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV,MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess,MPLS_TUNNEL_MIS-MATCH,MPLS_TUNNEL_MIS-MERGE,MPLS_TUNNEL_UN-KNOWN,MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI,MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI,MPLS_TUNNEL_SD,MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
CSHN
AM_DOWNSHIFTMW_CFG_MISMATCHMW_LIMMW_LOF
ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2
Fault Causesl Incorrect operations are performed.
– The transmission link is looped back.– Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end.– Service configuration is incorrect.
l The local NE is faulty.l The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors.l Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift.l The opposite NE is faulty.l External electromagnetic interference is severe.
Fault Locating Methods1. Check whether the data is modified, whether the line is looped back, and whether any boards
are replaced.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
![Page 105: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
2. Handle the link alarms on the MPLS server trail.
3. Locate the faulty section by using the LSP Traceroute function.
4. Locate the fault by replacing boards.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-13 Procedure for troubleshooting MPLS tunnels
Clear the alarm
No
Yes
Yes
Troubleshoot equipment faults byperforming loopbacks on sections
or replacing boards
Contact Huaweitechnical engineers
Faults are rectified?
End
Yes
No
Clear the alarm
Start
Any incorrectoperation?
Cancel the operation
No
Yes
Any equipment- orlink-related alarm?
No
Any alarm related to MPLStunnel ?
YesHandle the fault
No
Any fault ofinterconnection
equipment
3
2
1
Table 5-18 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting MPLS tunnels
CommentNo.
Description
1 Check the following points:l Whether a loopback is set for E1 portsl Whether a loopback is set for the transmission linkl Whether the parameter settings such as the working mode of Ethernet ports
match those of the opposite NEl Whether the parameter settings such as frame format and frame mode at
E1 ports match those of the opposite NEl Whether MPLS service configuration is correct, especially whether tunnel
attributes are set correctly
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
![Page 106: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
CommentNo.
Description
2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms:l POWER_ALMl FAN_FAILl HARD_BADl BD_STATUSl BUS_ERRl NESF_LOSTl TEMP_ALARMl RADIO_RSL_HIGHl RADIO_RSL_LOWl RADIO_TSL_HIGHl RADIO_TSL_LOWl IF_INPWR_ABNl AM_DOWNSHIFTl MW_CFG_MISMATCHPay special attention to the following line alarms:l MW_LIMl MW_LOFl MW_BER_EXCl MW_BER_SDl MW_RDIl MW_FEC_UNCOR
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDIl MPLS_TUNNEL_Excessl MPLS_TUNNEL_FDIl MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCVl MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCHl MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGEl MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAILl MPLS_TUNNEL_SDl MPLS_TUNNEL_SFl MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN
Experience and SummaryLearn about the working principle and protocol configuration of MPLS tunnels beforetroubleshooting MPLS tunnels.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
![Page 107: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
5.11 Troubleshooting CES ServicesThis section describes how to troubleshoot CES services that are interrupted or degraded.
Fault Phenomena
CES services are interrupted if they are completely unavailable. CES services are degraded ifthey have packet loss or incorrect packets.
Table 5-19 Common faults of CES services
Symptom Alarm Board
CES services are interrupted. HARD_BAD,TEMP_ALARM,WRG_BD_TYPE,BUS_ERR, BD_STATUS,CES_LOSPKT_EXC
CSHN, ML1, MD1
AM_DOWNSHIFTMW_CFG_MISMATCH
ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2
CES services are degraded. HARD_BAD,TEMP_ALARM,CES_JTROVR_EXC,CES_JTRUDR_EXC,CES_MALPKT_EXC,CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC, CES_STRAYPKT_EXC
CSHN, ML1, MD1
AM_DOWNSHIFTMW_CFG_MISMATCH
ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2
Fault Causesl Incorrect operations are performed.
– The transmission link is looped back.
– Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end.
– Service configuration is incorrect.l The clock source is asynchronous.l Jitters and delays on the network are too great.l The local NE is faulty.l The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors.l Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift.l The opposite NE is faulty.l External electromagnetic interference is severe.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
![Page 108: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
Fault Locating Methods1. Check whether the data is modified, whether the line is looped back, and whether any boards
are replaced.2. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping function. If the PW is faulty,
check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping function. If theMPLS tunnel works properly, check whether the PW has the same configuration at bothends. If the configuration is the same, replace the board on the NNI side.
3. If the PW works properly, check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same.If the PE data is different, change the PE data to the same.
4. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent.5. Analyze the RMON performance events of CES services.6. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables
are connected incorrectly.7. Replace Smart E1 processing boards.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
![Page 109: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-14 Procedure for troubleshooting CES services
Clear the alarm
No
Yes
Yes
YesClear the alarm
Troubleshoot equipment faults byperforming loopbacks on sections
or replacing boards
Contact Huaweitechnical engineers
Faults are rectified?
End
Yes
No
Clear the alarm
Start
Any incorrectoperation?
Cancel the operation
No
Yes
Any equipment- orlink-related alarm?
No
No
Any alarm related totunnels/PWs?
Any alarm on E1ports?
YesHandle the fault
No
Any fault ofinterconnection with
PDH equipment
7
5
3
2
1
YesHandle the performance event
No
Any RMONperformance event?
6
YesClear the alarm
Any alarm related toCES services?
4
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
![Page 110: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
Table 5-20 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting CES services
Comment No.
Description
1 Check the following points:l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 portl Whether a loopback is set for the transmission linkl Check whether the parameter settings of CES services, PWs, and tunnels are
consistent at the source end and sink end.l Check whether the parameter settings of physical ports (including frame
format, code, electrical port impedance, and overhead byte), are consistent.l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic.
2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms:l POWER_ALMl FAN_FAILl HARD_BADl BD_STATUSl BUS_ERRl NESF_LOSTl TEMP_ALARMl RADIO_RSL_HIGHl RADIO_RSL_LOWl RADIO_TSL_HIGHl RADIO_TSL_LOWl IF_INPWR_ABNl AM_DOWNSHIFTl MW_CFG_MISMATCHPay special attention to the following line alarms:l MW_LIMl MW_LOFl MW_BER_EXCl MW_BER_SDl MW_RDIl MW_FEC_UNCOR
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
![Page 111: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
Comment No.
Description
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDIl MPLS_TUNNEL_Excessl MPLS_TUNNEL_FDIl MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCVl MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCHl MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGEl MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAILl MPLS_TUNNEL_SDl MPLS_TUNNEL_SFl MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN
4 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l CES_JTROVR_EXCl CES_JTRUDR_EXCl CES_LOSPKT_EXCl CES_MALPKT_EXCl CES_MISORDERPKT_EXCl CES_STRAYPKT_EXC
5 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l T_ALOSl UP_E1_AISl LFAl LMFAl DOWN_E1_AISl ALM_E1RAI
6 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l CES_MISORDERPKTl CES_LOSPKTl CES_MALPKTl CES_JTRUDRl CES_JTROVRl CES_STRAYPKT
7 Troubleshoot the interconnection with the PDH equipment.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
![Page 112: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
Experience and Summary
Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of CES services beforetroubleshooting CES services.
5.12 Troubleshooting ATM ServicesThis section describes how to troubleshoot ATM services that are interrupted or degraded.
Fault Phenomena
ATM services are interrupted if they are completely unavailable. ATM services are degraded ifthey have packet loss or incorrect packets.
Table 5-21 Common faults of ATM services
Symptom Alarm Board
ATM services areinterrupted.
HARD_BAD,TEMP_ALARM,WRG_BD_TYPE,BUS_ERR, BD_STATUS,ALM_IMA_LIF,ALM_IMA_LODS,ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UN-USABLE,ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UN-USABLE,IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN,IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN,LCD
CSHN, ML1, MD1
AM_DOWNSHIFTMW_CFG_MISMATCH
ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2
ATM services are degraded. HARD_BAD,TEMP_ALARM,ALM_IMA_LIF,ALM_IMA_LODS,ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UN-USABLE,ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UN-USABLE, OCD
CSHN, ML1, MD1
AM_DOWNSHIFTMW_CFG_MISMATCH
ISU2, ISX2, IFU2, or IFX2
Fault Causesl Incorrect operations are performed.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
![Page 113: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
– The transmission link is looped back.– Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end.– Service configuration is incorrect.
l The local NE is faulty.l The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors.l Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift.l The opposite NE is faulty.l External electromagnetic interference is severe.
Fault Locating Methods1. Check whether the data is modified, whether the link is looped back, and whether any
boards are replaced.2. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping function. If the PW is faulty,
check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping function. If theMPLS tunnel works properly, check whether the PW has the same configuration at bothends. If the configuration is the same, replace the board on the NNI side.
3. If the PW works properly, check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same.If the PE data is different, change the PE data to the same.
4. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent.5. Analyze the RMON performance events of ATM services.6. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cables
are connected incorrectly.7. Replace Smart E1 processing boards.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
![Page 114: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-15 Procedure for troubleshooting ATM services
Clear the alarm
No
Yes
Yes
YesClear the alarm
Troubleshoot equipment faults byperforming loopbacks on sections
or replacing boards
Contact Huaweitechnical engineers
Faults are rectified?
End
Yes
No
Clear the alarm
Start
Any incorrectoperation?
Cancel the operation
No
Yes
Any equipment- orlink-related alarm?
No
No
Any alarm related to ATMservices?
Any alarm at the E1port?
YesHandle the fault
No
Any fault ofinterconnection with
PDH equipment
6
4
3
2
1
YesHandle the performance event
No
Any RMONperformance event?
5
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
![Page 115: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
Table 5-22 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting ATM services
CommentNo.
Description
1 Check the following points:l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 portl Whether a loopback is set for the transmission linkl Whether the parameter settings of ATM VPI/VCI, PWE3 CW, PW, and
Tunnel are consistent between the source end and the sink end.l Whether the parameter settings of interconnected ports are consistent
– Whether E1 frame format, coding, overhead bytes, and E1 timeslotmode (30/31) are correctly configured
– Whether IMA parameters (including protocol version, clock mode,frame length, and maximum differential delay) are correctlyconfigured
l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic.
2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms:l POWER_ALMl FAN_FAILl HARD_BADl BD_STATUSl BUS_ERRl NESF_LOSTl TEMP_ALARMl RADIO_RSL_HIGHl RADIO_RSL_LOWl RADIO_TSL_HIGHl RADIO_TSL_LOWl IF_INPWR_ABNl AM_DOWNSHIFTl MW_CFG_MISMATCHPay special attention to the following line alarms:l MW_LIMl MW_LOFl MW_BER_EXCl MW_BER_SDl MW_RDIl MW_FEC_UNCOR
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
![Page 116: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
CommentNo.
Description
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l ALM_IMA_LIFl ALM_IMA_LODSl ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLEl ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLEl IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWNl IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWNl OCDl LCD
4 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l T_ALOSl UP_E1_AISl LFAl LMFAl DOWN_E1_AIS
5 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLSl ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR
6 Troubleshoot the interconnection with the PDH equipment.
Experience and SummaryLearn about the working principle and protocol configuration of ATM services beforetroubleshooting ATM services.
5.13 Troubleshooting Ethernet Services Carried by PWsThis section describes how to troubleshoot Ethernet services that are carried by PWs andtransmitted in the PSN. These Ethernet services are considered faulty when they are interruptedor deteriorate.
Fault SymptomsEthernet services are interrupted if they are completely unavailable. Ethernet services deteriorateif they have great delays, packet loss, or incorrect packets.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
![Page 117: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
Table 5-23 Common faults of Ethernet services
Symptom Alarm Board
Ethernet services areinterrupted.
HARD_BAD,TEMP_ALARM,WRG_BD_TYPE,BUS_ERR, BD_STATUS
EG2D, EM6TA, EM6FA,EM6F or EM6T
COMMUN_FAIL,LAG_DOWN
ETH_LOS,ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK,or LOOP_ALM
LASER_MOD_ERR EM6FA, EM6F or EG2D
Ethernet services deteriorate. HARD_BAD orTEMP_ALARM
EG2D, EM6TA, EM6FA,EM6F or EM6T
FLOW_OVER orLAG_MEMBER_DOWN
EG2D, EM6TA, EM6FA,EM6F or EM6T
AM_DOWNSHIFT ISU2, ISX2, IFU2 or IFX2
Fault Causesl Incorrect operations are performed.
– The transmission link is looped back.– Service configuration data is inconsistent between the local end and the opposite end.– Service configuration is incorrect.
l The local NE is faulty.l The transmission link is faulty or has bit errors.l Service bandwidth decreases due to an AM downshift.l The opposite NE is faulty.l External electromagnetic interference is severe.
Fault Locating Methods1. Check whether the data is modified, whether the link is looped back, and whether any
boards are replaced.2. Check whether the PW works properly by using the PW ping function. If the PW is faulty,
check whether the MPLS tunnel works properly by using the LSP ping function. If theMPLS tunnel works properly, check whether the PW has the same configuration at bothends. If the configuration is the same, replace the board on the NNI side.
3. If the PW works properly, check whether the PE data configured at both ends is the same.If the PE data is different, change the PE data to the same.
4. Check whether UNI-side data and CE-side data are consistent.5. Analyze the RMON performance events of Ethernet services.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
![Page 118: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
6. Check whether there is impedance mismatch on channels and whether any electrical cablesare connected incorrectly.
7. Replace Ethernet interface boards.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-16 Procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services carried by PWs
Clear the alarm
No
Yes
Yes
YesClear the alarm
Troubleshoot equipment faults byperforming loopbacks on sections
or replacing boards
Contact Huaweitechnical engineers
Faults are rectified?
End
Yes
No
Clear the alarm
Start
Any incorrectoperation?
Cancel the operation
No
Yes
Any equipment- orlink-related alarm?
No
No
Any alarm related to tunnels/PWsthat carry services?
Any alarm on theUNI side?
YesHandle the fault
No
Any fault ofinterconnection with
PDH equipment
6
4
3
2
1
YesHandle the performance event
No
Any RMONperformance event?
5
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
![Page 119: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
Table 5-24 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting Ethernet services carried by PWs
No. Description
1 Check the following points:l Whether a loopback is set for the E1 portl Whether a loopback is set for the transmission linkl Whether the parameter settings of ATM VPI/VCI, PWE3 CW, PW, and
tunnel are consistent between the source end and the sink endl Whether the parameter settings of interconnected ports are consistent
– Whether E1 frame format, coding, overhead bytes, and E1 timeslotmode (30/31) are correctly configured
– Whether IMA parameters (including protocol version, clock mode,frame length, and maximum differential delay) are correctlyconfigured
l Check whether the network bandwidth is sufficient for the service traffic.
2 Pay special attention to the following equipment alarms:l POWER_ALMl FAN_FAILl HARD_BADl BD_STATUSl BUS_ERRl NESF_LOSTl TEMP_ALARMl RADIO_RSL_HIGHl RADIO_RSL_LOWl RADIO_TSL_HIGHl RADIO_TSL_LOWl IF_INPWR_ABNl AM_DOWNSHIFTl MW_CFG_MISMATCHPay special attention to the following line alarms:l MW_LIMl MW_LOFl MW_BER_EXCl MW_BER_SDl MW_RDIl MW_FEC_UNCOR
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
![Page 120: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
No. Description
3 Pay special attention to the following alarms:l MPLS_TUNNEL_BDIl MPLS_TUNNEL_Excessl MPLS_TUNNEL_FDIl MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCVl MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCHl MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGEl MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAILl MPLS_TUNNEL_SDl MPLS_TUNNEL_SFl MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN
4 Check the following points:l Whether the UNI-side performance of the faulty service is normall Whether the working mode and tag attribute of the UNI are the same as
those of its interconnected portPay special attention to the following alarms:l ETH_LOSl ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
5 For RMON performance events, see D RMON Event Reference.
6 Troubleshoot the interconnection with the PDH equipment.
Experience and Summary
Learn about the working principle and protocol configuration of Ethernet services carried byPWs before troubleshooting these services.
5.14 Troubleshooting Orderwire FaultsIf orderwire calls cannot get through when services are normal, there is an orderwire fault.
Fault Causesl The phone set is set incorrectly.
l The phone line is connected incorrectly.
l The orderwire is configured incorrectly.
l The orderwire unit is faulty.
l The system control unit is faulty.
l The line unit or radio link is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
![Page 121: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
Fault Locating Methodsl Check whether the phone set is set correctly, whether the phone line is connected correctly,
and whether the orderwire is configured correctly.l Replace the possibly faulty board to locate the fault.
Troubleshooting Procedure
Figure 5-17 Procedure for troubleshooting orderwire faults
Start
Is the phonecorrectly set?
NoModify the phone setting
Check the orderwireconfiguration
Is the configurationcorrect?
No
Yes
Proceed with the next step Is the fault rectified?
End
Yes
No
Is the phone linecorrectly connected?
Yes
Check the phone setting
No
Modify the configuration
Replace the possibly faultyboard
Reconnect the phone line
Yes
3
2
1
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
![Page 122: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
Table 5-25 Description of the procedure for troubleshooting orderwire faults
CommentNo.
Description
1 Check the following points:l Check whether the ring current switch "RING" on the phone set is set to
"ON".l Check whether the dialing mode switch is set to "T", namely, the dual tone
multi-frequency mode.l An orderwire phone set should be in on-hook state when it is not in
communication, and the upper-right red indicator in the front view of theorderwire phone set should be off.If the red indicator is on, it indicates that the phone set is in off-hook state.Press the "TALK" button in the front of phone set to hook it up. In certainoccasions, the maintenance personnel press the "TALK" button is pressedby mistake. As a result, the phone set stay in off-hook state all the timeand the orderwire call from the other NEs cannot get through.
2 Check the following points:l Whether all orderwire phone numbers on a subnet are of the same lengthl Whether all orderwire phone numbers on a subnet are uniquel Whether the overhead bytes of all the NEs on a subnet are the samel Whether the orderwire port is set correctly
3 Replace the boards where the orderwire unit, system control unit, andline unit are located to locate the fault.
Experience and SummaryTo troubleshoot orderwire faults, you must check the orderwire phone periodically.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 5 Troubleshooting
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
![Page 123: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
6 Part Replacement
About This Chapter
Part replacement is a method frequently used to locate faults. The replacement operation variesaccording to the specific part type.
Background Information
Table 6-1 Part replacement description
Part Name Operation Tool
SL1D, SL1DA 6.3 Replacing the SDH OpticalInterface Board
l ESD wrist strapl Screwdriverl U2000l Fiber remover
EM6T, EM6F,EMS6,EM6TA,EM6FA, andEFP8
6.6 Replacing the EthernetInterface Board
CF card 6.8 Replacing the CF Card
CSHN 6.9 Replacing the System Control,Switch and Timing Board
AUX 6.10 Replacing the AuxiliaryBoard
SP3D and SP3S 6.4 Replacing the PDH InterfaceBoard
l ESD wrist strapl Screwdriverl U2000IF1, IFU2,
ISX2, ISU2,and IFX2
6.7 Replacing the IF Board
PIU 6.12 Replacing the Power Board
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
![Page 124: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
Part Name Operation Tool
ML1 and MD1 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board
FAN 6.11 Replacing the Fan Board l ESD wrist strapl U2000
ODU 6.14 Replacing the ODU l Ejector lever (torque wrench)l U2000l Siliconl Waterproof adhesive tape
IF cable 6.15 Replacing the IF Cable l Multimeterl Ejector leverl Electro-technical knifel Filel Installation parts and
accessories of the connectorl IF cablel Waterproof adhesive tape
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
![Page 125: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
6.1 Removing a BoardRemoving a board is a basic operation for replacing a board.
Procedure
Step 1 Insert one end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD connector on the cabinet. Wear the ESD wriststrap.
Figure 6-1 Wear the ESD wrist strap
Step 2 Optional: If cables are connected to the board, make labels for the cables and then remove thecables.
NOTE
Use fiber removers to remove fibers or network cables.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
![Page 126: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
Figure 6-2 Tweezer fiber remover
Step 3 Remove the board.1. Loosen the screws on the panel of the board.
Figure 6-3 Removing a board (1)
2. Hold the left and right ejector levers with hands. Push them outwards to disengage the board
from the backplane.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
![Page 127: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
Figure 6-4 Removing a board (2)
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-5, there is a latch on each ejector lever of the System control Switch&Timingboard. To remove the System control Switch&Timing board, you need to push the latches whenpulling the ejector levers outward.
Figure 6-5 Removing the System control Switch&Timing board
3. Pull out the board gently along the slot guide rail.
Figure 6-6 Removing a board (3)
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
![Page 128: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
CAUTIONRemove the board slowly to prevent the components on the boards from colliding.
Step 4 Put the removed board into the antistatic box or bag.
----End
6.2 Inserting a BoardInserting a board is a basic operation for replacing a board.
Procedure
Step 1 Insert one end of the ESD wrist strap into the ESD connector on the cabinet. Wear the ESD wriststrap.
Figure 6-7 Wear the ESD wrist strap
Step 2 Insert the board.1. Hold the ejector levers on the panel with both hands. Push them outwards so that the angle
between the ejector lever and the panel is about 45 degrees.2. Push the board gently along the slot guide rail until the board cannot slide further.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
![Page 129: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
Figure 6-8 Inserting a board (1)
CAUTIONInsert the board slowly to prevent the components on the boards from colliding.
3. Press the two ejector levers inward with force.
Figure 6-9 Inserting a board (2)
4. Tighten screws on the panel.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
![Page 130: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
Figure 6-10 Inserting a board (3)
Step 3 Optional: If cables are connected to the board, recover the original cable connections accordingto the labels that are made previously.
----End
6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface BoardWhen the SDH optical interface board is replaced, the unprotected services on the board areinterrupted.
Prerequisitesl You must know the impact of board replacement.l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.l The spare SDH optical interface board must be available, and the version and type of the
spare board must be the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You canquery the board manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to bereplaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl ESD wrist strapl Screwdriverl U2000l Fiber remover
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with SNCP, ensure that the services arealready switched to the protection channel.1. Query the SNCP protection group.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
![Page 131: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
2. Perform the forced switching, if the port on the board functions as the current workingchannel, the current protection channel is not on the board, and the state of the currentprotection channel is normal or SD.
Step 3 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with linear MSP, ensure that the servicesare already switched to the protection channel.1. Query the linear MSP group.2. Perform the forced switching, if the port on the board functions as the current working
channel, the current protection channel is not on the board, and the state of the currentprotection channel is normal or SD.
Step 4 Remove the board.
Step 5 Check whether the version and SFP type of the spare board are the same as the version and SFPtype of the board to be replaced.
Step 6 Insert the board.
Step 7 After the board starts to work, check the STAT indicator on the board. The STAT indicatorshould be on and green.
Step 8 Query the current alarms of the board.There should be no new alarms on the board.
Step 9 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed on the board, release the forced switching.
Step 10 Optional: If the linear MSP switching has been performed for the services, release the forcedswitching.
----End
6.4 Replacing the PDH Interface BoardWhen the PDH interface board is replaced, the services on the board are interrupted.
Prerequisitesl You must know the impact of board replacement.l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.l The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must
be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturinginformation to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl ESD wrist strapl Screwdriverl U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
![Page 132: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
Step 2 Remove the board.
Step 3 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version andtype of the board to be replaced.
Step 4 Insert the board.
Step 5 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should beon and green.
Step 6 Query the current alarms of the board.There should be no new alarms on the board.
----End
6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 BoardWhen the Smart E1 board is replaced, the services on the board are interrupted.
Prerequisitesl You must know the impact of board replacement.l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.l The spare board must be available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the
same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You can query the boardmanufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.
Tools, Instruments and Materialsl ESD wrist strapl Screwdriverl U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board to be replaced.
Step 2 Remove the board.
Step 3 Verify that the spare board has the same board version and board type as the board to be replaced.
Step 4 Insert the spare board.
Step 5 After the substitute board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicatoris on and green.
NOTE
Smart E1 boards are hot-swappable. After the spare board is installed, it enters initialization state and starts towork 2 minutes later.
Step 6 Query the current alarms of the substitute board.There is no new alarm on the board.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
![Page 133: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
6.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface BoardWhen the Ethernet interface board is replaced, the unprotected services on the board areinterrupted.
Prerequisitesl You must know the impact of board replacement.l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.l The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must
be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturinginformation to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl ESD wrist strapl Screwdriverl U2000l Fiber remover
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Optional: If the services are configured with MPLS APS, ensure that the services are alreadyswitched to the protection tunnel.1. Querying MPLS APS Status.2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.
Step 3 Optional: If the services are configured with PW APS, ensure that the services are alreadyswitched to the protection PW.1. Querying PW APS Status.2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.
Step 4 Remove the board.
Step 5 Check and ensure that the board version and the model of the SFP module on the spare boardare the same as the board version and the model of the SFP module on the board to be replaced.
Step 6 Insert the board.
NOTE
Ethernet interface boards are hot-swappable. After the substitute board is installed, it enters initialization stateand starts working two minutes later.
If dynamic ARP is disabled on the NE at the opposite end of an MPLS tunnel, you need to change the staticARP table entries of the opposite NE.
Step 7 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should beon and green.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
![Page 134: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
Step 8 Query the current alarms of the board.There should be no new alarms on the board.
Step 9 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed for the services, release the forcedswitching.
----End
6.7 Replacing the IF BoardWhen the IF board is replaced, the unprotected services on the board are interrupted.
Prerequisitesl You must know the impact of board replacement.l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.l The spare board must be available, and the version and type of the spare board must be the
same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You can query the boardmanufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl ESD wrist strapl Screwdriverl U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with SNCP, ensure that the services arealready switched to the protection channel.1. Query the SNCP protection group.2. If the port on the board functions as the current working channel, the current protection
channel is not on the board, perform the forced switching.
Step 3 Optional: If the services on the radio link are configured with 1+1 protection, switch the serviceto the protection IF board.1. Query the IF 1+1 protection group.2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.
Step 4 Optional: If the services on the radio link are configured with N+1 protection, ensure that theservices are already switched to the protection IF board.1. Query the IF N+1 protection group.2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.
Step 5 Optional: If the services are configured with MPLS APS, ensure that the services are alreadyswitched to the protection tunnel.1. Querying MPLS APS Status.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
![Page 135: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.
Step 6 Optional: If the services are configured with PW APS, ensure that the services are alreadyswitched to the protection PW.
1. Querying PW APS Status.
2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.
Step 7 Optional: If the IF board is configured with the XPIC function, see Setting the ODU TransmitterState and mute the ODU at the opposite end.
Step 8 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board to be replaced.
CAUTIONTo turn off the ODU-PWR switch, you need to pull the switch lever outwards slightly and thenset the switch to the "O" position.
Step 9 Remove the board.
Step 10 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version andtype of the board to be replaced.
Step 11 Ensure that the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the spare IF board is turned off.
Step 12 Insert the board.
Step 13 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should beon and green.
Step 14 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board.
CAUTIONTo turn on the ODU-PWR switch, you need to pull the switch lever outwards slightly and thenset the switch to the "I" position.
IF boards are hot-swappable. After the substitute board is installed, it enters initialization stateand starts working two minutes later.
If dynamic ARP is disabled on the NE at the opposite end of an MPLS tunnel, you need to changethe static ARP table entries of the opposite NE.
Step 15 Query the current alarms of the board.There should be no new alarms on the board.
Step 16 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed for the services, release the forcedswitching.
Step 17 Optional: If the forced protection switching has been performed for the radio link, release theforced switching.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
![Page 136: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
Step 18 If the IF board is configured with the XPIC function, see Setting the ODU Transmitter State andunmute the ODU at the opposite end.
----End
6.8 Replacing the CF Cardall the services are interrupted during the replacement of the CF card.
Prerequisitesl You must be aware of the impact of CF card replacement.l You must know the specific position of the CF card to be replaced.l You must be a user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.l You must obtain a spare CF card that has the same capacity as the CF card to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl ESD wrist strapl U2000l Fiber remover
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Optional: If the board is configured with 1+1 protection, ensure that the services are switchedfrom the current working board to the protection board.1. See 8.21 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit, and ensure
that the current working board functions as the protection board.2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the manual switching.
Step 3 Remove the board.
Step 4 Remove the CF card according to the illustration in the following figure.
Step 5 Check the spare CF card.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
![Page 137: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
Step 6 Install the spare CF card according to the illustration in the following figure.
Step 7 Insert the board.
Step 8 After the board starts to work, observe the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator shouldbe on and green.
Step 9 Query the current alarms of the board.There should be no new alarms.
Step 10 Optional: If the manual switching has been performed on the board, release the manualswitching.
----End
6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing BoardAll the services are interrupted during the period of replacing the system control switch andtiming board, if the NE is configured with only one system control switch and timing board.
Prerequisitesl You must be aware of the impact of board replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be replaced.
l The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board mustbe the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturinginformation to learn about the version of the board to be replaced.
Impact on System
If no protection board is available, the replacement of the System Control Switch and Timingboard results in service interruption.
Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl ESD wrist strap
l Screwdriver
l U2000
l Fiber remover
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
![Page 138: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
ContextNOTE
After the NE database is restored successfully, a cold reset is automatically performed on the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Replace the System control Switch&Timing board.
If... Then...
One System control Switch and Timingboard is configured
1. Notify the onsite maintenance personnel toremove the board.
2. Check and ensure that the version and type ofthe spare board (including the patch version)are correct.NOTE
If the spare board and the board to be replaced havedifferent patch versions, contact Huaweiengineers for loading correct patches.
3. Remove the CF card from the original boardand then install the CF card to the spare board.For details about how to install the CF card,see 6.8 Replacing the CF Card.
4. Insert the spare board into the chassis.5. Press and hold the CF RCV button on the
board for 8 seconds so that the boardautomatically restores the NE databases,system parameters, software packages, andNE logs from the CF card.NOTEl In the process of restoring the NE database, the
PROG indicator on the board blinks green forabout 20 minutes.
l If the database restoration is successful, theNE resets automatically. After the NE resetssuccessfully, the STAT and PROG indicatoris on and green.
l If the database restoration fails, the NE doesnot reset, and the PROG is red. In this case,contact Huawei technical support engineersfor rectifying the fault.
NOTEAfter the NE starts up normally, the STAT and PROGindicator on the board is green.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
![Page 139: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
If... Then...
Two System control Switch and Timingboards are configured
1. Before replacing the main system controlboard, switch the main system control boardto the protection board. For details, see 8.21Switching the System Control Unit and theCross-Connect Unit.NOTE
Replacing the standby system control board doesnot need to switch the system control board to theprotection board.
2. Remove the board to be replaced.3. Check whether the version and type of the
spare board are the same as the version andtype of the board to be replaced.
4. Insert the spare board.5. Wait for about 10 minutes to complete the
backup of the data on the main and standbysystem control units.
NOTEAfter the NE starts up normally, the STAT and PROGindicator on the board is green.
Step 3 Query the current alarms of the board. There should be no new alarms.
----End
6.10 Replacing the Auxiliary BoardWhen the auxiliary board is replaced, the services on the auxiliary board are interrupted.
Prerequisitesl You must know the impact of board replacement.l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.l The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must
be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturinginformation to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strapl Screwdriverl U2000l Fiber remover
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
![Page 140: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
Step 2 Remove the board.
Step 3 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version andtype of the board to be replaced.
Step 4 Insert the spare board.
Step 5 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should beon and green.
Step 6 Query the current alarms of the board.There should be no new alarms on the auxiliary board.
----End
6.11 Replacing the Fan BoardThe IDU cannot perform air cooling in the process of replacing the fan board. Therefore, youneed to replace the fan board quickly.
Prerequisitesl You must be aware of the impact of board replacement.l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.l The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must
be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturinginformation to learn about the version of the board to be replaced.
l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l ESD wrist strapl U2000
Precautions
WARNINGDo not touch the blades until the fan has stopped rotating.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Move the cables away from the front panel of the fan board assembly.
Step 3 Loosen captive screws.
Step 4 Remove the fan board.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
![Page 141: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
Step 5 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version andtype of the board to be replaced.
Step 6 Insert the standby fan board.
Step 7 Tighten captive screws.
Step 8 After the board starts to work, observe the indicators on the board. The FAN indicator shouldbe on and green.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
![Page 142: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
Step 9 Query the current alarms of the board.There should be no new alarms.
----End
6.12 Replacing the Power BoardIf another power board works normally during the replacement period, the services at the IDUare not affected.
Prerequisitesl You must be aware of the impact of board replacement.l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.l The spare board must be made available, and the version and type of the spare board must
be the same as those of the board to be replaced. You can query the board manufacturinginformation to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl ESD wrist strapl Screwdriverl U2000
Precautions
WARNINGBefore replacing the board, you must turn off the power switch of the PDU. Do not connect theinterface to the power plug. After inserting the PIU properly, insert the power plug, and thenturn on the power switch of the PDU.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Notify the onsite maintenance personnel to turn off the output power switch on the power supplyequipment.
Step 3 Remove the cables connected to the board.
Step 4 Remove the power board gently and horizontally along the guide rail.
Step 5 Check and ensure that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version andtype of the board to be replaced.
Step 6 Insert the spare board steadily along the guide rail.
Step 7 Reconnect the cables between the board and the power supply equipment.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
![Page 143: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
Step 8 Notify the onsite maintenance personnel to turn on the output power switch on the equipment.
Step 9 After the board starts to work, observe the indicators on the board. The PWR indicator shouldbe on and green.
----End
6.13 Replacing the SFPWhen the small form pluggable (SFP) is replaced, the unprotected services on the optical/electrical port are interrupted.
Prerequisitesl You must know the impact of SFP replacement.l You must know the specific position of the SFP to be replaced.l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the SFP to be replaced.l The spare SFP must be available, and the version and type of the spare SFP must be the
same as the version and type of the SFP to be replaced. You can query the boardmanufacturing information to obtain the version of the SFP to be replaced.
Tools, Equipment and Materialsl ESD wrist strapl Screwdriverl U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Optional: If SNCP is configured for services at the optical interface, ensure that the servicesare already switched to the protection channel.1. Query the status of the SNCP group.2. If the port on the local board functions as the working channel, the protection channel does
not involve the local board, and the protection channel is in the normal or SD state, performforced switching.
Step 3 Optional: If linear MSP is configured for services at the optical interface, ensure that the servicesare already switched to the protection channel.1. Query the status of the linear MSP group.2. If the port on the local board functions as the working channel, the protection channel does
not involve the local board, and the protection channel is in the normal or SD state, performforced switching.
Step 4 Record the cable connections of the SFP, and then disconnect cables.
Step 5 Check the types of the spare SFP and the SFP to be replaced, and remove the SFP module.
NOTE
When removing the STM–1 electrical module, press the blcak button first.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
![Page 144: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
2
1
Press the unclocking button.
Remove the STM-1 electical module.
1
2
Step 6 Insert the standby SFP module and reconnect cables based on the record.
Step 7 Query the current alarms of the board.There should be no new alarms on the board.
Step 8 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed on the board, release the forced switching.
Step 9 Optional: If the linear MSP switching has been performed for the services, release the forcedswitching.
----End
6.14 Replacing the ODUWhen the ODU is replaced, the unprotected services on the ODU are interrupted.
Prerequisitesl You must know the impact of ODU replacement.l You must know the specific positions of the ODU to be replaced and the IF board connected
to the ODU.l The spare ODU must be at hand, whose type must be the same as the type of the ODU to
be replaced.
Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Ejector lever (torque spanner)l U2000l Siliconl Waterproof adhesive tape
Precautions
Before you replace an ODU that is installed on the coupler, power off the ODU to be replaced,but do not power off or mute the other ODU. Otherwise, the services may be affected. Theinterface of the coupler ejects little RF radiation, thus meeting the safety standards for microwaveradiation.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
![Page 145: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
Do not damage the coating when you replace an ODU. In the case of any coating damage, repairthe coating timely.
ProcedureStep 1 Query the current alarms on the ODU and then record the results.
Step 2 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board.
Step 3 Remove the IF cable and the PGND cable from the ODU.
Step 4 Remove the ODU.
Option Description
If... Then...
You need to remove the RTN 600 ODUwith a waveguide interface
Loosen the four latches of the ODU anddisconnect the ODU from the antenna, thehybrid coupler, or ODU adapter.
You need to remove the RTN 600 ODUwith a coaxial interface
Remove the ODU from the post.
You need to remove the RTN XMC ODU Loosen the captive screws on the ODU anddisconnect the ODU from the antenna, thehybrid coupler, or ODU adapter.
Step 5 Ensure the type of the spare ODU is the same as the type of the ODU to be replaced.
Step 6 Install the ODU.
Option Description
If... Then...
You need to install a new RTN 600 ODUwith a waveguide interface
See the RTN 600 ODU Quick InstallationGuide.
You need to install a new RTN 600 ODUwith a coaxial interface
See the RTN 600 ODU Quick InstallationGuide.
You need to install a new RTN XMC ODU See the RTN XMC ODU Installation Guide.
Step 7 Connect the PGND cable and the IF cable to the ODU.
Step 8 Waterproof the IF interface on the ODU.
Step 9 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board.
Step 10 After the ODU starts to work, check the ODU indicator and LINK indicator on the IF board.The ODU indicator and LINK indicator should be on and green.
Step 11 Query the current alarms of the ODU. There should be no new alarms on the ODU.
----End
6.15 Replacing the IF CableWhen the IF cable is replaced, the unprotected services on the IF cable are interrupted.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
![Page 146: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
Prerequisitesl You must know the impact of IF cable replacement.l You must know the specific positions of the IF cable to be replaced and the IF board
connected to the IF jumper.l In the case of the RG-8U IF cable or the 1/2-inch IF cable, an IF jumper is required to
connect the IF cable to the IDU and both ends of the IF cable should be terminated withtype-N connectors. In the case of the 5D IF cable, the IF cable is connected directly to theIDU and the cable end connecting to the IDU should be terminated with the TNC connectorand the cable end connecting to the ODU should be terminated with the type-N connector.
Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Multimeterl Ejector leverl Electro-technical knifel Filel Installation parts and accessories of the connectorl IF cablel Waterproof adhesive tape
Procedure
Step 1 Query and record the current alarm of the IDU.
Step 2 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board.
Step 3 Disconnect the IF cable from the IF jumper and from the ODU.
Step 4 Use a multimeter to test the connectivity of the IF cable to determine whether you need to makenew connectors for the IF cable or replace the IF cable with a new one.
If... Then...
You need to make new connectors for theIF cable
See the Installation Reference and make newconnectors for the IF cable.
You need to replace the IF cable with a newone
Replace the IF cable with a new one.
Step 5 Connect the IF cable to the IF jumper and to the ODU.
Step 6 Waterproof the connectors at the two ends of the IF cable with the waterproof adhesive tape.
Step 7 Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board.
Step 8 After the ODU starts to work, check the ODU and LINK indicators on the IF board.The ODU indicator and LINK indicator should be on and green.
Step 9 Query the current alarms of the IDU.There should be no new alarms on the IDU.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 6 Part Replacement
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
![Page 147: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
7 Database Backup and Restoration
About This Chapter
The OptiX RTN 980 supports database backup and restoration through the NMS.
7.1 NE DatabaseAn NE database stores the communication data, security data, alarm data, performance data, andconfiguration data of an NE in a certain structure to facilitate the relevant query and modification,hence ensuring that the data can be restored after the NE is reset.
7.2 Backing Up the Database ManuallyThe NE configuration data is stored in the database of an NE. To prevent the database frombeing damaged due to certain risky operations such as replacing a faulty system control, cross-connect, and timing board or upgrading the software, you need to manually back up the databaseon a regular basis and before performing any risk operation.
7.3 Setting the Database Backup PolicyYou can set the policy of backing up a database to realize the function of periodically backingup the database.
7.4 Restoring the DatabaseIf the database is damaged, you can restore the NE database by using the database files that aresaved previously.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
![Page 148: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
7.1 NE DatabaseAn NE database stores the communication data, security data, alarm data, performance data, andconfiguration data of an NE in a certain structure to facilitate the relevant query and modification,hence ensuring that the data can be restored after the NE is reset.
An NE database includes the following types:
l Memory database (MDB)The data in the MDB varies according to the configuration and is lost when the systemcontrol unit is reset or when the NE is powered off.
l Dynamic random database (DRDB)The DRDB automatically stores the data that is checked successfully. The DRDB is residentin the reserved memory. Hence, the data in the DRDB is not lost when a warm reset isperformed on the system control unit. The data, however, is lost when a cold reset isperformed on the system control unit or when the NE is powered off.
l Flash database (FDB)The FDB includes FDB0 and FDB1. The FDB is resident in the flash memory on the board.Hence, the data in the FDB is permanently stored.
After being delivered to the system control unit, the NE configuration data is stored in the MDB.After checking the NE configuration data successfully, the system control unit automaticallycopies the data from the MDB to the DRDB and delivers the board configuration data generatedafter successful check to the relevant board.
The NE backs up the DRDB database into the FDB0 and FDB1 databases of the flash memoryat an interval of 30 minutes.
After the NE is restarted because of power-off, the system control unit checks whether theconfiguration data in the DRDB is available. If yes, the system control unit restores the data. Ifthe configuration data in the DRDB is damaged, the system control unit restores the data fromFDB0 or FDB1.
On the CF card, NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask),software packages, and NE logs are stored. After the CRV button on the system control,switching and timing board is pressed and held for 8 seconds, the data stored on the CF card isloaded to the board. To synchronize the data on the CF card with the NE databases, systemparameters, and NE logs on the system control, switching and timing board, the regular backupfunction needs to be enabled. By default, the data is backed up every 24 hours.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are updated with those on the system control, switching and timing boardduring package diffusion. Therefore, no automatic or manual operation is performed to synchronize the softwarepackages.
The system control, switching and timing board and the CF card must have same software packages. If theyhave different software packages, the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm is reported.
7.2 Backing Up the Database ManuallyThe NE configuration data is stored in the database of an NE. To prevent the database frombeing damaged due to certain risky operations such as replacing a faulty system control, cross-
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
![Page 149: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
connect, and timing board or upgrading the software, you need to manually back up the databaseon a regular basis and before performing any risk operation.
Prerequisitesl You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.l You must log in to the NE.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In NE View, click Find.
Step 3 In the Find NE dialog box, set the search conditions and search for the NE that requires databasebackup.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Click Backup.
NOTE
Press and hold the Ctrl button on the keyboard, you can select multiple NEs to back up the data at one time.
Step 6 Set the data backup path to NMS Server or NMS Client according to the requirements.
Step 7 Click Start to start backing up the NE data. In NE View, Operation Status indicates the progressof backing up the data. After the data backup is successful, Operation Status displays a message,indicating that the operation is successful.
----End
7.3 Setting the Database Backup PolicyYou can set the policy of backing up a database to realize the function of periodically backingup the database.
7.3.1 Setting the User-Defined Backup PolicyThrough this task, you can set the backup policy for a specific NE.
Prerequisitesl You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.l You must log in to the NE.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
![Page 150: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
Background InformationEach NE has a default data backup policy.
l Database packages are backed up once at 2:00.l The default backup policy is disabled by default.l A maximum of five database packages can be backed up at a time.l Data changes do not trigger any backup operations.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Managementfrom the Main Menu.Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type.The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed.
Step 3 Click New Policy.
Step 4 Optional: Click to import the information of the NEs.
Step 5 Optional: Click to export the information of the NEs.The information of the selected NEs is stored in the specified location.
Step 6 In NE Table, select one or more NEs.
Step 7 Click Next.Then, the Setting Policy dialog box is displayed.
Step 8 Set Policy Name, Period Backup Policy, and Period Save Policy.
NOTE
l If The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Enable, the NMS performs the backup operation withinthe specified period, day, and time.
l If The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Disable, the backup policy is still in the Disable statealthough the policy period reaches the specified period, day, and time.
Step 9 Click Advanced Settings, and set Backup Type, Max Backup Num, and ConfigurationChange Backup for a certain type of NEs.
Step 10 Click OK.
Step 11 Click OK.
----End
7.3.2 Enable the Backup Policy of the DeviceThrough this task, you can set the backup policy of a device to the running state.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
![Page 151: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Managementfrom the Main Menu.Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type.The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed.
Step 3 Right click the selected NE, Click Enable Backup Policy.
----End
7.3.3 Disable the Backup Policy of the DeviceThrough this task, you can set the backup policy of a device to the suspended state.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Backup Policy Managementfrom the Main Menu.Then, the NE Backup Policy Management dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In Auto Backup Policy window, set NE type.The version, name, and IP address of the selected NE are displayed.
Step 3 Right click the selected NE, Click Disable Backup Policy.
----End
7.4 Restoring the DatabaseIf the database is damaged, you can restore the NE database by using the database files that aresaved previously.
Prerequisitesl You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.l The data to be restored must be backed up.l You must log in to the NE.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
![Page 152: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu.The NE Data Backup/Restoration window is displayed.
Step 2 In NE View, click Find.Then, the Find NE dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 In the Find NE dialog box, set the search conditions to search for the NEs that need to restoredatabases.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Select the NE whose data needs to be recovered, and click Recover.
NOTE
You can select multiple NEs to recover the data at one time.
Then, the Recover dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Select Browse in File Name.Then, the Select File dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Select files from NMS Server or NMS Client, and then choose the files to be recovered. ClickOK.
Step 8 In the Recover dialog box, click Start.
Step 9 Click Yes in the prompt dialog box.The system starts recovering the selected data files on the specified NE.
In the NE list of NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress of recovering the data.
After the data is recovered, Operation Status displays a message, indicating that the operationis successful.
Step 10 In NE View, right-click the NE and choose Active Database from the shortcut menu.The Active Database dialog box is displayed.
Step 11 Click Start to start activating the database.
NOTE
If the NE transmits data services, select Deliver to Board.
Services are interrupted during the activation of databases.
In NE View, Operation Status indicates the progress of activating the database. After thedatabase is activated, Operation Status indicates that the operation is successful.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 7 Database Backup and Restoration
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
![Page 153: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
8 Supporting Task
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the common maintenance operations.
8.1 Hardware LoopbackHardware loopback refers to the loopback operation performed by changing the physicalconnection.
8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and AdaptersThe optical connectors are easily contaminated in the maintenance process. The minute dustparticles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. Inthis case, the system performance deteriorates. Hence, the fiber connectors or adapters that areterminated need to be cleaned in time.
8.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and Performance EventsThe U2000 is used to browse alarms, abnormal events, and performance events at the networklayer.
8.4 Using the RMONRemote monitoring (RMON) is mainly used to monitor the data traffic on a network segmentor on the entire network. Currently, it is one of the widely used network management standards.
8.5 Querying a ReportYou can obtain the version, manufacture, and microwave link information of all the boards byquerying the corresponding report.
8.6 Software LoopbackSoftware loopback refers to the loopback operation that is implemented by using the NMS.During software loopback, you need not visit the engineering site. Hence, software loopback isused more widely than hardware loopback.
8.7 ResetReset is an important method of troubleshooting software faults. Reset is classified into coldreset, warm reset.
8.8 PRBS TestThe pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test is an important method of network maintenanceand self-check.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
![Page 154: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
8.9 Querying the License CapacityYou can check whether the loaded license file meets the requirements by querying the licensecapacity.
8.10 Setting the On/Off State of the LaserWhen performing operations such as testing a fiber cut, you can set the on/off state of the laserrather than removing and re-inserting the optical fiber on site.
8.11 Setting the ALS FunctionThe SDH optical interface board supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. Thisfunction enables the board to turn off a laser when the board does not transmit services, theoptical fiber is faulty, or the received optical signals are lost.
8.12 Setting the Automatic Release FunctionTo protect the communication between the NMS and NE against improper operations, an NEsupports the automatic release of the ODU muting, software loopback, and other operations thatrequire you to exercise caution. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. You canset whether to enable the automatic release function and the automatic release time through theNMS.
8.13 Querying Power Consumption of BoardsThis section describes how to query power consumption of the ODU and each board.
8.14 Querying the Impedance of an E1 ChannelThe impedance of an E1 channel is 75 ohms or 120 ohms.
8.15 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port MirroringTo monitor and analyze the Ethernet packets at a port, you can enable the port mirroring functionso that the received or transmitted packets on the port are duplicated to another Ethernet port towhich the Ethernet tester is connected. Then, you can monitor and analyze the packets. Thisfunction is supported by the EFP8/EMS6 board of the OptiX RTN 980.
8.16 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet PortThrough the operation, you can learn about the attributes of an Ethernet port, such as rate.
8.17 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet PortsTo query the traffic, physical bandwidth, or bandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within acertain period, you need to enable the monitoring for the object before that period starts. TheFE/GE ports and Integrated IP radio ports on the packet plane support this operation.
8.18 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of Ethernet PortsThis section describes how to query the change curve of the traffic, physical bandwidth, orbandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within a certain period. The FE/GE ports and IntegratedIP radio ports on the packet plane support this operation.
8.19 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on an Ethernet PortThe FLOW_OVER alarm is reported when the traffic flow received on an Ethernet port exceedsthe specified threshold. Only the FE port on the EFP8 board supports this operation.
8.20 Using the Ethernet Test FramesBy using the Ethernet test frames, you can check the connectivity of VCTRUNKs. Only theEFP8 board supports this operation.
8.21 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect UnitWhen the OptiX RTN 980 is configured with two system control, cross-connect, and timingboards, you can manually switch the system control unit and the cross-connect unit as required.
8.22 End-to-End Management on Fibers, Tunnels, and PWE3 Services
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
![Page 155: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
This section describes the common maintenance operations for end-to-end management onfibers, MPLS tunnels, and PWE3 services.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
![Page 156: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
8.1 Hardware LoopbackHardware loopback refers to the loopback operation performed by changing the physicalconnection.
Background InformationHardware loopback is classified into optical cable loopback, PDH cable loopback, and Ethernetelectrical port loopback.l Optical cable loopback indicates that the receive and transmit optical fibers are connected
through a fiber jumper on the ODF. In certain occasions, an optical attenuator is addedbased on the actual situation, to prevent the optical SFP from being damaged by theexcessive receive optical power.
l PDH cable loopback indicates that the receive and transmit PDH cables are connectedthrough a short-circuiting cable or connector on the DDF.
l Ethernet electrical port loopback indicates that the receive and transmit service signals onone Ethernet port are looped back through a special loopback Ethernet cable.
8.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors and AdaptersThe optical connectors are easily contaminated in the maintenance process. The minute dustparticles that can be seen only in the microscope can also affect the quality of optical signals. Inthis case, the system performance deteriorates. Hence, the fiber connectors or adapters that areterminated need to be cleaned in time.
8.2.1 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Cartridge CleanersWhen there are special cartridge cleaners (such as the CLETOP cassette cleaner), use them forcleaning the fiber connectors.
Prerequisitesl Disconnect both ends of the fiber. Ensure that there is no laser light on the fiber connectors.l Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber connectors are
contaminated.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsCartridge cleaner
Procedure
Step 1 Press down and hold the lever. Then, the shutter slides back and exposes a new cleaning area.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
![Page 157: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
Figure 8-1 Using the CLETOP cassette cleaner
Step 2 Position the fiber tip slightly against the cleaning area and drag the fiber tip slightly in thedownward direction.
Figure 8-2 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on one cleaning area
Step 3 Repeat the same in the other cleaning area in the same direction as Step 2.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
![Page 158: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
Figure 8-3 Dragging the fiber tip slightly on the other cleaning area
Step 4 Release the lever to close the cleaning area.
----End
8.2.2 Cleaning Fiber Connectors by Using Lens TissueWhen there is no cartridge cleaners, use the lens tissue for cleaning fiber connectors.
Prerequisitesl Disconnect both ends of the fiber. ensure that there is no laser light on the fiber connectors.
l Inspect the fiber connector with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber connectors arecontaminated.
Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Clean solvent
l Non-woven lens tissue
l Special compressed gas
NOTE
l The isoamylol is preferred as the clean solvent, and the propyl can also be used as the clean solvent.Do not use alcohol or formalin.
l The fiber cleaning tissue or lint-free wipes can substitute the non-woven lens tissue.
l The special cleaning roll can substitute the special compressed gas.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
![Page 159: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the lens tissue.
Step 2 Drag the fiber tip slightly on the lens tissue.
Figure 8-4 Cleaning the fiber with the lens tissue
Step 3 Repeat Step 2 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been used.
Step 4 Use the compressed gas to blow the fiber tip.When using compressed gas, note the following points:l First spray it into the air because the initial spray of condensation may contain certain
sediment.l Ensure that the injector nozzle is as close as possible to (but does not touch) the connector
surface.
----End
8.2.3 Cleaning Fiber Adapters by Using Optical Cleaning SticksThe fiber adapters need to be cleaned with optical cleaning sticks. This section describes themethod of cleaning fiber adapters on the optical interface board. The same method can be usedto clean fiber adapters on the optical attenuators and flanges.
Prerequisitesl Before you clean the fiber adapter, remove the optical fiber and shut down the laser. For
details about how to shut down a laser, see 8.10 Setting the On/Off State of the Laser.l Inspect the fiber adapter with a fiber microscope to ensure that the fiber adapter is
contaminated.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
![Page 160: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Optical cleaning sticksl Clean solventl Special compressed gas
NOTE
l In the case of the SC and FC optical interface, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 2.5 mm. In thecase of the LC optical interface, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 1.25 mm.
l The medical cotton or long fiber cotton can substitute the optical cleaning stick.
l The isoamylol is preferred as the clean solvent, and the propyl can also be used as the clean solvent.Do not use alcohol or formalin.
l The special cleaning roll can substitute the special compressed gas.
Procedure
Step 1 Apply a small amount of cleaning solvent on the optical cleaning stick.
Step 2 Touch the adapter gently with the optical cleaning stick and turn the stick clockwise four to fivetimes.Ensure that there is direct contact between the stick tip and fiber tip so that the solvent can cleanthe adapter tip.
Step 3 Use the compressed gas to blow the fiber adapter.When using compressed gas, note the following points:l First spray the compressed gas into the air because the initial spray of condensation gas may
contain some sediment.l Ensure that the injector nozzle is as close as possible to (but does not touch) the inner surface
of the connector.
----End
8.3 Browsing Alarms, Abnormal Events, and PerformanceEvents
The U2000 is used to browse alarms, abnormal events, and performance events at the networklayer.
8.3.1 Checking the NE StatusYou can learn about the basic information such as whether the NE fails to communicate withthe NMS and whether any alarms are reported by checking the NE status.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
![Page 161: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
PrecautionsNOTE
By default, the color of the NE icon on the NMS indicates the NE status.
ProcedureStep 1 In Main Topology, select the required NE.
Step 2 In Main Topology, click .
Step 3 Click the Attribute tab.
Step 4 View the NE status and alarm status.TIP
You can also determine the NE status based on the comparison between the NE icon and the descriptionat the Legend tab.
----End
8.3.2 Checking the Board StatusYou can learn about the board status in a visual manner by checking the slot diagram.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
ProcedureStep 1 On the Main Topology, double-click the desired NE. The NE Panel is displayed. The NE is in
Running Status.
Step 2 Click the icon. The legend description is displayed.
Step 3 Check the running status of the boards based on the legend description. If a board is runningnormally, the board icon is green.
----End
8.3.3 Browsing Current AlarmsYou can find the faults that occur on the equipment by browsing current alarms.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
![Page 162: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Optional: In the Filter dialog box, click the Basic Settings tab.1. In Severity, select the alarm severity to be queried.2. In Status, select the alarm status to be queried.3. In Type, select the alarm type.4. In Last Occurrence Time Segment, specify the alarm generation time.5. In Clearance Time Segment, specify the alarm clearance time.
Step 3 In the Filter dialog box, click the Alarm Source tab.
Step 4 Select the object to be queried.
Option Description
Browse all alarms on the NE. Select All Objects.
Browse certain alarms on the NE. 1. Select Custom.2. Choose Add > Object below NE.3. Select the required NE in the left pane of Object
below NE, and click .4. Click OK.
Alarm Source displays Selected Alarm Source.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Browse the displayed alarms.
Step 7 Select the newly generated alarms, record the details of the alarms, and click Acknowledge.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 8 Click Yes.
Step 9 Notify the troubleshooting personnel to clear the alarms in time.For the details, see A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures.
----End
Related InformationA current alarm refers to an alarm that is not cleared.
You can browse the network-wide alarms based on the alarm severity by clicking the alarmindicators in the upper right corner.
l You can click (red) to browse the network-wide critical alarms.
l You can click (orange) to browse the network-wide major alarms.
l You can click (yellow) to browse the network-wide minor alarms.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
![Page 163: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
l You can click (light-blue) to browse the network-wide warning alarms.
NOTE
By default, the number shown by each indicator indicates the number of current network-wide alarms, whichare not cleared, of the specific severity.
8.3.4 Browsing Abnormal EventsYou can find the faults that occur on the equipment in a specific time by browsing abnormalevents. An abnormal event refers to an exception that occurs on the system at a particular timerather than an exception that persists for a certain time of period.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse Event Logs from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Filter dialog box, click the Event Source tab.
Step 3 Select the object to be queried.
Option Description
Browse all performance events on the NE. Select All Objects.
Browse certain performance events on theNE.
1. Select Custom.2. Choose Add > Object below NE.3. Select the required NE in the left pane of
Object below NE, and click .4. Click OK.
Event Source displays Selected EventSource.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Browse the abnormal events.
For details on how to handle an abnormal event, see B.2 Abnormal Performance Events andHandling Procedures.
----End
Related InformationBeing different from an alarm that has both the occurrence time and the clearance time, anabnormal event has only the occurrence time.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
![Page 164: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance EventsYou can know the running status of the equipment by browsing current SDH/PDH performanceevents. The counter of current performance events measures all the performance events that arisebetween the start time of the monitoring period and the current time.
Prerequisitesl The performance monitoring function must be enabled. For details about how to enable the
performance monitoring function, see 8.3.10 Configuring the Performance MonitoringStatus of NEs.
l You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
ProcedureStep 1 Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the Main Menu, and then click the
Current Performance Data tab.
Step 2 Select one or more NEs from the left pane, and click .
Step 3 Select All in Monitored Object Filter Condition.
Step 4 Select 15-Minute in the Monitor Period field.
Step 5 Click the Count tab, and then select Display Continuous Severely Errored Seconds.
Step 6 Click Query to browse the current performance events.In normal cases, no bit error performance events should be displayed, and the number of pointerjustification events should be less than six per day.
Step 7 Click the Measure tab, click Select All.In the Measure tag page, the maximum and minimum values of the performance events aredisplayed with the current value.
Step 8 Click Query to browse the displayed performance events.In normal cases, compared with the history records, the gauge indicators, such as the boardtemperature, do not change drastically.
Step 9 Re-define the time span by setting Monitor Period to 24-Hour.
Step 10 Repeat Step 5 through Step 8 to query the current performance events in a period of 24 hours.
----End
8.3.6 Browsing History AlarmsYou can know the faults that occur on the equipment in a past period of time by browsing historyalarms. A history alarm refers to an alarm that is already cleared.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
![Page 165: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse History Alarm from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Optional: In the Filter dialog box, click the Basic Settings tab.1. In Severity, select the alarm severity to be queried.2. In Type, select the alarm type.3. In Occurrence Time Segment, specify the alarm generation time.4. In Clearance Time Segment, specify the alarm clearance time.
The time span starts from the time when the last history alarm browsing operation wasperformed to the current time.
Step 3 In the Filter dialog box, click the Alarm Source tab.
Step 4 Select the object to be queried.
Option Description
Browse all alarms on the NE. Select All Objects.
Browse certain alarms on the NE. 1. Select Custom.2. Choose Add > Object below NE.3. Select the required NE in the left pane of Object
below NE, and click .4. Click OK.
Alarm Source displays Selected Alarm Source.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Browse the displayed history alarms.
----End
8.3.7 Browsing History Performance EventsYou can know the faults that occur on the equipment in a past period of time by browsing historyperformance events.
Prerequisitesl The performance monitoring function must be enabled. For details about how to enable the
performance monitoring function, see 8.3.10 Configuring the Performance MonitoringStatus of NEs.
l You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
![Page 166: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the main menu, and then click theHistory Performance Data tab.
Step 2 Select one or more NEs from the left pane, and click .
Step 3 Set the parameters, such as Monitored Object Filter Condition, Monitor Period, DataSource.
Step 4 Click the Gauge tab, and set Performance Event Type.
Step 5 Click the Count tab, and set Performance Event Type.
Step 6 Click Query.
----End
8.3.8 Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing RecordsYou can learn about the threshold-crossing information of the performance events of an NE bybrowsing the performance event threshold-crossing records.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 Browse the performance event threshold-crossing records that are displayed.
Step 2 Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the Main Menu.
Step 3 Click the Performance Threshold-Crossing Record tab.
Step 4 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Click .
Step 5 Set the parameters such as Monitored Object Filter Condition, Monitor Period, andPerformance Event Type.
Step 6 Click Query.
----End
8.3.9 Browsing UAT EventsLearn about the severe abnormalities on the transmission line by browsing UAT events.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
![Page 167: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
Context
UAT refers to a period of 10 consecutive seconds during which the bit error ratio per second ofthe digital signal in either of the transmission directions of a transmission system is inferior to10-3. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of the unavailable time.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Performance > UAT Event from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set Monitored Object Filter Condition, From, To, and Data Source.
Step 4 Set Function Block Type and Display Options.
Step 5 Click Query.
Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.3.10 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEsBy performing this operation task, you can manually enable or disable performance monitoringfor NEs, or set the performance monitoring period.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Performance > NEPerformance Monitoring Time from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Configure the performance monitoring parameters of the NEs.
1. Select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.
2. Select Enabled or Disabled in Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring.
3. Set the start time and end time of the performance monitoring of NEs.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
![Page 168: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
NOTE
l Generally, both Set 15-Minute Monitoring and Set 24-Hour Monitoring are enabled.l You can specify the start time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enabled
in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area.l You can specify the end time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enabled
and then selecting To in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area.
4. Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box.
----End
8.3.11 Setting Severity and Auto Reporting Status of AlarmsThis section describes how to set the severity and auto reporting status of specific alarms.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and MaterialsU2000
ProcedureStep 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired object.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Severity and Auto Reporting from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select any items in the column Event and set Severity and Auto Reporting Status for them.
Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.3.12 Suppressing Alarms for Monitored ObjectsThis section describes how to suppress specific alarms for a specific monitored object.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
![Page 169: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Suppression from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set Monitored Object and click Query.
Step 4 Set Status in Alarm Suppression.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.3.13 Suppressing Alarms for NEsThis section describes how to suppress certain alarms for NEs.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > Alarm Suppression from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set Status in Alarm Suppression.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.3.14 Reversing Alarms for Service PortsThis section describes how to reverse alarms for service ports.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
![Page 170: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > NE Alarm Attribute from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set Alarm Reversion to Enable (Manually Restore).
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 6 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 7 Choose Alarm > Alarm Reversion from the Function Tree.
Step 8 Set Reversion Status for the required port.
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.3.15 Setting Trigger Conditions of AIS InsertionThis section describes how to set the trigger conditions of AIS insertion for specific monitoredobjects.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > AIS Insertion from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set the trigger conditions of AIS insertion. If you select Enabled under an alarm, the AIS signalis inserted when this alarm occurs; otherwise, the AIS signal is not inserted when this alarmoccurs.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
![Page 171: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
8.3.16 Setting Trigger Conditions of UNEQ InsertionThis section describes how to set the trigger conditions of UNEQ insertion for service ports.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > UNEQ Insertion Switch from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set the trigger conditions of UNEQ insertion. If you select Enabled under an alarm, the UNEQsignal (all 0s) is inserted when this alarm occurs; otherwise, the UNEQ signal is not insertedwhen this alarm occurs.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.3.17 Setting Bit Error Thresholds for Service PortsThis section describes how to set bit error thresholds for service ports.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Alarm > QoS Alarm > Bit Error Alarm Threshold from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set bit error thresholds.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
![Page 172: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
8.3.18 Setting Monitoring and Auto-Report Status of PerformanceEvents
This section describes how to set monitoring and auto-report status of specific performanceevents for monitored objects.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Performance > Performance Monitor Status from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set the following parameters: Monitor Status, 15-Minute Auto-Report, and 24-Hour Auto-Report.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.3.19 Setting Performance ThresholdsThis section describes how to set the thresholds of specific performance events for monitoredobjects.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Performance > Performance Threshold from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set Threshold Value.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
![Page 173: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
8.3.20 Resetting Performance RegistersThis section describes how to reset performance registers. After performance registers are reset,their counts are cleared and they immediately start a new counting period.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board.
Step 2 Choose Performance > Reset Board Performance Register from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set Monitored Object and register types.
Step 4 Click Reset.
Step 5 In the Hint dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.4 Using the RMONRemote monitoring (RMON) is mainly used to monitor the data traffic on a network segmentor on the entire network. Currently, it is one of the widely used network management standards.
8.4.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of aPort
After you configure an RMON statistics group for a port, you can browse the real-time statisticalperformance data of the port.
Prerequisitesl You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.l The corresponding board must be added in the NE Panel.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects accordingto the following tables.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
![Page 174: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
Table 8-1 Packet plane
PerformanceObject
BrowseObject
Navigation Path
Basicperformance
Ethernetporta
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NEExplorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from theFunction Tree.NOTE
a: Ethernet ports on the packet plane include FE/GE ports, Integrated IPradio ports, port 10 on the EFP8 board, and port 8 on the EMS6 board.
Extendedperformance
MPLStunnelperformance
MPLStunnel
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the ObjectTree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management >Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Static Tunnel tab.3. Select one or more tunnels, right-click the tunnel(s), and
choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
L2 VPN-PWperformance
ETHPWE3service
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LineService from the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services, right-click the service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
L2 VPNperformance
UNI-UNIE-Lineservice
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LineService from the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services, right-click theservice(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcutmenu.
CES-PWperformance
CESservice
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree andchoose Configuration > CES Service Management from theFunction Tree.
2. Select one or more CES services, right-click the service(s), andchoose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.CES
performance
ATM/IMA(accessside)performance
Smart E1port
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NEExplorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from theFunction Tree.
ATM-PWperformance
ATMPWE3service
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree andchoose Configuration > ATM Service Management fromthe Function Tree.
2. Select one or more ATM PWE3 services, right-click theservice(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcutmenu.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
![Page 175: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
PerformanceObject
BrowseObject
Navigation Path
ATMPWE3performance
Port trafficclassificationperformance
Ports thatperformcomplextrafficclassification
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > QoS Management > Policy Management> Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Application Object tab.3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.NOTE
Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port trafficclassification performance.
Portpriorityperformance
Egressqueues
For FE/GE ports:1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Interface Management > EthernetInterface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.For Integrated IP radio ports:1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Interface Management > MicrowaveInterface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.
Port DSdomainperformance
Ports in aDSdomain
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > QoS Management > Diffserv DomainManagement > Diffserv Domain Management from theFunction Tree.
2. Select the desired DS domain.3. Click the Application Object tab.4. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Click the Statistics Group tab.
Step 3 Set the required parameters for the statistics group.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
![Page 176: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
1. Select the desired object or port from the drop-down list.
2. Select the performance items for which statistics need to be collected.
3. Set Sampling Period.Sampling Period represents the time unit of the performance statistics.
Step 4 Click Resetting begins.
NOTE
If you click Start, the register of the statistics group is not reset to clear the existing data.
----End
8.4.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for a PortAfter you configure an RMON alarm group for a port, you can monitor whether the performancevalue of the port crosses the configured thresholds in the long term.
Prerequisitesl You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects accordingto the following tables.
Table 8-2 Packet plane
PerformanceObject
BrowseObject
Navigation Path
Basicperformance
Ethernetporta
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NEExplorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from theFunction Tree.NOTE
a: Ethernet ports on the packet plane include FE/GE ports, Integrated IPradio ports, port 10 on the EFP8 board, and port 8 on the EMS6 board.
Extendedperformance
MPLStunnelperformance
MPLStunnel
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the ObjectTree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management >Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Static Tunnel tab.3. Select one or more tunnels, right-click the tunnel(s), and
choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
![Page 177: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
PerformanceObject
BrowseObject
Navigation Path
L2 VPN-PWperformance
ETHPWE3service
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LineService from the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services, right-click the service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
L2 VPNperformance
UNI-UNIE-Lineservice
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LineService from the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services, right-click theservice(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcutmenu.
CES-PWperformance
CESservice
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree andchoose Configuration > CES Service Management from theFunction Tree.
2. Select one or more CES services, right-click the service(s), andchoose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.CES
performance
ATM/IMA(accessside)performance
Smart E1port
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NEExplorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from theFunction Tree.
ATM-PWperformance
ATMPWE3service
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree andchoose Configuration > ATM Service Management fromthe Function Tree.
2. Select one or more ATM PWE3 services, right-click theservice(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcutmenu.
ATMPWE3performance
Port trafficclassificationperformance
Ports thatperformcomplextrafficclassification
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > QoS Management > Policy Management> Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Application Object tab.3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.NOTE
Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port trafficclassification performance.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
![Page 178: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
PerformanceObject
BrowseObject
Navigation Path
Portpriorityperformance
Egressqueues
For FE/GE ports:1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Interface Management > EthernetInterface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.For Integrated IP radio ports:1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Interface Management > MicrowaveInterface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.
Port DSdomainperformance
Ports in aDSdomain
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > QoS Management > Diffserv DomainManagement > Diffserv Domain Management from theFunction Tree.
2. Select the desired DS domain.3. Click the Application Object tab.4. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Click the RMON Setting tab.
Step 3 Click the Object tab and set the corresponding parameters.
Step 4 Click the Event tab and set the corresponding parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box.
----End
8.4.3 Configuring a Historical Control GroupWhen configuring a historical control group for an Ethernet port, you can configure how thehistorical performance data of the port is monitored. The Ethernet board monitors the historicalperformance data of each port at the default sampling interval of 30 minutes. A maximum of 50historical performance entries can be saved.
Prerequisitesl You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
![Page 179: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
l The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON HistoryControl Group.
Step 2 Set the parameters of the historical control group.
Step 3 Click Apply. Close the displayed dialog box.
----End
8.4.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the Historical Group of aPort
After you configure an RMON historical group for a port, you can browse the historicalperformance data of the port.
Prerequisitesl You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel.l The objects and performance events to be monitored must be set.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, navigate to the performance query interfaces for different objects accordingto the following tables.
Table 8-3 Packet plane
PerformanceObject
BrowseObject
Navigation Path
Basicperformance
Ethernetporta
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NEExplorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from theFunction Tree.NOTE
a: Ethernet ports on the packet plane include FE/GE ports, Integrated IPradio ports, port 10 on the EFP8 board, and port 8 on the EMS6 board.
Extendedperformance
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
![Page 180: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
PerformanceObject
BrowseObject
Navigation Path
MPLStunnelperformance
MPLStunnel
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the ObjectTree and choose Configuration > MPLS Management >Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Static Tunnel tab.3. Select one or more tunnels, right-click the tunnel(s), and
choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
L2 VPN-PWperformance
ETHPWE3service
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LineService from the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more ETH PWE3 services, right-click the service(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.
L2 VPNperformance
UNI-UNIE-Lineservice
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LineService from the Function Tree.
2. Select one or more UNI-UNI E-Line services, right-click theservice(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcutmenu.
CES-PWperformance
CESservice
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree andchoose Configuration > CES Service Management from theFunction Tree.
2. Select one or more CES services, right-click the service(s), andchoose Browse Performance from the shortcut menu.CES
performance
ATM/IMA(accessside)performance
Smart E1port
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NEExplorer. Choose Performance > RMON Performance from theFunction Tree.
ATM-PWperformance
ATMPWE3service
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree andchoose Configuration > ATM Service Management fromthe Function Tree.
2. Select one or more ATM PWE3 services, right-click theservice(s), and choose Browse Performance from the shortcutmenu.
ATMPWE3performance
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
![Page 181: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
PerformanceObject
BrowseObject
Navigation Path
Port trafficclassificationperformance
Ports thatperformcomplextrafficclassification
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > QoS Management > Policy Management> Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Application Object tab.3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.NOTE
Complete the operation Creating Traffic before monitoring the port trafficclassification performance.
Portpriorityperformance
Egressqueues
For FE/GE ports:1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Interface Management > EthernetInterface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.For Integrated IP radio ports:1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Interface Management > MicrowaveInterface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.3. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.4. Select the desired egress queue in the Object drop-down list.
Port DSdomainperformance
Ports in aDSdomain
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > QoS Management > Diffserv DomainManagement > Diffserv Domain Management from theFunction Tree.
2. Select the desired DS domain.3. Click the Application Object tab.4. Select one or multiple ports, right-click and choose Browse
Performance from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Click the History Group tab.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the historical group.1. Select the desired object or port from the drop-down list.2. Click and specify the required time span.3. Select the performance items to browse.4. Under History Table Type, set the time span for the performance items to be browsed.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
![Page 182: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
Step 4 Click Query.
----End
8.5 Querying a ReportYou can obtain the version, manufacture, and microwave link information of all the boards byquerying the corresponding report.
8.5.1 Querying the Board Information ReportYou can obtain the logic version, and software version of each board by querying the boardinformation report.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Inventory > Physical Inventory from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Select Board from Physical Inventory Type in the Physical Inventory window.
Step 3 In Physical Inventory, click the Board List tab.
Step 4 Click Filter.In Filter window, set the board or board attributes that need to be queried. Click OK.
Step 5 The board information displayed in the Board List.
Step 6 Optional: Click Save As.Set the parameters in Saving Options.
Step 7 Click OK. Then, you can save and archive the board information as a text file.
Step 8 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.5.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing Information ReportYou can obtain the manufacturing information about each board and the SFP module by queryingthe board manufacturing information report.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
![Page 183: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Inventory > Project Document > Board Manufacturer Information from the MainMenu.
Step 2 In Board Manufacturer Information, click the Board Manufacturer Information tab.
Step 3 Select one or multiple NEs from the left pane, and click .
Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 5 Click Query.The Query processing bar is displayed.
Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 7 Optional: Click Save As.
Step 8 Set the parameters in Saving Options.
Step 9 Click OK. Then, you can save and archive the board manufacturing information as a text file.
----End
8.5.3 Querying the Microwave Link Information ReportYou can obtain the current and recent transmit/receive power of microwave links by queryingthe microwave link information report.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 In Main Menu, choose Inventory > Microwave Report > Microwave Link Report.
Step 2 In the left pane of the Microwave Link Report tab page, choose one or more NEs, and click
.
Step 3 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 4 Optional: Click Save As.
Step 5 Set the parameters in Saving Options.
Step 6 Click OK. Then, you can save and archive the microwave link information as a text file.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
![Page 184: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
8.5.4 Querying the Network-wide License ReportBy querying the network-wide license report, you can check the license information of each NE.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Inventory > Microwave Report > Microwave License Capacity Report from theMain Menu.
Step 2 Select one or more NEs in the left pane, and click .
Step 3 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 4 Optional: Click Save As. Save the license report as a file and archive the file properly.
Step 5 Set the parameters in Saving Options.
Step 6 Click OK. Then, the license report is saved and archived as a file.
----End
8.6 Software LoopbackSoftware loopback refers to the loopback operation that is implemented by using the NMS.During software loopback, you need not visit the engineering site. Hence, software loopback isused more widely than hardware loopback.
8.6.1 Setting Loopback for the SDH Optical Interface BoardThe SDH optical interface board supports the optical/electrical interface inloop/outloop and theVC-4 path inloop/outloop.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
ContextThe optical/electrical interface inloop is a process wherein the signals over an SDH port arelooped back at the overhead processing unit towards the backplane.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
![Page 185: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
Figure 8-5 Optical/electrical interface inloop
SDH opticalinterface boardBackplane
SDH
The optical/electrical interface outloop is a process wherein the signals over an SDH port arelooped back at the overhead processing unit towards the remote equipment.
Figure 8-6 Optical/electrical interface outloop
SDH opticalinterface boardBackplane
SDH
The VC-4 path outloop is a process wherein the signals on a VC-4 path are looped back at thelogic processing unit towards the remote equipment.
Figure 8-7 VC-4 path outloop
SDH opticalinterface boardBackplane
VC-4
The VC-4 path inloop is a process wherein the signals on a VC-4 path are looped back at thelogic processing unit towards the backplane.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
![Page 186: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
Figure 8-8 VC-4 path inloop
SDH opticalboardBackplane
VC-4
Precautions
CAUTIONl The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by
defaults). For details, see 8.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the SDH optical interface board from the Object Tree.
NOTEThe SDH optical interface boards described in this section include the physical SL1D and SL1DA board andthe logical SL4D board that the physical CSHN board maps.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select By Function, and select the loopback mode from the drop-down list.
To Perform... Choose...
Optical/electrical interface loopback Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopback
VC-4 path loopback VC4 Loopback
Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port or path based on the requirements.
Step 5 Click Apply.Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.6.2 Setting Loopback for the Tributary BoardThe tributary board supports the tributary inloop and outloop.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
![Page 187: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Context
The tributary inloop is a process wherein the signals over a PDH port are looped back at thecoding/decoding unit towards the backplane.
Figure 8-9 Tributary inloop
PDH interface boardBackplane
PDH
The tributary outloop is a process wherein the signals on a tributary path are looped back at thePDH interface board of the local IDU towards the remote equipment.
Figure 8-10 Tributary outloop
PDH
PDH interface boardBackplane
Precautions
CAUTIONThe services may be interrupted on the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
![Page 188: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Select the PDH interface board from the Object Tree.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select By Function, and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down list.
Step 4 Set the loopback status of the path based on the requirements.
Step 5 Click Apply.Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.6.3 Setting a Loopback for the Smart E1 Processing BoardA Smart E1 processing board supports inloops and outloops on E1 ports.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials
U2000
Context
The E1 inloop is a process wherein the signals over an E1 port are looped back from the coding/decoding unit to the backplane.
Figure 8-11 E1 inloop
Smart E1Processing BoardBackplane
E1
The E1 outloop is a process wherein the signals over an E1 port are looped back from the SmartE1 processing board of the local IDU to the remote equipment.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
![Page 189: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
Figure 8-12 E1 outloop
E1
Smart E1Processing BoardsBackplane
Precautions
CAUTIONl The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.
l A software loopback may be released automatically within a period (5 minutes, by default).For details, see 8.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Smart E1 processing board from the Object Tree.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 3 In the Advanced Attributes tab, select the required port.
Step 4 Set the loopback status of the port as required.
Step 5 Click Apply.The system displays a prompt dialog box for confirmation.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Close the dialog box.
----End
8.6.4 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet InterfaceBoard
The Packet-plane Ethernet interface board supports the Ethernet port inloop (at the MAC layerand PHY layer).
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
![Page 190: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
ContextThe Ethernet port MAC inloop is a process wherein the Ethernet physical signals are loopedback at the service processing module of the board at the MAC layer towards the backplane.The Ethernet port PHY inloop is a process wherein the Ethernet frame signals are looped backat the interface module of the board at the PHY layer towards the backplane.
Figure 8-13 Ethernet port inloop
Ethernet serviceprocessing boardBackplane
PHYMAC
Precautions
NOTE
The tributary boards described in this section include the physical EM6TA, EM6FA, EM6T and EM6F boardsand the logical EG2D board that the physical CSHN board map.
PORT 10 on the EFP8 board can not be configured with loops.
PORT 8 on the EMS6 board can not be configured with loops.
CAUTIONl A loopback operation results in service interruption.l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by
defaults). For details, see 8.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
CAUTIONWhen Port Mode of an Ethernet port is set to Layer 3, do not perform any loopback on the port.In this case, LSP Traceroute is recommended for locating faults.
Procedure
Step 1 Select an Ethernet processing board from the Object Tree.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
![Page 191: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
Step 2 Select the corresponding function options from the Function Tree based on the loopback type.
To Perform... Choose...
PHY loopback 1. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > EthernetInterface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
MAC loopback 1. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > EthernetInterface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 3 Set the loopback status of the port based on the requirements.
Step 4 Click Apply.Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.6.5 Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane EthernetInterface Board
EPF8 board supports the inloop at Ethernet ports (at the MAC layer and PHY layer) and theinloop in VC-12 paths. EMS6 board supports the inloop at Ethernet ports (at the MAC layer andPHY layer) and the inloop in VC-3 paths.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments, and MaterialsU2000
ContextA MAC layer inloop is an inloop where the service processing module loops back the Ethernetphysical signals towards the backplane through the MAC layer. A PHY layer inloop is an inloopwhere the interface module loops back the Ethernet frame signals towards the backplane throughthe PHY layer.
NOTE
PORT 9 in the EFP8 board only supports inloop at the MAC layer.
PORT 7 in the EMS6 board only supports inloop at the MAC layer.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
![Page 192: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
Figure 8-14 Ethernet port inloop
Ethernet serviceprocessing boardBackplane
PHYMAC
An inloop in a VC-12 path is an inloop where the logic processing unit of a board loops backthe signals in a specific VC-12 path towards the backplane.
Figure 8-15 VC-12 path inloop
EOPDH
Backplane EFP8
An inloop in a VC-3 path is an inloop where the logic processing unit of a board loops back thesignals in a specific VC-3 path towards the backplane.
Figure 8-16 VC-3 path inloop
EOS
Backplane EMS6
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
![Page 193: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
Precautions
CAUTIONl A loopback operation may interrupt the services on the port where the loopback is performed.l A software loopback may be automatically released within a period (five minutes by default).
For details, see 8.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function.
NOTE
A VC-3 loopback can be performed only after the EMS6 is configured with services.
ProcedureStep 1 In NE Explorer, select the required board from the Object Tree.
Step 2 Select the corresponding function options from the Function Tree according to the loopbacktype.
To Perform... Choose...
PHY loopback 1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management >Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select External Port.3. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
MAC loopback 1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management >Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select External Port.3. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
VC-12 path inloop 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.2. Select By Function.3. Select the required VC-12 path.
VC-3 path inloop 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.2. Select By Board/Port(Channel).3. Select the required VC-3 path.
Step 3 Set the loopback status of the port as required.
Step 4 Click Apply.The confirmation dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Click OK.The prompt dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Close the prompt dialog box.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
![Page 194: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
8.6.6 Setting Loopback for the IF BoardLoopbacks on the IF board are classified into IF port loopback, composite port loopback, andIntegrated IP radio port MAC loopback. The IF1 board supports the IF port inloop, IF portoutloop, composite port inloop, and composite port outloop. The IFU2/IFX2 board supports theIF port inloop, IF port outloop, composite port inloop, composite port outloop, and IntegratedIP radio port MAC inloop. The ISU2/ISX2 board supports the IF port inloop, IF port outloop,composite port inloop, and composite port outloop.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
ContextThe IF port inloop is a process wherein the IF signals are looped back at the modem unit towardsthe backplane.
Figure 8-17 IF port inloop
IF boardBackplane
IF signal
The IF port outloop is a process wherein the IF signals are looped back at the modem unit of theboard towards the remote equipment.
Figure 8-18 IF port outloop
IF boardBackplaneIF signal
The composite port inloop is a process wherein the microwave baseband signal is looped backat the MUX/DEMUX unit of the board towards the backplane.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
![Page 195: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
Figure 8-19 Composite port inloop
IF boardBackplaneMicrowave
baseband signal
The composite outloop is a process wherein the microwave baseband signal is looped back atthe MUX/DEMUX unit of the board towards the remote equipment.
Figure 8-20 Composite port outloop
IF boardBackplaneMicrowavebaseband
signal
Precautions
CAUTIONl The services may be interrupted at the port or on the path where the loopback is performed.l A software loopback may be released automatically after a certain period (five minutes, by
defaults). For details, see 8.12 Setting the Automatic Release Function.l To perform the software loopback on the standby IF board of the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection
group, switch the standby IF board to the working state forcedly. Otherwise, the operationmay fail.
l Before performing the loopback operation for the IFU2/IFX2 board, disable the AM functionat both ends of the radio link.
CAUTIONWhen Port Mode of an Integrated IP radio port is set to Layer 3, do not perform any loopbackon the port. In this case, LSP Traceroute is recommended for locating faults.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
![Page 196: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
ProcedureStep 1 Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE explorer.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the FunctionTree.
Step 3 Select Loopback Attributes.
Step 4 Select the port where the loopback needs to be performed and set loopback type.
Step 5 Click Apply.Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Click OK to close the dialog box.Then, a dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.6.7 Locating a Fault by Performing Loopback OperationsLoopback is a common method of locating the fault.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Service TrailFigure 8-21 shows how to locate a fault by performing a loopback operation.
Figure 8-21 Service trail
IFboard
Cross-connectboard
SDHtributaryboard
ODU
NE2
IFboard
Cross-connectboard
SDHtributaryboard
ODU
NE3
Optical cable
IFboard
Cross-connectboard ODU
NE4
PDHtributaryboard
IFboard
Cross-connectboard ODU
NE1
PDHtributaryboard
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
![Page 197: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/197.jpg)
PrecautionsThe LSP Traceroute method, instead of sectional loopbacks, is recommended for locating thefaults of PWE3 services.
ProcedureStep 1 If the services are available on the radio links, perform the inter-station loopbacks to narrow
down the fault to a specific hop.1. Set the outloops for the SDH optical interface boards on NE2 and NE3, and then perform
the inter-station loopbacks to locate the fault.
Step 2 After the fault is located on the specific radio link, perform the intra-station loopbacks to narrowdown the fault to a specific NE or board.1. Set inloop for the IF board on the NEs at both ends of the radio link where the fault occurs,
to check whether the service receiver or the radio link is faulty.2. If the fault is located in the service receiver, set outloop for the PDH tributary board to
check whether the interface board or switch unit is faulty.3. If the radio link is faulty, replace the IF board and ODU to check whether the IF board or
ODU is faulty.
----End
8.7 ResetReset is an important method of troubleshooting software faults. Reset is classified into coldreset, warm reset.
8.7.1 Cold ResetCold reset is a process wherein the board software is reset and the board is re-initiated. Duringthe board initialization, the FPGA, if any, is re-loaded.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Precautions
CAUTIONCold reset causes service interruption because it is similar to the procedure of removing andinserting a board.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
![Page 198: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/198.jpg)
ProcedureStep 1 In NE Panel, right-click the board where the cold reset needs to be performed.
Step 2 Choose Cold Reset from the shortcut menu.Then, the dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click OK.
Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.7.2 Warm ResetWarm reset is a process wherein the board software is reset but the board is not re-initiated.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
PrecautionsDuring warm reset, the board software is reset but the services are not interrupted.
ProcedureStep 1 In NE Panel, right-click the board where the warm reset needs to be performed.
Step 2 Choose Warm Reset from the shortcut menu.Then, the dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click OK.
Step 4 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.8 PRBS TestThe pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test is an important method of network maintenanceand self-check.
8.8.1 Performing a PRBS Test for the Tributary BoardIf a special test tool is unavailable, you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded testsystem on the tributary board.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
![Page 199: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/199.jpg)
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
ContextThe OptiX RTN 980 supports the PRBS test in the tributary direction and in the cross-connectdirection.
The PRBS test in the tributary direction can be performed to check the connection between thetributary board and the DDF, as shown in Figure 8-22.
Figure 8-22 PRBS test in the tributary direction
PRBSTransmitter
PRBSRecevicer
PDH interface boardDDF frame
1
1 Loopback at the DDF frame
The PRBS test in the cross-connect direction can be performed to check the connection betweenthe tributary board and the remote NE, as shown in Figure 8-23.
Figure 8-23 PRBS test in the cross-connect direction
Cross-connectboard
PRBStransmitter
PRBSreceiver
PDH interfaceboard IF board
NE at the local end NE at the opposite end
IN
OUT
VC-4 inloop orcomposite port inloop
IF port inloop IF port outloop1
2 3
2 3
IF board
1
a) IF board working as the line board
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
![Page 200: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/200.jpg)
Cross-connect board
PRBStransmitter
PRBSreceiver
PDH interface board
NE at the local end NE at the opposite end
IN
OUT
VC-4 inloop Port inloop Port outloop1
2 3
2 3
SDH opticalinterface board
1
b) Line board working as the SDH optical interface board
Precautions
CAUTIONl During the PRBS test, the services in the tested path are interrupted.l The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction at one time.l If you perform a PRBS test in the tributary direction of a port on the SP3D/SP3S board, the
services carried on the other ports may be interrupted transiently.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the loopback at the proper location. For details, see Figure 8-22 and Figure 8-23.
Step 2 Select the E1 interface board from the Object Tree.
Step 3 Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Select the port to be tested.
Step 5 Set Duration and Measured in Time.
NOTE
l The PRBS test supports three time units: one second, 10 minutes, and one hour.
l A maximum of 255 test cycles is permissible for the PRBS test.
Step 6 Optional: Select Accumulating Mode.
Step 7 Click Start to Test.A prompt is displayed.
Step 8 Click OK.
Step 9 When Process is displayed as 100%, click Query to check the test result.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
![Page 201: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/201.jpg)
NOTE
The result of a PRBS test can be normal, error, or invalid.
l Invalid: indicates that no bit is received. In this case, the curve is yellow.
l Normal: indicates that the path is in normal state. In this case, the number of PRBSs is zero, and thecurve is green.
l Error: indicates that the path has errors. In this case, the number of total PRBSs is a non-zero number,and the curve is red.
----End
8.8.2 Performing a PRBS Test for the IF BoardIf a special test tool is unavailable, you can perform the PRBS test by using the embedded testsystem on the IF board.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Precautions
Figure 8-24 PRBS test of the IF board
11
PRBStransmitter
PRBS
ODU
1
ODU
NE at the local end NE at the opposite endIF port outloop1
transmitter
IF board IF board
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
![Page 202: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/202.jpg)
CAUTIONl During the PRBS test, the services in the tested path are interrupted.l The PRBS test can be performed only in one path and in one direction at one time.l The standby IF unit does not support the PRBS test. Before you perform the PRBS test for
the standby IF board of a 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection group, you must switch the standbyIF board to the working state.
Procedure
Step 1 Perform an outloop on the opposite IF board. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopback for theIF Board.
Step 2 Select the IF board from the Object Tree.
Step 3 Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Select the port to be tested.
Step 5 Set Duration and Measured in Time.
NOTE
l The time unit of the PRBS test can be one second, 10 minutes, or one hour.
l A maximum of 255 test cycles is permissible for the PRBS test.
Step 6 Optional: Select Accumulating Mode.
Step 7 Click Start to Test.A prompt is displayed.
Step 8 Click OK.
Step 9 When Process is displayed as 100%, click Query to check the test result.
NOTE
The result of a PRBS test can be normal, error, or invalid.
l Invalid: indicates that no bit is received. In this case, the curve is yellow.
l Normal: indicates that the path is in normal state. In this case, the number of PRBSs is zero, and thecurve is green.
l Error: indicates that the path has errors. In this case, the number of total PRBSs is a non-zero number,and the curve is red.
----End
8.9 Querying the License CapacityYou can check whether the loaded license file meets the requirements by querying the licensecapacity.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
![Page 203: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/203.jpg)
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > License Management.
Step 3 Click Query, browse the license capacity of the NE.
----End
8.10 Setting the On/Off State of the LaserWhen performing operations such as testing a fiber cut, you can set the on/off state of the laserrather than removing and re-inserting the optical fiber on site.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired SDH optical interface board from the Object Tree.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select By Function.
Step 4 Select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.
Step 5 Select a port, and then set Laser Switch.
Step 6 Click Apply.A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Click OK.A prompt is displayed.
Step 8 Click OK.
----End
8.11 Setting the ALS FunctionThe SDH optical interface board supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. Thisfunction enables the board to turn off a laser when the board does not transmit services, theoptical fiber is faulty, or the received optical signals are lost.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
![Page 204: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/204.jpg)
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired SDH optical interface board from the Object Tree.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select a port, and then set Automatic Shutdown to Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.12 Setting the Automatic Release FunctionTo protect the communication between the NMS and NE against improper operations, an NEsupports the automatic release of the ODU muting, software loopback, and other operations thatrequire you to exercise caution. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. You canset whether to enable the automatic release function and the automatic release time through theNMS.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Functionfrom the Main Menu.
Step 2 Select the desired NE from the Object Tree. Click .
Step 3 In Automatic Disabling of NE Function, set Auto Disabling and Auto Disabling Time(min).
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings for the automatic release function.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
![Page 205: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/205.jpg)
8.13 Querying Power Consumption of BoardsThis section describes how to query power consumption of the ODU and each board.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Power Management from the MainMenu.
Step 2 In the NE Power dialog box, select the Board Power tab.
Step 3 Select the required NE or board from the object tree, and then click .
Step 4 Click Query.The Query progress bar is displayed.
Step 5 Close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 6 On the Board Power tab page, browse Nominal Power Consumption and Current PowerConsumption of the selected board.
----End
8.14 Querying the Impedance of an E1 ChannelThe impedance of an E1 channel is 75 ohms or 120 ohms.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 Select a PDH tributary board from the Object Tree.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select By Board/Port(Channel).
Step 4 Select Port in the list.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
![Page 206: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/206.jpg)
Step 5 Select a port, and check Port Impedance.
----End
8.15 Monitoring Ethernet Packets Through Port MirroringTo monitor and analyze the Ethernet packets at a port, you can enable the port mirroring functionso that the received or transmitted packets on the port are duplicated to another Ethernet port towhich the Ethernet tester is connected. Then, you can monitor and analyze the packets. Thisfunction is supported by the EFP8/EMS6 board of the OptiX RTN 980.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
ContextThe OptiX RTN 980 supports the mirroring, monitoring, and analyzing of the Ethernet packetsthat are received or transmitted on the port.
Figure 8-25 Schematic diagram of Ethernet port mirroring
Mirroringport
Ethernet processing unit
Monitoringport
Ethernetequipment
Ethernet testerDuplication
To monitor the data in different directions, port mirroring can be performed in the ingressdirection and in the egress direction. For the ports on EFP8/EMS6 board:
l In the ingress directionAlso in the upstream direction. The equipment duplicates the packets received from themirroring port to the observing port, and then transmits the packets from the observing portto the Ethernet tester.
l In the egress directionAlso in the downstream direction. The equipment duplicates the packets transmitted by themirroring port to the observing port, and then transmits the packets from the observing portto the Ethernet tester.
In the ingress direction, the ports mirror the data transmitted from the VCTRUNK to the TDMside. In the egress direction, the ports mirror the data transmitted from the TDM side to theVCTRUNK.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
![Page 207: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/207.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, select the EFP8 or EMS6 board.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Port Mirroring from theFunction Tree.
Step 3 Click New, and set Mirror Listener Port, Uplink Listened Port, and Downlink ListenedPort.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
8.16 Querying the Attributes of an Ethernet PortThrough the operation, you can learn about the attributes of an Ethernet port, such as rate.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Query the attributes of the FE or GE port on the packet plane.1. In NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree.2. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function
Tree.3. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.4. Check the parameters such as Port Physical Parameters, Transmitting Rate, and
Receiving Rate.
Step 2 Optional: Querying the attributes of the Integrated IP radio port.1. In NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree.2. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the
Function Tree.3. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
![Page 208: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/208.jpg)
4. Check the parameters such as Transmitting Rate and Receiving Rate.
----End
8.17 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or BandwidthUtilization of Ethernet Ports
To query the traffic, physical bandwidth, or bandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within acertain period, you need to enable the monitoring for the object before that period starts. TheFE/GE ports and Integrated IP radio ports on the packet plane support this operation.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
The flow monitoring function is enabled on the Ethernet port. To enable the flow monitoringfunction on a port, see 8.17 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilizationof Ethernet Ports.
Tools, Instruments, and MaterialsU2000
Background InformationAfter the flow monitoring function is enabled, the system saves the statistics about the receivedtraffic and transmitted traffic with an interval of 15 minutes. In normal cases, the system storesthe statistics that are collected in the last 30 days. In the system, every measurement entry showsthe average transmit rate and average receive rate within a period of 15 minutes. You can querythe statistics in the last 30 days.
Procedure
Step 1 Select a board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Choose Performance > Ethernet Port Flow Monitoring from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select the Set Monitoring tab. Set Flow Monitoring, Physical Bandwidth Monitoring,Bandwidth Usage Monitoring to Enabled for the Ethernet port.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Close the displayed Result dialog box.
----End
8.18 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or BandwidthUtilization of Ethernet Ports
This section describes how to query the change curve of the traffic, physical bandwidth, orbandwidth utilization of Ethernet ports within a certain period. The FE/GE ports and IntegratedIP radio ports on the packet plane support this operation.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
![Page 209: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/209.jpg)
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
The flow monitoring function is enabled on the Ethernet port. To enable the flow monitoringfunction on a port, see 8.17 Setting Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilizationof Ethernet Ports.
Tools, Instruments, and MaterialsU2000
Background InformationAfter the flow monitoring function is enabled, the system saves the statistics about the receivedtraffic and transmitted traffic with an interval of 15 minutes. In normal cases, the system storesthe statistics that are collected in the last 30 days. In the system, every measurement entry showsthe average transmit rate and average receive rate within a period of 15 minutes. You can querythe statistics in the last 30 days.
Procedure
Step 1 Select a board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
Step 2 Choose Performance > Ethernet Port Flow Monitoring from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select the Query Flow tab.
Step 4 Set the Monitored Object, Monitored Indicator, Start Time, End Time, and DisplayMode.
Step 5 Click Query.The system displays the query result in a table or in a graph.
Step 6 Close the displayed Result dialog box.
----End
8.19 Setting the Threshold of Received Traffic Flow on anEthernet Port
The FLOW_OVER alarm is reported when the traffic flow received on an Ethernet port exceedsthe specified threshold. Only the FE port on the EFP8 board supports this operation.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
![Page 210: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/210.jpg)
Tools, Instruments, and Materials
U2000
PrecautionsNOTE
The receive traffic threshold cannot be set for the Ethernet ports on the packet domain.
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, select an Ethernet processing board from the Object Tree.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from theFunction Tree.
Step 3 Select External Port.
Step 4 Select the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 5 Select an Ethernet port and set Traffic Threshold and Port Traffic Threshold TimeWindow.
Step 6 Click Apply.
----End
8.20 Using the Ethernet Test FramesBy using the Ethernet test frames, you can check the connectivity of VCTRUNKs. Only theEFP8 board supports this operation.
Prerequisitesl You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
l The service traffic is encapsulated or mapped by using the GFP method.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials
U2000
Background Information
The Ethernet board uses the specific GFP management frame or Ethernet frame as the test frame.One frame is transmitted to the opposite Ethernet board per second. After receiving the testframe, the Ethernet board returns the response frame. Upon receiving the response frame, theEthernet service processing board at the local end can judge the connectivity of the VCTRUNKin between.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
![Page 211: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/211.jpg)
Figure 8-26 Ethernet test frames between Ethernet boards
LocalEthernet
board
RemoteEthernet
board
Test frame
Response frame
Precautions
CAUTIONDo not use the test frames when the network traffic is heavy.
Procedure
Step 1 In NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Test from the Function Tree.Then, the Ethernet Test dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Select the test port and click Clear Counters. Select Clear All Counters .
Step 4 Set Send Mode and Frames to Send.
NOTE
It is recommended that you choose "Burst mode", and a maximum of 10 frames can be transmitted eachtime.
Step 5 Click Apply.The system starts transmitting and receiving test frames.
Step 6 After Status displays Finished Sending, click Query.
Step 7 Check Counter of Frames Sent and Counter of Received Response of Test Frame.Test frames are used to check the network connectivity. If some of the test frames are lost butno alarm is reported on the SDH side, you can infer that the network is normal. If all the testframes are lost, you can infer that the network is faulty.
----End
Related Information
If you choose the continue mode, the local port transmits test frames continuously until the testis disabled.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
![Page 212: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/212.jpg)
8.21 Switching the System Control Unit and the Cross-Connect Unit
When the OptiX RTN 980 is configured with two system control, cross-connect, and timingboards, you can manually switch the system control unit and the cross-connect unit as required.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Select the desired NE from the Object Tree.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
Step 3 In 1+1 Protection List, select Cross-Connect Protection Pair.
Step 4 Perform the 1+1 protection switching on the board.
If... Then...
Active Board is set to Working Board Click Working/Protection Switching.
Active Board is set to Protection Board Click Restore Working/Protection.
Step 5 In the prompt that is displayed, click OK.
----End
8.22 End-to-End Management on Fibers, Tunnels, and PWE3Services
This section describes the common maintenance operations for end-to-end management onfibers, MPLS tunnels, and PWE3 services.
8.22.1 Expanding/Collapsing Fibers and CablesIf multiple fibers, cables, or tunnels are available between network elements (NEs), you cancollapse them to form a link, which is displayed in the topology. You can also expand the linkto display the fibers, cables, or tunnels.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
![Page 213: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/213.jpg)
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Expand fibers and cables.1. In the main topology, if an NE link is displayed as
, select the link and right-click it. Then chooseExpand Link from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Optional: Collapse fibers and cables.
1. In the main topology, if an NE link is displayed as ,select the link and right-click it. Then choose Collapse Link from the shortcut menu.
----End
8.22.2 Querying Optical Power of Fibers and CablesWhen fiber connections are available between network elements (NEs), you can query the opticalpower related to the fibers.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the main topology, select the required radio link and right-click it. Then choose QueryRelevant Optical Power from the shortcut menu.The Optical Power Management dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click the Port Optical Power tab.
Step 3 Click Query.The input and output optical power of the fiber is displayed in the dialog box.
Step 4 In the Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
Step 5 Click the Graphic tab to display the statistical graphics regarding optical power of the sourceand sink ends of a fiber.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
![Page 214: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/214.jpg)
8.22.3 Querying the Radio Link InformationWhen fiber links are available between network elements (NEs), you can query the relevantinformation about radio links.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the main topology, select the required radio link and right-click it. Then choose MicrowaveLink Information from the shortcut menu.The Microwave Link Report dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select the required NE or board from the object tree, and then click .
Step 3 Click Query.
Step 4 In the Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
----End
8.22.4 Querying the Radio Link PerformanceWhen fiber links are available between network elements (NEs), you can query the relevantperformance information about radio links.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE monitor authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the main topology, select the required radio link and right-click it. Then choose Radio LinkPerformance Statistics from the shortcut menu.The Radio Link Performance Statistics dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the Radio Link Performance Statistics dialog box, choose Current Performance tab.
Step 3 In the Current Performance dialog box, choose Auto Refresh to see the current performanceof the radio link.
Step 4 In the Radio Link Performance Statistics dialog box, choose History Performance tab.
Step 5 In the Radio Link Performance Statistics dialog box, set Monitor Period, Ended From,To, and Options. Then click OK below Options.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
![Page 215: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/215.jpg)
Step 6 Click Query.
Step 7 Click Save as, and save the data displayed in the current dialog box.
----End
8.22.5 Managing E-Line Services Transmitted in Native EthernetMode
This section describes how to perform management and maintenance operations, such asquerying information about E-Line services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode and deploying/deleting E-Line services.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Native Ethernet Service > Manage E-Line Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions and click Filter.The E-Line services that meet the criteria are listed in the query result.
Step 3 Optional: Select the desired E-Line service from the query result, and view information in theTopology and Interface Information tab pages.
Step 4 Optional: Select the desired E-Line service from the query result, click functional buttons underthe query result or right-click the service and choose options from the shortcut menu to performrelated maintenance operations.
----End
8.22.6 Managing MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End ModeThis section describes how to perform management and maintenance operations on MPLStunnels, such as querying tunnel information, running/deploying/deleting an MPLS tunnel, andtroubleshooting MPLS tunnels.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions and click Filter.The MPLS tunnels that meet the criteria are listed in the query result.
Step 3 Optional: Select a desired tunnel, and browse the tunnel information in the Topology, HopInformation, QoS Information, and Relevant Service tab pages at the bottom.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
![Page 216: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/216.jpg)
Step 4 Optional: Select the desired tunnels from the query result, click functional buttons under thequery result or right-click the service and choose options from the shortcut menu to performrelated maintenance operations.
----End
8.22.7 Managing and Maintaining PWE3 ServicesThis section describes how to perform management and maintenance operations, includingquerying PWE3 service information, deploying or deleting a PWE3 service, and detecting PWfaults.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions and click Filter.The PWE3 services that meet the criteria are listed in the query result.
Step 3 Optional: Select a desired PWE3 service and browse the service information in the Topology,SAI, Service Parameter, and PW tab pages at the bottom.
Step 4 Optional: Select the desired PWE3 service from the query result, click functional buttons underthe query result or right-click the service and choose options from the shortcut menu to performrelated maintenance operations.
----End
8.22.8 Verifying Native Ethernet ServicesThis section describes how to use ETH OAM to verify connectivity of Native Ethernet services.
Prerequisitesl You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l Native Ethernet services are configured in end-to-end mode and ETH OAM CC are enabled.
l The data on the NE and the NMS is synchronized.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Native Ethernet Service > Manage Native Ethernet Service from the mainmenu.
Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box, set filter conditions and click Filter.The Native Ethernet services that meet the criteria are listed in the query result.
Step 3 Right-click the desired Native Ethernet service, and choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test fromthe shortcut menu.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
![Page 217: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/217.jpg)
Step 4 In the LB Test dialog box, select the desired service trail.
NOTE
l An LB test checks whether a service is bidirectional available. For a bidirectional service, select theNE at either end to initiate an LB test.
l If Ethernet services are in different VLANs, the U2000 automatically selects the service in a VLANfor an LB test.
l One NE cannot be involved in multiple LB tests simultaneously.
Step 5 Optional: Choose Config LB Parameter from the shortcut menu. Set Sent Packets, SentPackets Length, and Sent Packets Priority. Then, click OK.
Step 6 Click Run.
Step 7 Click the LB Testing Information and LB Statistics Information tabs, and determine whetherthe service is available based on the displayed information.Normally, Test Results indicates Test Succeeded.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
![Page 218: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/218.jpg)
----End
8.22.9 Verifying MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End ModeThis section describes how to verify that an MPLS tunnel is available using the LSP ping testor LSP traceroute function.
Prerequisitesl You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.l MPLS tunnels have already been deployed.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions and click Filter.The MPLS tunnels that meet the criteria are listed in the query result.
Step 3 Right-click the tunnel to verify. Choose Test and Check from the shortcut menu.TIPYou can select and verify several MPLS tunnels concurrently.
Step 4 Select LSP Ping or LSP Traceroute from Diagnosis Option.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
![Page 219: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/219.jpg)
Step 5 Optional: Click the on the right and set parameters about the LSP ping/LSP traceroutetest in the dialog box that is displayed.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
l Packet Size: Set this parameter according to requirements.
l Response Mode: Set this parameter to Application Control Channel if the tunnel isbidirectional and its egress node supports reverse channel response. Set this parameter toIPv4 UDP Response if the egress node does not support reverse channel response, butsupport DCN channel response based on IP protocols. In other scenarios, set this parameterto No Response.
l Other parameters: Other parameters take their default values.
Step 6 Click Run.
Step 7 After the verification, query the verification result of each MPLS tunnel.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
![Page 220: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/220.jpg)
8.22.10 Verifying PW Configurations in an End-to-End ModeThis section describes how to verify connectivity of a PW using the PW ping test or PWtraceroute function.
PrerequisitesYou must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsU2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the Main Menu.The Set Filter Criteria dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click Filter.
NOTE
After you click Filter, all configured PWE3 services will be displayed.
Step 3 Right-click the PWE3 service to verify and choose Test And Check from the shortcut menu.
The Diagnosis Option tab page is displayed.
Step 4 Perform a PW service connectivity test.
If... Then...
You perform a PW ping test Perform Step 5 and Step 9.
You perform a PW traceroute test Perform Step 10 and Step 14.
Step 5 Select VCCV Ping from the Diagnosis Option list.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
![Page 221: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/221.jpg)
Step 6 Click on the right of VCCV Ping.The VCCV ping dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Set the connectivity test parameters.
Set the parameters as follows:
l Response Mode: Application Control Channell Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that other parameters take their default values.
Step 8 Click OK.
Step 9 Click Run.
Step 10 Select VCCV Traceroute from the Diagnosis Option list.
Step 11 Click on the right of VCCV Traceroute.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
![Page 222: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/222.jpg)
The VCCV Traceroute dialog box is displayed.
Step 12 Set the connectivity test parameters.
Set the parameters as follows:
l Response Mode: Application Control Channell Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that other parameters take their default values.
Step 13 Click OK.
Step 14 Click Run.
----End
8.22.11 Verifying PW-Based E-Line Service Configurations (in anEnd-to-End Mode)
This section describes how to use Ethernet OAM to verify connectivity of a PW-based E-Lineservice.
Prerequisitesl You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.l The Configuring PW-Based E-Line Services (in an End-to-End Mode) task has been
completed.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the Main Menu.
Step 2 In the Set Filter Criteria window, select Source NE and Sink Node. Click Filter.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
![Page 223: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/223.jpg)
Step 3 Right-click the PWE3 service to verify, and choose Ethernet OAM > LB Test... from theshortcut menu.
Step 4 In the Eth Oam LB Test dialog box that is displayed, select the source NE for initiating an LBtest.
NOTE
l An LB test detects whether a service is bidirectionally available. For a bidirectional service, it isrecommended that you select either end of a PW as the source NE for initiating the LB test.
l If a PW carries Ethernet services from different VLANs, the U2000 automatically select the serviceof a VLAN for the LB test.
Step 5 Optional: Right-click the service that is selected for an LB test, and choose Configure... fromthe shortcut menu. In the Config Eth Oam LB Test Parameter dialog box that is displayed,set Sent Packets, Sent Packets Length, and Sent Packets Priority. Then, click OK.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
![Page 224: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/224.jpg)
Step 6 Right-click the service that is selected for an LB test, and choose Run from the shortcut menu.
Step 7 Click the LB Statistic Information tab and determines whether the service is available basedon the displayed information.If Test Result displays Test Succeeded, the service is available.
If Packet Loss Ratio(%) displays 100 and Test Result displays Test Failed, the service isunavailable. If the service is unavailable, check whether the service configurations are incorrect.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
![Page 225: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/225.jpg)
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) 8 Supporting Task
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
![Page 226: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/226.jpg)
A Alarm Reference
Alarms are important indicators when abnormalities occur on the equipment. This chapterdescribes all the possible alarms on the OptiX RTN 980 and how to handle these alarms.
A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order)The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the OptiX RTN 980 in alphabeticalorder.
A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards)This part lists the alarms that are reported by each board.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
![Page 227: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/227.jpg)
A.1 Alarm List (in Alphabetical Order)The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the OptiX RTN 980 in alphabeticalorder.
Table A-1 Alarm list
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
A_LOC Loss of clock in theupstream bus
Major
ALM_E1RAI E1 link remote alarmindication
Minor
ALM_GFP_dCSF Loss of GFP clientsignals
Critical
ALM_GFP_dLFD Out of frame state ofgeneric framingprocedure (GFP)frames
Major
ALM_IMA_LIF Frame delimitation isout-of-frame at thelocal end of the IMAlink.
Major
ALM_IMA_LODS Differential delay ofthe IMA link crossesthe threshold.
Major
ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE The IMA link on theopposite NE fails inthe receive direction.
Minor
ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE The IMA link on theopposite NE fails inthe transmitdirection.
Minor
ALM_IMA_RFI Frame delimitation isout-of-frame at theremote end of theIMA link.
Major
AM_DOWNSHIFT Downshift of AMmodes
Major
APS_FAIL Failure indication ofMS protectionswitching
Major
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
![Page 228: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/228.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
APS_INDI Indication of the APSprotection switching
Major
APS_MANUAL_STOP MS protocol stoppedmanually
Minor
ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC The number ofunknown ATM cellsexceeds the specifiedthreshold in a timeunit.
Major
AU_AIS AU alarm indication Major
AU_LOP Loss of AU pointers Major
B1_EXC Excessiveregenerator sectionerrors (B1)
Minor
B1_SD Signal degradationdue to excessiveregenerator sectionerrors (B1)
Minor
B2_EXC Excessive multiplexsection errors (B2)
Major
B2_SD Signal degradationdue to excessivemultiplex sectionerrors (B2)
Minor
B3_EXC Excessive higherorder path bit errors(B3)
Major
B3_EXC_VC3 Excessive B3 biterrors in a VC-3 path
Major
B3_SD Signal degradationdue to excessivehigher order path biterrors (B3)
Minor
BD_NOT_INSTALLED The logical board isnot added on theNMS.
Minor
BD_STATUS The board is out-of-position.
Major
BIOS_STATUS The board is in BIOSstate.
Major
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
![Page 229: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/229.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
BIP_EXC Excessive BIP errors Minor
BIP_SD Signal degradationdue to excessive BIPerrors
Minor
BOOTROM_BAD BOOTROM datacheck fails.
Major
BUS_ERR Bus errors Critical
CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN The locking functionof CES ACR serviceclock is abnormal.
Minor
CES_JTROVR_EXC The number of jitterbuffer overflowscrosses the specifiedthreshold.
Major
CES_JTRUDR_EXC The number of jitterbuffer underflowscrosses the specifiedthreshold.
Major
CES_LOSPKT_EXC The number of lostpackets crosses thespecified threshold ina time unit.
Major
CES_MALPKT_EXC The number ofdeformed packetscrosses the specifiedthreshold in a timeunit.
Major
CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC The number of lostdisordered packetscrosses the specifiedthreshold in a timeunit.
Major
CES_RDI Remote defectindication
Minor
CES_STRAYPKT_EXC The number oferrored packetscrosses the specifiedthreshold in a timeunit.
Major
CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT The AC circuit on theopposite NE is faulty.
Major
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
![Page 230: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/230.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI Remote alarmindication
Major
CFCARD_FAILED The operation on theCF card fails.
Major
CFCARD_OFFLINE The CF card is off-line.
Major
CHCS Correctable cellerrors
Minor
COMMUN_FAIL Inter-boardcommunication fails.
Major
CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE The clock source isnot in locked mode.
Minor
CONFIG_NOSUPPORT Configuration is notsupported.
Major
DBMS_DELETE The status ofdatabases is delete.
Major
DBMS_ERROR Errors in theprocessing of systemdatabases
Major
DBMS_PROTECT_MODE System databases inprotection mode
Critical
DCNSIZE_OVER Over-sized DCNnetwork
Major
DDN_LFA The frame alignmentsignal of framed E1services is lost.
Major
DOWN_E1_AIS Alarm indication of 2Mbit/s downstreamsignals
Minor
DROPRATIO_OVER The number of lostpackets due to portcongestion crossesthe threshold.
Minor
E1_LOC Loss of 2M clock inupstream signals
Major
E1_LOS Loss of 2 Mbit/s linesignals
Minor
ETH_APS_LOST Loss of APS frames Minor
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
![Page 231: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/231.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH The working andprotection paths ofthe APS protectiongroup differ betweenthe two ends.
Major
ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL Protection switchingfailure
Major
ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH Protection schememismatch
Major
ETH_CFM_LOC Loss of connectivity Critical
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE Misconnection Critical
ETH_CFM_RDI The maintenanceassociation end point(MEP) fails toreceive CCMpackets.
Minor
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI Errored frames Minor
ETH_EFM_DF Discovery failure Major
ETH_EFM_EVENT Performance eventsat the opposite end
Major
ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK A loopback occurs. Major
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT Faults occur at theopposite end.
Critical
ETH_LOS Loss of Ethernet portconnection
Critical
ETH_NO_FLOW No flow on theEthernet port
Major
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL Discovery failure isdetected by point-to-point Ethernet OAM.
Minor
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP A remote loopback isdetected by point-to-point Ethernet OAM.
Minor
ETHOAM_RMT_SD Remote Ethernetperformancedegradation isdetected by point-to-point Ethernet OAM.
Minor
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
![Page 232: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/232.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT Severe faults aredetected by point-to-point Ethernet OAMat the remote end.
Minor
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP An MAC portloopback is detectedby point-to-pointEthernet OAM.
Major
ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP A VCTRUNK portloopback is detectedby point-to-pointEthernet OAM.
Major
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS Loss of periodicalconnectivity checkpackets
Critical
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT Conflict ofmaintenance pointIDs
Major
EXT_SYNC_LOS Loss of externalclock sources
Critical
FAN_AGING Aged fans Minor
FAN_FAIL Failure of fan boards Major
FCS_ERR Frame checksequence (FCS)errors
Critical
FLOW_OVER Excessive data trafficreceived by Ethernetports
Minor
HARD_BAD Hardware faults Critical
HP_CROSSTR Threshold-crossingperformance event ofthe higher order path
Minor
HP_LOM Loss of multiframesin the higher orderpath
Major
HP_RDI Higher order pathremote defectindication
Minor
HP_REI Higher order pathremote errorindication
Warning
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
![Page 233: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/233.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
HP_SLM Higher order pathsignal label mismatch
Minor
HP_TIM High order path traceidentifier mismatch
Minor
HP_UNEQ Unequipped higherorder path
Minor
HPAD_CROSSTR Adaptationperformancethreshold-crossing ofthe higher order path
Minor
IF_CABLE_OPEN IF cables aredisconnected.
Major
IF_INPWR_ABN The power suppliedby an IF board to anODU is abnormal.
Major
IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED Preset IF workingmode is notsupported.
Major
IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN The IMA group at thelocal end fails.
Major
IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN The IMA group at theremote end fails.
Major
IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH The transmit clockmodes at the two endsof the IMA group aredifferent.
Minor
IN_PWR_ABN Abnormal inputoptical power
Major
IN_PWR_HIGH Over high inputoptical power
Critical
IN_PWR_LOW Over low inputoptical power
Critical
J0_MM Trace identifiermismatch
Minor
K1_K2_M K1 and K2 mismatch Minor
K2_M K2 mismatch Minor
LAG_BWMM Bandwidthinconsistency in theLAG group
Major
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
![Page 234: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/234.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
LAG_DOWN The LAG isunavailable.
Major
LAG_MEMBER_DOWN A member port of alink aggregationgroup (LAG) isunavailable.
Minor
LAG_PORT_FAIL A member port of aLAG fails.
Minor
LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL A VCG port of anLAG fails.
Minor
LAN_LOC Ethernetcommunicationfailure
Major
LASER_CLOSED The laser is shutdown.
Major
LASER_MOD_ERR The type of thepluggable opticalmodule on the boarddoes not match thetype of the opticalinterface.
Major
LASER_MOD_ERR_EX The type of thepluggable opticalmodule on the boarddoes not match thetype of the opticalinterface.
Major
LCAS_FOPR LCAS protocol failsin the receivedirection.
Major
LCAS_FOPT LCAS protocol failsin the transmitdirection.
Major
LCAS_PLCR Loss of partialbandwidth in theLCAS receivedirection
Minor
LCAS_PLCT Loss of partialbandwidth in theLCAS transmitdirection
Minor
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
![Page 235: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/235.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
LCAS_TLCR Loss of totalbandwidth in theLCAS receivedirection
Major
LCAS_TLCT Loss of totalbandwidth in theLCAS transmitdirection
Major
LCD Loss of celldelimitation
Major
LCS_LIMITED The capacity of theconfigured servicesexceeds the rangepermitted by thelicense file.
Major
LFA Out of frame state ofE1 frames
Major
LICENSE_DIFF The license file on theIF board is differentfrom the backup fileon the system controlboard.
Warning
LICENSE_LOST The NE fails to detectany license file.
Major
LINK_ERR Faults occur in a datalink.
Critical
LMFA Out of frame state ofE1 multiframes
Major
LOOP_ALM A loopback occurs. Minor
LP_CROSSTR Performancethreshold-crossing ofthe lower order path
Minor
LP_R_FIFO FIFO overflow on thereceive side of thelower order path
Minor
LP_RDI Lower order pathremote defectindication
Minor
LP_RDI_VC12 VC-12 path remotedefect indication
Minor
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
![Page 236: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/236.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
LP_RDI_VC3 VC-3 path remotedefect indication
Minor
LP_REI Lower order pathremote errorindication
Minor
LP_REI_VC12 VC-12 path remoteerror indication
Minor
LP_REI_VC3 VC-3 path remoteerror indication
Minor
LP_RFI Lower order pathremote failureindication
Minor
LP_SLM Lower order pathsignal label mismatch
Minor
LP_SLM_VC12 VC-12 path signallabel mismatch
Minor
LP_SLM_VC3 VC-3 path signallabel mismatch
Minor
LP_T_FIFO FIFO overflow on thetransmit side of thelower order path
Minor
LP_TIM Lower order pathtrace identifiermismatch
Minor
LP_TIM_VC12 VC-12 path traceidentifier mismatch
Minor
LP_TIM_VC3 VC-3 path trackingidentificationmismatch
Minor
LP_UNEQ Unequipped lowerorder paths
Minor
LP_UNEQ_VC12 Unequipped VC-12paths
Minor
LP_UNEQ_VC3 Unequipped VC-3paths
Minor
LPS_UNI_BI_M The switching modeis single-ended at oneend and dual-ended atthe other end.
Minor
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
![Page 237: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/237.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT The LPT closes theaccess port of thelocal NE.
Major
LPT_INEFFECT LPT function failed Major
LPT_RFI Link state pass-through function failsat the remote end.
Critical
LSR_NO_FITED Laser not installed Critical
LTI Loss of clocksynchronizationsource
Major
MAC_EXT_EXC The number of biterrors at the MAClayer crosses thethreshold.
Major
MAC_FCS_EXC The software detectsthat the number of biterrors at the MAClayer crosses thethreshold.
Major
MOD_COM_FAIL Modulecommunicationfailure
Major
MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH Port module typemismatch
Critical
MPLS_PW_BDI PW backward defectindication
Minor
MPLS_PW_Excess Excessive trailtermination sourceidentifiers (TTSIs)are received on thePW.
Minor
MPLS_PW_LOCV Loss of PWconnectivity
Critical
MPLS_PW_MISMATCH The trail terminationsource identifiers(TTSIs) on the PW donot match with thespecified one.
Critical
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
![Page 238: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/238.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
MPLS_PW_MISMERGE The trail terminationsource identifiers(TTSIs) aremismerged on thePW.
Major
MPLS_PW_SD Signal degradationon the PW
Major
MPLS_PW_SF Signal failure on thePW
Major
MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN Unknown defects onthe PW
Major
MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI Tunnel backwarddefect indication
Minor
MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess Excessive trailtermination sourceidentifiers (TTSIs)are received on thetunnel.
Minor
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI Tunnel forwarddefect indication
Major
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV Loss of tunnelconnectivity
Critical
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH The trail terminationsource identifiers(TTSIs) on the tunneldo not match with thespecified one.
Critical
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE The trail terminationsource identifiers(TTSIs) aremismerged on thetunnel.
Major
MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL The OAM protocolnegotiation betweenthe two ends of thetunnel fails.
Minor
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD Signal degradationon the tunnel
Major
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF Signal failure on thetunnel
Major
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
![Page 239: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/239.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN Unknown defects onthe tunnel
Major
MS_AIS Multiplex sectionalarm indication
Major
MS_CROSSTR Multiplex sectionperformancethreshold-crossing
Minor
MS_RDI Multiplex sectionremote defectindication
Minor
MS_REI Multiplex sectionremote errorindication
Warning
MSAD_CROSSTR Multiplex sectionadaptationperformancethreshold-crossing
Minor
MULTI_RPL_OWNER The ring network hasmultipleRPL_OWNERnodes.
Minor
MW_AM_TEST The IF port is in theAM testing state.
Minor
MW_BER_EXC Excessive errors onradio links
Minor
MW_BER_SD Signal degradationdue to excessiveerrors on radio links
Minor
MW_CFG_MISMATCH Configurationmismatch on radiolinks
Critical
MW_CONT_WAVE Continuous wave Minor
MW_E1_LOST Loss of E1 signals Major
MW_FEC_UNCOR Microwave frameshave the errors thatcannot be correctedby using the forwarderror correction(FEC) technology.
Minor
MW_LIM Label mismatch onradio links
Major
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
![Page 240: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/240.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
MW_LOF Loss of microwaveframes
Critical
MW_RDI Remote defectindication on radiolinks
Minor
NESF_LOST The NE software islost.
Critical
NESOFT_MM The software in themain area is differentfrom that in thestandby area.
Major
NESTATE_INSTALL The NE is in theinstallation state.
Critical
NO_BD_SOFT The board software islost.
Critical
NP1_MANUAL_STOP The N+1 protectionprotocol is stoppedmanually.
Minor
NP1_SW_FAIL The N+1 protectionswitching fails.
Major
NP1_SW_INDI N+1 protectionswitching indication
Major
NTP_SYNC_FAIL Synchronization withthe NTP time fails.
Minor
OCD Out of celldelimitation
Major
OUT_PWR_ABN Abnormal outputoptical power
Critical
PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT Activating patchpackages times out.
Minor
PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT Deactivating patchpackages times out.
Minor
PATCH_PKGERR Abnormal patchpackage
Minor
PG_LINK_FAIL Links of the 1+1protection group fail.
Critical
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
![Page 241: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/241.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
PG_PRT_DEGRADED The working link orprotection link of the1+1 protection groupis faulty.
Major
PLA_CFG_MISMATCH Inconsistent PLAconfigurations
Critical
PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC The traffic is higherthan the portbandwidth threshold.
Warning
PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE Port not in position Major
PORTMODE_MISMATCH The working mode ofthe remote FE portdoes not match that ofthe local FE port.
Minor
POWER_ABNORMAL Power input alarm Major
POWER_ALM Power module alarm Major
PW_DROPPKT_EXC The number of lostpackets in a PWcrosses the threshold.
Warning
PWAPS_LOST Loss of APS frames Minor
PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH The working andprotection paths ofthe APS protectiongroup differ betweenthe two ends.
Major
PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL Protection switchingfailure
Major
PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH Protection schememismatch
Major
R_F_RST Reset of the receiveFIFO
Minor
R_LOC Loss of clock on thereceive line side
Critical
R_LOF Loss of frame on thereceive line side
Critical
R_LOS Loss of signal or lossof microwave frameon the receive lineside
Critical
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
![Page 242: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/242.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
R_S_ERR Errors in the receivedsignal
Critical
RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF Radio fading marginis insufficient.
Minor
RADIO_MUTE The radio transmitteris muted.
Warning
RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH Antennas are notaligned.
Minor
RADIO_RSL_HIGH Over high radioreceive signal level
Critical
RADIO_RSL_LOW Over low radioreceive signal level
Critical
RADIO_TSL_HIGH Over high radiotransmit signal level
Critical
RADIO_TSL_LOW Over low radiotransmit signal level
Critical
RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL There are criticalalarm inputs.
Critical
RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE There are warninginputs.
Warning
RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR There are majoralarm inputs.
Major
RELAY_ALARM_MINOR There are minoralarm inputs.
Minor
RMFA Loss of multiframealignment at theremote end
Minor
RPS_INDI Radio protectionswitching indication
Major
RS_CROSSTR Regenerator sectionperformancethreshold-crossing
Minor
RTC_FAIL The real-time clock(RTC) of the systemcontrol board fails.
Major
S1_SYN_CHANGE Clock sourceswitching in S1 mode
Major
SEC_RADIUS_FAIL RADIUSauthentication fails.
Major
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
![Page 243: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/243.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
SECU_ALM Security alarm Major
SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD Ethernet services areinterrupted.
Warning
SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT The commitoperation is notperformed duringsoftware packageloading.
Critical
SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH The automatic matchfunction is disabled.
Minor
SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH The board softwareversion and theversion of therunning software areinconsistent.
Critical
SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL The submit operationfails.
Minor
SWDL_INPROCESS The packagediffusion is beingperformed on the NE.
Warning
SWDL_NEPKGCHECK Certain files in thepackage stored inflash memory arelost.
Critical
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT The softwarepackage does notcontain any boardsoftware.
Minor
SWDL_PKGVER_MM Software packageversion consistencycheck fails.
Minor
SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL The version rollbackon an NE fails.
Minor
SYN_BAD Synchronous sourcedegradation
Minor
SYNC_C_LOS Loss ofsynchronizationclock sources
Warning
A.3.239 SCCDATA_BACKUP_FAIL Batch backup of SCCboards fails.
Minor
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
![Page 244: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/244.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
T_ALOS Loss of analogsignals at 2 Mbit/sinterfaces
Major
T_F_RST Reset of the transmitFIFO
Minor
T_LOC Loss of clock on thetransmit line side
Major
TEMP_ALARM Excessive boardtemperature
Minor
THUNDERALM Surge protectionfails.
Minor
TR_LOC Clock failure Major
TU_AIS TU alarm indication Major
TU_AIS_VC12 VC-12 path TU alarmindication
Major
TU_AIS_VC3 VC-3 path TU alarmindication
Major
TU_LOP Loss of TU pointers Major
TU_LOP_VC12 Loss of TU pointersin VC-12 paths
Major
TU_LOP_VC3 Loss of TU pointersin VC-3 paths
Major
TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED The tunnel protectiongroup degrades.
Major
UP_E1_AIS Alarm indication of 2Mbit/s upstreamsignals
Minor
UHCS Uncorrectable cellerrors
Minor
VC_AIS Alarm indicationsignal of the VCconnection
Critical
VC_LOC Loss of VCconnectivity check
Major
VC_RDI Remote defectindication of the VCconnection
Major
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
![Page 245: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/245.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Alarm Severity
VCAT_LOA Excessive virtualconcatenation delay
Critical
VCAT_LOM_VC12 Loss of multiframe ofVC-12 path virtualconcatenation
Major
VCAT_LOM_VC3 Loss of multiframe ofVC-3 path virtualconcatenation
Major
VCAT_SQM_VC12 SQ mismatch ofVC-12 path virtualconcatenation
Major
VCAT_SQM_VC3 SQ mismatch ofVC-3 path virtualconcatenation
Major
VOLT_LOS Loss of voltage Major
VP_AIS Alarm indicationsignal of the VPconnection
Critical
VP_LOC Loss of VPconnectivity check
Major
VP_RDI Remote defectindication of the VPconnection
Major
W_R_FAIL Failure in reading andwriting chip registers
Major
WRG_BD_TYPE Errored board types Major
XPIC_LOS Loss of XPICcompensation signals
Critical
A.2 Alarm List (Classified by Logical Boards)This part lists the alarms that are reported by each board.
NOTE
The NE software consider a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board.The NMS also considers a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board.
For OptiX RTN 980, all physical boards, except the system control, switching, and timing board, correspond tological boards of the same names. Table A-2 shows the logical boards corresponding to the system control,switching, and timing board.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
![Page 246: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/246.jpg)
Table A-2 Logical boards corresponding to the system control, switching, and timing board
Physical Board Logical Board
CSHN l CSHN in slot 15 + SL4D in slot 16 +EG2D in slot 17
l CSHN in slot 20 + SL4D in slot 21 +EG2D in slot 22
A.2.1 CSHN
APS_FAIL APS_INDI APS_MANUAL_STOP
BD_NOT_INSTALLED
BD_STATUS BIOS_STATUS BOOTROM_BAD CFCARD_FAILED
CFCARD_OFFLINE
CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE
DBMS_DELETE DBMS_ERROR
DBMS_PROTECT_MODE
DCNSIZE_OVER ETH_APS_LOST ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH
ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL
ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH
EXT_SYNC_LOS FLOW_OVER
HARD_BAD K1_K2_M K2_M LAG_BWMM
LAN_LOC LCS_LIMITED LICENSE_LOST LPS_UNI_BI_M
LPT_CFG_CLOSE-PORT
LTI MOD_COM_FAIL MPLS_PW_BDI
MPLS_PW_Excess MPLS_PW_LOCV MPLS_PW_MISMATCH
MPLS_PW_MISMERGE
MPLS_PW_SD MPLS_PW_SF MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN
MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH
MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE
MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL
MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN
NESF_LOST NESOFT_MM NESTATE_INSTALL
NP1_MANUAL_STOP
NP1_SW_FAIL NP1_SW_INDI NTP_SYNC_FAIL
PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT
PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT
PATCH_PKGERR PG_LINK_FAIL
PG_PRT_DEGRADED
PLA_CFG_MISMATCH
POWER_ALM PW_DROPPKT_EXC
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
![Page 247: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/247.jpg)
PWAPS_LOST PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH
PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL
PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH
RPS_INDI RTC_FAIL S1_SYN_CHANGE SCCDATA_BACKUP_FAIL
SEC_RADIUS_FAIL
SECU_ALM SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD
SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT
SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH
SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH
SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL
SWDL_INPROCESS
SWDL_NEPKGCHECK
SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
SWDL_PKGVER_MM
SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL
SYN_BAD SYNC_C_LOS TEMP_ALARM TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED
WRG_BD_TYPE - - -
A.2.2 IF1
AU_AIS AU_LOP B1_EXC B1_SD
B2_EXC B2_SD B3_EXC B3_SD
BD_STATUS HARD_BAD HP_CROSSTR HP_LOM
HP_RDI HP_REI HP_SLM HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ IF_CABLE_OPEN IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED
LCS_LIMITED
LICENSE_DIFF LICENSE_LOST LOOP_ALM MS_AIS
MS_CROSSTR MS_RDI MS_REI MSAD_CROSSTR
MW_CONT_WAVE
MW_FEC_UNCOR MW_LIM MW_LOF
MW_RDI R_LOC R_LOF R_LOS
RS_CROSSTR T_LOC TEMP_ALARM VOLT_LOS
WRG_BD_TYPE - - -
A.2.3 IFU2
AM_DOWNSHIFT BD_STATUS BIP_EXC BIP_SD
BUS_ERR DROPRATIO_OVER
ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
![Page 248: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/248.jpg)
ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_EFM_DF ETH_EFM_EVENT
ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
FLOW_OVER
HARD_BAD IF_CABLE_OPEN LAG_BWMM LAG_DOWN
LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
LCS_LIMITED LICENSE_DIFF LICENSE_LOST
LOOP_ALM LP_RDI LP_REI LP_UNEQ
MAC_EXT_EXC MAC_FCS_EXC MULTI_RPL_OWNER
MW_BER_EXC
MW_BER_SD MW_CFG_MISMATCH
MW_CONT_WAVE
MW_E1_LOST
MW_FEC_UNCOR MW_LIM MW_LOF MW_RDI
PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
R_LOC R_LOF TEMP_ALARM
TU_AIS TU_LOP VOLT_LOS WRG_BD_TYPE
A.2.4 IFX2AM_DOWNSHIFT BD_STATUS BIP_EXC BIP_SD
BUS_ERR DROPRATIO_OVER
ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_EFM_DF ETH_EFM_EVENT
ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
FLOW_OVER
HARD_BAD IF_CABLE_OPEN LAG_BWMM LAG_DOWN
LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
LCS_LIMITED LICENSE_DIFF LICENSE_LOST
LOOP_ALM LP_RDI LP_REI LP_UNEQ
MAC_EXT_EXC MAC_FCS_EXC MULTI_RPL_OWNER
MW_BER_EXC
MW_BER_SD MW_CFG_MISMATCH
MW_CONT_WAVE
MW_E1_LOST
MW_FEC_UNCOR MW_LIM MW_LOF MW_RDI
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
![Page 249: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/249.jpg)
PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
R_LOC R_LOF TEMP_ALARM
TU_AIS TU_LOP VOLT_LOS WRG_BD_TYPE
XPIC_LOS - - -
A.2.5 SL1D/SL1DA
AU_AIS AU_LOP B1_EXC B1_SD
B2_EXC B2_SD B3_EXC B3_SD
BD_STATUS HARD_BAD HP_CROSSTR HP_LOM
HP_RDI HP_REI HP_SLM HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ IN_PWR_HIGH IN_PWR_LOW J0_MM
LASER_CLOSED LASER_MOD_ERR_EX
LOOP_ALM LSR_NO_FITED
MS_AIS MS_CROSSTR MS_RDI MS_REI
MSAD_CROSSTR R_LOC R_LOF R_LOS
RS_CROSSTR T_LOC WRG_BD_TYPE -
A.2.6 EM6T
BD_STATUS BUS_ERR COMMUN_FAIL DROPRATIO_OVER
ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_EFM_DF ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_LOS ETH_NO_FLOW ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
FLOW_OVER
HARD_BAD LAG_DOWN LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
LOOP_ALM
LPT_CFG_CLOSE-PORT
MAC_EXT_EXC MAC_FCS_EXC MULTI_RPL_OWNER
PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
PORTMODE_MIS-MATCH
TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
![Page 250: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/250.jpg)
A.2.7 EM6TABD_STATUS BUS_ERR COMMUN_FAIL DROPRATIO_OVE
R
ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_EFM_DF ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_LOS ETH_NO_FLOW ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
FLOW_OVER
HARD_BAD LAG_DOWN LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
LOOP_ALM
LPT_CFG_CLOSE-PORT
MAC_EXT_EXC MAC_FCS_EXC MULTI_RPL_OWNER
PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
PORTMODE_MIS-MATCH
TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE
A.2.8 EM6FBD_STATUS BUS_ERR COMMUN_FAIL DROPRATIO_OVE
R
ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_EFM_DF ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_LOS ETH_NO_FLOW ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
FLOW_OVER
HARD_BAD IN_PWR_ABN LAG_DOWN LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT LOOP_ALM LPT_CFG_CLOSE-PORT
LSR_NO_FITED MAC_EXT_EXC MAC_FCS_EXC MULTI_RPL_OWNER
PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
PORTMODE_MIS-MATCH
TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
![Page 251: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/251.jpg)
A.2.9 EM6FA
BD_STATUS BUS_ERR COMMUN_FAIL DROPRATIO_OVER
ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_EFM_DF ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_LOS ETH_NO_FLOW ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
FLOW_OVER
HARD_BAD IN_PWR_ABN LAG_DOWN LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT LOOP_ALM LPT_CFG_CLOSE-PORT
LSR_NO_FITED MAC_EXT_EXC MAC_FCS_EXC MULTI_RPL_OWNER
PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
PORTMODE_MIS-MATCH
TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE
A.2.10 EFP8
ALM_GFP_dCSF ALM_GFP_dLFD BD_STATUS BIP_EXC
BIP_SD COMMUN_FAIL DOWN_E1_AIS ETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_LOS
ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT
FCS_ERR FLOW_OVER HARD_BAD LAG_PORT_FAIL
LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL
LCAS_FOPR LCAS_FOPT LCAS_PLCR
LCAS_PLCT LCAS_TLCR LCAS_TLCT LFA
LMFA LOOP_ALM LP_RDI_VC12 LP_REI_VC12
LP_SLM_VC12 LP_TIM_VC12 LP_UNEQ_VC12 LPT_RFI
NO_BD_SOFT RMFA TEMP_ALARM TU_AIS_VC12
TU_LOP_VC12 VCAT_LOA VCAT_LOM_VC12 VCAT_SQM_VC12
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
![Page 252: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/252.jpg)
W_R_FAIL WRG_BD_TYPE - -
A.2.11 EMS6
ALM_GFP_dCSF ALM_GFP_dLFD B3_EXC_VC3 B3_SD_VC3
BD_STATUS BIP_EXC BIP_SD BUS_ERR
COMMUN_FAIL ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI
ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_LOS ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL
ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT
ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
ETHOAM_RMT_SD
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT
FCS_ERR FLOW_OVER HARD_BAD
IN_PWR_ABN LAG_PORT_FAIL LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL
LCAS_FOPR
LCAS_FOPT LCAS_PLCR LCAS_PLCT LCAS_TLCR
LCAS_TLCT LINK_ERR LOOP_ALM LP_RDI_VC12
LP_RDI_VC3 LP_REI_VC12 LP_REI_VC3 LP_SLM_VC12
LP_SLM_VC3 LP_TIM_VC12 LP_TIM_VC3 LP_UNEQ_VC12
LP_UNEQ_VC3 LPT_INEFFECT LPT_RFI MOD_TYPE_MIS-MATCH
MULTI_RPL_OWNER
NO_BD_SOFT OUT_PWR_ABN PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE
TEMP_ALARM TU_AIS_VC12 TU_AIS_VC3 TU_LOP_VC12
TU_LOP_VC3 VCAT_LOA VCAT_LOM_VC12 VCAT_LOM_VC3
VCAT_SQM_VC12 VCAT_SQM_VC3 WRG_BD_TYPE -
A.2.12 SP3S/SP3D
A_LOC BD_STATUS BIP_EXC BIP_SD
DOWN_E1_AIS E1_LOC E1_LOS HARD_BAD
HPAD_CROSSTR LOOP_ALM LP_CROSSTR LP_R_FIFO
LP_RDI LP_REI LP_RFI LP_SLM
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
![Page 253: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/253.jpg)
LP_T_FIFO LP_TIM LP_UNEQ R_F_RST
R_S_ERR WRG_BD_TYPE T_ALOS T_F_RST
TU_AIS TU_LOP UP_E1_AIS DDN_LFA
A.2.13 AUX
BD_STATUS HARD_BAD RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL
RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE
RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR
RELAY_ALARM_MINOR
WRG_BD_TYPE -
A.2.14 PIU
BD_STATUS HARD_BAD POWER_ABNORMAL
THUNDERALM
WRG_BD_TYPE - - -
A.2.15 FAN
BD_STATUS FAN_AGING FAN_FAIL POWER_ALM
WRG_BD_TYPE - - -
A.2.16 ISU2
AM_DOWNSHIFT AU_AIS AU_LOP B1_EXC
B1_SD B2_EXC B2_SD B3_EXC
B3_SD BD_STATUS BIP_EXC BIP_SD
BUS_ERR DROPRATIO_OVER
ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_EFM_DF ETH_EFM_EVENT
ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
FLOW_OVER
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
![Page 254: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/254.jpg)
HARD_BAD HP_CROSSTR HP_LOM HP_RDI
HP_REI HP_SLM HP_TIM HP_UNEQ
IF_CABLE_OPEN LAG_BWMM LAG_DOWN LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
LCS_LIMITED LICENSE_DIFF LICENSE_LOST LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI LP_REI LP_UNEQ MAC_EXT_EXC
MAC_FCS_EXC MS_AIS MS_CROSSTR MS_RDI
MS_REI MSAD_CROSSTR MULTI_RPL_OWNER
MW_AM_TEST
MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD MW_CFG_MISMATCH
MW_CONT_WAVE
MW_E1_LOST MW_FEC_UNCOR MW_LIM MW_LOF
MW_RDI PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
R_LOC R_LOF
RS_CROSSTR T_LOC TEMP_ALARM TU_AIS
TU_LOP VOLT_LOS WRG_BD_TYPE -
A.2.17 ISX2AM_DOWNSHIFT AU_AIS AU_LOP B1_EXC
B1_SD B2_EXC B2_SD B3_EXC
B3_SD BD_STATUS BIP_EXC BIP_SD
BUS_ERR DROPRATIO_OVER
ETH_CFM_LOC ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_EFM_DF ETH_EFM_EVENT
ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
FLOW_OVER
HARD_BAD HP_CROSSTR HP_LOM HP_RDI
HP_REI HP_SLM HP_TIM HP_UNEQ
IF_CABLE_OPEN LAG_BWMM LAG_DOWN LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
LCS_LIMITED LICENSE_DIFF LICENSE_LOST LOOP_ALM
LP_RDI LP_REI LP_UNEQ MAC_EXT_EXC
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
![Page 255: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/255.jpg)
MAC_FCS_EXC MS_AIS MS_CROSSTR MS_RDI
MS_REI MSAD_CROSSTR MULTI_RPL_OWNER
MW_AM_TEST
MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD MW_CFG_MISMATCH
MW_CONT_WAVE
MW_E1_LOST MW_FEC_UNCOR MW_LIM MW_LOF
MW_RDI PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
R_LOC R_LOF
RS_CROSSTR T_LOC TEMP_ALARM TU_AIS
TU_LOP VOLT_LOS WRG_BD_TYPE XPIC_LOS
A.2.18 ML1/MD1ALM_E1RAI ALM_IMA_LIF ALM_IMA_LODS ALM_IMA_RE_RX
_UNUSABLE
ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE
ALM_IMA_RFI ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC
BD_STATUS
CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN
CES_JTROVR_EXC
CES_JTRUDR_EXC
CES_LOSPKT_EXC
CES_MALPKT_EXC
CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC
CES_RDI CES_STRAYPKT_EXC
CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT
CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI
CHCS WRG_BD_TYPE
HARD_BAD IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN
IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN
IMA_TXCLK_MIS-MATCH
LCD LFA LMFA LOOP_ALM
OCD POWER_ABNORMAL
T_ALOS TEMP_ALARM
TR_LOC UHCS UP_E1_AIS VC_AIS
VC_LOC VC_RDI VP_AIS VP_LOC
VP_RDI BUS_ERR - -
A.2.19 SL4DAU_AIS AU_LOP B1_EXC B1_SD
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
![Page 256: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/256.jpg)
B2_EXC B2_SD B3_EXC B3_SD
BD_STATUS HARD_BAD HP_CROSSTR HP_LOM
HP_RDI HP_REI HP_SLM HP_TIM
HP_UNEQ IN_PWR_HIGH IN_PWR_LOW J0_MM
LASER_CLOSED LASER_MOD_ERR_EX
LOOP_ALM WRG_BD_TYPE
LSR_NO_FITED MS_AIS MS_CROSSTR MS_RDI
MS_REI MSAD_CROSSTR R_LOC R_LOF
R_LOS RS_CROSSTR T_LOC -
A.2.20 EG2DBD_STATUS COMMUN_FAIL DROPRATIO_OVE
RETH_CFM_LOC
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
ETH_CFM_RDI ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
ETH_EFM_DF
ETH_EFM_EVENT ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_LOS
ETH_NO_FLOW ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
FLOW_OVER HARD_BAD
IN_PWR_ABN LAG_DOWN LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
LASER_MOD_ERR
LASER_SHUT LOOP_ALM LPT_CFG_CLOSE-PORT
LSR_NO_FITED
MAC_EXT_EXC MAC_FCS_EXC MULTI_RPL_OWNER
PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
PORTMODE_MIS-MATCH
TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE -
A.2.21 ODUBD_STATUS CONFIG_NOSUPP
ORTHARD_BAD IF_INPWR_ABN
LOOP_ALM POWER_ALM RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF
RADIO_MUTE
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
![Page 257: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/257.jpg)
RADIO_RSL_BE-YONDTH
RADIO_RSL_HIGH
RADIO_RSL_LOW RADIO_TSL_HIGH
RADIO_TSL_LOW TEMP_ALARM WRG_BD_TYPE -
A.3 Alarms and Handling ProceduresThis chapter describes all the alarms on the OptiX RTN 980 in alphabetical order and how tohandle these alarms.
A.3.1 A_LOC
Description
The A_LOC is an alarm indicating that a clock signal is lost in the uplink bus.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the A_LOC alarm occurs, the services carried by the board are interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A certain board is faulty.
1. Replace the board where the alarmed tributary unit is located.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
![Page 258: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/258.jpg)
A.3.2 ALM_E1RAI
Description
The ALM_E1RAI is an alarm indicating that the E1 link on the opposite NE reports alarms. Thisalarm is reported on the local NE when the T_ALOS, UP_E1_AIS, DOWN_E1_AIS, LFA, orLMFA alarm is reported on the opposite NE.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the services on the local NE in the downstream direction are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The E1 link on the opposite NE reports the T_ALOS, LFA, LMFA, UP_E1_AIS,
or DOWN_E1_AIS alarm.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The E1 link on the opposite NE reports the T_ALOS, LFA, LMFA, UP_E1_AIS, orDOWN_E1_AIS alarm.
Step 2 Handle these alarms first.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.3 ALM_GFP_dCSF
Description
The ALM_GFP_dCSF is an alarm indicating that the generic framing procedure (GFP) customersignal is lost. When the source end fails to receive the GFP customer signal, it sends themanagement frame to the sink end. The ALM_GFP_dCSF alarm is reported when the sink endreceives the management frame.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
![Page 259: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/259.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Timeslot binding is different at the source and sink VCTRUNKs.
l Cause 2: The radio link performance degrades.
l Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Timeslot binding is different at the source and sink VCTRUNKs.
1. Reconfigure the timeslot binding at the source and sink VCTRUNKs.
Step 2 Cause 2: The radio link performance degrades.
1. Troubleshoot the radio link.
Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.
1. Replace the faulty board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.4 ALM_GFP_dLFD
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
![Page 260: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/260.jpg)
DescriptionThe ALM_GFP_dLFD is an alarm indicating that the GFP frame is out of frame. This alarmoccurs when a board detects that the GFP frame is out of frame.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the logical port, and the value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty.l Cause 2: When the LCAS is disabled, the source and the sink VCTRUNKs are configured
with different timeslots or different numbers of paths.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty.1. Check whether the links where the service travels have errors or become faulty.
If... Then...
The links are faulty Rectify the fault.
The links are normal Replace the alarmed board.
Step 2 Cause 2: When the LCAS is disabled, the source and the sink VCTRUNKs are configured withdifferent timeslots or different numbers of paths.1. Correct the configuration data. For details, see Configuring VCTRUNKs on an Ethernet
Board.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
![Page 261: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/261.jpg)
Related Information
None.
A.3.5 ALM_IMA_LIF
Description
The ALM_IMA_LIF is an alarm indicating that the IMA link is out of frame in the receivedirection. This alarm occurs when the frame alignment is lost on the IMA link in the receivedirection.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.
Impact on the Systeml When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of
available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured forthe IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs onthe IMA port, causing loss of cells.
l After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,
R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
l Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.
l Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
![Page 262: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/262.jpg)
If... Then...
The path reports any SDH alarm Handle the relevant alarms first.
The path does not report any SDH alarm Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.1. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends.2. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is
consistent.3. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends.4. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.
----End
Related InformationLoss of frame alignment
A frame alignment word, provided at the physical layer, occupies the initial position of a frameand defines the start of information field. An Out Of Frame (OOF) defect is declared when theposition of frame alignment word cannot be determined in the input bit stream.
A.3.6 ALM_IMA_LODS
DescriptionThe ALM_IMA_LODS is an alarm indicating the differential delay on the IMA link crosses thethreshold. This alarm occurs when the maximum differential delay on the IMA link exceeds thepreset value.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
![Page 263: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/263.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.
Impact on the SystemThe IMA links are unavailable.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The maximum differential delay is configured incorrectly.l Cause 2: Within one IMA group, the transmission distances of member links have too large
gaps.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The maximum differential delay is configured incorrectly.1. Change the maximum differential delay to a greater value. For details, see Modifying CES
Service Parameters.
Step 2 Cause 2: Within one IMA group, the transmission distances of member links have too largegaps.1. Use the meter to measure the transmission time on E1 links. If the transmission time on
different links has a gap larger than 25 ms (default value), adjust the IMA links or deletethe member link with over long transmission time from the IMA group.
----End
Related InformationDifferential delay
Differential delay refers to the service delay difference between E1 links.
A.3.7 ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE
DescriptionThe ALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the oppositeNE fails in the receive direction.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
![Page 264: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/264.jpg)
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.
Impact on the Systeml When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of
available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured forthe IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs onthe IMA port, causing loss of cells.
l After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,
R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
l Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.
l Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
If... Then...
The path reports any SDH alarm Handle the relevant alarms first.
The path does not report any SDH alarm Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.
1. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends.
2. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration isconsistent.
3. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends.
4. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
![Page 265: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/265.jpg)
Related Information
None.
A.3.8 ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE
Description
The ALM_IMA_RE_TX_UNUSABLE is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the oppositeNE fails in the transmit direction.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.
Impact on the Systeml When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of
available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured forthe IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs onthe IMA port, causing loss of cells.
l After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,
R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
l Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.
l Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
![Page 266: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/266.jpg)
If... Then...
The path reports any SDH alarm Handle the relevant alarms first.
The path does not report any SDH alarm Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.
1. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends.
2. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration isconsistent.
3. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends.
4. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.9 ALM_IMA_RFI
Description
The ALM_IMA_RFI is an alarm indicating that the IMA link on the opposite NE is out of frame(OOF) in the receive direction. This alarm occurs when the frame alignment is lost on the IMAlink of the opposite NE and the opposite NE notifies the local NE of its OOF state.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
247
![Page 267: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/267.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the ATM Trunk ID.
Impact on the Systeml When this alarm occurs, the alarmed IMA link is unavailable. Therefore, the number of
available links in the IMA group decreases. If the bandwidth of the services configured forthe IMA group exceeds the total bandwidth of available IMA links, congestion occurs onthe IMA port, causing loss of cells.
l After this alarm is cleared, the affected IMA link becomes available.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,
R_LOF, and MS_AIS.l Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.l Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path that carries the IMA link reports the SDH alarms, such as R_LOS,R_LOF, and MS_AIS.
If... Then...
The path reports any SDH alarm Handle the relevant alarms first.
The path does not report any SDH alarm Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The IMA protocol negotiation fails between the two ends.1. Disable the IMA protocol at the two ends.2. Check the IMA group configuration at the two ends and ensure that the configuration is
consistent.3. Enable the IMA protocol at the two ends.4. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The IMA link is faulty.1. Replace the board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.
----End
Related Information
Frame alignment loss
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
![Page 268: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/268.jpg)
A frame alignment word, provided at the physical layer, occupies the initial position of a frameand defines the start of information field. An Out Of Frame (OOF) defect is declared when theposition of frame alignment word cannot be determined in the input bit stream.
A.3.10 AM_DOWNSHIFT
Description
The AM_DOWNSHIFT is an alarm indicating the downshift of the AM scheme. This alarmoccurs when the AM scheme is downshifted from the highest-efficiency scheme to the lower-efficiency scheme. When the AM scheme is upshifted from the lower-efficiency scheme to thehighest-efficiency scheme, this alarm is cleared.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the AM_DOWNSHIFT alarm occurs, the transmission capacity is reduced.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The external factors (for example, the climate) cause the degradation of the
working channels.
l Cause 2: There are interferences around the working channels.
l Cause 3: The ODU at the transmit end has abnormal transmit power.
l Cause 4: The ODU at the receive end has abnormal receive power.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The external factors (for example, the climate) cause the degradation of the workingchannels.
1. When the external factors (for example, the climate) cause the degradation of the workingchannels, the downshift of the AM scheme is normal. Hence, no measures should be takento handle the alarm.
Step 2 Cause 2: There are interferences around the working channels.
1. Eliminate the interferences around the working channels.
Step 3 Cause 3: The ODU at the transmit end has abnormal transmit power.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
![Page 269: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/269.jpg)
1. Use the NMS to check whether the transmit power of the ODU at the transmit end is normal.For details on troubleshooting at the transmit end, see Troubleshooting MicrowaveLinks.
Step 4 Cause 4: The ODU at the receive end has abnormal receive power.
1. Use the NMS to check whether the receive power of the ODU at the receive end is normal.For details on troubleshooting at the receive end, see Troubleshooting MicrowaveLinks.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.11 APS_FAIL
Description
The APS_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the MS protection switching fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group.
l 0x01: linear MS protectionl 0x02: ring MS protection
Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicatesthat the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
Impact on the System
When the APS_FAIL alarm occurs, the services cannot be switched. If the current paths areunavailable, the services are interrupted.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
![Page 270: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/270.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The parameters of the MSP protocol are set incorrectly.l Cause 2: The parameters of the MSP protocol are lost.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The parameters of the MSP protocol are set incorrectly.1. Check whether the parameters of the MSP protocol are set correctly.
If... Then...
The parameters are set incorrectly Set the parameters correctly.
The parameters are set correctly Go to the next step.
Step 2 Cause 2: The parameters of the MSP protocol are lost.1. Check whether the MSP protocol is normal on the network.2. Check whether the MSP protocol is normal on the network. For details, see Enabling/
Disabling the linear MSP protocol or Enabling/Disabling the ring MSP protocol.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the protocol isrestarted
End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists after the protocol isrestarted
Contact Huawei engineers to handle thealarm.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.12 APS_INDI
DescriptionThe APS_INDI is an alarm indicating that the MS protection switching occurs.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
![Page 271: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/271.jpg)
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group.
l 0x01: linear MS protection.l 0x02: ring MS protection.
Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicatesthat the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
Impact on the System
During the switching (≤ 50 ms), the service is interrupted. After the switching is complete, theservices are restored to normal. In the case of 1:N MS protection, after the switching starts andbefore the switching is complete, the extra services are interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The MS protection switching occurs.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The MS protection switching occurs.
1. Query the linear MSP group or query the ring MSP group.
2. Check whether the MSP protocol is in the manual switching state, forced switching state,or locked switching state. If yes, release the switching and check whether the alarm iscleared.
3. Check whether the MSP protocol is in the automatic switching state. Do as follows:
a. Handle the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, or B2_SD alarm that the equipmentreports. After the alarms are cleared, wait until the MSP protocol is changed from theautomatic switching state to the normal state. Then, check whether the APS_INDIalarm is cleared.
b. Check whether the service board configured with the MSP protocol is faulty. If yes,replace the faulty board and then check whether the APS_INDI alarm is cleared.
c. Check whether the currently working system control and cross-connect board is faulty.If the currently working system control and cross-connect board is faulty and aprotection system control and cross-connect board is available, switch the service tothe protection system control and cross-connect board and replace the faulty systemcontrol and cross-connect board. Then, check whether the APS_INDI alarm iscleared.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
![Page 272: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/272.jpg)
A.3.13 APS_MANUAL_STOP
Description
The APS_MANUAL_STOP is an alarm indicating that the MSP protocol is stopped manually.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group.
l 0x01: linear MS protection.l 0x02: ring MS protection.
Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicatesthat the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
Impact on the System
When the APS_MANUAL_STOP alarm occurs, the MSP protocol may fail and therefore theprotection switching may fail.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The MSP protocol is stopped manually.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The MSP protocol is stopped manually.1. Enable/Disable the linear MSP protocol or Enable/Disable the ring MSP protocol.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
![Page 273: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/273.jpg)
A.3.14 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC
Description
The ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELL_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of unknowncells exceeds the specified threshold in a time unit. This alarm occurs when the board detectsthat, within a period (2.5s), the number of unknown cells crosses the specified threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
An unknown cell is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases andservices are affected.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: PW control words mismatch.
l Cause 2: PW types mismatch.
l Cause 3: Fragments are received on the network side.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the configuration at the two ends of the PW is consistent. If not, modify theconfiguration.
Step 2 Check whether connections are correct. If not, reconnect fibers or reconfigure connections.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.15 AU_AIS
Description
The AU_AIS is an alarm indicating the administrative unit (AU). This alarm occurs when theboard detects the AU pointer of all 1s for three consecutive frames.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
![Page 274: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/274.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the AU_AIS alarm occurs, the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is interrupted. If theservices are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The opposite NE inserts the AU_AIS alarm.l Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.l Cause 3: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE inserts the AU_AIS alarm.
If... Then...
The alarm that triggers the AU_AIS insertion occurs Clear the alarm immediately.
No such alarms that trigger the AU_AIS insertion occur Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.1. Replace the board where the line unit is located or the IF board.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isreplaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Go to the next step.
2. Replace the system control board on the opposite NE.
Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.16 AU_LOP
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
![Page 275: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/275.jpg)
Description
The AU_LOP is an alarm indicating the loss of the AU pointer. This alarm occurs when a boarddetects the AU pointer of invalid values or with the NDF for eight consecutive frames.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the AU_LOP alarm occurs, the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is interrupted. If theservices are configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.
l Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.
1. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isreplaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Go to the next step.
2. Replace the system control board on the opposite NE.
Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.17 B1_EXC
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
![Page 276: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/276.jpg)
DescriptionThe B1_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B1 errors (in the regenerator section) exceed thethreshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the B1 errors exceed the preset B1_EXCalarm threshold (10-3 by default).
An IF board that works in PDH mode may also report this alarm. This alarm is detected by usingthe self-defined overhead byte B1 in PDH microwave frames.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the B1_EXC alarm occurs, the services on the port are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).l Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).l Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interfaceboard).1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local
end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 BrowsingCurrent Performance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE isover low
Replace the board where the SDHoptical interface unit is located on theopposite NE.
The transmit power of the opposite NE isnormal, but the receive power of the localNE is close to the value (for example,within ±3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity.
The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of achannel.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
![Page 277: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/277.jpg)
If... Then...
The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
The errors do not vary with the change of thefiber.
Ensure that the board is normal.
3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the opticaldistribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed,and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or
RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.
If... Then...
The clock source of the local NE isdifferent from the clock source of theopposite NE
The clock may become asynchronous and B1errors may occur. Reconfigure the clocksource, and ensure that the clock issynchronized on the local NE and oppositeNE.
The clock of the local NE and the clockof the opposite NE form a timing loop
This may cause errors and even serviceinterruption. In this case, reconfigure the clocksource and release the timing loop.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).1. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces
of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the opticalinterfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the alarmedline unit is located on the local NE.
The fault is rectified after the opticalinterfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the line unit islocated on the opposite NE.
Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after themultiplexing interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on thelocal NE.
The fault is rectified after the multiplexinginterface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on theopposite NE.
----End
Related InformationThe handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
258
![Page 278: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/278.jpg)
Handle the errors of TDM services.
A.3.18 B1_SD
DescriptionThe B1_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B1 errors (in theregenerator section). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the B1 errors exceed thepreset B1_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) but do not reach the preset B1_EXC alarmthreshold (10-3 by default).
An IF board that works in PDH mode may also report this alarm. This alarm is detected by usingthe self-defined overhead byte B1 in PDH microwave frames.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the B1_SD alarm occurs, the service performance on the port degrades.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).l Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).l Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interfaceboard).1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local
end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 BrowsingCurrent Performance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE isover low
Replace the board where the SDHoptical interface unit is located on theopposite NE.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
259
![Page 279: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/279.jpg)
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE isnormal, but the receive power of the localNE is close to the value (for example,within ±3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity
The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of achannel.
If... Then...
The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
The errors do not vary with the change of thefiber
Ensure that the board is normal.
3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the opticaldistribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed,and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm isgenerated. If yes, clear the alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.
If... Then...
The clock source of the local NE isdifferent from the clock source of theopposite NE
The clock may become asynchronous anderrors may occur. Reconfigure the clocksource, and ensure that the clock issynchronized on the local NE and oppositeNE.
The clock of the local NE and the clockof the opposite NE form a timing loop
This may cause errors and even serviceinterruption. In this case, reconfigure the clocksource and release the timing loop.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
1. The SDH optical line board of the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces ofthe NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the opticalinterfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the alarmedline unit is located on the local NE.
The fault is rectified after the opticalinterfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the line unit islocated on the opposite NE.
Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
260
![Page 280: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/280.jpg)
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after themultiplexing interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on thelocal NE.
The fault is rectified after the multiplexinginterface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on theopposite NE.
----End
Related InformationThe handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
Handle the errors of TDM services.
A.3.19 B2_EXC
DescriptionThe B2_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B2 errors (in the multiplex section) exceed thethreshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B2 errors exceeds thepreset B2_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe services on the port are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).l Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).l Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interfaceboard).
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
![Page 281: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/281.jpg)
1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the localend meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 BrowsingCurrent Performance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE isover low
Replace the board where the SDHoptical interface unit is located on theopposite NE.
The transmit power of the opposite NE isnormal, but the receive power of the localNE is close to the value (for example,within ±3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity
The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of achannel to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
The errors do not vary with the change of thefiber
Ensure that the board is normal.
3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the opticaldistribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed,and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR orRPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.
1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.
If... Then...
The clock source of the local NE isdifferent from the clock source of theopposite NE
The clock may become asynchronous anderrors may occur. Reconfigure the clocksource, and ensure that the clock issynchronized on the local NE and oppositeNE.
The clock of the local NE and the clockof the opposite NE form a timing loop
This may cause errors and even serviceinterruption. In this case, reconfigure the clocksource and release the timing loop.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).
1. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfacesof the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the opticalinterfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the alarmedline unit is located on the local NE.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
![Page 282: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/282.jpg)
If... Then...
The fault is rectified after the opticalinterfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the line unit islocated on the opposite NE.
Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after themultiplexing interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on thelocal NE.
The fault is rectified after the multiplexinginterface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on theopposite NE.
----End
Related InformationThe handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
Handle the errors of TDM services.
A.3.20 B2_SD
DescriptionThe B2_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B2 errors (in themultiplex section). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B2 errors ishigher than the preset B2_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) and lower than the presetB2_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe service performance on the port degrades.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
![Page 283: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/283.jpg)
l Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).l Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interfaceboard).1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local
end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 BrowsingCurrent Performance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE isover low
Replace the board where the SDHoptical interface unit is located on theopposite NE.
The transmit power of the opposite NE isnormal, but the receive power of the localNE is close to the value (for example,within ± 3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity
The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of achannel to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
The errors do not vary with the change of thefiber
Ensure that the board is normal.
3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the opticaldistribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed,and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is
generated. If yes, clear the alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.
If... Then...
The clock source of the local NE isdifferent from the clock source of theopposite NE
The clock may become asynchronous anderrors may occur. Reconfigure the clocksource, and ensure that the clock issynchronized on the local NE and oppositeNE.
The clock of the local NE and the clockof the opposite NE form a timing loop
This may cause errors and even serviceinterruption. In this case, reconfigure the clocksource and release the timing loop.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
![Page 284: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/284.jpg)
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).1. The SDH optical/electrical line board of the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical
interfaces of the station by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the opticalinterfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the alarmedline unit is located on the local NE.
The fault is rectified after the opticalinterfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the line unit islocated on the opposite NE.
Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after themultiplexing interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on thelocal NE.
The fault is rectified after the multiplexinginterface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on theopposite NE.
----End
Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
Handle the errors of TDM services.
A.3.21 B3_EXC
Description
The B3_EXC is an alarm indicating that the B3 errors (in the higher order path) exceed thethreshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B3 errors exceeds thepreset B3_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the B3_EXC alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path is interrupted.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
![Page 285: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/285.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).l Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).l Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interfaceboard).1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local
end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 BrowsingCurrent Performance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE isover low
Replace the board where the SDHoptical interface unit is located on theopposite NE.
The transmit power of the opposite NE isnormal, but the receive power of the localNE is close to the value (for example,within ±3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity
The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of achannel to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
The errors do not vary with the change of thefiber
Ensure that the board is normal.
3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the opticaldistribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed,and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR or
RPS_INDI alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
![Page 286: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/286.jpg)
If... Then...
The clock source of the local NE isdifferent from the clock source of theopposite NE
In this case, the clock may becomeasynchronous and errors may occur.Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure thatthe clock is synchronized on the local NE andopposite NE.
The clock of the local NE and the clockof the opposite NE form a timing loop
This may cause errors and even serviceinterruption. In this case, reconfigure the clocksource and release the timing loop.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).1. The board of the SDH line unit on the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical interfaces
of the NE by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the opticalinterfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the alarmedline unit is located on the local NE.
The fault is rectified after the opticalinterfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the line unit islocated on the opposite NE.
Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after themultiplexing interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on thelocal NE.
The fault is rectified after the multiplexinginterface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on theopposite NE.
----End
Related InformationThe handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
Handle the errors of TDM services.
A.3.22 B3_EXC_VC3
DescriptionThe B3_EXC_VC3 alarm indicates that the number of B3 bit errors in a VC-3 path crosses thethreshold. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the number of B3 bit errors crossesthe B3_EXC_VC3 alarm threshold (10-3, by default).
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
![Page 287: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/287.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example,0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.
Impact on the System
The services in the alarmed path have a large number of bit errors.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system.l Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical
port).l Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical
port).l Cause 4: A board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system.1. Check whether the local or upstream site detects B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD,
B3_EXC, or B3_SD alarms. If yes, clear the higher-level alarms.2. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port).1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite site and the receive power at the local
site meet the specifications of the optical ports. For details, see Browsing CurrentPerformance Events.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
![Page 288: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/288.jpg)
If... Then...
The transmit power at the opposite site istoo low
Replace the optical module at theopposite site.
The transmit power at the opposite site isnormal, but the receive power at the localsite is close to the receiver sensitivity (forexample, a difference within ±3 dB)
A fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the optical fibers in the receive and transmit directions of an optical path segment.
If... Then...
The number of bit errors changes Go to the next step.
The number of bit errors does not change Go to Cause 4.
3. If a fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the opticaldistribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out from the equipment room are pressed,and whether any fiber connector is dirty or damaged. If yes, clean or replace the fiberconnector, or replace the fiber jumper. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 4.
Step 3 Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port).
1. Check whether the cable grounding, cable connectors, and cables are damaged. If yes,replace the faulty cables.
2. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: A board is faulty.
1. Perform an inloop at the Ethernet port that connects to the alarmed VC-3 path.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after theEthernet port is looped back
Replace the alarmed Ethernet processingboard at the local site.
The fault is rectified after the Ethernetport is looped back
Replace the Ethernet processing board atthe opposite site.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
![Page 289: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/289.jpg)
A.3.23 B3_SD
DescriptionThe B3_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the excessive B3 errors (in thehigher order path). This alarm occurs when the board detects that the number of B3 errors ishigher than the preset B3_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) and lower than the presetB3_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe service performance on the port degrades.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).l Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).l Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interfaceboard).1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite end and the receive power at the local
end meet the specifications of the optical interfaces. For details, see 8.3.5 BrowsingCurrent Performance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power of the opposite NE isover low
Replace the board where the SDHoptical interface unit is located on theopposite NE.
The transmit power of the opposite NE isnormal, but the receive power of the localNE is close to the value (for example,within ±3 dB) of the receiver sensitivity
The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
![Page 290: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/290.jpg)
2. Exchange the core fibers of the optical cables in the receive and transmit directions of achannel to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The errors vary with the change of the fiber The fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
The errors do not vary with the change of thefiber
Ensure that the board is normal.
3. If the fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the opticaldistribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out of the equipment room are pressed,and whether the fiber connector is dirty. If yes, replace the fiber jumper or fiber connector.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).1. Check whether the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is
generated. If yes, clear the alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: The network clock quality degrades.1. Check the network clock status of the alarmed NE.
If... Then...
The clock source of the local NE isdifferent from the clock source of theopposite NE
In this case, the clock may becomeasynchronous and errors may occur.Reconfigure the clock source, and ensure thatthe clock is synchronized on the local NE andopposite NE.
The clock of the local NE and the clockof the opposite NE form a timing loop
This may cause errors and even serviceinterruption. In this case, reconfigure the clocksource and release the timing loop.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface board).1. The SDH optical/electrical line board of the local NE is faulty. Loop back the optical
interfaces of the station by using a fiber jumper to locate the fault.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after the opticalinterfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the alarmedline unit is located on the local NE.
The fault is rectified after the opticalinterfaces are looped back
Replace the board where the line unit islocated on the opposite NE.
Step 5 Cause 5: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).1. Perform an inloop for the multiplexing interface of the IF board on the local NE.
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after themultiplexing interface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on thelocal NE.
The fault is rectified after the multiplexinginterface is looped back
Replace the alarmed IF board on theopposite NE.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
![Page 291: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/291.jpg)
Related InformationThe handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
Handle the errors of TDM services.
A.3.24 B3_SD_VC3
DescriptionThe B3_SD_VC3 alarm indicates a signal degrade (SD) condition caused by excessive B3 biterrors in VC-3 paths. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the number of B3 bit errorscrosses the B3_SD_VC3 alarm threshold (10-6, by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x000x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.
Impact on the SystemWhen the B3_SD_VC3 alarm occurs, the services in the alarmed path deteriorate.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system.l Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical
port).l Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical
port).l Cause 4: A board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Higher-level bit error alarms occur in the system.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
![Page 292: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/292.jpg)
1. Check whether the local or upstream site detects B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD,B3_EXC, or B3_SD alarms. If yes, clear the higher-level alarms.
2. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet optical port).1. Check whether the transmit power at the opposite site and the receive power at the local
site meet the specifications of the optical ports. For details, see Browsing CurrentPerformance Events.
If... Then...
The transmit power at the opposite site istoo low
Replace the optical module at theopposite site.
The transmit power at the opposite site isnormal, but the receive power at the localsite is close to the receiver sensitivity (forexample, a difference within ±3 dB)
A fiber is faulty. Go to the next step.
2. Exchange the optical fibers in the receive and transmit directions of an optical path segment.
If... Then...
The number of bit errors changes Go to the next step.
The number of bit errors does not change Go to Cause 4.
3. If a fiber is faulty, check whether the fiber jumper from the equipment to the opticaldistribution frame (ODF) and the fiber that is led out from the equipment room are pressed,and whether any fiber connector is dirty or damaged. If yes, clean or replace the fiberconnector, or replace the fiber jumper. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 4.
Step 3 Cause 3: The line performance deteriorates (the alarm is reported by an Ethernet electrical port).1. Check whether the cable grounding, cable connectors, and cables are damaged. If yes,
replace the faulty cables.2. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: A board is faulty.1. Perform an inloop at the Ethernet port that connects to the alarmed VC-3 path.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
![Page 293: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/293.jpg)
If... Then...
The fault is not rectified after theEthernet port is looped back
Replace the alarmed Ethernet processingboard at the local site.
The fault is rectified after the Ethernetport is looped back
Replace the Ethernet processing board atthe opposite site.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.25 BD_NOT_INSTALLED
Description
The BD_NOT_INSTALLED is an alarm indicating that the physical board is installed in acertain slot, but the logical board is not added.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the slot.
Impact on the System
When the BD_NOT_INSTALLED alarm occurs, the physical board in this slot cannot work.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The logical board is not added in the corresponding logical slot.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The logical board is not added in the corresponding logical slot.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
274
![Page 294: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/294.jpg)
1. Configure the logical board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.26 BD_STATUS
Description
The BD_STATUS is an alarm indicating that the board is not in position.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the BD_STATUS alarm occurs, the alarmed board fails to work.
Possible Causes
If the alarm is reported by a board of the IDU, the possible causes are as follows:
l Cause 1 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board is installed in an incorrectslot.
l Cause 2 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board and the backplane are notconnected properly.
l Cause 3 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The slot is faulty.
l Cause 4 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: A certain board is faulty.
If the alarm is reported by the ODU, the possible causes are as follows:
l Cause 1 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The other alarms are generated.
l Cause 2 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The ODU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board is installed in an incorrect slot.
1. Check whether the logical slot and physical slot of the alarmed board are consistent. Fordetails, see 8.3.2 Checking the Board Status.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
![Page 295: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/295.jpg)
If... Then...
The alarmed board is installed in anincorrect slot
Install the board in a correct slot.
The alarmed board is installed in acorrect slot
Ensure that the board and the backplaneare connected properly.
Step 2 Cause 2 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The board and the backplane are notconnected properly.
1. Remove and insert the alarmed board.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isremoved and inserted
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isremoved and inserted
Ensure that the board is normal.
Step 3 Cause 3 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: The slot is faulty.
1. Contact Huawei engineers to handle the fault of the slot.TIPGenerally, the slot becomes faulty due to the broken pin or bent pin. Remove the board, and use atorch to observe whether there is any broken pin or bent pin.
2. If a vacant slot is available, insert the board in the vacant slot and add the board again.Then, the board can work normally.
Step 4 Cause 4 of the alarm reported by a board of the IDU: A certain board is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isreplaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Ensure that the slot is normal.
Step 5 Cause 1 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The other alarms are generated.
1. Query whether the IF board reports the HARD_BAD, BD_STATUS,IF_CABLE_OPEN, BD_NOT_INSTALLED or VOLT_LOS alarm.
If... Then...
The IF board reports any of the preceding alarms Clear the alarm immediately.
The IF board does not report any of the precedingalarms
Replace the alarmed ODU.
Step 6 Cause 2 of the alarm reported by the ODU: The ODU is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed ODU.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
![Page 296: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/296.jpg)
Related Information
None.
A.3.27 BIOS_STATUS
Description
The BIOS_STATUS is an alarm indicating that the board is in BIOS state.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm
Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the slot ID of the board that is in BIOS state.
Impact on the System
The services on the alarmed board are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The board software is lost.
l Cause 2: The board software becomes abnormal.
Procedure
Step 1 Perform a cold reset on the alarmed standby system control, switching, and timing board, andthen check whether the alarm is cleared.
Step 2 If the alarm persists, remove the standby system control, switching, and timing board, andthen reseat the board.
Step 3 If the alarm persists, replace the board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.28 BIP_EXC
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
![Page 297: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/297.jpg)
Description
The BIP_EXC is an alarm indicating that the BIP errors exceed the threshold. This alarm occurswhen the board detects that the number of BIP-2 errors (in byte V5) exceeds the preset BIP_EXCalarm threshold (10-3 by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the BIP_EXC alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path is interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).
l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).
l Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).
l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).1. Check whether the performance degradation alarm occurs on the STM-1 path or radio link
along which the E1 service signal travels. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.
The common line performance degradation alarms are as follows:
B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, B3_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR,RPS_INDI, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD.
If... Then...
There is any of the preceding alarms Clear the alarm immediately.
No such alarms occur Ensure that the board is normal.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).1. Check whether any alarm occurs on the tributary board or IF board that transmits the service
signal. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.
Step 3 Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).1. Replace the board where the E1 service unit is located. Then, check whether the alarm
is cleared.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
![Page 298: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/298.jpg)
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the system control and cross-connect board.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).1. Replace the Hybrid IF board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the system control and cross-connect board.
----End
Related InformationHandle the errors of TDM services.
The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-3 when EMS6 board report the alarm.
Table A-3 Alarm Parameters of EMS6
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports thealarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate thatthe alarm is reported in path 1.
A.3.29 BIP_SD
DescriptionThe BIP_SD is an alarm indicating that the signal degrades due to the BIP errors. This alarmoccurs when the board detects that the number of BIP-2 errors (in byte V5) is higher than thepreset BIP_SD alarm threshold (10-6 by default) and lower than the preset BIP_EXC alarmthreshold (10-3 by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
ParametersNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
![Page 299: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/299.jpg)
Impact on the System
When the BIP_SD alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path degrades.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).
l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).
l Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).
l Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).1. Check whether the performance degradation alarm occurs on the STM-1 path or radio link
along which the E1 service signal travels. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.
The common line performance degradation alarms are as follows:
B1_EXC, B1_SD, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, B3_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR,RPS_INDI, MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD.
If... Then...
There is any of the preceding alarms Clear the alarm immediately.
No such alarms occur Ensure that the board is normal.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).1. Check whether any alarm occurs on the tributary board or IF board that transmits the service
signal.
If... Then...
An alarm occurs Clear the alarm immediately.
No alarm occurs Ensure that the board is normal.
Step 3 Cause 3: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by an E1 service board).1. Replace the board where the E1 service unit is located. Then, check whether the alarm
is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the system control and cross-connect board.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board is faulty (if the alarm is reported by a Hybrid IF board).1. Replace the Hybrid IF board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
![Page 300: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/300.jpg)
If... Then...
The alarm persists Replace the system control and cross-connect board.
----End
Related Information
Handle the errors of TDM services.
The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-4 when EMS6 board report the alarm.
Table A-4 Alarm Parameters of EMS6
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports thealarm. For example, 0x00 0x01 indicate thatthe alarm is reported in path 1.
A.3.30 BOOTROM_BAD
Description
The BOOTROM_BAD is an alarm indicating that the BOOTROM data consistency check fails.This alarm occurs when the BOOTROM data is damaged during a periodical check by thesystem.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
![Page 301: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/301.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the type of the BOOTROM damage.l 0x00, 0x01: damage of the basic BIOSl 0x00, 0x02: damage of the extended BIOS
Parameter 4, Parameter 5 The values are always 0xff 0xff.
Impact on the SystemWhen the BOOTROM_BAD alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system databaseprocessing. The system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returnedfor certain query and setting commands, and certain system functions cannot work.
l When the NE is already started, the BOOTROM_BAD alarm does not affect the systemand services.
l If the BOOTROM_BAD alarm occurs and a hard reset is performed on a board, the boardfails to load the BIOS and cannot be started.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The basic BIOS is damaged.l Cause 2: The extended BIOS is damaged.l Cause 3: The BOOTROM database is damaged.l Cause 4: The system control switch and timing board is faulty.
ProcedureStep 1 Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.31 BUS_ERR
DescriptionThe BUS_ERR alarm indicates bus errors. This alarm occurs when the bus becomes abnormal.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
![Page 302: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/302.jpg)
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the board that has errors.
Impact on the System
When the BUS_ERR alarm occurs, the services that travel along the faulty bus are interruptedor have errors.
Possible Causes
The possible causes of the BUS_ERR alarm are as follows:
l Cause 1: The board is not properly inserted.
l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board is not properly inserted.
1. Remove and insert the board.
Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
1. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
The alarm parameters have the meanings listed in Table A-5 when EMS6 board report the alarm.
Table A-5 Alarm parameters of EMS6
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the bus error type.0x10: The Serdes bus of the GE bridge isfaulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
![Page 303: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/303.jpg)
A.3.32 CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN
Description
The CES_ACR_LOCK_ABN is an alarm indicating that the locking function of CES ACRservice clock is abnormal.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Indicate the index of PW that carries the services associated withthe ACR clock source.
Parameter 5 Indicates clock mode.l 0x01: tracing mode.l 0x02: holdover mode.l 0x03: free-run mode.
Parameter 6 Indicates whether the clock is locked.l 0x00: unlocked.l 0x01: locked.
Impact on the System
Service quality is affected.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: CES ACR services are unavailable or have alarms.l Cause 2: The network is unstable.l Cause 3: NEs on the service path are abnormal.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: CES ACR services are unavailable or have alarms.1. Query the CES services associated with the ACR clock source. For details, see Configuring
the Primary Clock for an ACR Clock Domain.2. Check whether these services have alarms. For details, see 8.3.3 Browsing Current
Alarms.
Step 2 Cause 2: The network is unstable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
![Page 304: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/304.jpg)
1. Check for jitters and delays on the network. Query service performance statistics. Fordetails, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events.
2. Analyze service performance statistics. If the network is unstable, rectify the faults on thenetwork, or switch the affected services to a stable network.
Step 3 Cause 3: NEs on the service path are abnormal.1. Query alarms reported by the NEs on the service path. For details, see 8.3.3 Browsing
Current Alarms.2. Handle the alarms. For details, see A.3 Alarms and Handling Procedures.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.33 CES_JTROVR_EXC
DescriptionThe CES_JTROVR_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of jitter buffer overflowscrosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, the number ofjitter buffer overflows per second crosses the specified threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe buffer area does not have sufficient space for the received frames. As a result, packets arediscarded.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The size of buffer area is set to a low value.l Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not
synchronized.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The size of buffer area is set to a low value.1. Query the size of buffer area. For details, see Querying CES Service Information.2. Determine whether the size can be increased according to network planning. If yes, change
the size to a greater value. For details, see Managing CES Services.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
![Page 305: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/305.jpg)
Step 2 Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are notsynchronized.1. Synchronize the PSN network clock by setting clock synchronization, reducing
transmission nodes, and optimizing transmission routes.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.34 CES_JTRUDR_EXC
DescriptionThe CES_JTRUDR_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of jitter buffer underflowscrosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within a period(10s), the number of jitter buffer underflows per second crosses the specified threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, no packets are available in the buffer area for transmission. As a result,underflows occur in the buffer area.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.l Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not
synchronized.l Cause 3: The link is looped.l Cause 4: The link is congested.l Cause 5: The size of buffer area is set to a low value.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.1. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Cause 2: The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are notsynchronized.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
![Page 306: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/306.jpg)
1. Synchronize the PSN network clock by setting clock synchronization, reducingtransmission nodes, and optimizing transmission routes.
Step 3 Cause 3: The link is looped.
1. Release the loop.
Step 4 Cause 4: The link is congested.
1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth oreliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
Step 5 Cause 5: The size of buffer area is set to a low value.
1. Query the size of buffer area. For details, see Querying CES Service Information.
2. Determine whether the size can be increased according to network planning. If yes, changethe size to a greater value. For details, see Managing CES Services.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.35 CES_LOSPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_LOSPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that the number of lost packets of CES servicescrosses the threshold in a time unit. This alarm occurs when the board detects that, within aperiod (10s), the number of lost packets per second crosses the specified threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, all 1s are inserted and services are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.
l Cause 2: The link is looped.
l Cause 3: The link is congested.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
![Page 307: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/307.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.1. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped.1. Release the loop.
Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested.1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or
eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
----End
Related Information
Packets are lost when the sequence numbers of received packets are greater than expected.
A.3.36 CES_MALPKT_EXC
Description
The CES_MALPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a time unit, the number of deformedframes in CES services crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that,within a period (10s), the number of deformed frames in CES services crosses the specifiedthreshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
A deformed frame is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases andservices are affected.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The RTP head enabling status is different between the two ends of the PW.l Cause 2: Bit errors occur on the link.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The RTP head enabling status is different between the two ends of the PW.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
![Page 308: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/308.jpg)
1. Set the RTP head enabling status to the same on the two ends of the PW. For details, seeModifying CES Service Parameters.
Step 2 Cause 2: Bit errors occur on the link.1. Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
----End
Related InformationIf a CESoPSN frame contains valid TDM data and does not contain any error indication, but thesize of the CESoPSN frame is not consistent with the specified size, a deformed CESoPSN frameis generated.
A.3.37 CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC
DescriptionThe CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a unit time, the number of lostdisordered packets crosses the specified threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detectsthat, within a period (10s), the number of lost disordered packets per second crosses the specifiedthreshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe packets are disordered. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.l Cause 2: The link is looped.l Cause 3: The link is congested.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.1. See 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped.1. Release the loop.
Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
![Page 309: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/309.jpg)
1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth oreliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
----End
Related InformationPackets are disordered when the sequence numbers of received packets are smaller thanexpected.
A.3.38 CES_RDI
DescriptionThe CES_RDI is an alarm of remote defect indication. When the CES_LOSPKT_EXC alarm isreported at the remote end, the remote end sets the R bit in control word to 1. Upon receiving apacket in which the R bit is 1, the local end reports the CES_RDI alarm.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe packet loss rate at the remote end crosses the specified threshold.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.l Cause 2: The link is looped.l Cause 3: The link is congested.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signals degrade on the link.1. See 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Cause 2: The link is looped.1. Release the loop.
Step 3 Cause 3: The link is congested.1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or
eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
![Page 310: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/310.jpg)
Related InformationNone.
A.3.39 CES_STRAYPKT_EXC
DescriptionThe CES_STRAYPKT_EXC is an alarm indicating that, in a time unit, the number of erroredpackets in CES services crosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when the board detects that,within a period (10s), the number of errored packets in CES services per second crosses thespecified threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemAn errored packet is discarded once it is detected. As a result, the packet loss rate increases andservices are affected.
Possible CausesCause 1: Links are misconnected.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Links are misconnected.1. Check the link configuration and rectify the fault.
----End
Related InformationIncorrect packets are received when the tracing source field in the RTP head is different fromexpected.
A.3.40 CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT
DescriptionThe CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT is an alarm indicating that the AC circuit on the remoteNE is faulty. On detection of an AC circuit fault, the remote NE sets the L bit in the control wordto 1. When receiving a packet in which the L bit is 1, the local NE reports theCESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT alarm.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
![Page 311: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/311.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The remote NE reports the T_ALOS, UP_E1_AIS, LFA, LMFA, R_LOS, R_LOF, orMS_AIS alarm.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the remote NE reports the T_ALOS, UP_E1_AIS, LFA, LMFA, R_LOS,R_LOF, or MS_AIS alarm.
1. If yes, handle these alarms.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.41 CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI
Description
The CESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI is a remote alarm indication. On detection of the RAI alarm, theremote NE sets the L bit of the control word to 0 and the M field of the control word to 10. Whenreceiving the packet in which the L bit is 0 and the M field is 10, the local NE reports theCESPW_OPPOSITE_RAI alarm.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
![Page 312: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/312.jpg)
Impact on the SystemThe services in the downstream direction of the remote NE are interrupted.
Possible CausesCause 1: The remote NE detects the RAI alarm.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE detects the RAI alarm.1. Clear the ALM_E1RAI alarm on the remote NE.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.42 CFCARD_FAILED
DescriptionThe CFCARD_FAILED is an alarm indicating that the operation on the CF card fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the CFCARD_FAILED alarm occurs, the database cannot be backed up to the CF cardor be restored from the CF card. This alarm may cause rollback of the package loading upgrade.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The CF card fails to be initialized.l Cause 2: The file system of the CF card does not match.l Cause 3: The system control and communication board is faulty, and the file system of the
CF card fails to be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The CF card fails to be initialized.
Cause 2: The file system of the CF card does not match.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
![Page 313: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/313.jpg)
1. Replace the CF card and check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
Yes End the alarm handling.
No Go to Cause 3.
Step 2 Cause 3: The system control and communication board is faulty, and the file system of the CFcard fails to be created.1. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the system control and communication
board.2. If yes, perform a cold reset on the system control and communication board. Then, check
whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
Yes End the alarm handling.
No Replace the system control and communication board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.43 CFCARD_OFFLINE
DescriptionThe CFCARD_OFFLINE is an alarm indicating that the CF card is out of service.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the CFCARD_OFFLINE alarm occurs, the database cannot be backed up to the CF cardor be restored from the CF card. This alarm may cause rollback of the package loading upgrade.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The CF card is not inserted.l Cause 2: The CF card is in poor contact with the system control and communication board.l Cause 3: The CF card is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
![Page 314: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/314.jpg)
l Cause 4: The system control and communication board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The CF card is not inserted.1. Check whether the CF card is installed on the system control and communication board.
If... Then...
No Install the CF card.
Yes Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The CF card is in poor contact with the system control and communication board.1. Check whether the CF card is loosened. If yes, re-insert the CF card.2. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
Yes End the alarm handling.
No Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The CF card is faulty.1. Replace the CF card.2. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
Yes End the alarm handling.
No Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: The system control and communication board is faulty.1. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the system control and communication
board.2. If yes, perform a cold reset on the system control and communication board. Then, check
whether the alarm is cleared.3. If the alarm persists, replace the system control and communication board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.44 CHCS
Description
The CHCS is an alarm indicating the correctable cell error. When a correctable bit error isdetected in the cell header, the CHCS alarm occurs.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
![Page 315: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/315.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the CHCS alarm occurs, the services are not affected. The alarm only indicates that somecells with a bit error are detected during cell delimitation at the ATM port.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive tunnel corresponding to the alarmed ATM
port.l Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive tunnel corresponding to the alarmed ATM port.1. On the NMS, check whether the receive tunnel reports any alarms about excessive bit errors,
such as B1_SD, B2_SD, and B3_SD.2. On the NMS, check whether the service is looped.3. If yes, modify the service configuration to release the loop, and then check whether the
alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty.1. Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the CHCS alarm and check whether the alarm
is cleared. For details, see 8.7.1 Cold Reset.2. Optional: If the CHCS alarm persists after the cold reset, replace the alarmed board and
check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.NOTE
Board replacement is not recommended because the alarm does not affect the services.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.45 CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE
DescriptionThe CLK_NO_TRACE_MODE alarm indicates that a clock source is not in locked mode. Thisalarm is reported when the current clock does not trace any clock sources.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
![Page 316: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/316.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the clock mode.
l 0x01: holdoverl 0x02: free-run
Impact on the System
When the clock source is not in the locked mode, the system clock is not of high quality. Servicesmay have bit errors when the clocks of the NEs are not synchronized. Pointer justification mayoccur in TDM services. If a base station traces a clock that is carried by an Ethernet service, analarm indicating a large clock frequency deviation may occur.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The system clock source priority table is not configured.l Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The system clock source priority table is not configured.1. Configure the system clock source priority table. For details, see Configuring the Clock
Sources.
Step 2 Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail.1. Troubleshoot the synchronization sources that are listed in the clock source priority table.
If... Then...
The synchronization source is anexternal clock
Handle the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm.
The synchronization source is a lineclock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the lineboard.
The synchronization source is an IFclock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the IF board.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
![Page 317: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/317.jpg)
If... Then...
The synchronization source is atributary clock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the tributaryboard.
The synchronization source is anEthernet clock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the Ethernetboard.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.46 COMMUN_FAIL
DescriptionThe COMMUN_FAIL is an alarm indicating the inter-board communication failure. This alarmis reported when the communication between a board and the SCC board is interrupted.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the port. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the path on which the alarm is generated.Parameter 2 is always 0x00. Parameter 3 has the followingmeanings:
l 0x03: inter-board Ethernet communication
Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Parameters 4 and 5 are reserved, and their values are always 0xFF.
Impact on the SystemThe NE configuration cannot be delivered to the board or the board cannot work. Consequently,the services cannot be configured or the protection switching function is unavailable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
![Page 318: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/318.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: A certain board is reset.l Cause 2: A board and the backplane are connected improperly.l Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.l Cause 4: A slot is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A certain board is reset.1. After you reset the board, the alarm disappears automatically.
Step 2 Cause 2: A board and the backplane are connected improperly.1. Remove and insert the alarmed board. For details, see 6.1 Removing a Board and 6.2
Inserting a Board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm disappears after the board isremoved and inserted
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced.
Clear the alarm according to the solutionfor the alarm that is generated when aboard is faulty.
Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.1. Replace the alarmed board, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 6
Part Replacement.
If... Then...
The alarm disappears after the board isreplaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Clear the alarm according to the solutionfor the alarm that is generated when aslot is faulty.
Step 4 Cause 3: A slot is faulty.1. Contact Huawei engineers to handle the faulty slot.
TIPThe slot becomes faulty due to broken pins or bent pins. Remove the board, and use a torch to checkwhether any pins are broken or bent.
2. If a vacant slot is available, insert the board in the vacant slot, and then update the dataon the NMS so that the board can work normally.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.47 CONFIG_NOSUPPORT
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
![Page 319: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/319.jpg)
Description
The CONFIG_NOSUPPORT is an alarm indicating that the configuration is not supported. Thisalarm is reported if the ODU detects that the specified parameters do not meet the requirementsof the ODU.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates that the configuration data does not meet the requirements.l 0x01: The frequency is set incorrectly.l 0x02: The T/R spacing is set incorrectly.l 0x03: The transmit power is set incorrectly.l 0x04: The ATPC threshold is set incorrectly.l 0x05: The bandwidth is set incorrectly.l 0x06: The modulation mode is set incorrectly.
Impact on the System
When the CONFIG_NOSUPPORT alarm occurs, the ODU fails to work normally. If theequipment is configured with the 1+1 FD protection, the active ODU generates theCONFIG_NOSUPPORT alarm. In this case, the IF 1+1 protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The type and configuration parameters of the ODU do not match the requirements.l Cause 2: The AM parameters are incorrectly changed. (This cause can be verified only
when Parameter 1 is 0x03.)
NOTE
Perform the handling procedure of Cause 2 if the following conditions are met: The AM function is enabledon the radio link; the transmit power configured for the ODU is lower than the maximum rated power inAM guaranteed capacity mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The type and configuration parameters of the ODU do not match the requirements.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
![Page 320: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/320.jpg)
1. Determine the parameter that does not meet the requirement according to the alarmparameter. Then, handle the fault accordingly.
If... Then...
The alarm parameter takes a value from0x01 to 0x03
Perform the operation described in Step1.2.
The alarm parameter takes a value from0x04 to 0x06
Perform the operation described in Step1.3.
2. Check whether the parameters of the ODU interface meet the requirements of networkplanning. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.
If... Then...
The parameters meet the requirements ofnetwork planning
Use the ODU of the proper model.
The parameters do not meet therequirements of network planning
Modify the ODU interface parameters.
3. Check whether the parameters of the IF interface meet the requirements of networkplanning. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.
If... Then...
The parameters meet the requirements ofnetwork planning
Replace the IF board.
The parameters do not meet therequirements of network planning
Modify the IF interface parameters. Fordetails, see Configuring the IF/ODUInformation of a Radio Link.
Step 2 Cause 2: The AM parameters are incorrectly changed. (This cause can be verified only whenParameter 1 is 0x03.)1. Verify that the alarm is caused by incorrect change of AM parameters.
Perform the handling procedure of Cause 2 if the following conditions are met:
l The AM function is enabled on the radio link.l The transmit power configured for the ODU is lower than the maximum rated power in
AM guaranteed capacity mode
If... Then...
The conditions are met and the transmitpower needs to be changed
Perform a cold reset for the alarmedODU.
The conditions are met but the transmitpower does not need to be changed
Change the parameters of ODU interfacesto recover the original value of transmitpower.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
![Page 321: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/321.jpg)
A.3.48 DBMS_DELETE
Description
The DBMS_DELETE alarm indicates that a database is being deleted. This alarm is reportedwhen a user runs a command to delete the database and the NE is in Deleting Database state.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
Parameters
None
Impact on the System
All data is lost if an NE is powered off or a system control board is cold reset within 48 hours.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: A database is deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the main menu.
The NE Configuration Data Management window is displayed.
Step 2 Select the alarmed NE, and click .
Step 3 Under NE Configuration Data Management, select the NE.
Step 4 Choose Back up NE Data > Back up Database to SCC.
----End
Related Information
None
A.3.49 DBMS_ERROR
Description
The DBMS_ERROR is an alarm indicating that errors occur in the processing of the systemdatabase.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
302
![Page 322: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/322.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the DBMS_ERROR alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system databaseprocessing. The system configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returnedfor certain query and setting commands, and certain system functions cannot work.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The database processing fails or the database is damaged.
l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The database processing fails or the database is damaged.
1. Reset the system control board.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isreset
End the fault handling.
The alarm persists after the board isreset
Ensure that the system control board isnormal.
Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
1. 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.50 DBMS_PROTECT_MODE
Description
The DBMS_PROTECT_MODE is an alarm indicating that the system database is in protectionmode.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
303
![Page 323: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/323.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Processing alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, it indicates that errors occur in the system database processing and thesystem configuration may be lost. As a result, the failure indication is returned for some queryand setting commands, and some system functions are unavailable.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The database enters the protection mode due to frequent resets of the NE software.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The database enters the protection mode due to frequent resets of the NE software.1. 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.51 DCNSIZE_OVER
Description
The DCNSIZE_OVER is an alarm indicating an over-sized DCN network.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
304
![Page 324: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/324.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the size of the DCN network.
Impact on the Systeml Some NEs become unreachable to the NMS because DCN packets cannot be forwarded
timely due to insufficient CPU resources.l The DCN network is prone to route flapping and storms.
Possible CausesCause: The size of the DCN network crosses the preset threshold.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The size of the DCN network crosses the preset threshold.1. Replan the DCN network based on actual networking conditions.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.52 DDN_LFA
DescriptionThe DDN_LFA is an alarm indicating loss of basic frame alignment for framed E1 services.This alarm occurs when DDN side fails to receive the basic frame alignment signal for framedE1 services.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemE1 services on the alarmed board are unavailable.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The interconnected user equipment is faulty.l Cause 2: The service frame format is configured incorrectly.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
305
![Page 325: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/325.jpg)
l Cause 3: The alarmed board has hardware faults.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The interconnected user equipment is faulty.1. Troubleshoot the interconnected user equipment.
Step 2 Cause 2: The service frame format is configured incorrectly.1. Set the E1 frame format of the local port to the same as that of the opposite port.
Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board has hardware faults.1. Check whether the alarmed board also reports any hardware alarms, such as
HARD_BAD.2. If yes, perform a cold reset on the alarmed board and check whether the DDN_LFA alarm
is cleared.
CAUTIONIf the service on the board is not protected, a cold reset on the board causes serviceinterruptions.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the board.
----End
Related Information
Basic frame
As defined in ITU-T G.704, a basic frame is an even frame with frame alignment sequence (FAS)or an odd frame with non frame alignment sequence (NFAS).
A.3.53 DOWN_E1_AIS
Description
The DOWN_E1_AIS is an alarm of the 2 Mbit/s downlink signal. This alarm occurs when thetributary board detects the 2 Mbit/s downlink signal of all 1s.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
306
![Page 326: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/326.jpg)
Impact on the SystemWhen the DOWN_E1_AIS alarm occurs, the E1 signal in the alarmed path is unavailable.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The opposite NE transmits the E1_AIS alarm.l Cause 2: On the local NE, the receive unit of the tributary board or the system control and
cross-connect board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE transmits the E1_AIS alarm.1. Check whether the opposite NE reports the UP_E1_AIS or T_ALOS alarm.
If... Then...
The opposite NE reports the UP_E1_AISor T_ALOS alarm
Clear the alarm immediately.
The opposite NE does not report theUP_E1_AIS or T_ALOS alarm
Ensure that the board on the local NE isnormal.
Step 2 Cause 2: On the local NE, the receive unit of the tributary board or the system control and cross-connect board is faulty.1. Replace the board where the alarmed tributary unit is located. Then, check whether
the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the system control and cross-connect board on thelocal NE.
----End
Related InformationIf EFP8 reports the alarm, the alarm parameters have the meanings listed inTable A-6.
Table A-6 Alarm Parameters of EFP8
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 0x01, indicates optical interface number.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the number of the path.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
307
![Page 327: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/327.jpg)
A.3.54 DROPRATIO_OVER
Description
The DROPRATIO_OVER alarm indicates that the number of lost packets crosses the thresholdwhen queue congestion occurs at a port. This alarm is reported when the ratio of lost packets onan object under performance monitoring is higher than the expected ratio.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the direction in which traffic crosses the threshold.
l 0x00: Traffic crosses the threshold in the receive direction.l 0x01: Traffic crosses the threshold in the transmit direction.
Impact on the System
Service packet loss occurs.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Service configuration is incorrect.
l Cause 2: Actual traffic exceeds the configured port bandwidth or committed informationrate (CIR).
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Service configuration is incorrect.
1. Check and reconfigure services according to the network plan.
Step 2 Cause 2: Actual traffic exceeds the configured port bandwidth or CIR.
1. 8.18 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or Bandwidth Utilization of EthernetPorts. If traffic is large, check whether a network storm has occurred, and eliminate thesource that illegally sends a large amount of data.
2. If the port bandwidth is too low, follow instructions in Modifying the Port Policy to increaseport bandwidth or expand the network.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
308
![Page 328: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/328.jpg)
Related InformationIf packet loss is indicated in the receive direction, check the method of handling red packets inthe traffic classification configuration. If the method of handling red packets is non-discard,packets may not be actually lost in the receive direction.
A.3.55 E1_LOC
DescriptionThe E1_LOC is an alarm indicating that the uplink 2M clock is lost. This alarm occurs whenthe tributary board fails to extract the clock from the E1 signal.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the E1_LOC occurs, the service is not affected.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The opposite NE is faulty.l Cause 2: The wiring sequence of the cable is incorrect.l Cause 3: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local NE is faulty.l Cause 4: The input E1 signal has an abnormal waveform.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is faulty.1. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.
Step 2 Cause 2: The wiring sequence of the cable is incorrect.1. Redo the cable.
Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local NE is faulty.1. Replace the board where the line unit is located.
Step 4 Cause 4: The input E1 signal has an abnormal waveform.1. Check whether any external interference causes the abnormal waveform of the E1 signal.
If... Then...
There is the external interference The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
309
![Page 329: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/329.jpg)
If... Then...
There is no external interference Contact Huawei engineers.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.56 E1_LOS
DescriptionThe E1_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of the E1 signal. This alarm occurs when the tributaryboard detects the uplink E1 signal of all 0s.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the E1_LOS alarm occurs, the E1 service is interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The cable is not connected or the cable is faulty.l Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty.l Cause 3: The tributary board on the local NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The cable is not connected or the cable is faulty.1. Check whether the cable is connected properly.
If... Then...
The cable is not connected properly Connect the cable properly.
The cable is prepared incorrectly Redo the cable.
Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty.1. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.
Step 3 Cause 3: The tributary board on the local NE is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
310
![Page 330: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/330.jpg)
1. Replace the board where the tributary unit is located.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.57 ETH_APS_LOST
Description
The ETH_APS_LOST is an alarm indicating that the APS frame is lost. This alarm occurs whenno APS frame is received from the protection channel.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the APS protection may fail.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection.l Cause 2: The APS protection group is deactivated.l Cause 3: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends.l Cause 4: The service on the protection channel is interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection.1. On the NMS, check whether the opposite NE is configured with the APS protection. For
details, see Querying MPLS APS Status.
If... Then...
The opposite NE is not configured with the APS protection Go to the next step.
The opposite NE is configured with the APS protection Go to Cause 2.
2. Create a matching APS protection group on the opposite NE, and activate the APS protocol.Check whether the alarm clears.
3. If the alarm persists, proceed to cause 4.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
311
![Page 331: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/331.jpg)
Step 2 Cause 2: The APS protection group is deactivated.
1. Check whether the APS protocol is activated at both ends.
If... Then...
The APS protocol is deactivated at one end Activate the APS protocol at the end.
The APS protocol is activated at both ends Go to Cause 3.
2. Check whether the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends.
1. On the NMS, check whether the settings of the APS protection group are the same at thetwo ends. If the settings differ between the two ends, change them to the same. Then,deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends.
2. Check whether the alarm clears. If the alarm persists, go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: The service on the protection channel is interrupted.
1. Check whether the protection channel reports an alarm related to signal loss or signaldegrade, such as ETH_LOS. If yes, clear the alarm immediately.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.58 ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH
Description
The ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the working and protectionpaths of the APS protection group differ between the two ends. This alarm is reported when theworking and protection paths of one APS protection group at one end are different from thoseat the other end.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, service protection fails.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
312
![Page 332: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/332.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends.l Cause 2: The physical link is connected incorrectly.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends.1. Check whether the APS settings at the two ends are the same. For details, see Querying
MPLS APS Status.2. If the APS settings are different, change the settings to the same. Then, deactivate and
activate the APS protection group at the two ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears.3. If the alarm persists, go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The physical link is connected incorrectly.1. Check whether the fiber or cable is correctly connected between the two ends. If not,
connect the fiber or cable properly.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.59 ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL
Description
The ETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL is an alarm of a protection switching failure. This alarm isreported when the request signal in the transmitted Automatic Protection Switching (APS) frameis different from the bridge signal in the received APS frame and this symptom lasts for 50 ms.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, service protection fails.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
313
![Page 333: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/333.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The settings of the APS protection group differ between the two ends.1. Change the settings to the same. For details, see Creating an MPLS APS Protection Group.
Then, deactivate and activate the APS protection group at the two ends.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.60 ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH
DescriptionThe ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH is an alarm of protection scheme mismatch. This alarm isreported when the information in the received Automatic Protection Switching (APS) frame isdifferent from the APS settings at the local end.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the specific difference.
l 0x01: Indicates that the switching type is different.l 0x02: Indicates that the switching direction is different.l 0x03: Indicates that the revertive mode is different.
Impact on the SystemThis alarm may cause the APS protection failure, and therefore the service protection fails.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The switching type is different.l Cause 2: The switching direction is different.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
314
![Page 334: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/334.jpg)
l Cause 3: The revertive mode is different.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the possible cause of the alarm according to the alarm parameters.
1. Change the settings of the APS protection group to the same at the two ends. For details,see Querying MPLS APS Status. Then, deactivate and activate the APS protection groupat the two ends.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.61 ETH_CFM_LOC
Description
The ETH_CFM_LOC is an alarm indicating the loss of connectivity. This alarm occurs whenthe system fails to receive the CCM packet from the remote MEP in 3.5 connectivity check (CC)periods successively.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3,Parameter 4 (Port)
Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 7 (Direction) Indicates the direction of the local MEP.l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
315
![Page 335: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/335.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 8 (Level) Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low)l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium)l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high)l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)l 0x05: operator MEP level (low)l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium)l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates thesupplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 (RMEPID) Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.
Impact on the Systeml When the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm occurs, the LB and LT detection functions of Ethernet
service OAM are unavailable.
l The service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The line between the local standard MEP and the remote standard MEP is
interrupted.
l Cause 2: The Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEPbelongs is faulty.
l Cause 3: Serious congestion occurs on the network.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line between the local standard MEP and the remote standard MEP is interrupted.
1. Check whether the physical links (such as network cables and fibers) between the standardMEPs are connected properly.
If... Then...
The physical links are connected improperly Connect the physical links properly.
The physical links are connected properly Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the local MEPbelongs is faulty.
1. Check whether Ethernet service in the maintenance association (MA) to which the localMEP belongs is configured correctly.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
316
![Page 336: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/336.jpg)
If... Then...
The service is configured incorrectly Modify the configuration of the service to ensureconsistency at two ends.
The service is configured correctly Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: Serious congestion occurs on the network.1. Check the utilization of bandwidth. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth
or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
----End
Related InformationThe Table A-7 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reportedby the EoS/EoPDH plane.
Table A-7 Alarm Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 MD
Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 MA
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 MEP ID
Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.When these parameters indicate theVCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 -0x10) + 0x80.
Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 17 Indicates the direction of the local MEP.l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low)l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium)l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high)l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)l 0x05: operator MEP level (low)l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium)l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicatesthe supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
317
![Page 337: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/337.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 19, Parameter 20 Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.NOTE
If the alarmed port is a VCTRUNK, theseparameters are not supported.
A.3.62 ETH_CFM_MISMERGE
DescriptionThe ETH_CFM_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating an incorrect connection. This alarm occurswhen the system receives the CCM packet whose MA mismatches or whose priority is lower.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3,Parameter 4 (Port)
Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 7 (Direction) Indicates the direction of the local MEP.l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
318
![Page 338: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/338.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 8 (Level) Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low)l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium)l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high)l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)l 0x05: operator MEP level (low)l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium)l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates thesupplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
Impact on the System
When the ETH_CFM_MISMERGE alarm occurs, the service between the relevant standardMEPs may be interrupted, and the data flow may be routed incorrectly.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the
standard MEPs correspond to are inconsistent.
l Cause 2: The levels of the maintenance domains that the standard MEPs correspond to aredifferent.
l Cause 3: The physical connection is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that the standardMEPs correspond to are inconsistent.
1. Check whether the names of the maintenance domain and the maintenance alliance that thestandard MEPs correspond to are consistent.
If... Then...
The names are inconsistent Set the other names of maintenance domain andmaintenance alliance to ensure consistency at both ends.
The names are consistent Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The levels of the maintenance domains that the standard MEPs correspond to aredifferent.
1. Check whether the MD levels of the standard MEPs are the same.
If... Then...
The levels are different Set the MD levels again to ensure consistency at both ends.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
319
![Page 339: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/339.jpg)
If... Then...
The levels are the same Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The physical connection is incorrect.
1. Check the physical connection of the Ethernet service route and rectify the fault of thephysical connection if any.
----End
Related Information
The Table A-8 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reportedby the EoS/EoPDH plane.
Table A-8 Alarm Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 MD
Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 MA
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 MEP ID
Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.When these parameters indicate theVCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 -0x10) + 0x80.
Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 17 Indicates the direction of the local MEP.l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low)l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium)l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high)l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)l 0x05: operator MEP level (low)l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium)l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicatesthe supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
320
![Page 340: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/340.jpg)
A.3.63 ETH_CFM_RDI
Description
The ETH_CFM_RDI is an alarm indicating the CCM packet with RDI received from the remoteMEP. This alarm occurs when the system receives the CCM packet with RDI from the remotemaintenance end point (MEP).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3,Parameter 4 (Port)
Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 7 (Direction) Indicates the direction of the local MEP.l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 8 (Level) Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low).l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium).l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high).l 0x03: provider MEP level (low).l 0x04: provider MEP level (high).l 0x05: operator MEP level (low).l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium).l 0x07: operator MEP level (high).NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates thesupplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 (RMEPID) Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
321
![Page 341: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/341.jpg)
Impact on the Systeml When the ETH_CFM_RDI alarm occurs, the loopback (LB) and link trace (LT) detection
functions of Ethernet service OAM are unavailable.l The service between the relevant standard MEPs may be interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The remote MEP fails to receive the correct CCM packet.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote MEP fails to receive the correct CCM packet.1. Determine the alarmed port according to the alarm parameter.2. Check whether the remote MEP that is connected to the port reports the
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE, ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI, or ETH_CFM_LOC alarm.
----End
Related InformationThe Table A-9 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarm reportedby the EoS/EoPDH plane.
Table A-9 Alarm Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 MD
Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 MA
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 MEP ID
Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.When these parameters indicate theVCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 -0x10) + 0x80.
Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 17 Indicates the direction of the local MEP.l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
322
![Page 342: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/342.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low)l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium)l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high)l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)l 0x05: operator MEP level (low)l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium)l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicatesthe supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
Parameter 19, Parameter 20 Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.NOTE
If the alarmed port is a VCTRUNK, theseparameters are not supported.
A.3.64 ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI
Description
The ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI is an alarm indicating the errored frame. This alarm occurs whenthe system receives invalid CCM packets.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3,Parameter 4 (Port)
Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 5, Parameter 6 (VLAN ID) Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
323
![Page 343: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/343.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 7 (Direction) Indicates the direction of the local MEP.l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 8 (Level) Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low)l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium)l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high)l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)l 0x05: operator MEP level (low)l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium)l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicates thesupplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
Impact on the Systeml When the ETH_CFM_UNEXPERI alarm occurs, the LB and LT detection functions of
Ethernet service OAM are unavailable.l The service may become abnormal due to the loop.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: No remote MEP is configured.l Cause 2: The configuration of the MEPs at both ends is inconsistent. For example, the
connectivity check (CC) periods are different, and the IDs of the MEPs are in conflict.l Cause 3: The service is looped back and the looped packet is received.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: No remote MEP is configured.1. Check whether the remote MEP is configured. If not, configure the remote MEP first.
Step 2 Cause 2: The configuration of the MEPs at both ends is inconsistent. For example, theconnectivity check (CC) periods are different, and the IDs of the MEPs are in conflict.1. Check whether the CC periods set at the MEPs are the same.
If... Then...
The CC periods are different Change the CC periods to ensure consistency at bothends.
The CC periods are the same Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the IDs of the MEPs in the maintenance domain are in conflict.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
324
![Page 344: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/344.jpg)
If... Then...
The IDs are in conflict Change the conflicting IDs.
The IDs are not in conflict Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The service is looped back and the looped packet is received.1. Check whether any loop exists at each IP port of the service trail. If yes, release the loop
and clear the alarm.
----End
Related InformationThe Table A-10 describes the meanings of the parameters in the ETH_CFM_LOC alarmreported by the EoS/EoPDH plane.
Table A-10 Alarm Parameters
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 MD
Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 MA
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 MEP ID
Parameter 11 to Parameter 14 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.When these parameters indicate theVCTRUNK ID, parameter values = (0x01 -0x10) + 0x80.
Parameter 15, Parameter 16 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 17 Indicates the direction of the local MEP.l 0x00: The port is direction insensitive.l 0x01: The port is in the ingress direction.l 0x02: The port is in the egress direction.
Parameter 18 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.l 0x00: consumer MEP level (low)l 0x01: consumer MEP level (medium)l 0x02: consumer MEP level (high)l 0x03: provider MEP level (low)l 0x04: provider MEP level (high)l 0x05: operator MEP level (low)l 0x06: operator MEP level (medium)l 0x07: operator MEP level (high)NOTE
Consumer indicates the user, provider indicatesthe supplier, and operator indicates the carrier.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
325
![Page 345: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/345.jpg)
A.3.65 ETH_EFM_DF
DescriptionThe ETH_EFM_DF is an alarm indicating negotiation failure. This alarm occurs when the point-to-point OAM protocol negotiation fails at the Ethernet port.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the reason why the negotiation fails.
l 0x01: The local link is faulty.l 0x02: The local end fails to receive any OAM packets in a specified period.l 0x03: The OAM settings of the opposite end do not meet the requirements of
the local end.l 0x04: The OAM settings of the local end do not meet the requirements of the
opposite end.
Impact on the SystemWhen the ETH_EFM_DF alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port may be interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty.l Cause 2: The point to point OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end.l Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty.1. Check whether the physical port is faulty. If yes, replace the board where the Ethernet
port is located.
Step 2 Cause 2: The point to point OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
326
![Page 346: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/346.jpg)
1. Enable the point to point OAM protocol at the opposite end.
Step 3 Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.1. Reconfigure the point to point OAM protocol and ensure the consistency at both ends.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.66 ETH_EFM_EVENT
DescriptionThe ETH_EFM_EVENT is an alarm indicating the performance event reported on the oppositeNE. This alarm occurs when the local end receives the link error indication packet (OAMPDUM)from the opposite end.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the link event.
l 0x01: errored symbol period.l 0x02: errored frame.l 0x03: errored frame period.l 0x04: errored frame seconds summary.
Impact on the SystemWhen the ETH_EFM_EVENT alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port may be interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The physical port at the local end is faulty.l Cause 2: The equipment at the opposite end is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
327
![Page 347: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/347.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port at the local end is faulty.1. Check whether the physical port is faulty. If yes, replace the board where the Ethernet
port is located.
Step 2 Cause 2: The equipment at the opposite end is faulty.1. Rectify the fault of the equipment at the opposite end.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.67 ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK
DescriptionThe ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK is an alarm indicating the loopback. This alarm occurs when thelocal end initiates a loopback or responds to a loopback request from the opposite end.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the state of the loopback.
l 0x01: The local end initiates a loopback.l 0x02: The local end responds to a loop request from the opposite end.
Impact on the SystemWhen the ETH_EFM_LOOPBACK alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port is looped back.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The local end initiates a loopback.l Cause 2: The opposite end initiates a loopback.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
328
![Page 348: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/348.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local end initiates a loopback.
1. According to the alarm parameter, it is determined that the local end initiates a loopback.Determine the causes of the loopback initiated at the local end and release the loopback assoon as possible.
Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite end initiates a loopback.
1. According to the alarm parameter, it is determined that the opposite end initiates a loopback.Determine the causes of the loopback initiated at the opposite port and release the loopbackas soon as possible.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.68 ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
Description
The ETH_EFM_REMFAULT is an alarm indicating the fault on the opposite NE. This alarmoccurs when the local end receives the fault indication packet (OAMPDUM) from the oppositeend.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the fault type at the opposite end.
l 0x01: link fault.l 0x02: dying gasp.l 0x03: critical event.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
329
![Page 349: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/349.jpg)
Impact on the System
When the ETH_EFM_REMFAULT alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port may beinterrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The opposite NE is reset.l Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE is reset.1. Check whether the opposite NE is reset frequently.
If... Then...
The opposite NE is reset frequently Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.
The opposite NE is not reset frequently Reset the opposite NE, and the alarm iscleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty.1. Rectify the fault on the opposite NE.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.69 ETH_LOS
Description
The ETH_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of Ethernet port connection.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the ETH_LOS alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed port is interrupted.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
330
![Page 350: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/350.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The negotiation fails because the transmit port and receive port work in different
modes.
l Cause 2: The cable or fiber is faulty.
l Cause 3: The local NE is faulty.
l Cause 4: The opposite NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The negotiation fails because the transmit port and receive port work in different modes.1. Check whether the transmit port and receive port work in the same mode.
If... Then...
The transmit port and receive port workin different modes
Correctly set the working modes of thetransmit port and receive port.
The transmit port and receive port workin the same mode
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The cable or fiber is faulty.1. Check the network cable or fiber jumper connected to the alarmed port.
If... Then...
The network cable is loose or damaged Connect the network cable properly orreplace the damaged network cable.
The connector of the fiber jumper is dirty Clean the connector.
The connector or fiber is damaged Insert the connector properly or replace thedamaged fiber jumper.
The connection is normal Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The local NE is faulty.1. Check whether any fault occurs on the alarmed port.
If... Then...
The equipment is faulty Replace the alarmed board on the local NE.
The equipment is normal Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: The opposite NE is faulty.1. Check whether any fault occurs on the equipment interconnected with the alarmed port.2. Rectify the fault.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
331
![Page 351: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/351.jpg)
A.3.70 ETH_NO_FLOW
Description
The ETH_NO_FLOW is an alarm indicating that the Ethernet port has no flow. This alarm isreported when an enabled Ethernet port is in link up state but has no flow.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the MAC port number.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the path ID.
Parameter 2 indicates the most significant bits and the value isalways 0x00. Parameter 3 indicates the least significant bits and thevalue is always 0x01.
Parameter 4 Indicates the direction in which the flow is unavailable.
l 0x00: Rx direction.l 0x01: Tx direction.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, it indicates that the alarmed port has no flow.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The port is enabled and in link up state, but is configured with no service.
l Cause 2: The port is enabled and in link up state, but does not transmit any packet due tothe service fault at the local end.
l Cause 3: The port is enabled and in link up state, but does not receive any packet due tothe service fault at the remote end.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
332
![Page 352: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/352.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the MAC port number, alarmed board, and cause according to the parameters.
Step 2 Cause 1: No services are configured.
1. Configure the Ethernet service.
Step 3 Cause 2: No services are available.
If... Then...
No services are available in the transmitdirection
Check whether the service is normal at thelocal end.
No services are available in the receivedirection
Check whether the service is normal at theremote end.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.71 ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL
Description
The ETHOAM_DISCOVER_FAIL alarm indicates a discovery failure when the point-to-pointETH-OAM function is enabled. This alarm occurs when the OAM function is enabled at a portof a board and the negotiation between the port and the opposite equipment fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
333
![Page 353: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/353.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 4 Indicates the reason why the negotiation fails.
l 0x01: A fault occurs at the local receive link.l 0x02: The local end fails to transmit OAM packets.l 0x03: The OAM packets from the opposite end are not received.l 0x04: The OAM configuration of the opposite end does not meet
the requirements of the local end.l 0x05: The OAM configuration of the local end does not meet
the requirements of the opposite end.l 0x06-0xff: other unknown reasons.
Impact on the SystemThe OAM function based on IEEE 802.3ah is unavailable.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty.l Cause 2: The P2P OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end.l Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The physical port of the local end is faulty.1. Check whether the physical port is faulty. If yes, replace the alarmed board.
Step 2 Cause 2: The P2P OAM protocol is not enabled at the opposite end.1. Enable the P2P OAM protocol at the opposite end. For details, see Enabling the OAM
Auto-Discovery Function.
Step 3 Cause 3: The OAM configuration at both ends is inconsistent.1. Reconfigure the P2P OAM protocol and ensure the consistency at both ends. For details,
see Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.72 ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT
DescriptionThe ETHOAM_RMT_CRIT_FAULT is an alarm indicating that the point-to-point EthernetOAM detects a critical fault at the remote end. This alarm occurs when a port with the OAMfunction enabled receives the OAM packets that contain critical fault information from theopposite end.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
334
![Page 354: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/354.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01.
Parameter 4 Indicates the type of the fault.
l 0x01: A link fault occurs at the port of the opposite end.l 0x02: Irrecoverable problems such as the power failure occur at
the opposite end.l 0x03-0xff: other faults.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, the services on the link may be interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: A link fault occurs at the remote MEP.l Cause 2: Irrecoverable problems such as power failure occur at the remote MEP.l Cause 3: Other faults occur at the remote MEP.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the fault type according to Parameter 4.
If... Then...
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 Go to Cause 1.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Go to Cause 2.
Parameter 4 is a value from 0x03 to 0xff. Go to Cause 3.
Step 2 Cause 1: A link fault occurs at the remote MEP.1. Handle the ETH_LOS alarm at the remote port.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
335
![Page 355: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/355.jpg)
Step 3 Cause 2: Irrecoverable problems such as power failure occur at the remote MEP.1. Handle the problems such as power failure at the remote MEP, and recover the power supply
to the remote MEP.
Step 4 Cause 3: Other faults occur at the remote MEP.1. Contact Huawei technical support engineers.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.73 ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP
Description
The ETHOAM_RMT_LOOP is an alarm indicating that a remote loopback is initiated when thepoint-to-point Ethernet OAM function is enabled. This alarm occurs when the local equipmentinitiates a remote loopback or responds to the remote loopback initiated by the oppositeequipment.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01.
Parameter 4 l 0x01: The loopback is initiated.l 0x02: The loopback is responded.
Impact on the System
The services are looped back between the local equipment and the opposite equipment. Theservices and other protocol packets are interrupted.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
336
![Page 356: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/356.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The local end issues a loopback command and the opposite end responds to the
command.l Cause 2: The opposite end issues a loopback command and the local end responds to the
command.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the type of loopback according to the alarmparameters.
If... Then...
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 Go to Cause 1.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 1: The local end issues a loopback command and the opposite end responds to thecommand.1. Determine the causes of the loopback at the local end and release the loopback.
Step 3 Cause 2: The opposite end issues a loopback command and the local end responds to thecommand.1. Determine the causes of the loopback at the opposite end and release the loopback.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.74 ETHOAM_RMT_SD
DescriptionThe ETHOAM_RMT_SD alarm indicates that the point-to-point Ethernet-OAM detects thedegradation of remote Ethernet performance. This alarm occurs when a port with the OAMfunction enabled receives link event notification packets from the opposite end.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
337
![Page 357: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/357.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01.
Parameter 4 Indicates the type of the received link event.
l 0x01: errored frame eventl 0x02: errored frame period eventl 0x03: errored frame second event
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, the performance of services degrades.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end.l Cause 2: The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are inappropriate.l Cause 3: The link performance deteriorates.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end.1. Check whether the link event notification function is enabled at the opposite end.
If... Then...
If yes Disable the link event notification function at the opposite end.
If not Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The link performance thresholds of the opposite end are inappropriate.1. Check whether the link performance thresholds of the opposite end are appropriate.
If... Then...
If not Set the thresholds to appropriate values.
If yes Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The link performance deteriorates.1. Improve the link performance at the opposite end so that the opposite end does not send
any link event notification packet to the local end. Then, the alarm at the local end is clearedautomatically.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
338
![Page 358: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/358.jpg)
A.3.75 ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
DescriptionThe ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP is an alarm indicating the loopback of the MAC port that runs thepoint-to-point OAM protocol. This alarm occurs when the MAC port of a board receives theOAM protocol packet sent by the port itself or the board after the loop detection function isenabled.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Environmental alarms
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the loopback type.
l 0x01: selfloop of the port.l 0x02: selfloop of the board.
Impact on the SystemWhen the ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP alarm occurs, a network storm may occur due to theloopback.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The cable connected to the port is self-looped, or the port is connected to a LAN
that has a loopback, or the PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port.l Cause 2: Two ports of the board are connected through cables or two ports of the board are
connected to the same LAN.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the loopback type according to Parameter 1, and then handle the loopbackaccordingly.
If... Then...
The value of Parameter 1 is 0x01 Go to Cause 1.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
339
![Page 359: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/359.jpg)
If... Then...
The value of Parameter 1 is 0x02 Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 1: The cable connected to the port is self-looped, or the port is connected to a LAN thathas a loopback, or the PHY/MAC loopback is manually configured at the port.
If... Then...
The PHY/MAC loopback is manuallyconfigured at the port
Manually release the PHY/MAC loopback (orwait five minutes for the automatic release bythe NE if the automatic loopback releasefunction is enabled on the NE). Then, theselfloop is released.
The cable connected to the port is self-looped
Connect the cable properly to release theselfloop.
The port is connected to a LAN that has aloopback
Release the loopback on the LAN, or break theconnection between the port and the LAN, torelease the selfloop.
Step 3 Cause 2: Two ports of the board are connected through cables or two ports of the board areconnected to the same LAN.1. Check whether two ports of the board are connected through cables or whether two ports
of the board are connected to the same LAN.
If... Then...
The two ports are connected throughcables
Disconnect the cables to release theselfloop.
The two ports are connected to the samenetwork
Break the connection between a port and theLAN to release the selfloop.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.76 ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP
DescriptionThe ETHOAM_VCG_SELF_LOOP alarm indicates that a VCTRUNK port is looped back whenthe point-to-point Ethernet OAM function is enabled. This alarm occurs when the loopbackdetection function is enabled and the VCTRUNK port receives the OAM protocol packetstransmitted by the port itself or the board where the VCTRUNK port resides.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
340
![Page 360: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/360.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Environment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the loopback type.
l 0x01: The port is self-looped.l 0x02: The board is self-looped.l 0x03-0xff: unknown types.
Impact on the System
If the function of automatic shutdown in the case of a selfloop is enabled at the alarmed port,the services at the alarmed port are interrupted. Otherwise, a network storm may occur.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: A loopback occurs on the lines connected to one VCTRUNK.
l Cause 2: The lines connected to two VCTRUNKs on the same board are interconnected.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the type of loopback according to the alarmparameters.
If... Then...
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 Go to Cause 1.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 1: The port is self-looped.
1. Release the loopback at the port.
2. Reconfigure the lines connected to the VCTRUNK port and ensure that the port is not self-looped.
Step 3 Cause 2: The board is self-looped.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
341
![Page 361: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/361.jpg)
1. Reconfigure the lines connected to the VCTRUNK ports and ensure that the lines connectedto any two VCTRUNK ports on the same board are not interconnected.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.77 EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS
Description
The EX_ETHOAM_CC_LOS is an alarm indicating the loss of periodic connectivity check(CC) packets. This alarm occurs when the sink MEP fails to receive CC packets from the samesource MEP in a period (3.5 transmission periods of CC packets at the source MEP).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.
Parameter 5 to Parameter 8 Indicates the ID of the local MEP.
Parameter 9, Parameter 10 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
l PORT number, Parameter 9 is 0x00.l VCTRUNK number, Parameter 9 is 0x80.
Parameter 11, Parameter 12 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 13 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.
Parameter 14 to Parameter 17 Indicates the ID of the remote MEP.
Parameter 18 - Parameter 21 Indicates the ID of the local MEP.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
342
![Page 362: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/362.jpg)
Impact on the System
A unidirectional connectivity failure occurs in the Ethernet service between two MEPs.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The line between two MEPs is interrupted.
l Cause 2: The Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are faulty.
l Cause 3: The services between two MEPs are congested or interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line between two MEPs is interrupted.
1. Check whether the physical links (such as network cables or optical fibers) that carryservices between the two MEPs are correctly connected.
If... Then...
If not Re-connect the cables to rectify the faults on physical links.
If yes Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs are faulty.
1. Check whether the Ethernet services in the MA to which the alarmed MEP belongs areconfigured correctly.
If... Then...
If not Modify the configuration to ensure consistency at both ends.
If yes Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The services between two MEPs are congested or interrupted.
1. Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth oreliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.78 EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT
Description
The EX_ETHOAM_MPID_CNFLCT is an alarm indicating the conflict of MPIDs. This alarmoccurs when two MEPs in one MD have the same maintenance point identity (MPID) and oneMEP receives the packets from the other MEP.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
343
![Page 363: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/363.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Environment alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Indicates the ID of the local MEP.
Parameter 5, Parameter 6 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
l PORT number, Parameter 9 is 0x00.l VCTRUNK number, Parameter 9 is 0x80.
Parameter 7, Parameter 8 Indicates the VLAN ID of the MEP.
Parameter 9 Indicates the MD level of the local MEP.
Parameter 10 to Parameter 13 Indicates the ID of the local MEP.
Impact on the SystemMPIDs must be unique on a network. When this alarm occurs, the LB and LT functions areabnormal and OAM packets are received incorrectly.
Possible CausesCause 1: At least two MEPs in an MD have the same MPID.
ProcedureStep 1 Cause 1: At least two MEPs in an MD have the same MPID.
1. Check the alarm on the NMS and determine the associated MP ID according to the alarmparameters.
2. Query the information about the MEP. Delete the incorrect MEPs and create MEPs withunique MP IDs.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
344
![Page 364: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/364.jpg)
A.3.79 EXT_SYNC_LOS
DescriptionThe EXT_SYNC_LOS is an alarm of the loss of the external clock source.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the Systeml When the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm occurs, if only the external clock source and internal
clock source are configured in the clock source priority list, the NE traces the internal clocksource after the external clock source is lost and enters the free-run state 24 hours later.
l If another valid clock source of higher priority and good quality is configured in the clocksource priority list, however, the clock protection switching occurs.
Possible CausesCause 1: The external clock source is configured in the clock source priority list, but the externalclock source cannot be detected or become invalid.
ProcedureStep 1 Cause 1: The external clock source is configured in the clock source priority list, but the external
clock source cannot be detected or become invalid.1. Check whether the equipment that provides the external clock source is faulty.
If... Then...
The equipment is faulty Rectify the fault.
The equipment is normal Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the cable that connects the external clock source is normal.
If... Then...
The cable is abnormal Replace the cable.
The cable is normal Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
345
![Page 365: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/365.jpg)
A.3.80 FAN_AGING
DescriptionThe FAN_AGING is an alarm of the aged fan. This alarm occurs when the fan rotates at a speedlower than eighty percent of the nominal speed.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the number of the alarmed fan.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, the temperature of the NE is too high and impacts the long-termoperation of the NE.
Possible CausesCause 1: The fan is aged.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The fan is aged.1. Replace the fan.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.81 FAN_FAIL
DescriptionThe FAN_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the fan is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
346
![Page 366: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/366.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the number of the fan.
Impact on the System
When the FAN_FAIL alarm occurs, the heat dissipation of the system is affected.
After an alarm is reported, clear it immediately. Otherwise, services may be interrupted orequipment may be damaged.
When a fan is faulty, perform the following operations:
l Replace the faulty fan with one that works properly within a period of 96 hours if theambient temperature ranges from 0°C to 40°C .
l Replace the faulty fan with one that works properly within a period of 24 hours if theambient temperature is higher than 40°C .
When multiple fans are faulty, replace them immediately.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly.l Cause 2: Fan failure occurs.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly.1. Remove the fan board. Clean the dust on the fan and reinsert the fan board.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isremoved and inserted
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isremoved and inserted
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: Fan failure occurs.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
347
![Page 367: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/367.jpg)
1. Replace the alarmed fan board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.82 FCS_ERR
Description
The FCS_ERR is an alarm indicating the errors of frame check sequence (FCS). This alarmoccurs when a board detects FCS errors in the received frames.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the VCTRUNK number where the alarm occurs.
Impact on the System
When the FCS_ERR alarm occurs, if the encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parametersare inconsistent at both ends of Ethernet services, the services may have errors and even becomeinterrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are inconsistent at both
ends of services.
l Cause 2: Service channels have errors.
l Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
348
![Page 368: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/368.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are inconsistent at both endsof services.
1. Check whether the encapsulation protocols or encapsulation parameters are consistent atboth ends of services.
If... Then...
The protocols are inconsistent Correct the configuration data.
The protocols are consistent Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the encapsulation parameters are consistent at both ends of services.
If... Then...
The parameters are inconsistent Correct the configuration data.
The parameters are consistent Go to the next step.
Step 2 Cause 2: Service channels have errors.
1. Check whether any error alarm or performance event occurs on the line board that carriesthe services.
If... Then...
Yes Handle the alarm or performance event.
No Go to the next step.
Step 3 Cause 3: The alarmed board is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.83 FLOW_OVER
Description
The FLOW_OVER is an alarm indicating that the data flow received by the Ethernet port exceedsthe threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
349
![Page 369: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/369.jpg)
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the receive or transmit direction in which traffic crosses the specifiedthreshold.
l 0x00: the receive directionl 0x01: the transmit direction
Impact on the System
When the FLOW_OVER alarm occurs, the extra data may be discarded by the port.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The traffic threshold of the local port is very low.
l Cause 2: The opposite end transmits excessive data flow.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The traffic threshold of the local port is very low.
1. Increase the traffic threshold of the local port to a value that is lower than the rate of thelocal port.
Step 2 Cause 2: The opposite end transmits excessive data flow.
1. Configure the QoS policies at the opposite end to reduce the data flow that the oppositeend transmits.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.84 HARD_BAD
Description
The HARD_BAD is an alarm indicating hardware errors.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
350
![Page 370: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/370.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 3 Indicate the internal faults detected by the board.
Impact on the System
The alarmed board fails to work. If the board is configured with the 1+1 protection, protectionswitching may be triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The board and the backplane are connected improperly.
l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
l Cause 3: The slot is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board and backplane are connected improperly.
1. Remove and insert the alarmed board. For details, see 6.1 Removing a Board and 6.2Inserting a Board. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isremoved and inserted
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isremoved and inserted
Ensure that the board is normal.
Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board, and then check whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 6Part Replacement.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isreplaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
351
![Page 371: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/371.jpg)
If... Then...
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Ensure that the slot is normal.
Step 3 Cause 3: The slot is faulty.
1. Contact Huawei engineers to handle the faulty slot.TIPGenerally, the slot becomes faulty due to the broken pin or bent pin. Remove the board, and use atorch to observe whether there is any broken pin or bent pin.
2. If a vacant slot is available, insert the board in the vacant slot and add the board again.Then, the board can work normally.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.85 HP_CROSSTR
Description
The HP_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the higher order path error crosses the threshold.This alarm occurs when the board detects that the performance event that the higher order patherror crosses the preset threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the performance monitoring period:
l 0x01: 15 minutesl 0x02: 24 hours
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
352
![Page 372: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/372.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm.
l 0x30: HPBBEl 0x31: HPESl 0x32: HPSESl 0x33: HPFEBBEl 0x34: HPFEESl 0x35: HPFESESl 0x36: HPUASl 0x37: HPCSESl 0x38: HPFECSESl 0x4c: HPFEUAS
Impact on the System
When the HP_CROSSTR alarm occurs, a large number of errors occur in the service, and theservice may be interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The higher order path error crosses the preset threshold.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The higher order path error crosses the preset threshold.
1. Check the threshold crossing records to find out the performance event that the higher orderpath error crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8 Browsing the PerformanceEvent Threshold-Crossing Records.
2. Handle the threshold-crossing performance event.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.86 HP_LOM
Description
The HP_LOM is an alarm indicating the loss of the higher order path multiframe. This alarmoccurs when the board detects that byte H4 is inconsistent with the expected multiframesequence.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
353
![Page 373: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/373.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the HP_LOM alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed path is interrupted. If the servicesare configured with protection, protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.
l Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite NE is faulty.
1. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. Then, checkwhether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the system control, cross-connect, and timing boardon the opposite NE.
Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the local NE is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.87 HP_RDI
Description
The HP_RDI is an alarm indicating the higher order path remote receive failure. This alarmoccurs when the board detects that bit 5 of byte G1 is 1.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
354
![Page 374: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/374.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the HP_RDI alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The service receivedby the opposite NE, however, is interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates thehigher order path remote receive failure.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates thehigher order path remote receive failure.1. Clear the alarms such as HP_LOM and B3_EXC that the AU-4 path reports on the opposite
NE.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.88 HP_REI
Description
The HP_REI is an alarm indicating the higher order path remote error. This alarm occurs whenthe board detects that bits 1-4 of G1 take a value from 1 to 8.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Warning Service alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
355
![Page 375: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/375.jpg)
Impact on the System
The service on the local site is not affected. The service received by the opposite station, however,has errors.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates thehigher order path remote errors.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates thehigher order path remote receive failure.
1. Handle the HP_BBE performance event that the AU-4 path reports on the opposite NE.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.89 HP_SLM
Description
The HP_SLM is an alarm indicating the lower order path label mismatch. This alarm occurswhen the board detects the C2 byte mismatch.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
None.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The C2 byte received by the local NE does not match with the C2 byte transmitted
by the remote NE.
l Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
356
![Page 376: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/376.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The C2 byte received by the local NE does not match with the C2 byte transmitted bythe remote NE.1. Configure the same service type at the source and sink of the AU-4 path. For details, see
Configuring Overhead Bytes.
Step 2 Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect.1. If the alarmed port is the SDH port that is interconnected with the ATM/Ethernet equipment,
configure the service as VC-4 pass-through service. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.90 HP_TIM
Description
The HP_TIM is an alarm indicating the higher order path trace identifier mismatch. This alarmoccurs when the board detects the J1 byte mismatch.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
If the service is configured with the protection that considers the HP_TIM alarm as a triggercondition, the protection switching is triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The receivable J1 byte on the local NE does not match with the J1 byte transmitted
on the opposite NE.l Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The receivable J1 byte on the local NE does not match with the J1 byte transmitted onthe opposite NE.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
357
![Page 377: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/377.jpg)
1. Disable the receivable J1 byte on the local NE or set the receivable J1 byte on the local NEto the same as the transmitted J1 byte on the opposite NE. For details, see ConfiguringVC-4 POHs.
Step 2 Cause 2: Configuration data is incorrect.
1. If the alarmed port is the SDH port that is interconnected with the ATM/Ethernet equipment,configure the service as VC-4 pass-through service. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services or Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-PointServices.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the configurationis changed
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the configurationis changed
Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the cross-connections are configured correctly at the intermediate nodeswhere the service travels. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see CreatingCross-Connections of SNCP Services or Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-PointServices.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.91 HP_UNEQ
Description
The HP_UNEQ is an alarm indicating the unequipped higher order path. This alarm occurs whenthe board detects that the C2 byte is 0.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the HP_UNEQ alarm occurs, the service in the alarmed AU-4 path is unavailable. If theservice is configured with the protection that considers the alarm as a trigger condition, theprotection switching is triggered.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
358
![Page 378: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/378.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The line port at the local NE is configured with services, but the corresponding
line port at the opposite NE is not configured with services.l Cause 2: Byte C2 is set to 0 at the opposite NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The line port at the local NE is configured with services, but the corresponding lineport at the opposite NE is not configured with services.1. Configure line services on the opposite NE. For details, see Creating Cross-Connections
of SNCP Services or Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services.
Step 2 Cause 2: Byte C2 is set to 0 at the opposite NE.1. Change the setting of byte C2. For details, see Configuring VC-4 POHs.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.92 HPAD_CROSSTR
Description
The HPAD_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the higher order path adaptation performancecrosses the threshold. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the performance event of TUpointer justification crosses the preset threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the performance monitoring period:
l 0x01: 15 minutesl 0x02: 24 hours
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
359
![Page 379: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/379.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm.
l 0xaa: TUPJCHIGHl 0xab: TUPJCLOWl 0xac: TUPJCNEW
Impact on the SystemWhen the HPAD_CROSSTR alarm occurs, bit errors may occur in the service.
Possible CausesCause 1: The performance event of TU pointer justification crosses the preset threshold.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The performance event of TU pointer justification crosses the preset threshold.1. Check the threshold crossing records to find out the performance event of TU pointer
justification that crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8 Browsing thePerformance Event Threshold-Crossing Records.
2. Handle the threshold-crossing performance event.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.93 IF_CABLE_OPEN
DescriptionThe IF_CABLE_OPEN is an alarm indicating that the IF cable is open.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the IF_CABLE_OPEN alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed IF port is interrupted.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
360
![Page 380: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/380.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The IF cable is loose or faulty.l Cause 2: The IF port on the IF board is damaged.l Cause 3: The power module of the ODU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The IF cable is loose or faulty.1. Check whether the connector of the IF cable is loose or whether the connector is made
properly.
The connectors to be checked include the connector between the IF fiber jumper and theIF board, the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable, and the connectorbetween the IF cable and the ODU.
If... Then...
The connector is loose Connect the connector tightly.
The connector is made improperly See the Installation Reference and make newconnectors for the IF cable.
None of the above Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the surface of the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable is damaged.
If... Then...
The cable does not meet the requirement Replace the cable with a qualified one.
The cable meets the requirement Go to Cause 2 or Cause 3.
Step 2 Cause 2: The IF port on the IF board is damaged.1. Replace the alarmed IF board.
Step 3 Cause 3: The power module of the ODU is faulty.1. Replace the ODU connected to the alarmed IF board.
----End
Related InformationNOTEWhen rectifying the faults of the IF cable, IF port, and ODU, you must turn off the ODU before theoperation. You can turn on the ODU only after the operation is complete.
A.3.94 IF_INPWR_ABN
DescriptionThe IF_INPWR_ABN is an alarm indicating that the power supplied by an IF board to an ODUis abnormal.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
361
![Page 381: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/381.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 l 0x01: Indicates that the input power of the ODU is too high.l 0x02: Indicates that the input power of the ODU is too low.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the services on the ODU are interrupted. If 1+1 protection is configured,this alarm also triggers 1+1 HSB switching.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The IF board is faulty.l Cause 2: The IF cable is faulty.l Cause 3: The ODU is faulty.l Cause 4: The IF fiber jumper and the IF board are connected incorrectly.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The IF board is faulty.1. Replace the IF board connected to the alarmed ODU.
Step 2 Cause 2: The IF cable is faulty.1. Check whether the connectors of the IF cable are loose or prepared incorrectly.
The connectors to be checked include the connector between the IF fiber jumper and theIF board, the connector between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable, and the connectorbetween the IF cable and the ODU.
If... Then...
Any of the connectors is loose Connect the connector tightly.
Any of the connectors is preparedincorrectly
See the Installation Reference and makenew connectors for the IF cable.
All connectors are normal Go to the next step.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
362
![Page 382: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/382.jpg)
2. Check whether the surface of the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable is damaged or deformed,
and test the connectivity between the IF fiber jumper and the IF cable. For details, seeTesting the Connectivity of the IF Cable.
If... Then...
The IF cable is below standard Replace the IF cable.
The IF cable is up to standard The IF board or ODU may be faulty.
Step 3 Cause 3: The ODU is faulty.1. Replace the alarmed ODU.
Step 4 Cause 4: The IF fiber jumper and the IF board are connected incorrectly.1. Connect the IF fiber jumper and the IF board correctly.
----End
Related InformationThe logical slot ID of the ODU is obtained by adding 50 to the slot ID of the IF board connectedto the ODU.
A.3.95 IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED
DescriptionThe IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED is an alarm indicating that the configured IF working modeis not supported. This alarm occurs if the board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supportsthe configured IF working mode.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
363
![Page 383: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/383.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the FPGA file that is loaded to the board.
l 0x01 indicates that FPGA file 250 is loaded.l 0x02 indicates that FPGA file 002 is loaded.
Impact on the SystemWhen the IF_MODE_UNSUPPORTED alarm occurs, the service on the alarmed IF port isinterrupted.
Possible CausesCause 1: The board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supports the configured IF workingmode, or the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode is damaged.
Procedurel Cause 1: The board is not loaded with the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working
mode, or the FPGA file that supports the configured IF working mode is damaged.1. Contact Huawei engineers to upgrade the software and the FPGA file.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.96 IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN
DescriptionThe IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN is an alarm indicating that the IMA group at the local end fails.This alarm occurs when the IMA group is in non-Active state on the local NE or when theactivated links of the IMA group on the local NE are less than the minimum number.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, all links of the alarmed IMA group are unavailable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
364
![Page 384: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/384.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The IMA links on the local NE are faulty.l Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the local NE are less than the minimum
number.
ProcedureStep 1 Cause 1: The IMA links on the local NE are faulty.
1. Check whether the T_ALOS alarm is reported at the E1 port. If yes, clear this alarm.2. Check whether the IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists,
configure the related services at other ports or replace the related board.
Step 2 Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the local NE are less than the minimum number.
If... Then...
The ALM_IMA_LIF alarm occurs Clear the ALM_IMA_LIF alarm immediately.Activate the links of the IMA group on the local NE.
No other alarm occurs Reconfigure the links of the IMA group on the localNE.
When the number of activated links of the IMA group reaches the minimum number, the alarmclears automatically.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.97 IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN
DescriptionThe IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN is an alarm indicating that the IMA group at the remote endfails. This alarm occurs when the IMA group is in non-Active state on the remote NE or whenthe activated links of the IMA group on the remote NE are less than the minimum number.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, the ports of the IMA group are congested and services have bit errors.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
365
![Page 385: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/385.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The IMA links on the remote NE are faulty.
l Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the remote NE are less than the minimumnumber.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The IMA links on the remote NE are faulty.
1. Check whether the T_ALOS alarm is reported at the E1 port. If yes, clear this alarm.
2. Check whether the IMA_GROUP_RE_DOWN alarm is cleared. If the alarm persists,configure the related services at other ports or replace the related board.
Step 2 Cause 2: The activated links of the IMA group on the remote NE are less than the minimumnumber.
If... Then...
The ALM_IMA_LIF alarm occurs Clear the ALM_IMA_LIF alarm immediately.Activate the links of the IMA group on the opposite NE.
No other alarm occurs Reconfigure the links of the IMA group on the remoteNE.
When the number of activated links of the IMA group reaches the minimum number, the alarmclears automatically.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.98 IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH
Description
The IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the transmit clock modes of an IMAgroup are inconsistent at the two ends.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
366
![Page 386: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/386.jpg)
Impact on the SystemThe IMA_TXCLK_MISMATCH alarm may cause loss of ATM cells.
Possible CausesCause 1: The transmit clock modes of an IMA group are inconsistent at the two ends.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit clock modes of an IMA group are inconsistent at the two ends.1. Check the alarm information and determine the NE, board, and ATM trunk related to the
alarm.2. Modify the Clock Mode parameter of the alarmed ATM trunk to the same value as that of
the opposite end. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
----End
Related InformationThe Clock Mode parameter can be set to two modes.
l CTC mode: Common transmit clock mode. In CTC mode, all transmit clocks of the linksin an IMA group are from the same clock source.
l ITC mode: Independent transmit clock mode. In ITC mode, the transmit clocks of the linksin an IMA group are from different clock sources. When the IMA group is set to the lineclock mode, the ITC mode is recommended.
A.3.99 IN_PWR_ABN
DescriptionThe IN_PWR_ABN is an alarm indicating that the input optical power is abnormal.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the IN_PWR_ABN alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed optical interface has errorsand even becomes unavailable.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over high or over low.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
367
![Page 387: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/387.jpg)
l Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect.
l Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty.
l Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over high or over low.
1. Browse current performance events, and query the performance event of the transmitoptical power on the opposite NE.
If... Then...
The transmit optical power does not meetthe requirement
Replace the optical module.
The transmit optical power is over high Add a proper attenuator to reduce thereceive optical power.
Step 2 Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect.
1. Query the board manufacturing information report, and check whether the models ofthe SFP optical modules used at both ends are correct.
If... Then...
The models are incorrect Replace the optical module.
The models are correct Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty.
1. Use the optical power meter to test the receive optical power, and check whether the receiveoptical power meets the requirement. If yes, contact Huawei engineers to replace the opticalmodule.
Step 4 Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades.
If... Then...
The connector of the fiber jumper is dirty Clean fiber connectors.
The connector or fiber is damaged Insert the connector properly or replace thedamaged fiber jumper.
----End
Related Information
The following table describes the meanings of the parameters in the IN_PWR_ABN alarmreported by the EMS6.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the port number.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
368
![Page 388: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/388.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The value of Parameter 2 is always 0x00, andthe value of Parameter 3 is always 0x01. Thetwo parameters indicate the path ID.
Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Reserved. The values are always 0xFF.
A.3.100 IN_PWR_HIGH
DescriptionThe IN_PWR_HIGH is an alarm indicating that the input optical power is over high.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the IN_PWR_HIGH alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed optical interface has errors.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over high.l Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect.l Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite site is over high.1. Browse current performance events, and query the performance event of the transmit
optical power on the opposite NE.
If... Then...
The transmit optical power does not meetthe requirement
Contact Huawei engineers to replace theoptical module.
The transmit optical power meets therequirement
Add a proper attenuator to reduce thereceive optical power.
Step 2 Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
369
![Page 389: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/389.jpg)
1. Query the board manufacturing information report, and check whether the models ofthe SFP optical modules used at both ends are correct.
If... Then...
The models are incorrect Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module.
The models are correct Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty.1. Use the optical power meter to test the receive optical power, and check whether the receive
optical power meets the requirement. If yes, contact Huawei engineers to replace the opticalmodule.
----End
Related InformationThe optical power threshold set for the IN_PWR_HIGH alarm is lower than the overload point.
SDH Interface Performance.
A.3.101 IN_PWR_LOW
DescriptionThe IN_PWR_LOW is an alarm indicating that the input optical power is over low.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the IN_PWR_LOW alarm occurs, the service at the alarmed optical interface has errors.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over low.l Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect.l Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty.l Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit power of the opposite NE is over low.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
370
![Page 390: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/390.jpg)
1. Browse current performance events, and query the performance event of the transmitoptical power on the opposite NE.
If... Then...
The transmit optical power does not meetthe requirement
Contact Huawei engineers to replace theoptical module.
The transmit optical power meets therequirement
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The model of the selected optical module is incorrect.
1. Query the board manufacturing information report, and check whether the models ofthe SFP optical modules used at both ends are correct.
If... Then...
The models are incorrect Contact Huawei engineers to replace the optical module.
The models are correct Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module at the receive end is faulty.
1. Use the optical power meter to test the receive optical power, and check whether the receiveoptical power meets the requirement.
If... Then...
The receive optical power meets therequirement
Contact Huawei engineers to replace theoptical module.
The receive optical power does not meet therequirement
Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: The fiber performance degrades.
1. Clean fiber connectors and adapters.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the connector iscleaned
The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists after the connector iscleaned
Replace the fiber.
----End
Related Information
The optical power threshold set for the IN_PWR_LOW alarm is higher than the sensitivity point.
SDH Interface Performance.
A.3.102 J0_MM
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
371
![Page 391: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/391.jpg)
Description
The J0_MM is an alarm indicating the trace identifier mismatch. This alarm occurs when theboard detects the J0 byte mismatch.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
None.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The receivable J0 byte on the local NE does not match the transmitted J0 byte on theopposite NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The receivable J0 byte on the local NE does not match the transmitted J0 byte on theopposite NE.1. Disable the receivable J0 byte on the local NE. For details, see Configuring RSOHs.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.103 K1_K2_M
Description
The K1_K2_M is an alarm indicating the K1/K2 byte mismatch. This alarm occurs when theboard detects inconsistent channel numbers that the transmitted K1 byte (bits 5-8) and thereceived K2 byte (bits 1-4) indicate.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
372
![Page 392: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/392.jpg)
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the protection group type.l 0x01: linear MS protection.l 0x02: ring MS protection.
Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicatesthat the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
Impact on the SystemWhen the K1_K2_M alarm occurs, the MSP protocol may fail and therefore the protectionswitching may fail.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The switching modes configured at both ends are single-ended switching and dual-
ended switching separately.l Cause 2: The fiber connection is incorrect.l Cause 3: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The switching modes configured at both ends are single-ended switching and dual-ended switching separately.1. Check whether the switching modes at both ends are the same.
If... Then...
The switching modes are different Configure the switching modes as the same.
The switching modes are the same Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The fiber connection is incorrect.1. Check whether the fiber connection is correct. For example, the fiber at the receive or
transmit port may be incorrectly connected, or disconnected.
If... Then...
The fiber connection is incorrect Connect the fiber properly.
The connection is correct Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: A certain board is faulty.1. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. Then, check
whether the alarm is cleared.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
373
![Page 393: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/393.jpg)
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.104 K2_M
DescriptionThe K2_M is an alarm indicating the K2 byte mismatch. This alarm occurs when the boarddetects that the protection mode indicated by the received K2 (bit 5) is different from theprotection mode of the NE.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the protection group type.l 0x01: linear MS protection.l 0x02: ring MS protection.
Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicatesthat the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
Impact on the SystemWhen the K2_M alarm occurs, the MSP protocol may fail and therefore the protection switchingmay fail.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Two NEs of the linear MSP group are configured with different protection modes
(1+1 or 1:N).
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
374
![Page 394: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/394.jpg)
l Cause 2: The MSP protocol is stopped when the protection switching occurs.l Cause 3: The fiber connection is incorrect.l Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Two NEs of the linear MSP group are configured with different protection modes (1+1 or 1:N).1. Query the status of the linear MSP, and check whether two NEs of the linear MSP group
are configured with different protection modes (1+1 or 1:N).
If... Then...
The protection modes are different Configure the protection modes as the same.
The protection modes are the same Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The MSP protocol is stopped when the protection switching occurs.1. Query the status of the linear MSP, and check whether the MSP protocol is stopped on the
opposite NE.
If... Then...
The protocol is stopped Restart the MSP protocol on the opposite NE. For details, seeStarting/Stopping the Linear MSP Protocol.
The protocol is running Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The fiber connection is incorrect.1. Check whether the fiber connection is correct. For example, the fiber at the receive or
transmit port may be incorrectly connected, or disconnected.
If... Then...
The connection is incorrect Connect the fiber properly
The connection is correct Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.1. Replace the board where the line unit is located on the opposite NE. Then, check
whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.105 LAG_BWMM
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
375
![Page 395: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/395.jpg)
DescriptionLAG_BWMM is an alarm indicating the bandwidth inconsistency in the LAG group.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemFor a LAG group in load-sharing mode, data services may be lost.
Possible CausesCause 1: In the LAG group, the license capacities of the ports differ from each other.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: In the LAG group, the license capacities of the ports differ from each other.1. Query the license capacities of the ports of the LAG group by using the NMS.2. If the license capacities of the ports differ from each other, reload a license file of an
appropriate capacity.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.106 LAG_DOWN
DescriptionThe LAG_DOWN is an alarm indicating that the link aggregation group (LAG) is unavailable.This alarm occurs when the LAG does not have activated members.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
376
![Page 396: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/396.jpg)
Impact on the System
When the LAG_DOWN alarm occurs, the service at the member port of the LAG is interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: All the member ports of the aggregation group are invalid for the same causes as theLAG_MEMBER_DOWN alarm.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: All the member ports of the LAG are invalid for the same causes as theLAG_MEMBER_DOWN alarm.
1. Rectify the fault at each member port according to the description ofLAG_MEMBER_DOWN.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.107 LAG_MEMBER_DOWN
Description
The LAG_MEMBER_DOWN is an alarm indicating that a member port of a link aggregationgroup (LAG) is unavailable. This alarm occurs when a member port of an LAG can neither beactivated nor function as a protection port.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicates the slot ID of the alarmed board.
Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the alarmed subboard. The value is always 0xff.
Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Indicates the ID of the alarmed port.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
377
![Page 397: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/397.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 6 Indicates the cause that makes the port unavailable.l 0x01: The port link is faulty or disabled.l 0x02: The port fails to receive the LACP packets.l 0x03: The port works in half-duplex mode.l 0x04: The port is self-looped.
Impact on the SystemThe port in the LAG cannot share the service load, and the port does not transmit or receive anyservices.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The port link is faulty or disabled.l Cause 2: The port receives no LACP packets.l Cause 3: The port works in half-duplex mode or not in Auto-Negotiation mode.l Cause 4: The port is self-looped.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the alarmed port and the cause of the alarm according to the alarm parameters.
If... Then...
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 Perform the operations described in step Step 2.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Perform the operations described in step Step 3.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03 Perform the operations described in step Step 4.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x04 Perform the operations described in step Step 5.
Step 2 Cause 1: The port link is faulty or disabled.1. On the NMS, check whether the port in the LAG is enabled. For details, see Querying the
Protocol Information of the LAG.
If... Then...
The port is not enabled Enable the port in the LAG.
The port is enabled Go to the next step.
2. Check the link status of all ports and check whether the ETH_LOS alarm is reported.
If... Then...
The alarm is reported Clear the ETH_LOS alarm immediately and rectify thefault of the port link.
The alarm is not reported Go to Cause 2.
Step 3 Cause 2: The port receives no LACP packets.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
378
![Page 398: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/398.jpg)
1. Check whether the local port and the remote port transmit the LACP packets. For details,see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. If the LACP packets are not transmitted,configure the ports at two ends to ensure that the packets can be normally transmitted.
Step 4 Cause 3: The port works in half-duplex mode or not in Auto-Negotiation mode.
1. On the NMS, check whether the port in the LAG works in half-duplex mode. For details,see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG. If the port works in half-duplex mode,change the working mode of the port into full-duplex.
2. On the NMS, change the working mode of the port into full-duplex and Auto-Negotiation.
Step 5 Cause 4: The port is self-looped.
1. Check whether the port is self-looped. For details, see 8.16 Querying the Attributes ofan Ethernet Port. If the port is self-looped, release the selfloop. For details, see 8.6.4Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet Interface Board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.108 LAG_PORT_FAIL
Description
The LAG_PORT_FAIL is an alarm indicating that a port in the LAG fails. When a port in theLAG is unavailable, the LAG_PORT_FAIL alarm is reported.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the number of the IP port.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 The values are always 0x00 0x01.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
379
![Page 399: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/399.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 4 Indicates the cause of the protection failure.
l 0x01: The link of the port is faulty or fails.l 0x02: The port is in half-duplex mode.l 0x03: The port fails to receive the LACP packets.l 0x04: The port detects the selfloop.l 0x05: Other unknown reasons.
Parameter 5 The value is always 0xff.
Impact on the SystemThe port in the LAG cannot share the service load, and the port does not transmit or receive anyservices.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty.l Cause 2: The port is in the half-duplex mode.l Cause 3: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets.l Cause 4: The port detects a selfloop.l Cause 5: other unknown reasons
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the port where the alarm occurs and the alarm cause according to the alarm parameter.
If... Then...
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 Go to Cause 1.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x02 Go to Cause 2.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03 Go to Cause 3.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x04 Go to Cause 4.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x05 Go to Cause 5.
Step 2 Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty.1. On the NMS, check whether the port in the LAG is enabled. For details, see Setting the
General Attributes of Ethernet Ports.
If... Then...
The port is not enabled Enable the port in the LAG group.
The port is enabled Check the link state of each port. If any link is faulty, rectifythe fault.
Step 3 Cause 2: The port is in the half-duplex mode.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
380
![Page 400: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/400.jpg)
1. On the NMS, check the working mode of the port in the LAG group. If the port is in half-duplex mode, change the working mode of the port into full-duplex. For details, see Settingthe General Attributes of Ethernet Ports.
Step 4 Cause 3: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets.
1. On the NMS, check whether the LAG group is properly configured on the opposite end.For details, see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG.
If... Then...
The LAG group is not properly configured Reconfigure the LAG group.
The LAG group is properly configured Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the local port and the remote port transmit the LACP packets. If the LACPpackets are not transmitted, configure the ports at both ends to ensure that the packets canbe normally transmitted. For details, see Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG.
Step 5 Cause 4: The port detects a selfloop.
1. Release the selfloop of the port with reference to Enabling Self-Loop Detection.
Step 6 Cause 5: other unknown reasons
1. Contact Huawei engineers.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.109 LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL
Description
The LAG_VC_PORT_FAIL is an alarm indicating that a VCG port in the LAG fails. When theVCTRUNK is unavailable, the alarm is reported.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
381
![Page 401: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/401.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the number of the faulty VCG port in the LAG. Parameter2 indicates the most significant bits and Parameter 3 indicates theleast significant bits.
Parameter 4 Indicates the cause of the protection failure.
l 0x01: The link of the port is faulty or fails.l 0x03: The port fails to receive the LACP packets.l 0x04: The link of the port is configured into a loop.l 0x05: other unknown reasons.
Parameter 5 The value is always 0xff.
Impact on the System
The port in the LAG cannot share the service load, and the port does not transmit or receive anyservices.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The link of the port is faulty or fails.
l Cause 2: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets.
l Cause 3: The port detects a selfloop.
l Cause 4: other unknown reasons
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the port where the alarm occurs and the alarm cause according to the alarm parameter.
If... Then...
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x01 Go to Cause 1.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x03 Go to Cause 2.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x04 Go to Cause 3.
The value of Parameter 4 is 0x05 Go to Cause 4.
Step 2 Cause 1: The port is disabled or the link is faulty.
1. Check the link state of each VCG port. If any link is faulty, rectify the fault.
Step 3 Cause 2: The port fails to receive the LCAP packets.
1. On the NMS, check whether the LAG group is properly configured on the opposite end.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
382
![Page 402: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/402.jpg)
If... Then...
The LAG group is not properly configured Reconfigure the LAG group.
The LAG group is properly configured Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the local port and the remote port transmit the LACP packets. If the LACPpackets are not transmitted, configure the ports at both ends to ensure that the packets canbe normally transmitted.
Step 4 Cause 3: The port detects a selfloop.1. Release the selfloop of the port.
Step 5 Cause 4: other unknown reasons1. Contact Huawei engineers.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.110 LAN_LOC
DescriptionThe LAN_LOC is an alarm indicating the Ethernet communication failure.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the network port ID. For example, 0x01 indicates networkport 1 and 0x02 indicates network port 2.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the number of the path on which the alarm is reported.
Parameter 2 indicates the most significant bits and the value isalways 0x00. Parameter 3 indicates the least significant bits and thevalue is always 0x01.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
383
![Page 403: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/403.jpg)
Impact on the System
When the alarm is reported, the communication of the network port is interrupted. As a result,the NE is out of control. The existing services of the NE, however, are not affected.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The cable is not connected to the network port, or the cable is faulty.l Cause 2: The network port is faulty.l Cause 3: The system control, switching, and timing board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 View the alarm on the NMS. Determine the network port ID according to the alarm parameter1.
Step 2 Cause 1: The cable is not connected to the network port, or the cable is faulty.1. Check whether the cable of the network port is loose or no cable is connected. Properly
connect the NMS to the network port. The LINK indicator is in green.
Step 3 Cause 2: The network port is faulty.1. Replace the faulty board. For details, see 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and
Timing Board.
Step 4 Cause 3: The system control, switching, and timing board is faulty.1. Replace the system control, switching, and timing board. For details, see 6.9 Replacing
the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.111 LASER_CLOSED
Description
The LASER_CLOSED is an alarm indicating that the laser is shut down. This alarm occurs whenthe laser is shut down by using the NMS.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
384
![Page 404: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/404.jpg)
Impact on the System
When the LASER_CLOSED alarm occurs, the optical interface fails to carry services.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS.
1. Find out the cause of shutting down the laser and start up the laser as soon as possible.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.112 LASER_MOD_ERR
Description
The LASER_MOD_ERR is an alarm indicating that the type of the pluggable optical moduleon the board does not match the type of the optical interface.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the LASER_MOD_ERR alarm occurs, the performance of the optical interface degradesand serious degradation even causes service interruption.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the
optical interface.
l Cause 2: The small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module does not match the interface type.
l Cause 3: The optical module is faulty.
l Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
385
![Page 405: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/405.jpg)
ProcedureStep 1 Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the
optical interface.1. Check whether the optical module installed at the optical interface matches the rate of the
optical interface. For details, see 8.5.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing InformationReport .
If... Then...
The optical module does not match therate of the optical interface
Contact Huawei engineers to replace theoptical module with one that matches therate of the optical interface.
The optical module matches the rate ofthe optical interface
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The SFP module does not match the interface type.1. Replace the existing SFP module with a proper SFP module.
Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module is faulty.1. Replace the faulty optical module.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the optical module is replaced End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists after the optical module is replaced Go to Cause 3.
Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.113 LASER_MOD_ERR_EX
DescriptionThe LASER_MOD_ERR is an alarm indicating that the type of the pluggable optical moduleon the board does not match the type of the optical interface.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
386
![Page 406: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/406.jpg)
Impact on the System
When the LASER_MOD_ERR_EX alarm occurs, the performance of the optical interfacedegrades and serious degradation even causes service interruption.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of the
optical interface.l Cause 2: The small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module does not match the interface type.l Cause 3: The optical module is faulty.l Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The optical module installed at the optical interface does not match the rate of theoptical interface.1. Check whether the optical module installed at the optical interface matches the rate of the
optical interface. For details, see 8.5.2 Querying the Board Manufacturing InformationReport .
If... Then...
The optical module does not match therate of the optical interface
Contact Huawei engineers to replace theoptical module with one that matches therate of the optical interface.
The optical module matches the rate ofthe optical interface
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The SFP module does not match the interface type.1. Replace the existing SFP module with a proper SFP module.
Step 3 Cause 3: The optical module is faulty.1. Replace the faulty optical module.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the optical module is replaced End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists after the optical module is replaced Go to Cause 3.
Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.114 LASER_SHUT
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
387
![Page 407: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/407.jpg)
DescriptionThe LASER_SHUT is an alarm indicating that the laser is shut down. This alarm occurs whenthe laser is shut down by using the NMS.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the laser_shut alarm occurs, the optical interface fails to carry services.
Possible CausesCause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS.
ProcedureStep 1 Cause 1: The laser on the local NE is shut down by using the NMS.
1. Find out the cause of shutting down the laser and start up the laser as soon as possible.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.115 LCAS_FOPR
DescriptionThe LCAS_FOPR is an alarm indicating that the LCAS protocol in the receive direction fails.This alarm occurs if the receive unit of the LCAS module of a board detects an abnormal statein which the LCAS might fail to negotiate or cannot negotiate correctly.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
388
![Page 408: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/408.jpg)
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.
Impact on the SystemThe Ethernet service is not normal.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect.l Cause 2: The link is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect.1. Check whether the LCAS enabling state and the LCAS parameters are the same at both
ends of the link.
If... Then...
The settings of the LCAS protocols arenot consistent
Properly enable the LCAS protocols at bothends.
The settings of the LCAS protocols atboth ends are consistent
Go to Cause 2.
2. Check whether configurations of the local and opposite NEs are correct. For example, checkwhether a VCG on one NE is connected to multiple VCGs on the opposite NE.
If... Then...
The configurations of the local and opposite NEs areincorrect
Correct the configuration data.
The configurations of the local and opposite NEs arecorrect
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The link is faulty.1. Check whether the link where the service travels has errors or becomes faulty.
If... Then...
The link is faulty Rectify the fault.
The link is normal Go to the next step.
2. Restart the LCAS protocols at both ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
389
![Page 409: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/409.jpg)
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.116 LCAS_FOPT
Description
The LCAS_FOPT is an alarm indicating that the LCAS protocol in the transmit direction fails.This alarm occurs if the transmit unit of the LCAS module of a board detects an abnormal statein which the LCAS might fail to negotiate or cannot negotiate correctly.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.
Impact on the System
The Ethernet service is not normal.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect.
l Cause 2: The link is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
390
![Page 410: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/410.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data of the LCAS protocol is incorrect.1. Check whether the LCAS enabling state and the LCAS parameters are the same at both
ends of the link.
If... Then...
The settings of the LCAS protocols arenot consistent
Properly enable the LCAS protocols at bothends.
The settings of the LCAS protocol at bothends are consistent
Go to Cause 2.
2. Check whether configurations of the local and opposite NEs are correct. For example, checkwhether a VCG on one NE is connected to multiple VCGs on the opposite NE.
If... Then...
The configurations of the local and opposite NEs areincorrect
Correct the configuration data.
The configurations of the local and opposite NEs arecorrect
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The link is faulty.1. Check whether the link where the service travels has errors or becomes faulty.
If... Then...
The link is faulty Rectify the fault.
The link is normal Go to the next step.
2. Restart the LCAS protocols at both ends. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.117 LCAS_PLCR
DescriptionThe LCAS_PLCR is an alarm indicating that a part of the LCAS bandwidth in the receivedirection is lost. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the number of paths that carry theoverloads in the receive direction of the VCTRUNK with the LCAS function enabled is lessthan the preset number but is not zero.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
391
![Page 411: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/411.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.
Impact on the System
The available Ethernet service bandwidth is smaller than the configured bandwidth.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the
remote site is different from that at the local site.
l Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty.
l Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remotesite is different from that at the local site.
1. Check whether the VCTRUNKs at the transmit and the receive directions at the local siteare configured with the same number of physical paths and timeslots.
If... Then...
The sink and source VCTRUNKs arebound with different number of physicalpaths or bound with different timeslots
Correct the configuration data. For details,see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing theVCTRUNK Bandwidth.
If yes Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty.
1. Check whether any path alarm exists in the transmit direction of the remote site.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
392
![Page 412: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/412.jpg)
If... Then...
Any of the preceding alarms occurs Clear the alarm immediately.
No alarm occurs Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.118 LCAS_PLCT
Description
The LCAS_PLCT is an alarm indicating that part of the LCAS bandwidth in the transmitdirection is lost. This alarm occurs when a board detects that the number of paths that carry theoverloads in the transmit direction of the VCTRUNK with the LCAS function enabled is lessthan the preset number but is not zero.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUN 1.
Impact on the System
The available transmit bandwidth of Ethernet services is less than the preset bandwidth. Whenthe transmitted services are more than the available transmit bandwidth, packet loss occurs.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
393
![Page 413: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/413.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the
remote site is different from that at the local site.
l Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty.
l Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remotesite is different from that at the local site.
1. Check whether the sink and source VCTRUNKs are bound with the same number ofphysical paths or the same timeslots.
If... Then...
The sink and source VCTRUNKs arebound with different number of physicalpaths or different timeslots
Correct the configuration data. For details,see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing theVCTRUNK Bandwidth.
The sink and source VCTRUNKs arebound with the same number of physicalpaths or the same timeslots
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty.
1. Check whether any path alarm exists in the receive direction of the remote site.
If... Then...
Any of the preceding alarms occurs Clear the alarm immediately.
No alarm occurs Go to the next step.
Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.119 LCAS_TLCR
Description
The LCAS_TLCR is an alarm indicating that all the LCAS bandwidth in the receive directionis lost. This alarm occurs when no path in the receive direction of the VCTRUNK with LCASenabled carries the overload but paths are configured to carry the overload.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
394
![Page 414: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/414.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x000x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUN 1.
Impact on the SystemThere is no available bandwidth in the receive direction, and the Ethernet services are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the
remote site is different from that at the local site.l Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty.l Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remotesite is different from that at the local site.1. Check whether the VCTRUNKs at the transmit and the receive directions at the local site
are configured with the same number of physical paths and timeslots.
If... Then...
The sink and source VCTRUNKs arebound with different number of physicalpaths or bound with different timeslots
Correct the configuration data. For details,see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing theVCTRUNK Bandwidth.
The sink and source VCTRUNKs arebound with the same number of physicalpaths or the same timeslots
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the transmit direction of the remote site are faulty.1. Check whether any path alarm exists in the transmit direction of the remote site.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
395
![Page 415: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/415.jpg)
If... Then...
Any of the preceding alarms occurs Clear the alarm immediately.
No alarm occurs Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the receive direction of the local site are faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.120 LCAS_TLCT
Description
The LCAS_TLCT is an alarm indicating that all the LCAS bandwidth in the transmit directionis lost. This alarm occurs when no path in the transmit direction of the VCTRUNK with LCASenabled carries the overload but paths are configured to carry the overload.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK. For example, 0x00 0x01indicate that the alarm is reported in VCTRUNK 1.
Impact on the System
There is no available bandwidth in the transmit direction, and the Ethernet services areinterrupted.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
396
![Page 416: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/416.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the
remote site is different from that at the local site.
l Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty.
l Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The number of paths or timeslots that are configured for the VCTRUNK at the remotesite is different from that at the local site.
1. Check whether the sink and source VCTRUNKs are bound with the same number ofphysical paths or the same timeslots.
If... Then...
The sink and source VCTRUNKs arebound with different number of physicalpaths or bound with different timeslots
Correct the configuration data. For details,see Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing theVCTRUNK Bandwidth.
The sink and source VCTRUNKs arebound with the same number of physicalpaths or bound with the same timeslots
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: Some paths in the receive direction of the remote site are faulty.
1. Check whether any path alarm exists in the receive direction of the remote site.
If... Then...
Any of the preceding alarms occurs Clear the alarm immediately.
No alarm occurs Go to the next step.
Step 3 Cause 3: Some paths in the transmit direction of the local site are faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.121 LCD
Description
The LCD is an alarm indicating loss of cell delimitation. This alarm occurs when the OCD alarmcontinuously occurs within the transmission period of N cells. The letter "N" indicates the LCDalarm threshold value. For different ports, the threshold value is different.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
397
![Page 417: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/417.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the Systeml When the LCD alarm occurs, all the services in the receive direction of the port are
interrupted and all the connections at the port insert segment or end AIS cells to thedownstream.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The path connected to the ATM port receives signals in an incorrect manner. For
example, the MS_AIS, AU_AIS or AU_LOP alarm occurs.l Cause 2: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path. The receive path reports
alarms indicating excessive bit errors, such as B1_EXC, B2_EXC, and B3_EXC.l Cause 3: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The path connected to the ATM port receives signals in an incorrect manner. Forexample, the MS_AIS, AU_AIS or AU_LOP alarm occurs.1. Check whether the MS_AIS, AU_AIS, or AU_LOP alarm occurs in the path connected
to the ATM port.2. If yes, clear these alarms first, and then check whether the LCD alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path. The receive path reports alarmsindicating excessive bit errors, such as B1_EXC, B2_EXC, and B3_EXC.1. Check whether the B1_EXC, B2_EXC, or B3_EXC alarm occurs in the receive path.2. If yes, clear these alarms first, and then check whether the LCD alarm is cleared.
Step 3 Cause 3: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty.1. Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the LCD alarm. For details, see 8.7.1 Cold
Reset.2. If the LCD alarm persists, replace the alarmed board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the
Smart E1 Board.
----End
Related InformationEnd and segment
The end point, used to monitor the entire virtual connection, is set at the end of the chain network.
The segment point is used to monitor a segment of the entire link.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
398
![Page 418: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/418.jpg)
Thresholds of generating the LCD alarm at different ports
l For the external ATM port, the threshold of generating the LCD alarm is seven cells.l For a VC-4 VCTRUNK port, the threshold of generating the LCD alarm is 360 cells.l For a VC-12 VCTRUNK port, the threshold of generating the ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD
alarm in the bound E1 link is 104 cells. If only one E1 link is bound with the VCTRUNK,the LCD alarm is reported when the ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD alarm occurs. If theVCTRUNK is bound with multiple E1 links in the IMA group, and if the number of E1links in which the ALM_IMA_LINK_LCD alarm occurs is greater than the value derivedfrom the total number of bound E1 links subtracted by the minimum number of activatedlinks in the receive direction of the IMA group, the LCD alarm is reported at the VCTRUNKport. Otherwise, the LCD alarm is not reported.
A.3.122 LCS_LIMITED
DescriptionThe LCS_LIMITED alarm indicates that the configuration capacity of an NE exceeds thecapacity authorized by the license file.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
399
![Page 419: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/419.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the alarm cause.
l 0x01: The E1 service capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the licensefile.
l 0x02: The AM license file is not loaded.l 0x03: For IF protection, the bandwidth at the standby port authorized by the
license file is lower than the bandwidth at the main port authorized by thelicense file.
l 0x05: The ATM/IMA capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the licensefile.
l 0x06: The air port LAG capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by thelicense file.
l 0x07: The E1 priority capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by the licensefile.
l 0x08: The synchronous Ethernet capacity exceeds the capacity authorized bythe license file.
l 0x09: The air port compression capacity exceeds the capacity authorized bythe license file
l 0x10: The MPLS service license capacity exceeds the capacity authorized bythe license file.
l 0x11: The PLA license capacity exceeds the capacity authorized by thelicense file.
l 0x12: The total service bandwidth (TDM service bandwidth and data servicebandwidth) exceeds the bandwidth allowed by the Ethernet license file forthe working and protection links.
Impact on the System
When the LCS_LIMITED alarm occurs, the change of radio service capacity cannot take effecton the NE.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The AM configuration on the NE exceeds the capacity authorized by the license
file.
l Cause 2: For IF protection, the bandwidth at the standby port authorized by the license fileis lower than the bandwidth at the main port authorized by the license file.
l Cause 3: The services configured on the NE exceed the capacity authorized by the licensefile.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the capacity of the license by using the NMS.
Step 2 Cause 1: The AM configuration on the NE exceeds the capacity authorized by the license file.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
400
![Page 420: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/420.jpg)
1. Check the AM enabling status. If the license does not allow the AM to be enabled, set theAM function to disabled.
Step 3 Cause 2: For IF protection, the bandwidth at the standby port authorized by the license file islower than the bandwidth at the main port authorized by the license file.
1. Check whether the capacities that are authorized by the license files for the main andstandby IF boards in an IF protection group are consistent with the capacities specified inthe contract. If not, contact Huawei technical support engineers to reload correct licensefiles.
Step 4 Cause 3: The services configured on the NE exceed the capacity authorized by the license file.
1. when the alarm parameter is 0x01, check whether the radio service configuration exceedsthe capacity authorized by the license file. For details, see Setting the Hybrid/AMAttributes. If yes, reduce the number of E1 services.
2. Purchase and load the corresponding service license.
----End
Related Information
For TDM services, radio service capacities of NEs are calculated based on the service cross-connections on IF boards.
A.3.123 LFA
Description
The LFA is an alarm indicating that the E1 frame alignment at the local end of the inversemultiplexing for ATM (IMA) link in the receive direction is lost.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the path ID.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
401
![Page 421: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/421.jpg)
Impact on the Systeml When this alarm occurs, the alarmed E1 link is unavailable, and the available links in the
IMA group are reduced.l If the VCTRUNK link binds only one member, the service is interrupted when the LFA
alarm occurs.l After this alarm clears, the E1 link in the IMA group will be recovered automatically.
Possible CausesThe possible causes of the LFA alarm are as follows:
l Cause 1: The demultiplexing module of the E1 frame cannot perform the frame alignmentfunction, and therefore the frame alignment loss alarms are reported. These alarms includeTU_LOP, TU_AIS, and alarm indicating that the cross-connection is not configured.
l Cause 2: The alarmed board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Check for the TU_LOP and TU_AIS alarms on the NMS. If these alarms occur, handlethese alarms first.
Step 2 Cause 2: The alarmed board is faulty.1. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the board.2. If the alarm occurs, perform a cold reset on the board that reports the hardware failure
alarm, and check whether the alarm clears.
CAUTIONIf the service on the board is not protected, a cold reset on the board causes serviceinterruptions.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the board. For details, see 6.6 Replacing the EthernetInterface Board or 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.
----End
Related InformationBasic frame
As defined in ITU-T G.704, a basic frame is an even frame with frame alignment sequence (FAS)or an odd frame with non frame alignment sequence (NFAS).
A.3.124 LICENSE_DIFF
DescriptionThe LICENSE_DIFF is an alarm indicating that the license file on the IF board is different fromthe backup file on the system control board. After the IF board or system control board is
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
402
![Page 422: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/422.jpg)
replaced, the license file on the IF board may be different from the backup file on the systemcontrol board.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Warning Equipment alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the license file.
l 0x01: AM license.l 0x02: Hybrid license.l 0x03: TDM license.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
403
![Page 423: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/423.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 2 Indicates the capacity of the license file on the IF board.
When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x01:
l 0x01: The AM function is disabled.l 0x02: The AM function is enabled.
When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x02:
l 0x01: The hybrid capacity is 10 Mbit/s.l 0x02: The hybrid capacity is 20 Mbit/s.l 0x03: The hybrid capacity is 50 Mbit/s.l 0x04: The hybrid capacity is 100 Mbit/s.l 0x05: The hybrid capacity is 150 Mbit/s.l 0x06: The hybrid capacity is 200 Mbit/s.l 0x07: The hybrid capacity is 300 Mbit/s.l 0x08: The hybrid capacity is 400 Mbit/s.l 0x09: The hybrid capacity is beyond the control of licenses.
When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x03:
l 0x01: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 8xE1.l 0x02: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 16xE1.l 0x03: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 32xE1.l 0x04: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 48xE1.l 0x05: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 64xE1.l 0x06: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 128xE1.l 0x07: The TDM radio transmission capacity is beyond the control of licenses.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
404
![Page 424: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/424.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 3 Indicates the capacity of the license file on the system control board.
When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x01:
l 0x01: The AM function is disabled.l 0x02: The AM function is enabled.
When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x02:
l 0x01: The hybrid capacity is 10 Mbit/s.l 0x02: The hybrid capacity is 20 Mbit/s.l 0x03: The hybrid capacity is 50 Mbit/s.l 0x04: The hybrid capacity is 100 Mbit/s.l 0x05: The hybrid capacity is 150 Mbit/s.l 0x06: The hybrid capacity is 200 Mbit/s.l 0x07: The hybrid capacity is 300 Mbit/s.l 0x08: The hybrid capacity is 400 Mbit/s.l 0x09: The hybrid capacity is beyond the control of licenses.
When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x03:
l 0x01: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 8xE1.l 0x02: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 16xE1.l 0x03: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 32xE1.l 0x04: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 48xE1.l 0x05: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 64xE1.l 0x06: The TDM radio transmission capacity is 128xE1.l 0x07: The TDM radio transmission capacity is beyond the control of licenses.
Impact on the SystemNone.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: After the IF board or system control board is replaced, the license file on the IF
board may be different from the backup file on the system control board.
Procedure
Step 1 This alarm only warns the user of the different license capacities on the IF board and the systemcontrol board. No handling is required. Software patrol is performed automatically 48 hours laterand synchronizes the license capacities. Then, the alarm clears.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
405
![Page 425: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/425.jpg)
Related Information
None.
A.3.125 LICENSE_LOST
Description
The LICENSE_LOST is an alarm indicating that the NE fails to detect the license file.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the license file.
l 0x02: Hybrid licensel 0x03: TDM licensel 0x05: ATM/IMA licensel 0x06: NE license
Impact on the System
When the LICENSE_LOST alarm occurs, the functions authorized by the license file cannottake effect.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The license file is lost or is not loaded.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The license file is lost or is not loaded.
1. Contact Huawei engineers to reload the license file to the NE.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
406
![Page 426: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/426.jpg)
Related InformationNone.
A.3.126 LINK_ERR
DescriptionThe LINK_ERR alarm indicates that a data link is faulty.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical port. For example, 0x01 indicatesthat the alarm is reported by optical port 1.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the path that reports the alarm. For example, 0x000x01 indicate that the alarm is reported by path 1.
Impact on the SystemServices in the alarmed path are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical port is faulty.l Cause 2: The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different.l Cause 3: The equipment at the local or opposite end is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical port is faulty.1. Check whether the optical fiber connected to the Ethernet optical port is faulty.
If... Then...
The optical fiber is faulty Replace the fiber.
The optical fiber is not faulty Go to Cause 2.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
407
![Page 427: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/427.jpg)
Step 2 Cause 2: The working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different.1. Check whether the working modes of the ports at the local and opposite ends are different.
If... Then...
The working modes of the ports at thelocal and opposite ends are different
Set the working modes of the ports to thesame.
The working modes of the ports at thelocal and opposite ends are the same
Go to the next step.
Step 3 Cause 3: The equipment at the local or opposite end is faulty.1. Use an optical fiber to perform a loopback at the the alarmed port. For details, see 8.1
Hardware Loopback.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared Replace the Ethernet board at the opposite end.
The alarm persists Replace the Ethernet board at the local end.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.127 LMFA
Description
The LMFA is an alarm indicating the E1 multiframe alignment is lost when the E1 frame is aCRC-4 multiframe.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the path ID.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
408
![Page 428: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/428.jpg)
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, the alarmed E1 links become unavailable. As a result, fewer links ofthe IMA group are available. If the IMA group is comprised of only one link, services will beinterrupted.
Possible CausesThe possible cause of the LMFA alarm is as follows:
l Cause 1: The alarmed board is faulty.l Cause 2: The frame format is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The alarmed board is faulty.1. Check whether the HARD_BAD alarm occurs on the board.2. If the alarm occurs, perform a cold reset on the board that reports the hardware failure
alarm, and check whether the alarm clears.
CAUTIONIf the service on the board is not protected, a cold reset on the board causes serviceinterruptions.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the board.
Step 2 Cause 2: The frame format is incorrect.1. Check the frame format of the opposite port. For details, see Setting Advanced Attributes
of Smart E1 Ports.2. Set the frame format to CRC-4 Multiframe if it is incorrect.
----End
Related InformationBasic frame
As defined in ITU-T G.704, a basic frame is an even frame with frame alignment sequence (FAS)or an odd frame with non frame alignment sequence (NFAS).
Multiframe
A multiframe is composed of sixteen PCM frames, and can implement cyclic redundancy check(CRC).
A.3.128 LOOP_ALM
DescriptionThe LOOP_ALM is an alarm indicating that a loop occurs.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
409
![Page 429: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/429.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of loopback.
l 0x00: optical/electrical port inloop.l 0x01: optical/electrical port outloop.l 0x02: path inloop.l 0x03: path outloop.l 0x04: loopback on the user side.l 0x05: loopback on the multiplexing side.l 0x08: ATM layer inloop.l 0x09: ATM layer outloop.l 0x0A: PHY layer inloop.l 0x0B: PHY layer outloop.l 0x0C: MAC layer inloop.l 0x0D: MAC layer outloop.l 0x0E: VC-4 timeslot inloop.l 0x0F: VC-4 timeslot outloop.l 0x10: VC-3 timeslot inloop.l 0x11: VC-3 timeslot outloop.l 0x12: VC-12 timeslot inloop.l 0x13: VC-12 timeslot outloop.l 0x14: IF outloop.l 0x15: IF inloop.l 0x16: RF inloop.l 0xFF: any of the preceding loopback modes.
Impact on the System
When the LOOP_ALM alarm occurs, the looped port or path cannot carry services.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
410
![Page 430: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/430.jpg)
Possible Causes
Cause 1: A loop is performed on the local NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A loop is performed on the local NE.
1. Determine the type of loopback according to the alarm parameter.
2. Find out the cause of the loopback, and set the loopback status of the alarmed port to Non-Loopback.
For details, see 8.6 Software Loopback.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.129 LP_CROSSTR
Description
The LP_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the lower order path error crosses the threshold.This alarm occurs when the board detects that the performance event that the lower order patherror crosses the preset threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the performance monitoring period:
l 0x01: 15 minutesl 0x02: 24 hours
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
411
![Page 431: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/431.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm.
l 0x90: LPBBEl 0x91: LPESl 0x92: LPSESl 0x93: LPFEBBEl 0x94: LPFEESl 0x95: LPFESESl 0x96: LPUASl 0x8e: LPFEUASl 0x97: LPCSESl 0x98: LPFECSES
Impact on the System
When the LP_CROSSTR alarm occurs, a large number of errors occur in the service, and theservice may even be interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The lower order path error crosses the preset threshold.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The lower order path error crosses the preset threshold.
1. Check the threshold crossing records to find out the performance event that the lower orderpath error crosses the preset threshold.
2. Handle the threshold-crossing performance event.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.130 LP_R_FIFO
Description
The LP_R_FIFO is an alarm indicating that the FIFO overflows on the transmit side of the lowerorder path.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
412
![Page 432: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/432.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the LP_R_FIFO alarm occurs, the service has errors.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The clock of the local NE is not synchronized with the clock of the opposite NE.
l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The clock of the local NE is not synchronized with the clock of the opposite NE.
1. Browse current performance events, and check whether the performance event of TUpointer justification occurs on the local NE and the opposite NE.
If... Then...
The TU pointer justification occurs Handle the performance event. For details,see C.3.2 TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW,and TUPJCNEW.
The TU pointer justification does notoccur
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.131 LP_RDI
Description
The LP_RDI is an alarm indicating the lower order path remote receive failure. This alarm occurswhen the board detects that bit 8 of byte V5 is 1.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
413
![Page 433: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/433.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the LP_RDI alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The service receivedby the opposite NE, however, is interrupted.
Possible CausesCause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates thelower order path remote receive failure.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates thelower order path remote receive failure.1. Handle the lower order path alarm on the opposite NE.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.132 LP_RDI_VC12
DescriptionThe LP_RDI_VC12 is an alarm indicating that data reception fails at the remote end of VC-12lower order path. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 8 of byte V5 is 1.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
414
![Page 434: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/434.jpg)
Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The service received by theopposite NE, however, is interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site, and the message says that datareception fails at the remote end of a lower order path.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site, and the message says that datareception fails at the remote end of a lower order path.1. Handle the alarm of the lower order path on the remote site.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.133 LP_RDI_VC3
Description
The LP_RDI_VC3 alarm indicates that data reception at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3)path fails. A board reports this alarm when detecting that bit 5 in byte G1 is 1.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
415
![Page 435: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/435.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example,0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.
Impact on the SystemWhen the LP_RDI_VC3 alarm occurs, the services at the local site are not affected, but theopposite site cannot receive services.
Possible CausesThe local site receives a message from the opposite site, and the message says that data receptionfails at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The local site receives a message from the opposite site, and the message says that datareception fails at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path.1. Handle the alarm in the lower order (VC-3) path at the opposite site.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.134 LP_REI
DescriptionThe LP_REI is an alarm indicating the lower order path remote error. This alarm occurs whenthe board detects that bit 3 of V5 is 1.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the LP_REI alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The service receivedby the opposite NE, however, has errors.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
416
![Page 436: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/436.jpg)
Possible CausesCause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates thelower order path remote errors.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates thelower order path remote errors.1. Handle the LP_BBE performance event on the opposite NE.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.135 LP_REI_VC12
DescriptionThe LP_REI_VC12 is an alarm indicating that there are bit errors at the remote end of a VC-12lower order path. This alarm occurs when the board detects that bit 3 of byte V5 is 1.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.
Impact on the SystemBit errors exist in the service in the receive direction of the remote site.
Possible CausesCause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site, and the message says that thereare bit errors in the lower order path.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
417
![Page 437: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/437.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the remote site, and the message says that thereare bit errors in the lower order path.
1. Handle the LPBBE performance event of the remote site.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.136 LP_REI_VC3
Description
The LP_REI_VC3 alarm indicates that there are bit errors at the remote end of a lower order(VC-3) path. A board reports this alarm when detecting that any one of bits 1 to 4 in byte G1 is1.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example,0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.
Impact on the System
Bit errors exist in received services at the opposite site.
Possible Causes
The local site receives a message from the opposite site, and the message says that there are biterrors at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
418
![Page 438: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/438.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The local site receives a message from the opposite site, and the message says that thereare bit errors at the remote end of a lower order (VC-3) path.1. Handle the alarm in the lower order (VC-3) path at the opposite site.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.137 LP_RFI
DescriptionThe LP_RFI is an alarm indicating the lower order path remote failure. This alarm occurs whenthe board detects that bit 4 of V5 is 1.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the LP_RFI alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. The alarm onlyindicates that the lower order paths on the opposite NE cannot carry services.
Possible CausesCause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates thelower order path remote failure.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local NE detects the message that is returned by the opposite NE and indicates thelower order path remote failure.1. Handle the lower order path alarm on the opposite NE.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
419
![Page 439: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/439.jpg)
A.3.138 LP_SLM
Description
The LP_SLM is an alarm indicating that a mismatched signal label is detected in the lower orderpath. This alarm is reported when the board detects a signal label mismatch between the V5bytes.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The services in the lower order path are unavailable.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does notmatch with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does notmatch with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site.1. Modify the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is to be received by the local site or
is to be transmitted by the remote site. Ensure that the signal labels at both ends match witheach other. For details, see Configuring VC-12 POHs.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.139 LP_SLM_VC12
Description
The LP_SLM_VC12 is an alarm indicating that a mismatched signal label is detected in thelower order path. This alarm is reported when the board detects a signal label mismatch betweenthe V5 bytes.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
420
![Page 440: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/440.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.
Impact on the System
The service in this lower order path is unavailable.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does notmatch with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The signal label contained in the V5 byte that is received by the local site does notmatch with the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is transmitted by the remote site.
1. Modify the signal label contained in the V5 byte that is to be received by the local site oris to be transmitted by the remote site. Ensure that the signal labels at both ends match witheach other. For details, see Configuring VC-12 POHs.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.140 LP_SLM_VC3
Description
The LP_SLM_VC3 alarm indicates that a mismatched signal label is detected in a lower order(VC-3) path. A board reports this alarm when detecting a mismatched signal label in byte C2.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
421
![Page 441: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/441.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example,0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.
Impact on the System
The services in the lower order (VC-3) path are unavailable.
Possible Causes
The signal label in byte C2 that is received at the local site does not match with the signal labelin byte C2 that is transmitted at the opposite site.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The signal label in byte C2 that is received at the local site does not match with thesignal label in byte C2 that is transmitted at the opposite site.1. Reset the signal label in byte C2 that is received at the local site or the signal label in byte
C2 that is transmitted at the local site. Ensure that the signal labels are the same at bothsites. For details, see Configuring VC-4 POHs.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.141 LP_T_FIFO
Description
The LP_T_FIFO is an alarm indicating that the FIFO overflows on the transmit side of the lowerorder path.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
422
![Page 442: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/442.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
Bit errors occur in the services.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large.
l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large.
1. Use an SDH analyzer to check whether the frequency offset of the input signal is within50 ppm.
If... Then...
The frequency offset is very large Troubleshoot the remote site.
The frequency offset is within 50 ppm Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.142 LP_TIM
Description
The LP_TIM is an alarm indicating a mismatched trace identifier is detected in the lower orderpath. This alarm is reported when the board detects a mismatch between the J2 bytes at bothends.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
423
![Page 443: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/443.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
None.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be
transmitted by the remote site.
l Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to betransmitted by the remote site.
1. Set the byte mode of the J2 byte to be received by the local site to the disable mode.Alternatively, set the J2 byte to be received by the local site to match with the J2 byte tobe transmitted by the remote site. For details, see Configuring VC-12 POHs.
Step 2 Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.
1. Check whether the cross-connections of the intermediate nodes where the service travelsare configured correctly. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see QueryingTDM Services.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.143 LP_TIM_VC12
Description
The LP_TIM_VC12 is an alarm indicating a mismatched trace identifier is detected in the lowerorder path. This alarm is reported when the board detects a mismatch between the J2 bytes atboth ends.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
424
![Page 444: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/444.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.
Impact on the System
None.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to be
transmitted by the remote site.
l Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The J2 byte to be received by the local site does not match with the J2 byte to betransmitted by the remote site.1. Set the byte mode of the J2 byte to be received by the local site to the disable mode.
Alternatively, set the J2 byte to be received by the local site to match with the J2 byte tobe transmitted by the remote site. For details, see Configuring VC-12 POHs.
Step 2 Cause 2: The data configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.1. Check whether the cross-connections of the intermediate nodes where the service travels
are configured correctly. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see QueryingTDM Services.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.144 LP_TIM_VC3
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
425
![Page 445: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/445.jpg)
DescriptionThe LP_TIM_VC3 alarm indicates that a mismatched trace identifier is detected in a lower order(VC-3) path. A board reports this alarm when detecting a mismatched trace identifier in byte J1.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example,0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.
Impact on the SystemNone.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Byte J1 to be received at the local site does not match with byte J1 to be transmitted
at the opposite site.l Cause 2: The data configuration at intermediate sites is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Byte J1 to be received at the local site does not match with byte J1 to be transmitted atthe opposite site.1. Set byte J1 to be received at the local site to the disable mode or the same as byte J1 to be
transmitted at the opposite site. For details, see Configuring VC-4 POHs.
Step 2 Cause 2: The data configuration at intermediate sites is incorrect.1. Check whether the cross-connections of intermediate sites where the services travel are
configured correctly. If not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see QueryingTDM Services.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
426
![Page 446: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/446.jpg)
A.3.145 LP_UNEQ
Description
The LP_UNEQ is an alarm indicating that the lower order path is unequipped. This alarm isreported when the board detects that the V5 byte signal label is 0.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The services in the path are unavailable. If the services are configured with protection, protectionswitching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
The data configuration is incorrect.
l Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributarypath at the remote site is not configured with services.
l Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path atthe remote site is not configured with services.1. Check whether the tributary path at the remote site is configured with services. For details,
see Querying TDM Services.
If... Then...
The tributary path at the remote site is notconfigured with services
Configure services for the tributary path atthe remote site.
The tributary path at the remote site isconfigured with services
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.1. Check whether the cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is correct. If
not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
427
![Page 447: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/447.jpg)
Related Information
None.
A.3.146 LP_UNEQ_VC12
Description
The LP_UNEQ_VC12 is an alarm indicating that the VC-12 path is unequipped. This alarmoccurs when the board detects that the V5 byte signal label is 0.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.
Impact on the System
If the alarm is generated due to incorrect service configurations, the services are interrupted.
Possible Causes
The data configuration is incorrect.
l Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributarypath at the remote site is not configured with services.
l Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path atthe remote site is not configured with services.
1. Check whether the tributary path at the remote site is configured with services. For details,see Querying TDM Services.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
428
![Page 448: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/448.jpg)
If... Then...
The tributary path at the remote site is not configured withservices
Configure services.
The tributary path at the remote site is configured with services Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is incorrect.1. Check whether the cross-connection configuration at the intermediate nodes is correct. If
not, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.147 LP_UNEQ_VC3
DescriptionThe LP_UNEQ_VC3 alarm indicates that a lower order (VC-3) path is unequipped. A boardreports this alarm when detecting that the C2 byte signal label is 0.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example,0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.
Impact on the SystemThe services in the path are unavailable. If the services are configured with protection, protectionswitching is triggered.
Possible CausesThe data configuration is incorrect.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
429
![Page 449: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/449.jpg)
l Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributarypath at the opposite site is not.
l Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate sites is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The tributary path at the local site is configured with services, but the tributary path atthe opposite site is not.
1. Check whether the tributary path at the opposite site is configured with services. For details,see Querying TDM Services.
If... Then...
The tributary path at the opposite site is not configured withservices
Configure services.
The tributary path at the opposite site is configured withservices
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The cross-connection configuration at the intermediate sites is incorrect.
1. Check whether the cross-connection configuration at the intermediate sites is correct. Ifnot, reconfigure the cross-connections. For details, see Querying TDM Services.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.148 LPS_UNI_BI_M
Description
The LPS_UNI_BI_M is an alarm indicating that switching modes (single-ended or dual-ended)at both ends of the linear MSP do not match with each other.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
430
![Page 450: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/450.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the type of the protection group.
0x01: linear MS protection.
Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01 indicatesthat the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
Impact on the System
The system performs protection switching in single-ended mode.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The linear MSP is configured incorrectly.
The LPS_UNI_BI_M alarm is generated only when the following conditions are met:
l The switching modes (single-ended or dual-ended) at the local and remote sites aredifferent.
l The last three bits of the K2 byte are set to the indicated mode.l The type of the protocol is set to a restructure protocol.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The linear MSP is configured incorrectly.1. Change the MSP switching modes at both ends, and ensure that they are the same. For
details, see Querying the Status of the Linear MSP.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.149 LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT
Description
The LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT is an alarm indicating that the LPT closes the access port of thelocal NE. Upon detecting that the convergence port of the local NE or the access port of theremote NE is faulty, the LPT automatically closes the access port of the local NE. Then, theLPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarm is reported.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
431
![Page 451: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/451.jpg)
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicates the board ID.
Parameter 3 Indicates the ID of the sub-board.
Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Indicate the port ID.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, services are switched to the backup network and the LPT closes theaccess port of the remote NE at the same time.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The convergence port of the local NE or the access port of the remote NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The convergence port of the local NE or the access port of the remote NE is faulty.
1. Check whether the convergence port of the local NE, the access port and the convergenceport of the remote NE report the ETH_LOS alarm or other alarms related to boards andoptical modules.
2. If yes, clear these alarms. Then, check whether the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarm iscleared.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.150 LPT_INEFFECT
Description
The LPT_INEFFECT is an alarm indicating that the LPT function fails. If the user configuresthe LPT function but the board does not support the LPT function, the LPT_INEFFECT alarmis reported.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
432
![Page 452: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/452.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the IP port.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the port ID.
The values are always 0x00 0x01.
Parameter 4, Parameter 5 The values are always 0xff 0xff.
Impact on the SystemWhen the alarm is generated, the services are not affected. If the board hardware is of a veryearly version, the board software automatically prevents the LPT protocol state machine fromrunning, but reserves the LPT configuration.
Possible CausesCause 1: The board hardware is of a very early version, and the user configures the LPT function.
ProcedureStep 1 Cause 1: The board hardware is of a very early version, and the user configures the LPT function.
1. Check whether the LPT function is required.
If... Then...
The LPT function is required Replace the board with a board of the properversion. For details, see 6 Part Replacement.
The LPT function is not required Delete the configuration of the LPT. For details, seeLPT Configuration.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
433
![Page 453: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/453.jpg)
A.3.151 LPT_RFI
Description
The LPT_RFI is a remote failure indication of the link path through (LPT) function. This alarmoccurs when the LPT function detects the failure of the remote port or the LPT service network.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the IP port.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the optical interface. The values are always 0x000x01.
Parameter 4 The value is always 0xff.
Impact on the System
During the data transmission, the links are unavailable and the services are interrupted when theLPT function detects the failure of the remote port or the service network. At the same time, thebackup links are enabled. If the backup links are available, the services can be restored on thebackup links.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The remote port fails due to the alarms such as ETH_LOS and
LSR_NO_FITED, or the remote port is disabled.
l Cause 2: The LPT service network is faulty.
– The communication link is interrupted.
– There are the bit error threshold-crossing alarms BIP_EXC and B3_EXC.
– There are the alarms such as TU_LOP, TU_AIS, VCAT_LOA,VCAT_LOM_VC12, and LP_UNEQ_VC12.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
434
![Page 454: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/454.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Check the alarms on the NMS, determine the board that reports the LPT_RFI alarm, and thendetermine the ID of the alarmed port on the board according to Parameter 1.
Step 2 Cause 1: The remote port fails due to the alarms such as ETH_LOS and LSR_NO_FITED, orthe remote port is disabled.1. Check whether the corresponding opposite port is enabled.
If... Then...
The opposite port is disabled Enable the opposite port.
The opposite port is enabled Go to the next step.
2. Check whether any link fault alarm occurs on the line board.
If... Then...
Any link fault alarm occurs Handle the link fault alarms. Focus on the R_LOS andMW_LOF alarms and handle them first.
No link fault alarm occurs Go to Cause 2.
Step 3 Cause 2: The LPT service network is faulty.1. Check whether the following alarms occur on the Ethernet boards of the MEPs at both ends.
Then, handle the alarms.l ETH_LOSl LSR_NO_FITEDl BIP_EXC and B3_EXCl TU_LOP, TU_AIS, VCAT_LOA, VCAT_LOM_VC12, and LP_UNEQ_VC12
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.152 LSR_NO_FITED
DescriptionThe LSR_NO_FITED is an alarm indicating that the SFP optical module is not installed.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
435
![Page 455: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/455.jpg)
Impact on the System
The optical interface fails to carry services.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The laser of the local site is not installed.l Cause 2: The optical module is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The SFP optical module of the local site is not installed.1. Find out why the SFP optical module is not installed, and contact Huawei technical support
engineers for the installation.
Step 2 Cause 2: The optical module is faulty.1. 6.13 Replacing the SFP.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.153 LTI
Description
The LTI is an alarm indicating that the synchronization sources are lost. This alarm is reportedwhen all the synchronization sources for the NE are lost.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 0x01: system priority list
0x02: external clock priority list
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
436
![Page 456: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/456.jpg)
Impact on the SystemThe clock enters the free-run mode and loses synchronization with other NE clocks.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The clock configuration is incorrect.l Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail.l Cause 3: A fiber cut or a cable cut occurs.l Cause 4: The synchronization source is set to the manual reversion mode.l Cause 5: No input is available from the external clock source.l Cause 6: The board is faulty.
ProcedureStep 1 Cause 1: The clock configuration is incorrect.
1. Check whether the data in the clock source priority table meets the network planningrequirement. For details, see Querying the Clock Synchronization Status.
If... Then...
The configuration is incorrect Correct the configuration.
The configuration is correct Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: All the clock sources in the clock source priority table fail.1. Troubleshoot the synchronization sources based on the clock source priority table.
If... Then...
The synchronization source is anexternal clock
Handle the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm.
The synchronization source is a lineclock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the lineboard.
The synchronization source is an IFclock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the IF board.
The synchronization source is atributary clock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the tributaryboard.
The synchronization source is anEthernet clock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the Ethernetboard.
Step 3 Cause 3: A fiber cut or a cable cut occurs.1. Connect the fiber or cable properly.
Step 4 Cause 4: The synchronization source is set to the manual reversion mode.1. See Modifying the Recovery Parameter of the Clock Source, and set the clock source to
the automatic reversion mode.
Step 5 Cause 5: No input is available from the external clock source.1. See Configuring Clock Sources for External Clock Output, and configure the clock source
that provides external clock signals.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
437
![Page 457: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/457.jpg)
Step 6 Cause 6: The board is faulty.1. Replace the board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.154 MAC_EXT_EXC
Description
The MAC_EXT_EXC alarm indicates that the number of bit errors at the MAC layer crossesthe threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the threshold crossing type.
l 0x01: ETHDROP threshold crossingl 0x02: ETHEXCCOL threshold crossingl 0x03: RXBBAD threshold crossing
Impact on the System
When the MAC_EXT_EXC alarm occurs, the performance of services degrades.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: ETHDROP threshold crossing. The number of packet loss events crosses the upper
threshold.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
438
![Page 458: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/458.jpg)
l Cause 2: ETHEXCCOL threshold crossing. The number of frames unsuccessfullytransmitted after successive collisions crosses the upper threshold.
l Cause 3: RXBBAD threshold crossing. The number of bytes in received bad packets crossesthe upper threshold.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the working modes of the ports at the transmit and receive ends are the same.
1. On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports at the transmit and receive ends.
If... Then...
The ports at the transmit and receiveends work in different modes or in half-duplex mode
Set the working modes of the ports at thetransmit and receive ends to full-duplex orauto-negotiation. Ensure that the workingmodes of the ports at the transmit and receiveends are the same. For details, see Setting theGeneral Attributes of Ethernet Ports.
The ports at the transmit and receiveends work in the same mode and neitherport works in half-duplex mode.
Go to the next step.
Step 2 Handle the problem that the opposite site transmits packets abnormally.
Step 3 Handle the quality problem with the transmission line.Check whether the local end reports alarms such as ETH_LOS as the external line is damagedor over attenuated. If yes, see the related handling method to clear the alarms.
Step 4 Replace the faulty board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.155 MAC_FCS_EXC
Description
The MAC_FCS_EXC alarm indicates that the software detects that the number of bit errors atthe MAC layer crosses the threshold. The software periodically detects the number of bytesreceived by the MAC chip and the number of bytes that have bit errors. The MAC_FCS_EXCalarm is reported when the number of bit errors crosses the threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
439
![Page 459: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/459.jpg)
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the MAC_FCS_EXC alarm occurs, the performance of services degrades.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The performance of the line signals degrades.l Cause 2: The input optical power is abnormal.l Cause 3: A fiber connector is dirty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The performance of the line signals degrades.1. On the NMS, check for a LOOP_ALM alarm. If there is any, clear it. For details, see 8.6
Software Loopback.2. If the LOOP_ALM alarm persists, check whether the NMS is under a denial-of-service
(DOS) attack. If yes, eliminate the source that transmits a large amount of invalid data, andthen check whether the LOOP_ALM alarm is cleared.
3. If the LOOP_ALM alarm persists, check whether a cable or fiber is faulty. Replace thefaulty cable or fiber, and then check whether the LOOP_ALM alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: The input optical power is abnormal.1. Check whether the alarmed port reports an IN_PWR_ABN alarm as well.2. If there is any, clear the IN_PWR_ABN alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: A fiber connector is dirty.1. Clean the fiber connector and the optical receive port. For details, see 8.2 Cleaning Fiber
Connectors and Adapters.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.156 MOD_COM_FAIL
DescriptionThe MOD_COM_FAIL is an alarm indicating that Module communicates abnormally.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
440
![Page 460: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/460.jpg)
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 0x11 indicates that the communication between the system control unit andpacket switching unit is failed.
Impact on the System
The related operations cannot be performed by using the NMS and the performance informationof each module cannot be queried.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The software processing of the related modules of the board is faulty.
l Cause 2: The board hardware is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The software processing of the related modules of the board is faulty.
1. Perform a cold reset on the faulty board by using the NMS. For details, refer to 8.7.1 ColdReset.
2. remove the faulty board and insert it again.
Step 2 Cause 2: The board hardware is faulty.
1. Replace the faulty board. For details, refer to 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switchand Timing Board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.157 MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH
Description
The MOD_TYPE_MISMATCH alarm indicates that a mismatched port module is detected.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
441
![Page 461: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/461.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Maloperation
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the port that reports the alarm. For example, 0x01 indicatesthat the alarm is reported by port 1.
Impact on the System
The services at the alarmed port are interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The preset type of the SFP module is different from the actual type of the SFP module.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The preset type of the SFP module is different from the actual type of the SFP module.
1. Find out the port that reports the alarm according to the alarm parameters.
2. Check whether the preset type of the SFP module is the same as the actual type of the SFPmodule.
If... Then...
The preset type of the SFP module is thesame as the actual type of the SFP module
Replace the optical/electrical SFPmodule. Ensure that the new SFP module isof the correct type.
The preset type of the SFP module isdifferent from the actual type of the SFPmodule
Reset the type of the SFP module.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
442
![Page 462: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/462.jpg)
A.3.158 MPLS_PW_BDI
DescriptionThe MPLS_PW_BDI is an alarm of PW backward defect indication. This alarm occurs whenthe local NE receives the BDI packet, notifying that the remote NE detects that the PW is faulty.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe services on the transmit side of the local NE are faulty.
Possible CausesCause 1: The remote NE detects that the PW is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE detects that the PW is faulty.
If... Then...
A board on the remote NE is reset or faulty Rectify the fault on the remote NE.
The physical link between the local NE and theremote NE is faulty
Rectify the fault on the physical link.
The bandwidth allocated to the PW is fullyoccupied.
Increase the bandwidth of the PW.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.159 MPLS_PW_Excess
DescriptionThe MPLS_PW_Excess is an alarm indicating that excessive trail termination source identifiers(TTSIs) are received on the PW. This alarm occurs when five or more correct CV/FFD packetsare received within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
443
![Page 463: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/463.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
Services may be interrupted if excessive redundant packets are received.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Multiple PWs are configured with the same label and PW ID.
l Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Multiple PWs are configured with the same label and PW ID.
1. Check whether multiple PWs are configured with the same label and PW ID.
2. If yes, delete the redundant PWs or change the PW ID and label of each PW to uniquevalues.
3. Then, check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.
1. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected.
2. If yes, rectify the fault.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.160 MPLS_PW_LOCV
Description
The MPLS_PW_LOCV is an alarm of PW connectivity loss. This alarm occurs when noexpected CV/FFD packets are received within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
444
![Page 464: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/464.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, services are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets.l Cause 2: The OAM is different between the ends of the PW.l Cause 3: The PW that carries services is faulty.l Cause 4: The remote NE of the PW is faulty.l Cause 5: The service interface is configured incorrectly.l Cause 6: Serious congestion occurs on the network.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets.1. Check whether the remote NE of the PW stops transmitting CV/FFD packets.
If... Then...
The remote NE of the PW stopstransmitting CV/FFD packets
Enable the CV/FFD detection and thencheck whether the alarm clears.
The remote NE of the PW keepstransmitting CV/FFD packets
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The OAM is different between the ends of the PW.1. Check whether the OAM is different between the ends of the PW. If no, Setting PW OAM
Parameters according to the plan. If yes, go to cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The PW that carries services is faulty.1. Check whether the local NE and remote NE of the PW report any alarm related to boards.
If yes, clear the alarm. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared.2. Check whether any link-related alarm is reported. If yes, clear the alarm. Then, check
whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 4.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
445
![Page 465: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/465.jpg)
Step 4 Cause 4: The remote NE of the PW is faulty.1. Check whether the interconnected board of the remote NE reports the COMMUN_FAIL
alarm. If yes, the board is being reset. Clear the COMMUN_FAIL alarm and then checkwhether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared.
2. If the interconnected board of the remote NE reports other alarms, clear these alarms. Then,check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 5.
Step 5 Cause 5: The service interface is configured incorrectly.1. Check whether the service interface is configured correctly according to service planning.2. If not, reconfigure the service interface. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_LOCV alarm
is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 6.
Step 6 Cause 6: Serious congestion occurs on the network.1. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty tunnel is fully occupied.2. If yes, increase the bandwidth of the PW or eliminate the sources that transmit a large
amount of invalid data.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.161 MPLS_PW_MISMATCH
DescriptionThe MPLS_PW_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers(TTSIs) on the PW do not match with the specified one. This alarm occurs when only the packetswith wrong TTSIs are received within three consecutive CV/FFD periods.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
446
![Page 466: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/466.jpg)
Impact on the System
Services are interrupted or the packets from other PWs are received.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The ingress node or egress node of the faulty PW is configured incorrectly.
l Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The ingress node or egress node of the faulty PW is configured incorrectly.
1. Check whether the ingress node and egress node of the faulty PW are configured correctlyaccording to NE planning.
2. If the ingress node or egress node is configured incorrectly, correct the configuration andthen check whether the alarm clears.
Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.
1. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected.
2. If yes, rectify the fault.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.162 MPLS_PW_MISMERGE
Description
The MPLS_PW_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating that the trail termination source identifiers(TTSIs) are mismerged on the PW. This alarm is reported if the CV/FFD packets with correctTTSIs and those with wrong TTSIs are received in three consecutive CV/FFD periods.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
Services are interrupted or the packets from other PWs are received.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
447
![Page 467: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/467.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The PW is configured incorrectly.l Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The PW is configured incorrectly.1. Check whether the PW are configured correctly according to NE planning.2. If the PW is configured incorrectly, correct the configuration and then check whether the
alarm clears.
Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.1. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected.2. If yes, rectify the fault.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.163 MPLS_PW_SD
DescriptionThe MPLS_PW_SD is an alarm of signal degrade on the PW. This alarm is reported when thepacket loss rate of the connectivity check (CC) crosses the SD threshold but is lower than theSF threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemServices degrade and moderate packet loss occurs.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied.l Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss.l Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
448
![Page 468: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/468.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied.1. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty PW is fully occupied.2. If yes, increase the bandwidth of the PW or eliminate the sources that transmit a large
amount of invalid data. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_SD alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss.1. Check whether the fiber connector is loose. If yes, insert the fiber connector securely.
Step 3 Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty.1. Clean the fiber connector or the optical module. For details, see Checking and cleaning
fiber connectors.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.164 MPLS_PW_SF
DescriptionThe MPLS_PW_SF is an alarm of signal failure on the PW. This alarm occurs when the numberof received connectivity check (CC) packets is less than the signal failure (SF) threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemServices fail and severe packet loss occurs.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied.l Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss.l Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The bandwidth of the PW is fully occupied.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
449
![Page 469: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/469.jpg)
1. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty PW is fully occupied.2. If yes, increase the bandwidth of the PW or eliminate the sources that transmit a large
amount of invalid data. Then, check whether the MPLS_PW_SF alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: The physical port has bit errors or packet loss.1. Check whether the fiber connector is loose. If yes, insert the fiber connector securely.
Step 3 Cause 3: The fiber connector or the optical module is dirty.1. Clean the fiber connector or the optical module. For details, see Checking and cleaning
fiber connectors.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.165 MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN
Description
The MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN is an alarm of unknown defects on the PW. This alarm occurswhen the connectivity check (CC) packets of unexpected types, periods, and values are receivedwithin three consecutive periods.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
PW OAM fails.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The PW OAM configuration at the two ends is different.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The PW OAM configuration at the two ends is different.1. Change the PW OAM configuration to the same at the two ends.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
450
![Page 470: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/470.jpg)
Related Information
None.
A.3.166 MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI is an alarm of tunnel backward defect indication. This alarm occurswhen the port of the local NE receives the backward defect indication (BDI) packet, notifyingthat the opposite NE detects that the tunnel is faulty.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the services on the local NE is normal.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The opposite NE detects MPLS alarms.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite NE detects MPLS alarms.1. Clear the MPLS alarms reported on the opposite NE.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.167 MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess is an alarm indicating that excessive trail termination sourceidentifiers (TTSIs) are received in the tunnel. This alarm occurs when the Ethernet port of thelocal NE receives five or more correct CV/FFD packets within three consecutive CV/FFDperiods.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
451
![Page 471: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/471.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemServices may be interrupted if excessive redundant packets are received.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Physical links are misconnected.
ProcedureStep 1 Cause 1: Physical links are misconnected.
1. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected between the two ends. If yes, reconnectthe fiber or cable.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.168 MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI
DescriptionThe MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI is an alarm of tunnel forward defect indication. This alarm isreported when the local NE receives the forward defect indication (FDI) packet, notifying thatthe upstream tunnel at the physical layer is faulty.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, services may be interrupted.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
452
![Page 472: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/472.jpg)
Possible CausesCause 1: The upstream NE detects that the physical link that carries the tunnel is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The upstream NE detects that the physical link that carries the tunnel is faulty.
If... Then...
The link-related alarms, such as MW_BER_EXC,MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR and MW_LOF, arereported
Clear these alarms first.
The transmit board of the local NE reports hardware-relatedalarms (alarms on the optical modules or boards), such asHARD_BAD and LSR_NO_FITED
Clear these alarms first.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.169 MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
DescriptionThe MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV is an alarm of tunnel connectivity loss. This alarm occurs whenthe port of the local NE fails to receive expected CV/FFD packets within three CV/FFD periods.(The expected CV/FFD packets must carry correct TTSIs and have the correct type, period, andvalue.)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, the services that the faulty tunnel carries are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: In detection mode of manual, the MPLS OAM settings, such as detection packet
type and detection packet period, differ at the two ends.l Cause 2: Severe congestion occurs on the network.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
453
![Page 473: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/473.jpg)
l Cause 3: A certain board is faulty.l Cause 4: The physical link between the two ends is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: In detection mode of manual, the MPLS OAM settings, such as detection packet typeand detection packet period, differ at the two ends.1. Check whether the MPLS OAM settings are the same at the two ends.2. If the MPLS OAM settings are different at the two ends, change them to the same.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: Severe congestion occurs on the network.1. If the alarm persists, check whether the bandwidth allocated to the faulty tunnel is fully
used. If the bandwidth of the faulty tunnel is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminatethe sources that transmit a large amount of invalid data.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: A certain board is faulty.1. Check whether the remote NE reports the COMMUN_FAIL alarm. If yes, you can infer
that the remote NE is being reset. Wait until the COMMUN_FAIL alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the local NE and the remote NE report alarms related to optical modules orboards, such as HARD_BAD and LSR_NO_FITED. If yes, clear these alarms first.
3. Then, check whether the MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: The physical link between the two ends is faulty.1. Check whether any fiber or cable is damaged. If yes, replace the damaged fiber or cable.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
454
![Page 474: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/474.jpg)
A.3.170 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the trail termination sourceidentifiers (TTSIs) on the tunnel do not match with the specified one. This alarm is reported ifno CV/FFD packets with correct TTSIs are received in three consecutive CV/FFD periods.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, services are interrupted or packets from other tunnels are received.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The tunnel settings are incorrect. For example, the LSR IDs or tunnel IDs differ
at the two ends of the tunnel.
l Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The tunnel settings are incorrect. For example, the LSR IDs or tunnel IDs differ at thetwo ends of the tunnel.
1. Check whether the tunnel settings are the same at the two ends.
l If the source NE is an ingress node, Sink Node is the LSR ID of the sink NE. If the sinkNE is an egress node, Source Node is the LSR ID of the source NE.
l Tunnel IDs of the source NE and sink NE of a tunnel must be set to the same.
2. If the tunnel IDs are different, change them to the same.
Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.
1. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected between the two ends. If yes, connectthe fiber or cable properly.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
455
![Page 475: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/475.jpg)
A.3.171 MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE
Description
The MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE is an alarm indicating that the trail termination sourceidentifiers (TTSIs) are mismerged in the tunnel. This alarm is reported if the CV/FFD packetswith correct TTSIs and those with wrong TTSIs are received in three consecutive CV/FFDperiods.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the packets from other tunnels are received.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Multiple tunnels are configured with the same label.
l Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Multiple tunnels are configured with the same label.
1. Check whether multiple tunnels are configured with the same label.
2. If multiple tunnels are configured with the same label, delete the redundant labels or changethe label of each tunnel to a unique value.
Step 2 Cause 2: Physical links are misconnected.
1. Check whether any fiber or cable is misconnected between the two ends. If yes, connectthe fiber or cable properly.
----End
Related Information
On the NE, the label of each MPLS tunnel is unique.
A.3.172 MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
456
![Page 476: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/476.jpg)
DescriptionThe MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL is an alarm indicating that the OAM protocol negotiationbetween the two ends of the tunnel fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, services are switched to the backup network and the LPT closes theaccess port of the remote NE at the same time.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing on one end
and is disabled on the other end.l Cause 2: The tunnel is unavailable when the OAM function is enabled and the detection
mode is auto-sensing.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The OAM function is enabled and the detection mode is auto-sensing on one end andis disabled on the other end.1. Enable the OAM function.
Step 2 Cause 2: The tunnel is unavailable when the OAM function is enabled and the detection modeis auto-sensing.1. Check whether the sink node of the alarmed tunnel reports the HARD_BAD,
ETH_LOS, or R_LOS alarm.2. If yes, clear the alarm. After the OAM protocol negotiation succeeds, the
MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL alarm clears.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
457
![Page 477: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/477.jpg)
A.3.173 MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
DescriptionThe MPLS_TUNNEL_SD is an alarm of signal degrade on the tunnel. This alarm is reportedwhen the packet loss rate of the CV/FFD crosses the SD threshold but is lower than the SFthreshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemServices degrade and moderate packet loss occurs.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur.l Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used.
ProcedureStep 1 Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur.
1. Clear bit errors.2. If the alarm persists, proceed to cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used.1. Check whether the bandwidth allocated to the tunnel is fully used. If the bandwidth of the
faulty tunnel is exhausted, increase the bandwidth or eliminate the sources that transmit alarge amount of invalid data. Check whether the alarm clears.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.174 MPLS_TUNNEL_SF
DescriptionThe MPLS_TUNNEL_SF is an alarm indicating that the tunnel signal degrades severely. Thisalarm is reported if the loss ratio of the CV/FFD packets is higher than the SF threshold and CV/FFD packets are received in three consecutive periods.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
458
![Page 478: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/478.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, the quality of service degrades severely and a large number of packetsare lost.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur.l Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Excessive bit errors occur.1. Clear bit errors.2. If the MPLS_TUNNEL_SF persists, go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used.1. On the NMS, check whether the bandwidth of the tunnel is fully used. If the bandwidth of
the tunnel is fully used, increase the bandwidth allocated to the tunnel or eliminate anysource that transmits a large amount of invalid data. Check whether the alarm is cleared.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.175 MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN
DescriptionThe MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN is an alarm indicating that certain unknown defects existon the tunnel. This alarm is reported when the port receives the CV packets and the FFD packets.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
459
![Page 479: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/479.jpg)
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, the OAM function is affected.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The OAM settings differ at the two ends.l Cause 2: The NE receives packets from an unknown source.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The OAM settings differ at the two ends.1. If the MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN alarm is reported transiently, check whether Tunnel
OAM configuration is changed on the local NE and the opposite NE.2. If the local NE and the opposite NE have different Tunnel OAM configuration, the
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN alarm is reported transiently and then theMPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV alarm is reported. Ensure that both ends have the same TunnelOAM configuration. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: The NE receives packets from an unknown source.1. Check whether there is any service configured between the NE and an unknown source, or
whether the NE is connected to an unknown source.2. If yes, modify the incorrect configuration or reconnect the fibers.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.176 MS_AIS
DescriptionThe MS_AIS is an alarm indicating multiplex section alarms. This alarm is reported when theboard detects that bits 6-8 of the K2 byte in the three consecutive frames are 111.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
460
![Page 480: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/480.jpg)
Impact on the System
The services on the line port are interrupted. If the services are configured with protection,protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
l Cause 2: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
1. Replace the line board at the opposite site based on the type of the alarmed board.
If... Then...
The line board reports the alarm Replace the line board at the opposite end.
The IF board reports the alarm Replace the IF board at the opposite end.
2. Replace the board and then check whether the alarm is cleared.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board replacement End the fault handling.
The alarm persists after the board replacement Go to the next step.
3. Replace the system control, cross-connect, and timing board at the opposite end.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board replacement End the fault handling.
The alarm persists after the board replacement Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.177 MS_CROSSTR
Description
The MS_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that a performance indicator of the multiplex sectioncrosses the threshold. This alarm is reported when the board detects that the MS BERperformance indicator crosses the preset threshold.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
461
![Page 481: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/481.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the performance monitoring period:
l 0x01: 15 minutesl 0x02: 24 hours
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 2 is always 0x00. Parameter 3 indicate the ID of aperformance event that causes the alarm and has the followingmeanings:
l 0x10: MSBBEl 0x11: MSESl 0x12: MSSESl 0x13: MSFEBBEl 0x14: MSFEESl 0x15: MSFESESl 0x16: MSUASl 0x17: MSCSESl 0x18: MSFECSESl 0x21: MSFEUAS
Impact on the SystemA large number of bit errors occur in the services, and the services may be interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Services are interrupted for a long time.l Cause 2: The MS BER performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.
ProcedureStep 1 Cause 1: Services are interrupted for a long time.
NOTEHandle the alarm as follows if the value of parameter 3 is 0x16:
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
462
![Page 482: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/482.jpg)
1. Check whether fibers are properly connected. If not, connect the fibers again according toplanning information.
2. Check whether cross-connections are configured for service ports. If not, configure cross-connections again according to planning information.
Step 2 Cause 2: The MS BER performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.1. Check the threshold crossing records of MS BER performance events to find out the
performance event that crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8 Browsing thePerformance Event Threshold-Crossing Records.
2. Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.178 MS_RDI
DescriptionThe MS_RDI is an alarm indicating that data reception at the remote end of the multiplex sectionfails. This alarm is reported when the board detects that bits 6-8 of the K2 byte are 110.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe services on the local site are not affected. The services received by the opposite station,however, are interrupted.
Possible CausesCause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station, and the message indicatesthat data reception at the remote end of the multiplex section fails.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station, and the message indicatesthat data reception at the remote end of the multiplex section fails.1. Rectify the fault that occurs on the opposite station.
The possible alarms are as follows:
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
463
![Page 483: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/483.jpg)
l MS_AISl R_LOSl R_LOFl B2_EXCl B2_SD
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.179 MS_REI
DescriptionThe MS_REI is an alarm indicating that bit errors occur on the remote end of the multiplexsection. This alarm is reported when the board detects that the M1 byte is non-zero.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Warning Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe services on the local site are not affected. The services received by the opposite station,however, has bit errors.
Possible CausesCause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station, and the message indicatesthat bit errors occur on the remote end of the multiplex section.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local site receives a message from the opposite station, and the message indicatesthat bit errors occur on the remote end of the multiplex section.1. Handle the MS_BBE performance event on the port of the opposite station.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
464
![Page 484: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/484.jpg)
A.3.180 MSAD_CROSSTR
DescriptionThe MSAD_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that the adaptation performance indicator of themultiplex section crosses the threshold. This alarm is reported when the board detects that anAU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the performance monitoring period:
l 0x01: 15 minutesl 0x02: 24 hours
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of a performance event that causes the alarm.
l 0x2a: AUPJCHIGHl 0x2b: AUPJCLOWl 0x2c: AUPJCNEW
Impact on the SystemBit errors may occur in the services.
Possible CausesCause 1: An AU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: An AU pointer adaptation performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.1. Check the threshold crossing records of the AU pointer adaptation performance events to
find out the performance event that crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
465
![Page 485: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/485.jpg)
2. Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.181 MULTI_RPL_OWNER
Description
The MULTI_RPL_OWNER is an alarm indicating that the ring network contains severalRPL_OWNER nodes.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the ID of the ERPS instance.
Impact on the System
The ERPS protection fails and the services configured on the Ethernet ring are interrupted.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The related data is configured incorrectly.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The related data is configured incorrectly.
1. Reconfigure the ERPS protection. For details, see Creating Ethernet Ring ProtectionInstances.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
466
![Page 486: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/486.jpg)
Related Information
The following table describes the meanings of the parameters in the MULTI_RPL_OWNERalarm reported by the EMS6.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 4 Indicates the port ID.
Parameter 5, Parameter 6 Indicate the ID of the ERPS instance.
A.3.182 MW_AM_TEST
Description
The MW_AM_TEST is an alarm indicating that the IF port is in the AM testing state.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Other alarms
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The transmission capacity is reduced during the AM test.
Possible Causesl Cause: The AM testing is enabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The AM testing is enabled.1. After the AM testing ends, disable the AM testing.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.183 MW_BER_EXC
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
467
![Page 487: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/487.jpg)
DescriptionThe MW_BER_EXC is an alarm indicating that excessive bit errors occur on the radio link. Thisalarm is reported when the bit errors on the radio link exceed the specified threshold (10-3 bydefault).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the MW_BER_EXC alarm occurs, the service on the port is interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy.l Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.l Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.l Cause 4: An interference event occurs.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy.1. At the local end, check whether the receive power of the ODU is normal. If yes, determine
the abnormality and take proper measures. For details, see Querying the Historical TransmitPower and Receive Power
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
468
![Page 488: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/488.jpg)
If... Then...
The RSL is lower than the receiversensitivity
Follow the steps:
1. Check the installation of the antenna to ensurethat the azimuth of the antenna meets therequirement.
2. Check the antenna direction. Check whetherthe received signal is from the main lobe.If the antenna direction does not meet therequirement, adjust the antenna in a widerange.
3. Check whether the setting of the polarizationdirection of the antenna is correct. Adjust theincorrect polarization direction.
4. Check whether the antenna gain at both thetransmit and receive ends meets thespecifications. Replace the antennas that donot meet the requirement.
5. Check whether any mountain or buildingobstacle exists in the transmit direction.If yes, contact the network planningdepartment for proper modification of theplanning design, hence preventing the blockof the mountain or building obstacle.
The RSL is higher than the specifiedRSL of the network. The offset value istens of decibels. The duration is fromtens of seconds to several hours.
Slow up fading occurs. Follow the steps:
1. Check whether any co-channel interferenceoccurs.a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. For
details, see Configuring the IF/ODUInformation of a Radio Link.
b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details,see Configuring the IF/ODU Informationof a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90dBm, it indicates that there is co-channelinterference that may affect the long-termavailability and errored-secondperformance of the system.
2. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze theinterference source.
3. Contact the spectrum managementdepartment to clear the interference spectrumor change plans to minimize the interference.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
469
![Page 489: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/489.jpg)
If... Then...
The RSL is lower than the specified RSLof the network. The offset value is tens ofdecibels. The duration is from tens ofseconds to several hours.
Slow down fading occurs. Generally, the radiolink may be faulty in both directions, becauseslow fading is imposed by the transmission path.Contact the network planning department to makethe following changes:
l Increase the installation height of the antenna.l Reduce the transmission distance.l Increase the antenna gain.l Increase the transmit power.
If the RSL is lower than or higher thanthe specified RSL of the network and ifthe duration is from several millisecondsto tens of seconds.
Fast fading occurs. Contact the network planningdepartment to make the following changes:
l Adjust the position of the antenna to block thereflected wave or make the reflection point fallon the ground that has a small reflectioncoefficient, therefore reducing the multipathfading.
l Adjust the RF configuration to make the linksin the 1+1 SD configuration.
l If the links are configured with the 1+1 SDprotection, adjust the height offset betweentwo antennas to make the receive power of oneantenna stronger than the receive power of theother antenna.
l Increase the fading margin.
Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one.Follow the steps:
1. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopbackfor the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the IF board.
The fault at the opposite end is rectified Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cableconnector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector.
3. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meetthe requirement.
4. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the ODU at the opposite end.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
470
![Page 490: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/490.jpg)
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is rectified End the alarm handling.
Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one.Follow the steps:
1. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopbackfor the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified after the loopback.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the IF board.
The fault at the opposite end is rectified Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cableconnector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector.
3. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meetthe requirement.
4. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the ODU at the local end.
The fault at the opposite end is rectified End the alarm handling.
Step 4 Cause 4: An interference event occurs.
1. Check whether any co-channel interference occurs.
a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end.
b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Informationof a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channelinterference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-secondperformance of the system.
2. Check whether any adjacent channel interference occurs.
a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end.
b. Adjust the radio working mode at the local end and use the minimum channel spacing.For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.
c. Decrease the received frequency at the local end by a half of the channel spacing. Fordetails, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.
d. Test and record the RSL.
e. Increase the received frequency at the local end, with a step length of 0.5 MHz or 1MHz, and record the RSL accordingly until the received frequency is equal to theoriginal received frequency plus a half of the channel spacing.
f. Compare the recorded RSLs, and check whether the RSL in a certain spectrum isabnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted range.
3. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
471
![Page 491: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/491.jpg)
4. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or changeplans to minimize the interference.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.184 MW_BER_SD
Description
The MW_BER_SD is an alarm indicating that signal deteriorates on the radio link. This alarmis reported when the bit errors on the radio link exceed the specified threshold (10-6 by default)but does not reach the MW_BER_EXC alarm threshold (10-3 by default).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The service performance on the port deteriorates. If the equipment is configured with 1+1 FD/SD protection, switching on the channel side may be triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy.
l Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
l Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
l Cause 4: An interference event occurs.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy.
1. At the local end, check whether the receive power of the ODU is normal. If yes, determinethe abnormality and take proper measures. For details, see Querying the Historical TransmitPower and Receive Power
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
472
![Page 492: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/492.jpg)
If... Then...
The RSL is lower than the receiversensitivity
Follow the steps:
1. Check the installation of the antenna to ensurethat the azimuth of the antenna meets therequirement.
2. Check the antenna direction. Check whetherthe received signal is from the main lobe.If the antenna direction does not meet therequirement, adjust the antenna in a widerange.
3. Check whether the setting of the polarizationdirection of the antenna is correct. Adjust theincorrect polarization direction.
4. Check whether the antenna gain at both thetransmit and receive ends meets thespecifications. Replace the antennas that donot meet the requirement.
5. Check whether any mountain or buildingobstacle exists in the transmit direction.If yes, contact the network planningdepartment for proper modification of theplanning design, hence preventing the blockof the mountain or building obstacle.
The RSL is higher than the specifiedRSL of the network. The offset value istens of decibels. The duration is fromtens of seconds to several hours.
Slow up fading occurs. Follow the steps:
1. Check whether any co-channel interferenceoccurs.a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. For
details, see Configuring the IF/ODUInformation of a Radio Link.
b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details,see Configuring the IF/ODU Informationof a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90dBm, it indicates that there is co-channelinterference that may affect the long-termavailability and errored-secondperformance of the system.
2. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze theinterference source.
3. Contact the spectrum managementdepartment to clear the interference spectrumor change plans to minimize the interference.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
473
![Page 493: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/493.jpg)
If... Then...
The RSL is lower than the specified RSLof the network. The offset value is tens ofdecibels. The duration is from tens ofseconds to several hours.
Slow down fading occurs. Generally, the radiolink may be faulty in both directions, becauseslow fading is imposed by the transmission path.Contact the network planning department to makethe following changes:
l Increase the installation height of the antenna.l Reduce the transmission distance.l Increase the antenna gain.l Increase the transmit power.
If the RSL is lower than or higher thanthe specified RSL of the network and ifthe duration is from several millisecondsto tens of seconds.
Fast fading occurs. Contact the network planningdepartment to make the following changes:
l Adjust the position of the antenna to block thereflected wave or make the reflection point fallon the ground that has a small reflectioncoefficient, therefore reducing the multipathfading.
l Adjust the RF configuration to make the linksin the 1+1 SD configuration.
l If the links are configured with the 1+1 SDprotection, adjust the height offset betweentwo antennas to make the receive power of oneantenna stronger than the receive power of theother antenna.
l Increase the fading margin.
Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one.Follow the steps:
1. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopbackfor the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the IF board.
The fault at the opposite end is rectified Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cableconnector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector.
3. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meetthe requirement.
4. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the ODU at the opposite end.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
474
![Page 494: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/494.jpg)
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is rectified End the alarm handling.
Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one.Follow the steps:
1. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopbackfor the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified after the loopback.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the IF board.
The fault at the opposite end is rectified Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cableconnector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector.
3. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meetthe requirement.
4. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the ODU at the local end.
The fault at the opposite end is rectified End the alarm handling.
Step 4 Cause 4: An interference event occurs.
1. Check whether any co-channel interference occurs.
a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end.
b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Informationof a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channelinterference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-secondperformance of the system.
2. Check whether any adjacent channel interference occurs.
a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end.
b. Adjust the radio working mode at the local end and use the minimum channel spacing.For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.
c. Decrease the received frequency at the local end by a half of the channel spacing. Fordetails, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.
d. Test and record the RSL.
e. Increase the received frequency at the local end, with a step length of 0.5 MHz or 1MHz, and record the RSL accordingly until the received frequency is equal to theoriginal received frequency plus a half of the channel spacing.
f. Compare the recorded RSLs, and check whether the RSL in a certain spectrum isabnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted range.
3. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
475
![Page 495: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/495.jpg)
4. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or changeplans to minimize the interference.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.185 MW_CFG_MISMATCH
Description
The MW_CFG_MISMATCH is an alarm of configuration mismatch on radio links. This alarmoccurs when an NE detects configuration mismatch on both ends of a radio link. For example,the number of E1 signals, the number of STM-1 signals, AM enabling, 1588 overhead enabling,modulation mode may be configured differently on both ends of a radio link.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the cause of the fault.
l 0x01: The number of E1 signals is different.l 0x02: The AM enabling is different.l 0x03: The 1588 overhead enabling is different.l 0x04: The modulation mode is different.l 0x05: The service mode is different.l 0x06: The number of STM-1 signals is different.l 0x09: The IP header compression enabling is different.
Parameter 2 When the value of Parameter 1 is 0x09:
l 0x01: The air interface compression at L2 is different.l 0x02: The air interface compression at L3 is different.
When Parameter 1 takes another value, Parameter 2 is reserved.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
476
![Page 496: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/496.jpg)
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, the service configuration cannot take effect or services are interrupted.After the NE is power cycled or reset, this alarm may still affect services.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The number of E1 signals is different on both ends of a radio link.l Cause 2: The AM enabling is different on both ends of a radio link.l Cause 3: The 1588 overhead enabling is different on both ends of a radio link.l Cause 4: The modulation mode is different on both ends of a radio link.l Cause 5: The service mode is different on both ends of a radio link.l Cause 6: The IP header compression is different on both ends of a radio link.l Cause 7: The air interface compression at L2 or L3 is different.l Cause 8: The number of STM-1 signals is different on both ends of a radio link.
ProcedureStep 1 Determine the possible cause of the alarm according to the alarm parameters.
Step 2 Check the configuration on both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the configuration is the sameon both ends of the radio link. For details, see Managing Radio Links.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.186 MW_CONT_WAVE
DescriptionThe MW_CONT_WAVE is an alarm of continuous wave. This alarm occurs if the continuouswave function is enabled on the IF board and clears after the continuous wave function isdisabled.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemIf the continuous wave function is enabled, radio links cannot transmit services.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
477
![Page 497: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/497.jpg)
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The continuous wave function is enabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Disable the continuous wave function.
1. In NE Explorer, select the IF board.
2. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
3. Select the alarmed port from IF Attribution.
4. Set 350MHz Consecutive Wave Status to Stop.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.187 MW_E1_LOST
Description
The MW_E1_LOST is an alarm indicating that E1 services are lost. This alarm occurs when theAM downshifts the modulation scheme or E1 bandwidth decreases in the current modulationscheme.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the timeslots of E1 services.
Impact on the System
Some E1 services are lost.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
478
![Page 498: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/498.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The AM downshifts the modulation scheme.
l Cause 2: E1 bandwidth decreases in the current modulation scheme.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The AM downshifts the modulation scheme.
1. Handle the alarm according to AM_DOWNSHIFT.
Step 2 Cause 2: E1 bandwidth decreases in the current modulation scheme.
1. Check whether the decrease of E1 bandwidth is caused by incorrect operations. If yes,restore E1 bandwidth to an appropriate value; if not, ignore the alarm.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.188 MW_FEC_UNCOR
Description
The MW_FEC_UNCOR is an alarm indicating that radio frames forward error correction (FEC)encoding cannot be corrected.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
Bit errors occur in the services. If the equipment is configured with 1+1 FD/SD protection, HSMchannel protection switching may be triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy.
l Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
l Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
l Cause 4: An interference event occurs.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
479
![Page 499: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/499.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy.1. At the local end, check whether the receive power of the ODU is normal. If yes, determine
the abnormality and take proper measures. For details, see Querying the Historical TransmitPower and Receive Power
If... Then...
The RSL is lower than the receiversensitivity
Follow the steps:
1. Check the installation of the antenna to ensurethat the azimuth of the antenna meets therequirement.
2. Check the antenna direction. Check whetherthe received signal is from the main lobe.If the antenna direction does not meet therequirement, adjust the antenna in a widerange.
3. Check whether the setting of the polarizationdirection of the antenna is correct. Adjust theincorrect polarization direction.
4. Check whether the antenna gain at both thetransmit and receive ends meets thespecifications. Replace the antennas that donot meet the requirement.
5. Check whether any mountain or buildingobstacle exists in the transmit direction.If yes, contact the network planningdepartment for proper modification of theplanning design, hence preventing the blockof the mountain or building obstacle.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
480
![Page 500: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/500.jpg)
If... Then...
The RSL is higher than the specifiedRSL of the network. The offset value istens of decibels. The duration is fromtens of seconds to several hours.
Slow up fading occurs. Follow the steps:
1. Check whether any co-channel interferenceoccurs.a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. For
details, see Configuring the IF/ODUInformation of a Radio Link.
b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details,see Configuring the IF/ODU Informationof a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90dBm, it indicates that there is co-channelinterference that may affect the long-termavailability and errored-secondperformance of the system.
2. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze theinterference source.
3. Contact the spectrum managementdepartment to clear the interference spectrumor change plans to minimize the interference.
The RSL is lower than the specified RSLof the network. The offset value is tens ofdecibels. The duration is from tens ofseconds to several hours.
Slow down fading occurs. Generally, the radiolink may be faulty in both directions, becauseslow fading is imposed by the transmission path.Contact the network planning department to makethe following changes:
l Increase the installation height of the antenna.l Reduce the transmission distance.l Increase the antenna gain.l Increase the transmit power.
If the RSL is lower than or higher thanthe specified RSL of the network and ifthe duration is from several millisecondsto tens of seconds.
Fast fading occurs. Contact the network planningdepartment to make the following changes:
l Adjust the position of the antenna to block thereflected wave or make the reflection point fallon the ground that has a small reflectioncoefficient, therefore reducing the multipathfading.
l Adjust the RF configuration to make the linksin the 1+1 SD configuration.
l If the links are configured with the 1+1 SDprotection, adjust the height offset betweentwo antennas to make the receive power of oneantenna stronger than the receive power of theother antenna.
l Increase the fading margin.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
481
![Page 501: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/501.jpg)
Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one.Follow the steps:
1. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopbackfor the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified after the loopback.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the IF board.
The fault at the opposite end is rectified Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cableconnector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector.
3. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meetthe requirement.
4. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the ODU at the opposite end.
The fault at the opposite end is rectified End the alarm handling.
Step 3 Cause 3: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station and excluding the position one by one.Follow the steps:
1. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end. For details, see 8.6.6 Setting Loopbackfor the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified after the loopback.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the IF board.
The fault at the opposite end is rectified Go to the next step.
2. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If any cableconnector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector.
3. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does not meetthe requirement.
4. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the ODU at the local end.
The fault at the opposite end is rectified End the alarm handling.
Step 4 Cause 4: An interference event occurs.1. Check whether any co-channel interference occurs.
a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end.b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information
of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channel
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
482
![Page 502: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/502.jpg)
interference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-secondperformance of the system.
2. Check whether any adjacent channel interference occurs.
a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end.b. Adjust the radio working mode at the local end and use the minimum channel spacing.
For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.c. Decrease the received frequency at the local end by a half of the channel spacing. For
details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.d. Test and record the RSL.e. Increase the received frequency at the local end, with a step length of 0.5 MHz or 1
MHz, and record the RSL accordingly until the received frequency is equal to theoriginal received frequency plus a half of the channel spacing.
f. Compare the recorded RSLs, and check whether the RSL in a certain spectrum isabnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted range.
3. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source.4. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change
plans to minimize the interference.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.189 MW_LIM
Description
The MW_LIM is an alarm indicating that a mismatched radio link identifier is detected. Thisalarm is reported if an IF board detects that the link ID in the radio frame overheads is inconsistentwith the specified link ID.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
After the IDU IF board reports the MW_LIM alarm, the IF board inserts the AIS alarm into thereceived signal. Then, the services on the radio link are interrupted. If the services are configuredwith SNCP, protection switching may be triggered.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
483
![Page 503: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/503.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The link ID of the local site does not match with the link ID of the opposite station.
l Cause 2: The services on other radio links are received due to the incorrect configurationof the radio link receive frequency at the local or opposite station.
l Cause 3: The antenna receives the radio from the other stations, because the direction ofthe antenna is set incorrectly.
l Cause 4: The polarization direction of the XPIC is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The link ID of the local site does not match with the link ID of the opposite station.1. Check whether the link ID of the local site matches with the link ID of the opposite station.
For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If not, set the linkIDs of the two stations to the same value according to the requirements of the networkingplanning.
Step 2 Cause 2: The services on other radio links are received due to the incorrect configuration of theradio link receive frequency at the local or opposite station.1. Check whether the receive and transmit frequencies of the local site are consistent with the
receive and transmit frequencies of the opposite station. For details, see Configuring theIF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If not, set the receive and transmit frequencies of thetwo stations again.
Step 3 Cause 3: The antenna receives radio signals from the other stations, because the direction of theantenna is set incorrectly.1. Adjust the direction of the antenna and ensure that the antennas at both ends are aligned.
Step 4 Cause 4: The polarization direction of the XPIC is incorrect.1. If XPIC protection groups are configured, check whether the XPIC configuration is correct.
For details, see Creating an XPIC Workgroup.
a. Check whether the settings of XPIC IF board in polarization direction-V andpolarization direction-H meet the requirement of the planning.
If... Then...
The polarization direction does not meetthe requirement of the planning
Delete the working XPIC group that isconfigured incorrectly and create theother working XPIC group again.
The polarization direction meets therequirement of the planning
Go to the next step.
b. Check whether Link ID-V and Link ID-H meet the requirement of the planning.
If... Then...
The link ID does not meet therequirement of the planning
Reset the ID of the radio link of the XPICIF board according to the planning. Fordetails, see Creating an XPIC WorkingGroup.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
484
![Page 504: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/504.jpg)
If... Then...
The link ID meets the requirement of theplanning
Go to the next step.
2. Check and modify the XPIC IF board and ODU, and the mapping relationship between the
ODU and the feed bottom. Ensure that the XPIC IF boards in the polarization direction Vof the two ends are interconnected with each other through the radio link in the polarizationdirection V, and the XPIC IF boards in the polarization direction H of the two ends areinterconnected with each other through the radio link in the polarization direction H.
----End
Related InformationThe MW_LIM alarm is generated due to the inconsistency between the specified link ID andthe received link ID. When the MW_LOF alarm is generated on the link, the received link IDis a random value. In this case, the link ID is invalid. The MW_LIM alarm is also suppressedby the MW_LOF alarm.
A.3.190 MW_LOF
DescriptionThe MW_LOF is an alarm indicating that the radio frame is lost.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe services are interrupted. If the system is configured with protection, protection switchingmay be triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The other alarms are generated.l Cause 2: In the case of TDM radio services, the IF working modes at the local site and the
opposite station are different. In the case of Integrated IP radio services, the channelbandwidth and modulation modes at the local site and the opposite station are different.
l Cause 3: The operating frequency of the ODU at the local site is inconsistent with theoperating frequency of the ODU at the opposite station.
l Cause 4: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
485
![Page 505: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/505.jpg)
l Cause 5: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.l Cause 6: The receive power of the ODU is abnormal.l Cause 7: An interference event occurs.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The other alarms are generated.1. Check whether any alarms are generated in the equipment of the local site. If yes, take
priority to clear them.The relevant alarms are as follows:l HARD_BADl VOLT_LOSl IF_CABLE_OPENl BD_STATUSl RADIO_RSL_LOWl CONFIG_NOSUPPORTl TEMP_ALARM
Step 2 Cause 2: In the case of TDM radio services, the IF working modes at the local site and theopposite station are different. In the case of Integrated IP radio services, the channel bandwidthand modulation modes at the local site and the opposite station are different.1. In the case of TDM radio services, check whether the working mode of the IF board at the
local site is consistent with the working mode of the IF board at the opposite station. Fordetails, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. If not, reset the workingmode of the IF board according to the network planning.
In the case of Hybrid radio services, check whether the channel bandwidth and modulationmodes are the same at both ends. If not, change the channel bandwidth and modulationmodes according to the network planning. For details, see Setting the Hybrid/AMAttributes.
Step 3 Cause 3: The operating frequency of the ODU at the local site is inconsistent with the operatingfrequency of the ODU at the opposite station.1. Ensure that the type of the ODU at the local site is consistent with the type of the ODU at
the opposite station.2. Reset the operating frequency of the ODU according to the network planning. For details,
see Setting ODU Transmit Frequency Attributes.Set the transmit frequency of the local site to the same as the receive frequency of theopposite station. Then, set the receive frequency of the local site to the same as the transmitfrequency of the opposite station.
Step 4 Cause 4: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.1. Check whether any alarms are generated in the equipment of the local site. If yes, take
priority to clear them.The relevant alarms are as follows:l HARD_BADl BD_STATUSl VOLT_LOS
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
486
![Page 506: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/506.jpg)
l IF_CABLE_OPENl RADIO_MUTEl RADIO_TSL_HIGHl RADIO_TSL_LOWl TEMP_ALARM
2. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station.
Follow the steps:
a. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the opposite end. For details, see 8.6.6 SettingLoopback for the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectifiedafter the loopback.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the IF board.
The fault at the opposite end is rectified Go to the next step.
b. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If anycable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector.
c. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does notmeet the requirement.
d. Then, check whether the fault at the opposite end is rectified.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is notrectified
Replace the ODU at the opposite end.
The fault at the opposite end is rectified End the alarm handling.
Step 5 Cause 5: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
1. Locate the fault by looping back the opposite station.
Follow the steps:
a. Perform an inloop on the IF port at the local end. For details, see 8.6.6 SettingLoopback for the IF Board. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified afterthe loopback.
If... Then...
The fault at the opposite end is not rectified Replace the IF board.
The fault at the opposite end is rectified Go to the next step.
b. Check whether the cable connector is prepared according to the requirement. If anycable connector does not meet the requirement, make a new connector.
c. Check whether the IF cable is wet, broken, or pressed. Replace the cable that does notmeet the requirement.
d. Check whether the fault at the local end is rectified.
Step 6 Cause 6: The receive power of the ODU is abnormal.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
487
![Page 507: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/507.jpg)
1. At the local site, check whether the receive power of the ODU is abnormal. For details, seeBrowse history performance events. If yes, determine the abnormality and take propermeasures.
If... Then...
The RSL is lower than the receiversensitivity
Follow the steps:
1. Check the installation of the antenna to ensurethat the azimuth of the antenna meets therequirement.
2. Check the antenna direction. Check whetherthe received signal is from the main lobe.If the antenna direction does not meet therequirement, adjust the antenna in a widerange.
3. Check whether the setting of the polarizationdirection of the antenna is correct. Adjust theincorrect polarization direction.
4. Check whether the antenna gain at both thetransmit and receive ends meets thespecifications. Replace the antennas that donot meet the requirement.
5. Check whether any mountain or buildingobstacle exists in the transmit direction.If yes, contact the network planningdepartment for proper modification of theplanning design, hence preventing the blockof the mountain or building obstacle.
The RSL is higher than the specifiedRSL of the network. The offset value istens of decibels. The duration is fromtens of seconds to several hours.
Slow up fading occurs. Follow the steps:
1. Check whether any co-channel interferenceoccurs.a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end. For
details, see Configuring the IF/ODUInformation of a Radio Link.
b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details,see Configuring the IF/ODU Informationof a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90dBm, it indicates that there is co-channelinterference that may affect the long-termavailability and errored-secondperformance of the system.
2. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze theinterference source.
3. Contact the spectrum managementdepartment to clear the interference spectrumor change plans to minimize the interference.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
488
![Page 508: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/508.jpg)
If... Then...
The RSL is lower than the specified RSLof the network. The offset value is tens ofdecibels. The duration is from tens ofseconds to several hours.
Slow down fading occurs. Generally, the radiolink may be faulty in both directions, becauseslow fading is imposed by the transmission path.Contact the network planning department to makethe following changes:
l Increase the installation height of the antenna.l Reduce the transmission distance.l Increase the antenna gain.l Increase the transmit power.
If the RSL is lower than or higher thanthe specified RSL of the network and ifthe duration is from several millisecondsto tens of seconds.
Fast fading occurs. Contact the network planningdepartment to make the following changes:
l Adjust the position of the antenna to block thereflected wave or make the reflection point fallon the ground that has a small reflectioncoefficient, therefore reducing the multipathfading.
l Adjust the RF configuration to make the linksin the 1+1 SD configuration.
l If the links are configured with the 1+1 SDprotection, adjust the height offset betweentwo antennas to make the receive power of oneantenna stronger than the receive power of theother antenna.
l Increase the fading margin.
Step 7 Cause 7: An interference event occurs.
Follow the steps:
1. Check whether any co-channel interference occurs.
a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end.b. Check the RSL at the local end. For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information
of a Radio Link. If the RSL exceeds -90 dBm, it indicates that there is co-channelinterference that may affect the long-term availability and errored-secondperformance of the system.
2. Check whether any adjacent channel interference occurs.
a. Mute the ODU at the opposite end.b. Adjust the radio working mode at the local end and use the minimum channel spacing.
For details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.c. Decrease the received frequency at the local end by a half of the channel spacing. For
details, see Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.d. Test and record the RSL.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
489
![Page 509: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/509.jpg)
e. Increase the received frequency at the local end, with a step length of 0.5 MHz or 1MHz, and record the RSL accordingly until the received frequency is equal to theoriginal received frequency plus a half of the channel spacing.
f. Compare the recorded RSLs, and check whether the RSL in a certain spectrum isabnormal if the received frequency is within the permitted range.
3. Use a spectrum analyzer to analyze the interference source.4. Contact the spectrum management department to clear the interference spectrum or change
plans to minimize the interference.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.191 MW_RDI
DescriptionThe MW_RDI is an alarm indicating that there are defects at the remote end of the radio link.This alarm is reported when the IF board detects an RDI in the radio frame overheads.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemIf the local site is configured with the reverse switching function, the 1+1 switching is triggeredon the IF board when the working and protection IF boards receive the MW_RDI alarm at thesame time. This alarm also indicates that the services received by the opposite station areinterrupted.
Possible CausesAfter detecting a service alarm that is caused by the fault in a radio link, the receive stationreturns a radio link fault indication to the transmit station.
Procedure
Step 1 Clear the radio alarms that occur at the opposite station. The possible alarms are as follows:l MW_LOFl R_LOF
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
490
![Page 510: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/510.jpg)
l R_LOCl MW_FEC_UNCORl XPIC_LOS
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.192 NESF_LOST
DescriptionThe NESF_LOST is an alarm indicating that the NE software is lost. This alarm is reported whenthe system control, cross-connect, and timing board detects that the NE software is lost.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Processing alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
491
![Page 511: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/511.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the routine inspection object.
l 0x01: FPGA of the system control board in ofs1l 0x02: FPGA of the system control board in ofs2l 0x03: ofs1/hwx/nesoft.hwxl 0x04: ofs2/hwx/nesoft.hwxl 0x05: ofs1/hwx/ne.inil 0x06: ofs2/hwx/ne.inil 0x07: ofs1/hwx/ocp.inil 0x08: ofs2/hwx/ocp.inil 0x09: ofs1/fpga/if1_002.pgal 0x0a: ofs2/fpga/if1_002.pgal 0x0b: ofs1/fpga/if1_250.pgal 0x0c: ofs2/fpga/if1_250.pgal 0x0d: ofs1/fpga/sl1d.pgal 0x0e: ofs2/fpga/sl1d.pgal 0x0f: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifu2.pgal 0x10: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifu2.pgal 0x11: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifx2.pgal 0x12: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifx2.pgal 0x13: ofs1/fpga/sl91aux.pgal 0x14: ofs2/fpga/sl91aux.pgal 0x15: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.hwxl 0x16: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.hwxl 0x17: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.inil 0x18: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.inil 0x19: ofs1/fpga/sl91em6t.pgal 0x1a: ofs2/fpga/sl91em6t.pgal 0x1b: ofs1/fpga/pvg610.pgal 0x1c: ofs2/fpga/pvg610.pgal 0x1d: ofs1/fpga/pvg610x.pgal 0x1e: ofs2/fpga/pvg610x.pgal 0x1f: ofs1/hwx/extbios.hwxl 0x20: ofs2/hwx/extbios.hwxl 0x21: ofs1/hwx/luexbios.hwxl 0x22: ofs2/hwx/luexbios.hwx
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
492
![Page 512: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/512.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 4 Indicates the specific alarm cause when a different bit is 1.
l 0x01: If the first bit is 1, it indicates that the file does not exist.l 0x02: If the second bit is 1, it indicates that verification of the
file fails.
Impact on the SystemIf the NE software does not exist in the active and standby areas, an NE cannot be restarted afterit is powered off or reset.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: No new NE software is loaded after the existing NE software is erased.l Cause 2: Loading the NE software is unsuccessful.l Cause 3: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: No new NE software is loaded after the existing NE software is erased.
Cause 2: Loading the NE software is unsuccessful.
1. Check whether the alarm is caused by the loading operation.
If... Then...
The alarm is caused by the loadingoperation
Contact the Huawei technical supportengineers to reload the software.
The alarm is not caused by the loadingoperation
Go to the next step.
Step 2 Cause 3: A certain board is faulty.1. For details, see 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.193 NESOFT_MM
DescriptionThe NESOFT_MM is an alarm indicating that the first software system is different from thesecond software system. This alarm is reported when the NE detects that the first software systemand the second software system of the system control, cross-connect, and timing board mismatchwith each other.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
493
![Page 513: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/513.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Processing alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the location of the file.l 0x01: the files in the flash memoryl 0x02: the software that is currently runningl 0x03: the software in the CF card
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
494
![Page 514: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/514.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the IDs of the inconsistent files in the flash memory of thesystem control board if the value of Parameter 1 is 0x01,l 0x01: FPGA of the system control board in ofs1l 0x02: FPGA of the system control board in ofs2l 0x03: ofs1/hwx/nesoft.hwxl 0x04: ofs2/hwx/nesoft.hwxl 0x05: ofs1/hwx/ne.inil 0x06: ofs2/hwx/ne.inil 0x07: ofs1/hwx/ocp.inil 0x08: ofs2/hwx/ocp.inil 0x09: ofs1/fpga/if1_002.pgal 0x0a: ofs2/fpga/if1_002.pgal 0x0b: ofs1/fpga/if1_250.pgal 0x0c: ofs2/fpga/if1_250.pgal 0x0d: ofs1/fpga/sl1d.pgal 0x0e: ofs2/fpga/sl1d.pgal 0x0f: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifu2.pgal 0x10: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifu2.pgal 0x11: ofs1/fpga/sl91ifx2.pgal 0x12: ofs2/fpga/sl91ifx2.pgal 0x13: ofs1/fpga/sl91aux.pgal 0x14: ofs2/fpga/sl91aux.pgal 0x15: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.hwxl 0x16: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.hwxl 0x17: ofs1/hwx/lusoft.inil 0x18: ofs2/hwx/lusoft.inil 0x19: ofs1/fpga/sl91em6t.pgal 0x1a: ofs2/fpga/sl91em6t.pgal 0x1b: ofs1/fpga/pvg610.pgal 0x1c: ofs2/fpga/pvg610.pgal 0x1d: ofs1/fpga/pvg610x.pgal 0x1e: ofs2/fpga/pvg610x.pgal 0x1f: ofs1/hwx/luexbios.hwxl 0x20: ofs2/hwx/luexbios.hwxl 0x21: ofs1/fpga/plc034.pgal 0x22: ofs2/fpga/plc034.pga
Indicate the IDs of the inconsistent files in the currently runningsoftware if the value of Parameter 1 is 0x02.
l 0x01: NeSoft(D)
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
495
![Page 515: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/515.jpg)
Name Meaning
l 0x02: Platform(D)l 0x04: ExtBiosl 0x05: Logicl 0x06: Dsp
Parameter 4 Indicate the cause of the alarm.l 0x04: The file versions in the master and slave areas of a single
system control board are inconsistent.l 0x08: The file versions in the active and standby system control
boards are inconsistent.l 0x0c: The file versions in the master and slave areas of a single
system control board are inconsistent and the file versions onthe active and standby system control boards are alsoinconsistent.
Impact on the Systeml This alarm affects active/standby switching of system control boards if the active and
standby system control boards have different NE software versions.
l If no NE software exists in the flash memory, the system is unable to restart after power-off or reset.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The software running on the active and standby SCC boards has different versions.
l Cause 2: The software stored in the ofs1 and ofs2 areas of the active SCC board has differentversions.
l Cause 3: The software stored in the mapping directories of active and standby SCC boardshas different versions.
Procedure
Step 1 Contact Huawei technical support engineers for reloading the software.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.194 NESTATE_INSTALL
Description
The NESTATE_INSTALL is an alarm indicating that the NE is in the install state.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
496
![Page 516: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/516.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Processing alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The NE fails to work.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The NE database check fails.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The NE database check fails.
1. Restore the data from the backup database on the CF card.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.195 NO_BD_SOFT
Description
The NO_BD_SOFT is an alarm indicating that the board software is lost.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
497
![Page 517: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/517.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicates the number of the lost file.
Impact on the Systeml If the board software is lost, the board fails to work normally.l If the FPGA is lost, the FPGA does not have a backup copy.
Possible CausesCause 1: The software fails to be loaded.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The software fails to be loaded.1. Contact the Huawei technical support engineers to reload the software.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.196 NP1_MANUAL_STOP
DescriptionThe NP1_MANUAL_STOP is an alarm indicating that the N+1 protection protocol is disabledmanually.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
498
![Page 518: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/518.jpg)
Impact on the SystemThe N+1 protection may fail, or the protection switching may fail.
Possible CausesCause 1: The N+1 protection protocol is disabled manually.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The N+1 protection protocol is disabled manually.1. Start the N+1 protection protocol.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.197 NP1_SW_FAIL
DescriptionThe NP1_SW_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the N+1 protection switching fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
Impact on the SystemThe services cannot be switched. If the current paths are unavailable, the services are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The parameters of the N+1 protection for the alarmed node are set incorrectly.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
499
![Page 519: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/519.jpg)
l Cause 2: The network-wide N+1 protection protocol runs abnormally.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The parameters of the N+1 protection for the alarmed node are set incorrectly.1. Check whether the parameters of the N+1 protection are set correctly according to the
planning. For details, see Creating an N+1 Protection Group.
If... Then...
The parameters of the N+1 protection areset incorrectly
Set the parameters of the N+1 protectioncorrectly.
The parameters of the N+1 protection areset correctly
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The network-wide N+1 protection protocol runs abnormally.1. Stop and restart the protocol manually. For details, see Starting/Stopping the N+1
Protection Protocol.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the protocol isrestarted.
End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists after the protocol isrestarted
Contact the Huawei technical supportengineers to handle the alarm.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.198 NP1_SW_INDI
DescriptionThe NP1_SW_INDI is an alarm indicating that the N+1 protection switching is detected.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
500
![Page 520: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/520.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter1, Parameter 2 Indicates the ID of the alarmed protection group. For example, 0x01indicates that the alarm is reported by protection group 1.
Impact on the SystemDuring the N+1 protection switching, the services are interrupted. After the N+1 switching iscomplete, the services are restored to normal. After the switching starts and before the switchingis complete, the extra services are interrupted.
Possible CausesCause 1: The N+1 protection switching is performed.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The N+1 protection switching is performed.1. Find out the cause of switching, and take appropriate measures.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.199 NTP_SYNC_FAIL
DescriptionThe NTP_SYNC_FAIL is an alarm indicating that NTP time synchronization fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemTime on the alarmed NE is different from time on the NTP server. The records on the NE, suchas performance events, alarms, and operations, cannot be kept with exact time.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The NTP server is not configured or is configured incorrectly.l Cause 2: The NTP server cannot communicate with the NE.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
501
![Page 521: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/521.jpg)
l Cause 3: The NTP server fails.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The NTP server is not configured or is configured incorrectly.1. Configure the NTP server correctly.2. Re-configure the NTP parameters for the NE.
Step 2 Cause 2: The NTP server cannot communicate with the NE.1. Check whether the cable connecting the gateway NE to the NTP server is normal. If not,
rectify the connection fault.2. Check whether the DCN communication between the NTP server and the NE is normal. If
not, configure the DCN communication correctly.
Step 3 Cause 3: The NTP server fails.1. Troubleshoot the NTP server.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.200 OCD
DescriptionThe OCD is an alarm indicating out-of-cell delimitation. This alarm occurs when the celldelimitation state machine is in the HUNT or PRESYN state.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the OCD alarm occurs, all the services in the receive direction of the alarmed ATM portlose cells.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path. The receive path reports
the alarms indicating excessive bit errors, such as B1_EXC, B2_EXC, and B3_EXC.l Cause 2: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
502
![Page 522: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/522.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A great number of bit errors occur in the receive path. The receive path reports thealarms indicating excessive bit errors, such as B1_EXC, B2_EXC, and B3_EXC.1. Check whether the B1_EXC, B2_EXC, or B3_EXC alarm occurs in the receive path.2. If yes, clear these alarms first, and then check whether the OCD alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: The ATM processing chip of the board is faulty.1. Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the OCD alarm. For details, see 8.7.1 Cold
Reset.2. If the OCD alarm persists, replace the alarmed board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the
Smart E1 Board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.201 OUT_PWR_ABN
DescriptionThe OUT_PWR_ABN alarm indicates that the output optical power is abnormal.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the port ID.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the path ID. The parameters have a fixed value of 0x000x01.
Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Are reserved. The value is always 0xFF.
Impact on the SystemThe OUT_PWR_ABN alarm affects the transmission performance of services, and may evenresult in service interruption.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
503
![Page 523: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/523.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The output optical power is too high or low.
l Cause 2: A board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The output optical power is too high or low.
1. Browse optical power performance events.
If... Then...
The output optical power does not meet therequirement
Replace the optical module.
The output optical power is too high Add a proper attenuator to reduce the inputoptical power.
Step 2 Cause 2: A board is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.202 PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT
Description
The PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT is an alarm indicating that activating the patch package timesout. This alarm occurs when the patch package is in the active state for a period longer than thespecified period of time. In this case, the user needs to process the patch package.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the PATCH_ACT_TIMEOUT alarm occurs, it does not affect services.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
504
![Page 524: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/524.jpg)
Possible CausesCause: The patch package is in the active state for a period longer than the specified period oftime.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The patch package is in the active state for a period longer than the specified period oftime.1. Check whether the activated patch package is normal.2. If yes, run the patch package to make the it valid. If not, delete the patch package. Then,
the alarm is cleared automatically.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.203 PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT
DescriptionThe PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT is an alarm indicating that deactivating the patch packagetimes out. This alarm occurs when the patch package is in the inactive state for a period longerthan the specified period of time. In this case, the user needs to process the patch package.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the PATCH_DEACT_TIMEOUT alarm occurs, it does not affect services.
Possible CausesCause: The patch package is in the inactive state for a period longer than the specified period oftime.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The patch package is in the inactive state for a period longer than the specified period oftime.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
505
![Page 525: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/525.jpg)
1. To make the patch package valid, activate the patch package.2. Otherwise, delete the patch package. Then, the alarm is cleared automatically.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.204 PATCH_PKGERR
DescriptionThe PATCH_PKGERR alarm indicates that a patch package is incorrect or has been damagedor deleted.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor alarm Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemIf a patch package is incorrect or has been damaged or deleted, the patch package cannot besuccessfully loaded, activated, or run.
NOTE
When this alarm is reported, services are not interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: A patch package is incorrect.l Cause 2: A patch package has been damaged.l Cause 3: A patch package has been deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Load a correct patch package.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.205 PG_LINK_FAIL
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
506
![Page 526: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/526.jpg)
DescriptionThe PG_LINK_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the links in a 1+1 protection group fail.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Service alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe services on the radio links are interrupted.
Possible CausesCause: Service alarms occur on the main and standby boards.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the Alarm Report Mode to Protection group and board alarms. For details, see Queryingthe IF 1+1 Protection Status.
NOTE
When alarms with different priorities occur on a board at the same time, the board reports only the alarmswith the highest priority. Alarms can be arranged in descending order by priority: hardware alarms >configuration alarms > service alarms.
Step 2 Handle the queried alarms.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.206 PG_PRT_DEGRADED
DescriptionThe PG_PRT_DEGRADED is an alarm indicating that the main link or standby link in a 1+1protection group is faulty.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
507
![Page 527: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/527.jpg)
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the board ID.
Impact on the SystemThe services at the NE are not affected, but radio link protection fails.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Service alarms occur on the main board.l Cause 2: Service alarms occur on the standby board.
Procedure
Step 1 Locate the faulty board according to the alarm parameter.
Step 2 Set the Alarm Report Mode to Protection group and board alarms. For details, see Queryingthe IF 1+1 Protection Status.
NOTE
When service alarms with different priorities occur on a board at the same time, the board reports only thealarms with the highest priority. Alarms can be arranged in descending order by priority: hardware alarms> configuration alarms > service alarms.
Step 3 Handle the queried alarms.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.207 PLA_CFG_MISMATCH
DescriptionThe PLA_CFG_MISMATCH alarm indicates that the PLA configuration data is inconsistentbetween two ends of a radio link.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Service alarm
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
508
![Page 528: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/528.jpg)
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the ID of a PLA group.
Parameter 3, Parameter 4 Indicate the error type.
l 0x00: indicates that no PLA group is configured at the oppositeend of a radio link.
l 0x01: indicates that the enabled status of Layer 2 headercompression function at the local end of a radio link is differentfrom that at the opposite end.
Impact on the System
Services at both ends of a radio link are unavailable.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: A PLA group is configured at the local end but no PLA group is configured at the
opposite end.
l Cause 2: The enabled status of the Layer 2 header compression function at the local end ofa radio link is different from that at the opposite end.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A PLA group is configured at the local end but no PLA group is configured at theopposite end.
1. Follow instructions in Creating a PLA Group to configure a PLA group at the opposite endof the radio link.
Step 2 Cause 2: The enabled status of the Layer 2 header compression function at the local end of aradio link is different from that at the opposite end.
1. Follow instructions in Querying the PLA Group Status to determine the ports whoseconfiguration data needs to be changed according to planning information.
2. Follow instructions in Setting the Advanced Attributes of IF_ETH Ports to change theenabled status of the Layer 2 header compression function for PLA member ports.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
509
![Page 529: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/529.jpg)
A.3.208 PORTMODE_MISMATCH
DescriptionThe PORTMODE_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the working mode of the remote FEport does not match with that of the local FE port. This alarm is reported when the local FE portworks in auto-negotiation mode and the opposite FE port works in non-auto-negotiation mode.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1, Parameter 2 Indicate the working mode of the FE port.
Impact on the SystemWhen the PORTMODE_MISMATCH alarm occurs, the service on the local NE is not affected. .
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The local FE port works in auto-negotiation mode and the opposite FE port works
in non-auto-negotiation mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local FE port works in auto-negotiation mode and the opposite FE port works innon-auto-negotiation mode.1. Disable the opposite FE port. For details, refer to Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet
Ports.2. Enable the opposite FE port and set work mode of the port to auto-negotiation. For details,
refer to Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
510
![Page 530: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/530.jpg)
A.3.209 PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC
Description
The PORT_EXC_TRAFFIC alarm indicates that the traffic over a port exceeds its threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Warning Service alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the traffic in the receive or transmit direction exceeds its threshold.
l 0x00: indicates the receive direction.l 0x01: indicates the transmit direction.
Impact on the System
Services are congested.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The configured bandwidth limit is too low.
l Cause 2: The port traffic is too high.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The configured bandwidth limit is too low.
1. Follow instructions in Configuring Traffic Shaping for Egress Queues to check theconfigured bandwidth limit.
2. If the configured bandwidth limit is too low, follow instructions in Configuring TrafficShaping for Egress Queues to increase the bandwidth limit value or perform networkexpansion.
Step 2 Cause 2: The configured port traffic is too high.
1. Follow instruction in 8.18 Querying Traffic, Physical Bandwidth, or BandwidthUtilization of Ethernet Ports to query the bandwidth utilization over a port.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
511
![Page 531: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/531.jpg)
2. If the port bandwidth utilization is higher than its threshold, check whether a network stormoccurs. If a network storm occurs, eliminate the source that transmits a large amount ofinvalid data.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.210 PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE
Description
The PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE alarm indicates that a port is offline.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the port that reports the alarm.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Have a fixed value of 0x00 0x01.
Parameter 4, Parameter 5 Are reserved and have a fixed value of 0xff.
Impact on the System
The services over the alarmed port are interrupted.
Possible Causes
The alarmed port is enabled but house no SFP module.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The alarmed port is enabled but house no SFP module.1. Check whether the alarmed port needs to receive/transmit a service.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
512
![Page 532: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/532.jpg)
If... Then...
The alarmed port needs to receive/transmit a service
Go to the next step.
The alarm port does not need to receive/transmit a service
Follow instructions in Setting the GeneralAttributes of Ethernet Ports to disable thealarmed port.
2. Check whether the alarmed port houses an SFP module.
If... Then...
The alarmed port houses no SFPmodule
Follow instructions in Installing an SFPModule to add an SFP module.
The alarmed port houses an SFPmodule
Go to the next step.
3. Re-install the SFP module.
If... Then...
The alarm clears No further action is required.
The alarm persists Follow instructions in Replacing an SFP Module to replace theSFP module.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.211 POWER_ABNORMAL
Description
The POWER_ABNORMAL is an alarm indicating that the input power supply is abnormal.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
513
![Page 533: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/533.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the number of the voltage channel.
l 0x01: the first channel of voltagel 0x02: the second channel of voltage
Parameter 2 Indicates the type of the alarm.
l 0x00: voltage lossl 0x01: undervoltagel 0x02: overvoltage
Impact on the SystemWhen the POWER_ABNORMAL alarm occurs, the power supply is abnormal, and thereforethe board may fail to work normally.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The power cable is cut, damaged, or incorrectly connected.l Cause 2: The input power is abnormal.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The power cable is cut, damaged, or incorrectly connected.1. Check whether the power cable is cut, damaged, or incorrectly connected. If the power
cable is cut or damaged, replace it with a proper power cable. If the power cable isincorrectly connected, reconnect the power cable.
Step 2 Cause 2: The input power is abnormal.1. Contact the engineers for power supply to rectify the fault.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.212 POWER_ALM
DescriptionThe POWER_ALM is an alarm indicating that the power module is abnormal.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
514
![Page 534: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/534.jpg)
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 If the POWER_ALM alarm is reported on a board on the IDU, this parameterindicates the ID of the alarmed power module. For example, 0x01 indicates thatthe alarm is reported by power module 1 of the board.
If the POWER_ALM is reported on the ODU, this parameter indicates the typeof the power fault.l 0x01: The -5 V power supply is faulty.l 0x02: The power supply for the power amplifier is faulty.
Parameter 2 l 0x01: under-voltagel 0x02: over-voltage
Impact on the System
The power modules are configured with protection. If only one power module reports thePOWER_ALM alarm, the system is not affected.
Possible Causes
If the alarm is reported by a board of the IDU, the possible causes are as follows:
l Cause 1: The input power or the PIU is abnormal.
l Cause 2: The power module is abnormal.
If the alarm is reported on the ODU, the cause is as follows:
l Cause 1: The power module of the ODU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 (POWER_ALM reported by a board of the IDU) Cause 1: The input power or the PIU isabnormal.
1. Check whether alarms are reported on the PIU, If yes, clear these alarms immediately.
Step 2 (POWER_ALM reported by a board of the IDU) Cause 2: The power module is abnormal.
1. Replace the alarmed board. For details, see 6 Part Replacement.
Step 3 (POWER_ALM reported on the ODU) Cause 1: The power module of the ODU is faulty.
1. Replace the ODU. For details, see 6.14 Replacing the ODU.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
515
![Page 535: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/535.jpg)
Related Information
None.
A.3.213 PW_DROPPKT_EXC
Description
The PW_DROPPKT_EXC alarm indicates that the packet loss ratio on a PW exceeds itsthreshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Warning Processing alarm
Parameters
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x00, indicating that the traffic in the ingress or egressdirection crosses its threshold.
Impact on the System
A small number of packets are lost, affecting service real-time performance.
Possible Causes
Cause: A small number of packets are lost on the alarmed PW.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: A small number of packets are lost on the alarmed PW.
1. Follow instructions in Querying Information and Running Status of PWs to check thebandwidth utilization of the alarmed PW. If the PW bandwidth is exhausted, increase thebandwidth or eliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
516
![Page 536: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/536.jpg)
Related InformationNone.
A.3.214 PWAPS_LOST
DescriptionThe PWAPS_LOST is an alarm indicating that the APS frame is lost. This alarm occurs whenno APS frame is received from the protection channel.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, the service protection fails.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The remote NE of the PW is not configured with any protection group.l Cause 2: The service on the protection channel is interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The remote NE of the PW is not configured with any protection group.1. Check whether the remote NE of the PW is configured with a protection group. If yes,
ensure that the configuration is the same at the two ends.
Step 2 Cause 2: The service on the protection channel is interrupted.1. Check whether the protection channel is faulty. If yes, rectify the fault.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.215 PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH
DescriptionThe PWAPS_PATH_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the working and protection pathsof the APS protection group differ between the two ends. This alarm is reported when the
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
517
![Page 537: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/537.jpg)
working and protection paths of one APS protection group at one end are different from thoseat the other end.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the service protection fails.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends.
l Cause 2: Certain physical links are incorrectly connected.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends.
1. Check whether the APS settings at the two ends are the same.
2. If the APS settings are different, change the settings to the same.
Step 2 Cause 2: Certain physical links are incorrectly connected.
1. Connect the fibers or cables properly.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.216 PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL
Description
The PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL is an alarm indicating a switching failure of the PW APSprotection group. This alarm is reported when the request signal in the transmitted AutomaticProtection Switching (APS) frame is different from the bridge signal in the received APS frameand this symptom lasts for 50 ms.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
518
![Page 538: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/538.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the service protection fails.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends.
l Cause 2: Certain physical links are incorrectly connected.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The configured working and protection paths differ between the two ends.1. Check whether the APS settings at the two ends are the same.2. If the APS settings are different, change the settings to the same.
Step 2 Cause 2: Certain physical links are incorrectly connected.1. Connect the fibers or cables properly.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.217 PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH
Description
The PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH is an alarm indicating that the local NE and the opposite NEare configured with different PW protection types. This alarm occurs when the information inthe received APS frames is inconsistent with the APS protection scheme configured at the localend.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
519
![Page 539: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/539.jpg)
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When this alarm occurs, the service protection fails.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The configured protection modes (1+1 protection or 1:1 protection) differ at the
two ends of the PW.
l Cause 2: The configured switching modes (single-ended or dual-ended) differ at the twoends of the PW.
l Cause 3: The configured revertive modes (revertive or non-revertive) differ at the two endsof the PW.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the APS protection settings, such as protection mode, switching mode, andrevertive mode, are the same at the local and remote ends.
Step 2 If the APS protection settings are different, change the settings to the same.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.218 R_F_RST
Description
The R_F_RST is an alarm indicating that the receive FIFO is reset.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The services are interrupted.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
520
![Page 540: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/540.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The clocks at both stations are not synchronous.l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The clocks at both stations are not synchronous.1. Query whether a TU pointer adaptation performance event is reported at both ends. For
details, see 8.3.5 Browsing Current Performance Events.
If... Then...
An AU pointer adaptation performanceevent is reported
Handle the performance event. For details,see C.3.2 TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW,and TUPJCNEW.
An AU pointer adaptation performanceevent is not reported
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.219 R_LOC
Description
The R_LOC is an alarm indicating that the clock is lost on the receive line side. This alarm isreported when the line board fails to extract clock signal from the line signal or the IF board failsto extract clock signal from the IF signal.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The services on the line port or the IF port are interrupted. If the system is configured withprotection, protection switching may be triggered.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
521
![Page 541: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/541.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
l Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
1. At the local end, perform an inloop on the port of the alarmed board. For details, see 8.6Software Loopback.
If... Then...
The alarm persists after the loopback Replace the alarmed local board.
The alarm is cleared after the loopback Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed opposite board.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isreplaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Replace the system control, switch&timingboard at the opposite end.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.220 R_LOF
Description
The R_LOF is an alarm indicating that frames are lost on the receive side. This alarm is reportedwhen the OOF state lasts for three milliseconds.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
522
![Page 542: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/542.jpg)
Impact on the System
The services are interrupted. If the system is configured with protection, protection switchingmay be triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Certain alarms are generated (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interface
board).l Cause 3: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.l Cause 4: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain high-level alarms are generated (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).1. If the alarm is reported by the IF board, check whether the MW_BER_EXC,
MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated.
If... Then...
The alarm is generated Take priority to clear theMW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD,MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm.
The alarm is not generated Go to the next step.
2. Set the inloop on the alarmed IF port.
If... Then...
The alarm persists after the inloop isperformed
Go to Cause 4.
The alarm is cleared after the inloop isperformed
Go to Cause 3.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH optical interfaceboard).1. If the alarm is reported by an optical interface board, exchange the transmit and receive
fiber jumpers at both ends.
If... Then...
The alarm persists after the exchange Go to Cause 3 or 4
The line port of the opposite station reportsthe R_LOF alarm
Troubleshoot the optical fibers.
Step 3 Cause 3: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
523
![Page 543: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/543.jpg)
1. Replace the opposite board where the line unit is or the opposite IF board.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the boardreplacement
The fault is rectified, and the alarmhandling is complete.
The alarm persists after the boardreplacement
Go to the next step.
2. Replace the system control and cross-connect board at the opposite end.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the boardreplacement
The fault is rectified, and the alarmhandling is complete.
The alarm persists after the boardreplacement
Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationThe handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
A.3.221 R_LOS
DescriptionIn the case of SDH boards, the R_LOS is an alarm indicating that the signals on the receive lineside are lost. In the case of IF boards, the R_LOS is an alarm indicating that the radio frames onthe receive line side are lost.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe services are interrupted. If the system is configured with protection, protection switchingmay be triggered.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
524
![Page 544: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/544.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Certain alarms are generated (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
l Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH line board).
l Cause 3: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
l Cause 4: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain alarms are generated (if the alarm is reported by an IF board).
1. If the alarm is reported by the IF board, check whether the MW_BER_EXC,MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is generated.
If... Then...
The alarm is generated Take priority to clear theMW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD,MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm.
The alarm is not generated Go to the next step.
2. Set the inloop on the alarmed IF port.
If... Then...
The alarm persists after the inloop isperformed
Go to Cause 4.
The alarm is cleared after the inloop isperformed
Go to Cause 3.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line performance degrades (if the alarm is reported by an SDH line board).
1. If the alarm is reported by an optical interface board, exchange the transmit and receivefiber jumpers at both ends.
If... Then...
The alarm persists after the exchange Go to Cause 3 or 4
The line port of the opposite station reportsthe R_LOF alarm
Troubleshoot the optical fibers.
Step 3 Cause 3: The transmit unit of the opposite station is faulty.
1. Replace the opposite board where the line unit is or the opposite IF board.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the boardreplacement
The fault is rectified, and the alarmhandling is complete.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
525
![Page 545: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/545.jpg)
If... Then...
The alarm persists after the boardreplacement
Proceed to the next step.
2. Replace the system control and cross-connect board at the opposite end.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the boardreplacement
The fault is rectified, and the alarmhandling is complete.
The alarm persists after the boardreplacement
Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: The receive unit of the local site is faulty.1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
The handling procedure applies when this alarm is reported by the STM-1e port.
A.3.222 R_S_ERR
Description
The R_S_ERR is an alarm indicating that the received signal has errors.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The services are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large.
l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
526
![Page 546: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/546.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large.
1. Check whether the tributary board supports the type of the input signal.
If... Then...
The tributary board does not support thetype of the input signal.
Change the type of the output signal of theremote site.
The tributary board supports the type ofthe input signal.
Go to the next step.
2. Test the frequency offset of the input signal.
If... Then...
The frequency offset is very large Troubleshoot the remote site.
The frequency offset meets the requirement Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.223 RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF
Description
The RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF is an alarm indicating that the mean receive powerof the ODUs are lower than the threshold of the receive power (the threshold value is about thereceiver sensitivity + 14 dB).
When the receive power of the ODUs in consecutive six hours is lower than the threshold, thesystem reports the alarm. When the mean receive power of the ODUs becomes normal and lastsfor three minutes after the alarm is reported, the alarm is cleared.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
527
![Page 547: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/547.jpg)
Impact on the SystemIf the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_LOF or MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is notgenerated, the service is not affected.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The ODU fault of the transmit end causes the abnormal transmit power.l Cause 2: The direction of the antenna is deflected.l Cause 3: The transmission environment changes.l Cause 4: The fade margin in the case of rain and fog in the network planning is insufficient.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The ODU fault of the transmit end causes the abnormal transmit power.1. Check whether the ODU at the transmit end reports the RADIO_TSL_LOW alarm.
If... Then...
The ODU at the transmit end reports theRADIO_TSL_LOW alarm
Handle the RADIO_TSL_LOW alarm.
The ODU at the transmit end does not report theRADIO_TSL_LOW alarm
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The direction of the antenna is deflected.1. Check whether the direction of the antenna is deflected.
If... Then...
The direction of the antenna is deflected Adjust the direction of the antenna.
The direction of the antenna is not deflected Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The transmission environment changes.1. Check whether the transmission environment changes. For example, check whether any
building blocks the transmission and increases the link fading significantly.
If... Then...
The transmission environment changes Contact the network planning department forre-planning the transmission trail.
The transmission environment does notchange
Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: The fade margin in the case of rain and fog in the network planning is insufficient.1. If the alarm is reported frequently, contact the network planning department to increase the
fade margin by re-planning the transmission trail.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
528
![Page 548: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/548.jpg)
A.3.224 RADIO_MUTE
DescriptionThe RADIO_MUTE is an alarm indicating that radio transmitter is muted.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Warning Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe transmitter does not transmit services.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The other alarms are generated.l Cause 2: The transmitter of the local site is muted manually.l Cause 3: The IF board is faulty, causing abnormal IF output.l Cause 4: The data output is abnormal because the ODU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The other alarms are generated.1. Check whether the CONFIG_NOSUPPORT or IF_INPWR_ABN alarm is generated. If
yes, take priority to clear the alarm.
Step 2 Cause 2: The transmitter of the local site is muted manually.1. Check whether the transmitter of the ODU is muted. For details, see Configuring the IF/
ODU Information of a Radio Link. If yes, cancel the muting operation. Then, set thetransmitting status of the ODU to unmute.
Step 3 Cause 3: The IF board is faulty, causing abnormal IF output.1. Replace the IF board.
Step 4 Cause 4: The data output is abnormal because the ODU is faulty.1. Replace the ODU.
----End
Related InformationThe logical slot ID of the ODU is obtained by adding 20 to the slot ID of the IF board connectedto the ODU.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
529
![Page 549: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/549.jpg)
A.3.225 RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH
DescriptionThe RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH is an alarm indicating that the antennas are not aligned. Whenthe receive power is set on the NE, the NE enables the antenna alignment indication function.If the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received 3 dB, theRADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH alarm is reported. Then, if the antennas are aligned for continuous30 minutes, the antenna alignment indication function is disabled automatically. Afterwards, theRADIO_RSL_BEYONDTH alarm is reported only when theRADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF alarm is reported.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemIf the MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_LOF or MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is notgenerated, the service is not affected.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Antennas are not aligned during the equipment commissioning.l Cause 2: The RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF is reported when the NE is running.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Antennas are not aligned during the equipment commissioning.1. Align the antennas, and ensure that the actual receive power is within the range of preset
receive power +/-3 dB.
Step 2 Cause 2: The RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF is reported when the NE is running.1. Handle the RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF alarm. When the
RADIO_FADING_MARGIN_INSUFF alarm is cleared, the RADIO_RSL_BEYONDTHalarm is cleared.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.226 RADIO_RSL_HIGH
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
530
![Page 550: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/550.jpg)
Description
The RADIO_RSL_HIGH is an alarm indicating that the radio receive power is very high. Thisalarm is reported if the detected receive power is equal to or higher than the upper threshold ofthe ODU (-20 dBm).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The service transmission is affected. If the system is configured with 1+1 protection, protectionswitching may be triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The local ODU is faulty.
l Cause 2: There is a strong interference source nearby.
l Cause 3: The transmit power of the opposite ODU is very high.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local ODU is faulty.
1. 6.14 Replacing the ODU.
Step 2 Cause 2: There is a strong interference source nearby.
1. Check whether any nearby signal source transmits signals whose frequency is close to thespecified range. If yes, check whether the signal source can be shut down or removed. Ifnot, contact the network planning department for replanning the frequency.
Step 3 Cause 3: The transmit power of the opposite ODU is very high
1. Reset the transmit power of the ODU at the opposite end. For details, see Configuring theIF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.227 RADIO_RSL_LOW
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
531
![Page 551: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/551.jpg)
DescriptionThe RADIO_RSL_LOW is an alarm indicating that the radio receive power is very low. Thisalarm is reported if the detected receive power is equal to or lower than the upper threshold ofthe ODU (-90 dBm).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemIf no MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_LOF or MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm isgenerated, the services are not affected.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Other alarms occur at the opposite station.l Cause 2: The transmit power of the opposite station is very low.l Cause 3: The local ODU is faulty.l Cause 4: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Other alarms occur at the opposite station.Check whether any of the following alarms is generated in the equipment of the opposite station.If yes, take priority to clear the alarm.l RADIO_MUTEl CONFIG_NOSUPPORTl RADIO_TSL_LOWl BD_STATUS
Step 2 Cause 2: The transmit power of the opposite station is very low.1. See Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link. Check whether the transmit
power of the opposite station is normal. If not, replace the ODU of the opposite station.
Step 3 Cause 3: The local ODU is faulty.1. Replace the ODU at the local end.
Step 4 Cause 4: Signal attenuation on the radio link is very heavy.1. Browse history alarms and check whether the alarm is generated continuously.
If the alarm is generated occasionally, contact the network planning department to changethe design to increase the anti-fading performance.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
532
![Page 552: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/552.jpg)
2. Check whether the antennas at both ends are adjusted properly.
If not, align the antennas again.3. Check whether any mountain or building obstacle exists in the transmit direction.
If yes, contact the network planning department for proper modification of the planningdesign, hence preventing the block of the mountain or building obstacle.
4. Check whether the polarization direction of the antenna, ODU, and hybrid coupler is setcorrectly.
If not, correct the polarization direction.5. Check whether the outdoor units such as antennas, combiner, ODU, and flexible waveguide
are wet, damp, or damaged.
If yes, replace the unit that is wet, damp, or damaged. For the operations, see 6 PartReplacement
6. Check whether the antenna gain at both the transmit and receive ends meets the requirement.
If not, replace the antenna.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.228 RADIO_TSL_HIGH
DescriptionThe RADIO_TSL_HIGH is an alarm indicating that the radio transmit power is too high. Thisalarm is reported when the detected transmit power is higher than the upper power threshold ofthe ODU.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe service transmission is affected. If the system is configured with 1+1 protection, protectionswitching may be triggered.
Possible CausesCause 1: The local ODU is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
533
![Page 553: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/553.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local ODU is faulty.
1. Replace the ODU.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.229 RADIO_TSL_LOW
Description
The RADIO_TSL_LOW is an alarm indicating that the radio transmit power is very low. Thisalarm is reported when the detected transmit power is less than the lower power threshold of theODU.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The service transmission is affected. If the system is configured with 1+1 protection, protectionswitching may be triggered.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The local ODU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The local ODU is faulty.
1. Replace the ODU.
----End
Related Information
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
534
![Page 554: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/554.jpg)
A.3.230 RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL
Description
The RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL is an alarm indicating the critical alarm inputs. This alarmoccurs when the user sets the severity of an available alarm input to critical and there is such analarm input.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL alarm occurs, it does not affect the operation of theboard or the services on the NE.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: There is a critical alarm input.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: There is a critical alarm input.
1. Clear the alarms of the external equipment according to the defined meanings of the alarms.Then, the RELAY_ALARM_CRITICAL alarm is cleared.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.231 RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE
Description
The RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE is an alarm indicating the warning alarm inputs. This alarmoccurs when the user sets the severity of an available alarm input to warning and there is suchan alarm input.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
535
![Page 555: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/555.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Warning Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE alarm occurs, it does not affect the operation of the boardor the services on the NE.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: There is a warning alarm input.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: There is a warning alarm input.
1. Clear the alarms of the external equipment according to the defined meanings of the alarms.Then, the RELAY_ALARM_IGNORE alarm is cleared.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.232 RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR
Description
The RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR is an alarm indicating the major alarm inputs. This alarm occurswhen the user sets the severity of an available alarm input to major and there is such an alarminput.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
536
![Page 556: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/556.jpg)
Impact on the SystemWhen the RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR alarm occurs, it does not affect the operation of the boardor the services on the NE.
Possible CausesCause 1: There is a major alarm input.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: There is a major alarm input.1. Clear the alarms of the external equipment according to the defined meanings of the alarms.
Then, the RELAY_ALARM_MAJOR alarm is cleared.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.233 RELAY_ALARM_MINOR
DescriptionThe RELAY_ALARM_MINOR is an alarm indicating the minor alarm inputs. This alarm occurswhen the user sets the severity of an available alarm input to minor and there is such an alarminput.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the RELAY_ALARM_MINOR alarm occurs, it does not affect the operation of the boardor the services on the NE.
Possible CausesCause 1: There is a minor alarm input.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: There is a minor alarm input.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
537
![Page 557: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/557.jpg)
1. Clear the alarms of the external equipment according to the defined meanings of the alarms.Then, the RELAY_ALARM_MINOR alarm is cleared.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.234 RMFA
DescriptionThe RMFA is an alarm indicating the loss of multiframe alignment at the remote end. This alarmoccurs when the local end detects all 1s of the remote indication bits in Z consecutive CASmultiframes (Z = 1-5) of the framed E1/T1 input.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the path ID.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, the services at the local site are not affected. The alarm indicates thatthe LMFA alarm occurs at the opposite end.
Possible CausesThe LMFA alarm occurs at the opposite end.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the opposite end of the alarmed path reports the LMFA alarm. If yes, clear theLMFA alarm. Then, the RMFA alarm at the local end clears.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
538
![Page 558: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/558.jpg)
Related InformationNone.
A.3.235 RPS_INDI
DescriptionThe RPS_INDI is an alarm indicating that the radio protection switching is detected.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the protection group.
Parameter 2 Indicates the type of protection switching.
0x01: HSB protection switching
0x02: HSM protection switching
Impact on the Systeml During the HSB protection switching, services are interrupted. After the HSB switching is
complete, the services are restored to normal.l During the HSM protection switching, no bit errors occur and the services are not affected.
Possible Causesl The possible causes of the HSB protection switching are as follows:
– Cause 1: An external switching event occurs– Cause 2: An automatic switching event occurs.– Cause 3: A reverse switching event occurs.
l The possible causes of HSM protection switching are as follows:The quality of the main channel degrades.– In the case of Hybrid radio, the automatic switching condition of the HSM is that the
quality of the main channel degrades.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
539
![Page 559: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/559.jpg)
– In the case of SDH/PDH radio, an alarm that triggers the HSM switching is reported onthe radio link.
ProcedureStep 1 Determine the type of the protection switching based on the alarm parameters.
Step 2 Cause 1 of HSB switching: An external switching event occurs. That is, the NMS issues acommand to trigger the switching.1. Check whether the switching is the forced switching or manual switching. For details, see
Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status.
If... Then...
The switching is the forced switching ormanual switching
Find the cause and release the switchingimmediately.
The switching is not the forcedswitching or manual switching
Go to Cause 2 of HSB switching.
Step 3 Cause 2 of HSB switching: An automatic switching event occurs. That is, the equipment is faulty,or the service is defective.1. Check whether the following faults or alarms occur. If yes, rectify the faults or clear the
alarms.l The hardware of the IF board or the ODU is faulty.l VOLT_LOSl RADIO_TSL_HIGH, RADIO_TSL_LOW, or RADIO_RSL_HIGHl IF_INPWR_ABN or CONFIG_NOSUPPORTl R_LOC, R_LOF, R_LOS, or MW_LOF
NOTE
l If the switching is non-revertive, the services are not automatically switched to the working pathwhen the working path is restored to normal, and the RPS_INDI alarm persists. In this case, youneed to manually switch the services from the protection path to the working path. The RPS_INDIalarm is cleared only when the switching is successful.
l If the switching is revertive, the services are automatically switched to the working path onlywhen the specified wait-to-restore (WTR) time expires after the working path is restored tonormal. The RPS_INDI alarm is cleared only when the switching is successful.
Step 4 Cause 3 of HSB switching: A reverse switching event occurs.1. Query whether the active and standby IF boards report the MW_RDI alarm. If yes, take
priority to clear the MW_RDI alarm.
Step 5 Cause 1 of HSM switching: In the case of Hybrid radio, the quality of the main channel degrades.1. Check whether the AM_DOWNSHIFT alarm is reported by an IF board. If the alarm is
reported by an IF board, refer to AM_DOWNSHIFT to rectify the fault that causes thequality of the main channel to degrade. If the alarm is not reported by an IF board, thequality of the main channel degrades possibly due to the weather. In this case, you do notneed to handle the problem, because this is a normal situation.
Step 6 Cause 2 of HSM switching: In the case of SDH/PDH radio, an alarm that triggers the HSMswitching is reported on the radio link.1. Check whether any alarm that triggers the HSM switching is reported by an IF board of the
IF 1+1 protection group. If yes, take priority to clear the alarm.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
540
![Page 560: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/560.jpg)
HSM switching may be triggered by any of the following alarms:l R_LOC, R_LOF, R_LOS, or MW_LOFl MW_BER_EXC, MW_BER_SD, MW_FEC_UNCORl B1_SD or B2_SD
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.236 RS_CROSSTR
DescriptionThe RS_CROSSTR is an alarm indicating that a regenerator section performance indicatorcrosses the threshold. This alarm is reported if a board detects that a regenerator section bit errorperformance event crosses the preset threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Service alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the performance monitoring period:
l 0x01: 15 minutesl 0x02: 24 hours
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
541
![Page 561: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/561.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Parameter 2 is always 0x00. Parameter 3 indicate the ID of aperformance event that causes the alarm and has the followingmeanings:
l 0x01: RSBBEl 0x02: RSESl 0x03: RSSESl 0x04: RSOOFl 0x05: RSOFSl 0x06: RSUASl 0x07: RSCSES
Impact on the SystemA large number of bit errors occur in the services, and the services may be interrupted.
l Cause 1: Services are interrupted for a long time.l Cause 2: The regenerator section bit error performance indicator crosses the preset
threshold.
ProcedureStep 1 Cause 1: Services are interrupted for a long time.
NOTEHandle the alarm as follows if the value of parameter 3 is 0x06:
1. Check whether fibers are properly connected. If not, connect the fibers again according toplanning information.
2. Check whether cross-connections are configured for service ports. If not, configure cross-connections again according to planning information.
Step 2 Cause 2: The regenerator section bit error performance indicator crosses the preset threshold.1. Find out the performance event that crosses the preset threshold. For details, see 8.3.8
Browsing the Performance Event Threshold-Crossing Records.2. Handle the performance event that crosses the threshold.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.237 RTC_FAIL
DescriptionThe RTC_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the real-time clock (RTC) on the system controlboard fails.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
542
![Page 562: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/562.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe service is not affected.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The RTC on the system control board is abnormal.l Cause 2: The board temperature is too high.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The RTC on the system control board is abnormal.1. Replace the system control, switching, and timing board.
Step 2 Cause 2: The board temperature is too high.1. 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms, and if the board reports the TEMP_ALARM alarm,
clear this alarm first.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.238 S1_SYN_CHANGE
DescriptionThe S1_SYN_CHANGE is an alarm indicating that the clock source is switched in S1 bytemode.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
543
![Page 563: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/563.jpg)
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 0x01: system priority list
0x02: external clock priority list
Impact on the System
If the new clock source has a lower quality, pointer justifications and bit errors are generatedafter the switching of clock source. As a result, the quality of services is affected.
Possible Causes
When the SSM protocol or extended SSM protocol is enabled.
l Cause 1: The original clock source is lost.l Cause 2: The fiber is cut off.l Cause 3: The external BITS is interrupted.l Cause 4: The S1_SYN_CHANGE alarm occurs at the upstream station.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The original clock source is lost.1. Handle the SYNC_C_LOS alarm that is related to the original clock source.
Step 2 Cause 2: The fiber is cut off.1. Replace the faulty fiber.
Step 3 Cause 3: The external BITS is interrupted.1. Check whether the cable connect NE to BITS is normal. If not, replace the faulty cable.
Step 4 Cause 4: The S1_SYN_CHANGE alarm reported at the upstream station.1. Handle the S1_SYN_CHANGE alarm reported at the upstream station.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.239 SCCDATA_BACKUP_FAIL
Description
The SCCDATA_BACKUP_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the batch backup on SCC boardsfails.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
544
![Page 564: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/564.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the cause of the failure.
l 0x31: The database backup fails.l 0x32: Software version verification fails on the main and standby SCC
boards.l 0x33: Communication between the main and standby SCC boards fails.l 0x34: The main and standby SCC boards have different data after an upgrade.
Impact on the SystemData synchronization between the main and standby SCC boards fails, and the switching betweenthe two boards is unavailable.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The main and standby SCC boards have different versions of software.l Cause 2: Communication between the main and standby SCC boards fails.l Cause 3: Databases on the main and standby SCC boards are damaged.l Cause 4: The main and standby SCC boards have different data after an upgrade.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The main and standby SCC boards have different versions of software.1. Query and record the software versions of the main and standby SCC boards according to
8.5.1 Querying the Board Information Report .2. If the software versions are different, determine the correct version based on the version
mapping table and replace the SCC board with an incorrect version. For details, see 6.9Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.
Step 2 Cause 2: Communication between the main and standby SCC boards fails.1. Check whether the system reports the COMMUN_FAIL alarm.2. If yes, clear the COMMUN_FAIL alarm. The system will start batch backup
automatically.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
545
![Page 565: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/565.jpg)
Step 3 Cause 3: Databases on the main and standby SCC boards are damaged.1. Check whether the system reports the DBMS_ERROR alarm. For details, see 8.3.3
Browsing Current Alarms.2. If yes, clear the DBMS_ERROR alarm. Then, check whether the SYNC_FAIL alarm is
cleared.
Step 4 Cause 4: The main and standby SCC boards have different data after an upgrade.1. Re-install the standby SCC board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.240 SEC_RADIUS_FAIL
DescriptionThe SEC_RADIUS_FAIL is an alarm indicating that RADIUS authentication fails overmanytimes. This alarm is reported when the RADIUS authentication fails for five consecutive times.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 to Parameter 5 Indicates the most significant five characters of username.
Impact on the SystemA user cannot log in to an NE.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The active period of the account expires.l Cause 2: Configurations on the RADIUS server are incorrect, such as passwords and access
policies.l Cause 3: There are unauthenticated login attempts.l Cause 4: The shared key for the NE and the RADIUS server is configured incorrectly.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
546
![Page 566: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/566.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The active period of the account expires.1. Use an active account.
Step 2 Cause 2: Configurations on the RADIUS server are incorrect, such as passwords and accesspolicies.1. Enter the correct password.2. Set correct access policies.
Step 3 Cause 3: There are unauthenticated login attempts.1. Eliminate the source that initiates the unauthenticated login attempts.
Step 4 Cause 4: The shared key for the NE and the RADIUS server is configured incorrectly.1. Set the shared key correctly.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.241 SECU_ALM
DescriptionThe SECU_ALM is an alarm indicating that an illegal user fails to log in to the NE.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe SECU_ALM alarm is ended soon after it is reported, and the alarm does not affect the systemand services.
Possible CausesAn illegal user tries to log in to the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 An illegal user tries to log in to the NE.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
547
![Page 567: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/567.jpg)
1. Query the NE log to check the user name that is used for the login.
----End
Related InformationAfter a user fails to log in to an NE for five consecutive times (if the interval between two loginsis less than 3 minutes, the two logins are consecutive logins), the SECU_ALM alarm is reportedupon each subsequent login failure and meanwhile the user is locked for 60 seconds. During the60 seconds, the user cannot log in to the NE.
A.3.242 SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD
DescriptionThe SRV_SHUTDOWN_LD alarm indicates that an Ethernet service is deactivated. This alarmis reported when an Ethernet service is deactivated due to a service loop. This alarm is clearedafter the Ethernet service is reactivated.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Warning Service alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe loop of the alarmed Ethernet service is released, and the Ethernet service is restored.
Possible CausesCause 1: A loop occurs in an Ethernet service and therefore the Ethernet service is deactivated.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A loop occurs in an Ethernet service and therefore the Ethernet service is deactivated.1. Check whether a service is looped back on the path of the alarmed Ethernet service.2. Re-configure the preceding service based on the network plan.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.243 SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
548
![Page 568: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/568.jpg)
DescriptionThe SWDL_ACTIVATED_TIMEOUT is an alarm indicating the activation timeout of thesoftware package. During the package loading, the system reports the alarm if no data issubmitted within 30 minutes after activation of the NE software or board software.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Processing alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe NE does not perform the submit operation. As a result, the software in the two areas of thedouble-area boards on the NE is inconsistent.
Possible CausesCause 1: The radio link is faulty. As a result, the NE involved in the package loading fails toreceive the submit command.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The radio link is faulty. As a result, the NE involved in the package loading fails toreceive the submit command.1. Check whether the radio link is faulty.
If... Then...
The radio link is faulty Troubleshoot the radio link to ensure that the linkbetween the nodes to be loaded is normal.
The radio link is normal Perform the package loading to the NE again.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.244 SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH
DescriptionThe SWDL_AUTOMATCH_INH is an alarm indicating that the automatic match function isdisabled. When the automatic match function of the board is disabled, the system reports thealarm if the board cannot match the software from the system control board.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
549
![Page 569: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/569.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen a board whose version is not consistent with the software version of the NE is installed,the software versions of the whole NE are not consistent if the board cannot automatically matchthe software from the system control board. As a result, certain functions of the NE cannot runnormally.
Possible CausesCause 1: The automatic match function is disabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The automatic match function is disabled.1. Contact the Huawei technical support engineers for troubleshooting.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.245 SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH
DescriptionThe SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH is an alarm of software inconsistency. After an NE ispower recycled and the boards on the NE become online, if the system detects that the systemcontrol board and the CF card are inconsistent in software packages, the system reports theSWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
550
![Page 570: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/570.jpg)
Impact on the System
When the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm is reported, certain functions of the NE maybe affected.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: After a system control board is replaced, the software package in the new system controlboard is inconsistent with that in the CF card.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: After a system control board is replaced, the software package in the new system controlboard is inconsistent with that in the CF card.
1. Perform the package diffusion again on the NE where the SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCHalarm is reported.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.246 SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL
Description
The SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the commission operation on the NEfails. This alarm is reported when the commission operation fails in the package diffusion.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the SWDL_COMMIT_FAIL alarm occurs, the software versions in the two areas of thedouble-area board are inconsistent.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: File backup fails.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
551
![Page 571: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/571.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: File backup fails.1. Check whether the loaded package is correct.2. Perform the package diffusion again on the NE where the alarm is reported.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.247 SWDL_INPROCESS
DescriptionThe SWDL_INPROCESS is an alarm indicating that the package diffusion is in process on theNE.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Warning Processing alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemWhen the SWDL_INPROCESS alarm is reported, the operations, such as modifyingconfiguration, uploading/downloading files, and backing up the database, are not allowed,because the software package is being loaded to the NE.
Possible CausesThe package diffusion is being performed on the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 The SWDL_INPROCESS alarm is cleared automatically after the loading or rollback iscomplete. Hence, this alarm can be neglected.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.248 SWDL_NEPKGCHECK
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
552
![Page 572: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/572.jpg)
Description
The SWDL_NEPKGCHECK is an alarm of software inconsistency. This alarm is reported inthe following two situations: the CF card and flash memory are inconsistent in software packageand the flash memory has a software package; in a routine check (the check is not initiated byissuing commands), the system detects that some files are missing from the software packagestored in the CF card or from the software package stored in the flash memory.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Processing alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the Systeml If this alarm occurs during package loading, package loading fails.
l If this alarm occurs in other conditions, automatic file matching fails.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: Certain files of the package are missing and cannot be recovered.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain files of the package are missing and cannot be recovered.
1. Ensure that the loaded software package is correct. Perform the package diffusion again onthe NE where the SWDL_NEPKGCHECK alarm is reported.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.249 SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT
Description
The SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT is an alarm indicating that certain board software is missingfrom the software package. This alarm is reported when the required software is missing fromthe software package during the automatic match of the board.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
553
![Page 573: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/573.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The board cannot perform automatic match, because the board software is missing from thesoftware package. Therefore, the board software version is inconsistent with the NE softwareversion, and certain functions of the NE may be affected.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: Certain board software is uninstalled during the software package loading.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain board software is uninstalled during the software package loading.1. Add the required board software to the software package. Alternatively, perform the
software package loading again.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.250 SWDL_PKGVER_MM
Description
The SWDL_PKGVER_MM is an alarm indicating that the consistency check on the softwarepackage version fails. This alarm is reported when the consistency check on the software packageversion fails.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm
Parameters
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
554
![Page 574: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/574.jpg)
Impact on the System
The software version of the software package is inconsistent with the software version describedin the software package. As a result, certain functions of the NE may be affected.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: The software version information in the description file of the software package isinconsistent with the actual software version information.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The software version information in the description file of the software package isinconsistent with the actual software version information.
1. Ensure that the loaded software package is correct. Perform the package diffusion again onthe NE where the alarm is reported.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.251 SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL
Description
The SWDL_ROLLBACK_FAIL is an alarm indicating that the rollback on the NE fails. Thisalarm is reported when the rollback fails for any board on the NE.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Processing alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The board software version and the NE software version may mismatch, and certain functionsof the NE may be affected.
Possible Causes
Cause 1: Certain board software is uninstalled during the software package loading.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
555
![Page 575: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/575.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Certain board software is uninstalled during the software package loading.1. Add the required board software to the software package. Alternatively, perform the
software package loading again.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.252 SYN_BAD
DescriptionThe SYN_BAD is an alarm indicating that the quality of the synchronization source declines.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe NE clock fails to be locked.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The quality of the synchronization source declines.l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The quality of the synchronization source declines.1. Take different measures based on the traced synchronization source.
If... Then...
The traced synchronization source is anexternal clock
Perform Steps Step 1.2 to Step 1.4.
The traced synchronization source is aline clock
Replace the system control,switching&timing board of the upstreamNE.
2. Check whether the configuration of the external clock is correct.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
556
![Page 576: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/576.jpg)
If... Then...
The configuration is incorrect Change the configuration data.
The configuration is correct Go to the next step.
3. Check whether the opposite equipment that provides the clock source is faulty.
If... Then...
The equipment is faulty Rectify the fault.
The equipment functions normally Go to the next step.
4. Check whether the cable that is connected to the external clock source is in normal status.
If... Then...
The cable is not in normal status Replace the cable.
The cable is in normal status Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.1. 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.253 SYNC_C_LOS
DescriptionThe SYNC_C_LOS is an alarm indicating that the synchronization source is lost.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Warning Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe NE clock degrades or enters the free-run mode.
Possible CausesCause 1: The clock source is lost.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
557
![Page 577: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/577.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The clock source is lost.1. Troubleshoot the synchronization sources of the lost clock source based on the clock source
priority table.
If... Then...
The synchronization source is anexternal clock
Handle the EXT_SYNC_LOS alarm.
The synchronization source is an IFclock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the IF board.
The synchronization source is a lineclock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the lineboard.
The synchronization source is atributary clock
Handle the alarm that occurs on the tributaryboard.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.254 T_ALOS
DescriptionThe T_ALOS is an alarm indicating that the 2 Mbit/s analog signal is lost at the specific port.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe 2Mbit/s services are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: No 2 Mbit/s services are received on the port.l Cause 2: The opposite NE is faulty.l Cause 3: The IF cable is faulty.l Cause 4: The alarmed board is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
558
![Page 578: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/578.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: No 2 Mbit/s services are received on the port.1. Check whether the alarmed port receives the 2 Mbit/s service.
If... Then...
The services are not received Transmit the services to the port or delete theunnecessary service configuration.
The services are received Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The equipment at the opposite end is faulty.1. Check whether the equipment at the opposite end is faulty.
If... Then...
The equipment is faulty Rectify the fault.
The equipment is normal Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The IF cable is faulty.1. Check whether the IF cable is faulty.
If... Then...
The IF cable is faulty Rectify the fault.
The IF cable is not faulty Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 4: The alarmed board is faulty.1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.255 T_F_RST
DescriptionThe T_F_RST is an alarm indicating that the transmit FIFO is reset.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
559
![Page 579: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/579.jpg)
Impact on the SystemThe services in the PDH path are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large.l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The frequency offset of the input signal is very large.1. Measure the frequency offset of the input signal.
If... Then...
The frequency offset is very large Troubleshoot the remote site.
The frequency offset is within 50 ppm Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.256 T_LOC
DescriptionThe T_LOC is an alarm indicating that the clock is lost on the transmit line side.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe services in the alarmed AU-4 path are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The cross-connect and timing board is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
560
![Page 580: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/580.jpg)
l Cause 2: The line board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The cross-connect and timing board is faulty.1. Replace the cross-connect and timing board at the local site.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isreplaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line board is faulty.1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.257 TEMP_ALARM
DescriptionThe TEMP_ALARM is an alarm indicating that the board temperature crosses the threshold.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Environmental alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 l 0x01: The temperature crosses the upper threshold.l 0x02: The temperature crosses the lower threshold.
Impact on the SystemThe board fails to work normally.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
561
![Page 581: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/581.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The board temperature crosses the threshold.l Cause 2: The temperature detection circuit of the board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The board temperature crosses the threshold.1. If the alarm is reported by the ODU, take appropriate measures (for example, installing a
sunshade) to control the temperature.2. If the alarm is reported by the board on the IDU, check whether the temperature control
devices, such as air-conditioners, work normally.
If... Then...
The temperature control devices workabnormally
Adjust the temperature control devices.
The temperature control devices worknormally
Go to the next step.
3. Check whether the heat dissipation hole on the IDU is covered or blocked.
If... Then...
The heat dissipation hole is covered orblocked
Clear or remove the covering materials orobstacles.
The heat dissipation hole is not covered orblocked
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The temperature detection circuit of the board is faulty.1. If the ambient temperature is normal and no other heat dissipation problems exist, replace
the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.258 THUNDERALM
DescriptionThe THUNDERALM is an alarm indicating the surge protection failure. If the system detectsthe surge protection circuit fails, the THUNDERALM occurs.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Environment alarm
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
562
![Page 582: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/582.jpg)
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the THUNDERALM occurs, the system operation and services are not affected, but thesurge protection function fails.
Possible Causes
The possible causes of the THUNDERALM alarm are as follows:
l Cause 1: The fuse tube of the surge protection circuit is interrupted.l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The fuse tube of the surge protection circuit is interrupted.1. Replace the fuse tube, and then check whether the alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.1. Replace the board that reports the THUNDERALM alarm.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.259 TR_LOC
Description
The TR_LOC is an alarm indicating that the clock is faulty. This alarm is reported when a boarddetects that the clock signal transmitted from the clock unit to the board is lost.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
563
![Page 583: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/583.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the slot ID of the board that loses the clock.
l 0x01: board with a smaller slot ID.l 0x02: board with a larger slot ID.l 0x03: two boards.
Impact on the Systeml If the protection cross-connect board is faulty, the services are not affected.l If the working cross-connect board is faulty, the services are switched, therefore causing
transient service interruption.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: If one board reports this alarm, the board hardware is faulty.l Cause 2: If multiple boards report this alarm, the clock cable of the cross-connect board is
faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Locate the alarmed board according to the alarm parameter.
Step 2 Cause 1: If one board reports this alarm, the board hardware is faulty.1. Perform a warm reset on the alarmed board, and then check whether the alarm is cleared.
If the alarm persists, perform a cold reset on the alarmed board. For details, see Resettinga Boards.
2. If the alarm persists, remove the alarmed board and check whether certain pins on thebackplane are bent. Insert the board again, and then check whether the alarm is cleared.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the alarmed board. For details, see Replacing a Board.
Step 3 Cause 2: If multiple boards report this alarm, the clock cable of the cross-connect board is faulty.1. If the working cross-connect board is faulty, perform 1+1 protection switching on the cross-
connect board. For details, see Performing 1+1 Protection Switching.2. Perform a cold reset on the protection cross-connect board, and then check whether the
alarm is cleared.3. If the alarm persists, remove and insert the protection cross-connect board, and then check
whether the alarm is cleared.4. If the alarm persists, replace the protection cross-connect board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.260 TU_AIS
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
564
![Page 584: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/584.jpg)
Description
The AU_AIS is an alarm indicating that the TU has errors. This alarm is reported if a boarddetects that the signal in the TU path is all 1s.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The service in the alarmed TU path is interrupted. If the services are configured with protection,protection switching is also triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect.l Cause 2: The line is faulty.l Cause 3: The board at the opposite end is faulty.l Cause 4: The board at the local end is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect.1. See Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services to check whether the SDH
service data is incorrect.
If... Then...
The SDH service data is incorrect Change the configuration data.
The SDH service data is correct Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line is faulty.1. Check whether a line alarm that causes AIS insertion is reported on the service trail.
NOTEFor details about the line alarms that cause AIS insertion, see E.2.6 AIS Insertion.
If... Then...
The line alarm is reported Clear the line alarms that cause AIS insertion.
No line alarms are reported Go to the next step.
2. See 8.6 Software Loopback to locate whether the board at the local end or at the oppositeend is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
565
![Page 585: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/585.jpg)
If... Then...
The board at the opposite end is faulty Go to Cause 3.
The board at the local end is faulty Go to Cause 4.
Step 3 Cause 3: The board at the opposite end is faulty.1. Replace the faulty board at the opposite end.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board at the local end is faulty.1. Replace the board where the local line unit resides.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isreplaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Go to the next step.
2. Replace the system control, cross-connect, and timing board at the local end.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isreplaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Go to the next step.
3. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.261 TU_AIS_VC12
DescriptionThe TU_AIS_VC12 is an indication of TU alarms at VC-12 level. This alarm occurs when aboard detects TU pointers of all 1s.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in the
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
566
![Page 586: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/586.jpg)
following format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, the services in the alarmed VC-12 path are interrupted. If the servicesare configured with protection, protection switching is also triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect.l Cause 2: The line is faulty.l Cause 3: The board at the opposite site is faulty.l Cause 4: The board at the local site is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect.1. Check whether the SDH service data is correct. For details, see Creating the Cross-
Connections of Point-to-Point Services.
If... Then...
The SDH service data is incorrect Change the configuration data.
The SDH service data is correct Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The line is faulty.1. Check whether a line alarm that causes AIS insertion is reported on the service trail.
NOTEFor details about the line alarms that cause AIS insertion, see E.2.6 AIS Insertion.
If... Then...
The line alarm is reported Change the configuration data.
No line alarms are reported Go to Step 3.
Step 3 Check whether the fault occurs at the local site or at the opposite site. For details, see 8.6.5Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Interface Board.
If... Then...
The board at the opposite site is faulty Go to Cause 3.
The board at the local site is faulty Go to Cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 3: The board at the opposite site is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
567
![Page 587: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/587.jpg)
1. Replace the faulty board at the opposite site.
Step 5 Cause 4: The board at the local site is faulty.1. Replace the line board at the local site. For details, see 6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical
Interface Board.
If... Then...
The alarm clears after the board isreplaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Go to the next step.
2. Replace the alarmed board at the local site.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.262 TU_AIS_VC3
DescriptionThe TU_AIS_VC3 is a TU-3 alarm indication. The alarm is reported when a board detects TUpointers of all "1"s.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example,0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.
Impact on the SystemThe services in the alarmed TU-3 paths are interrupted. If the services are configured withprotection, protection switching is triggered.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
568
![Page 588: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/588.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: SDH service configuration data is incorrect.l Cause 2: The service path is faulty.l Cause 3: The board at the opposite end is faulty.l Cause 4: The board at the local end is faulty.
ProcedureStep 1 Cause 1: SDH service configuration data is incorrect.
1. Follow instructions in Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services to checkwhether the SDH service configuration data is incorrect.
If... Then...
The SDH service configuration data isincorrect
Rectify the SDH service configurationdata.
The SDH service configuration data iscorrect
Go to cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The service path is faulty.1. Check whether a line alarm that will cause AIS insertion is reported on the service path.
NOTEFor the line alarms that will cause AIS insertion, see E.2.6 AIS Insertion.
If... Then...
A line alarm that will cause AISinsertion is reported
Rectify the SDH service configuration data.
No line alarm is reported Go to step 3.
Step 3 Follow instructions in 8.6.4 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet InterfaceBoard to identify whether the board at the local end or at the opposite end is faulty.
If... Then...
The board at the opposite end is faulty Go to cause 3.
The board at the local end is faulty Go to cause 4.
Step 4 Cause 3: The board at the opposite end is faulty.1. Replace the faulty board at the opposite end.
Step 5 Cause 4: The board at the local end is faulty.1. Follow instructions in 6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board to replace the line
board at the local end.
If... Then...
The alarm clears No further action is required.
The alarm persists Go to the next step.
2. Follow instructions in 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board toreplace the system control, switching, and timing board.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
569
![Page 589: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/589.jpg)
If... Then...
The alarm clears No further action is required.
The alarm persists Follow instructions in Replacing an Alarmed Board to replace theboard that reports the alarm.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.263 TU_LOP
DescriptionThe TU_LOP is an alarm indicating that the TU pointer is lost. This alarm is reported if a boarddetects that the TU-PTR value is an invalid pointer or NDF reversion in eight consecutive frames.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe service in the alarmed TU path is interrupted. If the services are configured with protection,protection switching is also triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The system control, cross-connect, and timing board is faulty.l Cause 2: The tributary board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The system control, cross-connect, and timing board is faulty.1. Replace the system control, cross-connect, and timing board at the local end.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isreplaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Go to Cause 2.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
570
![Page 590: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/590.jpg)
Step 2 Cause 2: The tributary board is faulty.1. Replace the board where the tributary unit resides.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.264 TU_LOP_VC12
DescriptionThe TU_LOP_VC12 is an alarm indicating that the VC-12 TU pointer is lost. This alarm isreported when a board receives invalid pointers or new data flags (NDFs) in eight consecutiveVC-12 frames.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.
Impact on the SystemServices in the alarmed TU path are interrupted. If the services are configured with protection,protection switching is also triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect.l Cause 2: The board at the opposite site is faulty.l Cause 3: The board at the local site is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
571
![Page 591: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/591.jpg)
1. Check whether the SDH service data is correct. For details, see Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services.
If... Then...
The SDH service data is incorrect Change the configuration data.
The SDH service data is correct Go to Step 2.
Step 2 Check whether the fault occurs at the local site or at the opposite site. For details, see 8.6.5Setting Loopbacks for the EOS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Interface Board.
If... Then...
The board at the opposite site is faulty Go to Cause 2.
The board at the local site is faulty Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 2: The board at the opposite site is faulty.1. In this case, replace the faulty board at the opposite site.
Step 4 Cause 3: The board at the local site is faulty.1. Replace the line board at the local site. For details, see 6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical
Interface Board.
If... Then...
The alarm clears after the board isreplaced
The fault is rectified. End the alarmhandling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Go to the next step.
2. Replace the alarmed board at the local site.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.265 TU_LOP_VC3
Description
The TU_LOP_VC3 alarm indicates that a TU-3 pointer is lost. This alarm is reported if a boarddetects that eight consecutive VC-3 TU-PTR values are invalid or the NDF field in eightconsecutive VC-3 TU-PTR values are reversed.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
572
![Page 592: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/592.jpg)
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example,0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.
Impact on the SystemThe services in the alarmed TU-3 path are interrupted. If the services are configured withprotection, protection switching is triggered.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: SDH service configuration data is incorrect.l Cause 2: The board at the opposite end is faulty.l Cause 3: The board at the local end is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: SDH service configuration data is incorrect.1. Follow instructions in Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services to check
whether the SDH service configuration data is incorrect.
If... Then...
The SDH service configuration data isincorrect
Rectify the SDH service configurationdata.
The SDH service configuration data iscorrect
Go to step 2.
Step 2 Follow instructions in 8.6.4 Setting a Loopback for the Packet-plane Ethernet InterfaceBoard to identify whether the board at the local end or at the opposite end is faulty.
If... Then...
The board at the opposite end is faulty Go to cause 2.
The board at the local end is faulty Go to cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 2: The board at the opposite end is faulty.1. Replace the faulty board at the opposite end.
Step 4 Cause 3: The board at the local end is faulty.1. Follow instructions in 6.3 Replacing the SDH Optical Interface Board to replace the line
board at the local end.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
573
![Page 593: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/593.jpg)
If... Then...
The alarm clears No further action is required.
The alarm persists Go to the next step.
2. Follow instructions in 6.9 Replacing the System Control, Switch and Timing Board toreplace the system control, switching, and timing board.
If... Then...
The alarm clears No further action is required.
The alarm persists Go to the next step.
3. Follow instructions in Replacing an Alarmed Board to replace the board that reports thealarm.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.266 TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED
DescriptionThe TUNNEL_APS_DEGRADED is an alarm indicating that a tunnel protection groupdegrades.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Service alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemThe protection tunnel is faulty and the protection group fails.
Possible CausesCause: The protection tunnel in the tunnel protection group is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause: The protection tunnel in the tunnel protection group is faulty.1. Check the status of the tunnel protection group and confirm that the protection tunnel is
faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
574
![Page 594: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/594.jpg)
2. 8.3.3 Browsing Current Alarms and clear the alarms in the protection tunnel.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.267 UHCS
Description
The UHCS is an alarm of uncorrected header check sequence. This alarm occurs when multipleuncorrectable bit errors exist in the cell headers.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
When the UHCS alarm occurs, some cells with multiple bit errors are detected during celldelimitation at the ATM port. Consequently, the user cells are lost.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive path related to the ATM port which reports
the UHCS alarm.l Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: A few bit errors occur in the receive path connected to the ATM port which reports theUHCS alarm.1. On the NMS, check whether the related receive path reports any alarms indicating excessive
bit errors, such as B1_SD, B2_SD, and B3_SD.2. On the NMS, check whether the service is looped.3. If yes, modify the service configuration to release the loop, and then check whether the
alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: The ATM physical-layer processing chip of the board is faulty.1. Perform a cold reset on the board that reports the UHCS alarm and check whether the alarm
is cleared. For details, see 8.7.1 Cold Reset.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
575
![Page 595: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/595.jpg)
2. Optional: If the UHCS alarm persists after the cold reset, replace the alarmed board andcheck whether the alarm is cleared. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the Smart E1 Board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.268 UP_E1_AIS
DescriptionThe UP_E1_AIS is an alarm indication of the 2 Mbit/s uplink signal. This alarm is reportedwhen the tributary board detects that the 2 Mbit/s uplink signal is all 1s.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Minor Communication alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemE1 signals are unavailable.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The opposite equipment transmits the AIS signal.l Cause 2: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local equipment is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The opposite equipment transmits the AIS signal.1. Check whether the opposite equipment transmits the AIS signal.
If... Then...
The opposite equipment transmits theAIS signal
Rectify the fault on the opposite equipment.
The opposite equipment does nottransmit the AIS signal
Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The receive unit of the tributary board on the local equipment is faulty.1. Replace the alarmed board.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
576
![Page 596: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/596.jpg)
Related Information
None.
A.3.269 VC_AIS
Description
The VC_AIS is an alarm indication of the virtual channel (VC) connection. This alarm occurswhen the VC connection that is set with the segment end point attribute receives the AIS cells,indicating that the upstream ATM services are abnormal.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the direction of ATM connection.
l 0x01: forwardl 0x02: backward
Parameter 2 Indicates the status of ATM connection.
l 0x01: working connectionl 0x00: protection connection
Parameter 3 Indicates the segment and end attribute of ATM connection.
l 0x01: segmentl 0x02: end
Impact on the Systeml If the continuity check (CC) sink is enabled on an upstream NE but the upstream NE does
not receive any CC cells, the local NE reports the VP_AIS. Then, the connection, thoughnot interrupted, is not loaded with any user service.
l In other cases, when the local NE detects that the VC connection is interrupted, the AIScells are inserted in the downstream direction and the RDI cells are returned to the upstreamNE.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
577
![Page 597: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/597.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: An upstream NE reports the VC_LOC, and the AIS cells are inserted to the
downstream.l Cause 2: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is
abnormal in the receive direction and therefore inserts AIS cells to the downstream.l Cause 3: The board on the local NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: An upstream NE reports the VC_LOC, and the AIS cells are inserted to the downstream.1. On the NMS, check whether the VC_LOC occurs and the ATM connections that report the
VC_LOC have the same ID.2. If the VC_LOC occurs, clear the VC_LOC and then the AIS insertion stops.
Step 2 Cause 2: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is abnormalin the receive direction and therefore inserts AIS cells to the downstream.1. Check whether any alarm, such as the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, AU_AIS, AU_LOP,
TU_AIS or TU_LOP occurs in the upstream SDH path.2. If yes, clear these alarms and then the AIS insertion stops.
Step 3 Cause 3: The board on the local NE is faulty.1. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board.2. If the alarm persists, replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationUnidirectional Connection
A complete bidirectional connection consists of two unidirectional connections: a forwardconnection and a backward connection. The direction of the forward and backward connectionsis based on the same node.
End and Segment
The end point refers to the termination point in the chain network, and it is used to monitor thewhole virtual connection.
The segment point is, generally, used to monitor a segment of the whole link.
Segment End Point
This is one of the segment end attributes. The segment end attributes include: segment point,end point, segment and end point, non segment and end point.
l If an NE is set with the segment end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that aregenerated at the segment and end.
l If an NE is set with the segment point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generatedat a segment.
l If an NE is set with the end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated atan end.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
578
![Page 598: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/598.jpg)
l If an NE is set with the non segment end point attribute, it fails to retrieve the alarms thatare generated at the segment and end.
A.3.270 VC_LOC
Description
The VC_LOC is an alarm indicating loss of connectivity on the virtual channel (VC). This alarmis reported when the CC is enabled but no cell is received within 3.5s (±0.5s).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the direction of ATM connection.
l 0x01: forwardl 0x02: backward
Parameter 2 Indicates the status of ATM connection.
l 0x01: working connectionl 0x00: protection connection
Parameter 3 Indicates the segment and end attribute of ATM connection.
l 0x01: segmentl 0x02: endl 0x03: segment and end
Impact on the Systeml If the CC sink is enabled on the local NE but the local NE does not receive any CC cells,
the service connection, though not interrupted, is not loaded with any user service.
l In other cases, the service is interrupted when the alarm occurs.
l When this alarm occurs, the system automatically inserts AIS cells to the downstream.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
579
![Page 599: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/599.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The CC sink is enabled on the local NE, but no CC source is enabled on the
upstream NE.l Cause 2: No bandwidth is available on the local NE.l Cause 3: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is
abnormal in the receive direction.l Cause 4: The board on the local NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The CC sink is enabled on the local NE, but no CC source is enabled on the upstreamNE.1. Check whether the CC function on the local NE is activated.2. If yes, Deactivate the CC function on the local NE. Then, check whether the alarm is cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: No bandwidth is available on the local NE.1. On the NMS, check whether the bandwidth allocated to the tunnel is fully used.2. If yes, increase the bandwidth or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount of
invalid data.
Step 3 Cause 3: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is abnormalin the receive direction.1. Check whether any alarm, such as the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, AU_AIS, AU_LOP,
TU_AIS or TU_LOP, occurs in an upstream SDH path.2. If yes, clear these alarms and check whether the VC_LOC is cleared.
Step 4 Cause 4: The board on the local NE is faulty.1. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board.2. If the alarm persists, replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.271 VC_RDI
DescriptionThe VC_RDI is an alarm indicating that defects occur at the remote end of the virtual channel(VC) connection. This alarm occurs when a forward or backward VC connection that is set withthe segment end point attribute receives the RDI cells, indicating that the downstream servicesare abnormal.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
580
![Page 600: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/600.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the direction of ATM connection.
l 0x01: forwardl 0x02: backward
Parameter 2 Indicates the status of ATM connection.
l 0x01: working connectionl 0x00: protection connection
Parameter 3 Indicates the segment and end attribute of ATM connection.
l 0x01: segmentl 0x02: end
Impact on the Systeml When this alarm occurs, it indicates that a segment end point at the remote end of the VC
connection receives AIS cells and returns RDI cells to the local end, but the services at thelocal end are not affected.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The VC_AIS occurs in the receive direction of the downstream VC connection.l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The VC_AIS occurs in the receive direction of the downstream VC connection.1. Check whether the VC_AIS occurs in the receive direction of the downstream VC
connection.2. If yes, clear the VC_AIS and then check whether the VC_RDI is cleared.
Step 2 Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.1. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
581
![Page 601: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/601.jpg)
2. If the alarm persists, replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related InformationUnidirectional Connection
A complete bidirectional connection consists of two unidirectional connections: a forwardconnection and a backward connection. The direction of the forward and backward connectionsis based on the same node.
End and Segment
The end point refers to the termination point in the chain network, and it is used to monitor thewhole virtual connection.
The segment point is, generally, used to monitor a segment of the whole link.
Segment End Point
This is one of the segment end attributes. The segment end attributes include: segment point,end point, segment and end point, non segment and end point.
l If an NE is set with the segment end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that aregenerated at the segment and end.
l If an NE is set with the segment point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generatedat a segment.
l If an NE is set with the end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated atan end.
l If an NE is set with the non segment end point attribute, it fails to retrieve the alarms thatare generated at the segment and end.
A.3.272 VCAT_LOA
DescriptionThe VCAT_LOA is an alarm indicating alignment loss of virtual concatenations. This alarm isreported if a board detects that the time delays between the timeslots bound to a VCTRUNKexceed the permissible limit.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Service alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
582
![Page 602: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/602.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VCTRUNK path.
Impact on the SystemThe virtually concatenated services are interrupted.
Possible CausesCause 1: The timeslots bound to a VCTRUNK travel through different physical links, so thedelays between the virtually concatenated links are long.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The timeslots bound to a VCTRUNK travel through different physical links, so thedelays between the virtually concatenated links are long.1. Determine the ID of the alarmed VCTRUNK path based on the alarm parameters.2. Check whether the transmission routes of the paths bound to a VCTRUNK are the same.
If not, adjust their routes to the same.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.273 VCAT_LOM_VC12
DescriptionThe VCAT_LOM_VC12 is an alarm indicating the loss of virtual concatenation multiframes inthe VC-12 path. This alarm is reported if the board detects that the K4 byte of the VC-12 pathdoes not match the expected multiframe sequence.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
583
![Page 603: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/603.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.
Impact on the System
The alarmed path is unavailable. If the LCAS function is disabled, the services in the path areinterrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Bit errors occur on the line.l Cause 2: The MFI field in the K4 byte sent from the opposite site is incorrect.l Cause 3: The delays between virtual concatenations are over long.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Bit errors occur on the line.1. Check whether any bit error alarm such as BIP_EXC and BIP_SD occurs.
If... Then...
A bit error alarm occurs Handle the alarm immediately.
No bit error alarm occurs Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The MFI field in the K4 byte sent from the opposite site is incorrect.1. Replace the board at the opposite site. For details, see 6.6 Replacing the Ethernet
Interface Board.2. Replace the board and then check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The delays between virtual concatenations are over long.1. Check whether the VCAT_LOA alarm is reported in this path.
If... Then...
The VCAT_LOA alarm is reported Handle the VCAT_LOA alarm immediately.
The VCAT_LOA alarm is not reported Go to Cause 2.
2. Check whether the VCAT_LOM_VC12 alarm clears after handling the VCAT_LOAalarm.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
584
![Page 604: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/604.jpg)
If... Then...
The alarm persists Replace the alarmed board at the local site. For details, see Replacethe alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.274 VCAT_LOM_VC3
Description
The VCAT_LOM_VC3 alarm indicates the loss of virtually concatenated multiframes in a VC-3path. A board reports this alarm when detecting that byte H4 in the VC-3 path does not matchthe expected multiframe sequence.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example,0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.
Impact on the System
The path that reports the alarm is unavailable. If the LCAS function is disabled, services areinterrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Bit errors occur in the line.l Cause 2: The MFI field in byte K4 sent from the opposite site is incorrect.l Cause 3: The delays between virtual concatenations are too long.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
585
![Page 605: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/605.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Bit errors occur in the line.1. Check for the bit error alarms such as BIP_EXC or BIP_SD.
If... Then...
The bit error alarms exist Handle the alarms immediately.
The bit error alarms do not exist Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The MFI field in byte K4 sent from the opposite site is incorrect.1. Follow instructions in 6.6 Replacing the Ethernet Interface Board to replace the board
at the opposite site.2. Replace the alarmed board and then check whether the alarm clears.
If... Then...
The alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists Go to Cause 3.
Step 3 Cause 3: The delays between virtual concatenations are too long.1. Check whether a VCAT_LOA alarm is reported in this path.
If... Then...
A VCAT_LOA alarm is reported in thispath
Handle the VCAT_LOA alarmimmediately.
No VCAT_LOA alarm is reported in thispath
Go to Cause 2.
2. Check whether the VCAT_LOM_VC3 alarm clears after handling the VCAT_LOA alarm.
If... Then...
The VCAT_LOM_VC3 alarm clears End the alarm handling.
The VCAT_LOM_VC3 alarm persists Follow instructions in 6.6 Replacing theEthernet Interface Board to replace thealarmed board at the local site.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.275 VCAT_SQM_VC12
DescriptionThe VCAT_SQM_VC12 is an alarm indicating the SQ number mismatch of a virtualconcatenation in the VC-12 path. This alarm is reported if the board detects that the SQ of avirtual concatenation does not match the expected value.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
586
![Page 606: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/606.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the ID of the optical interface. The value is always 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-12 path.
Impact on the SystemThe alarmed path is unavailable. If the LCAS function is disabled, services are interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty.l Cause 2: The SQ number sent from the opposite site is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Bit errors occur on certain links or certain links are faulty.1. Check whether bit errors or line alarms occur. Focus on the bit error alarm BIP_EXC or
BIP_SD.
If... Then...
Bit errors or line alarms occur Clear these alarms.
No bit errors or line alarms occur Go to the next step.
2. Replace the alarmed board.
Step 2 Cause 2: The SQ number sent from the opposite site is incorrect.1. Replace the corresponding board at the opposite site.
If... Then...
The alarm clears after the board isreplaced
End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Contact Huawei technical support engineersfor handling the alarm.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
587
![Page 607: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/607.jpg)
Related InformationNone.
A.3.276 VCAT_SQM_VC3
DescriptionThe VCAT_SQM_VC3 alarm indicates that the sequence (SQ) number mismatch of a virtualconcatenation in a VC-3 path. A board reports this alarm when detecting that the SQ of a virtualconcatenation does not match the expected value.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
ParametersWhen you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Has a fixed value of 0x01.
Parameter 2, Parameter 3 Indicate the ID of the VC-3 path that reports the alarm. For example,0x00 0x01 indicate that the alarm is reported in VC-3 path 1.
Impact on the SystemThe path that reports the alarm is unavailable. If the LCAS function is disabled, services areinterrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Bit errors occur on a link or a link is faulty.l Cause 2: The SQ number sent from the opposite site is incorrect.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Bit errors occur on a link or a link is faulty.1. Check for bit error alarms or line alarms, especially BIP_EXC and BIP_SD.
If... Then...
Bit error alarms or line alarms occur Clear these alarms.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
588
![Page 608: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/608.jpg)
If... Then...
No bit error alarms or line alarms occur Go to Cause 2.
2. Replace the alarmed board.
Step 2 Cause 2: The SQ number sent from the opposite site is incorrect.
1. Replace the related board at the opposite site.
If... Then...
The VCAT_SQM_VC3 alarm clears after theboard is replaced
End the alarm handling.
The VCAT_SQM_VC3 alarm persists afterthe board is replaced
Contact Huawei technical supportengineers.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.277 VOLT_LOS
Description
The VOLT_LOS is an alarm indicating that the power voltage is unavailable.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 The value is always 0x01.
Impact on the System
The ODU that is connected to the IF board that reports this alarm fails to work.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
589
![Page 609: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/609.jpg)
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The output power is abnormal.
l Cause 2: The input power is abnormal.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The output power is abnormal.
1. Check the power switch of the ODU.
If... Then...
The power switch is turned off Turn on the power switch.
The power switch is turned on Go to the next step.
2. Use the multimeter to check the IF fiber jumper, IF cable, or ODU section by section fora short circuit.
If... Then...
A short circuit exists Replace the short-circuited component,and then replace the alarmed IF board.
No short circuits exist Replace the alarmed IF board.
CAUTIONIf the alarm is reported due to a short circuit, replace the short-circuited cable or ODU, andthen replace the IF board. Otherwise, the new IF board may be damaged again.
Step 2 Cause 2: The input power is abnormal.
1. Replace the alarmed IF board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.278 VP_AIS
Description
The VP_AIS is an alarm indication of the virtual path (VP) connection. When a forward orbackward VP connection that is set with the segment end point attribute receives the AIS cells,the alarm is reported, indicating that the upstream services are abnormal.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
590
![Page 610: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/610.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the direction of ATM connection.
l 0x01: forwardl 0x02: backward
Parameter 2 Indicates the status of ATM connection.
l 0x01: working connectionl 0x00: protection connection
Parameter 3 Indicates the segment and end attribute of ATM connection.
l 0x01: segmentl 0x02: end
Impact on the Systeml If the continuity check (CC) sink is enabled on an upstream NE but the upstream NE does
not receive any CC cells, the local NE reports the alarm. In this case, the connection, thoughnot interrupted, is not loaded with any user service.
l In other cases, when the local NE detects that the VP connection is interrupted, the AIScells are inserted to the downstream and the RDI cells are returned to the upstream NE.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: An upstream NE reports the VP_LOC, and the AIS cells are inserted to the
downstream.
l Cause 2: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path isabnormal in the receive direction and inserts AIS cells to the downstream.
l Cause 3: The board on the local NE is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: An upstream NE reports the VP_LOC, and the AIS cells are inserted to the downstream.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
591
![Page 611: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/611.jpg)
1. On the NMS, check whether the VP_LOC occurs and the ATM connections that report theVP_LOC have the same ID.
2. If the VP_LOC occurs, clear the VP_LOC and then the AIS insertion stops.
Step 2 Cause 2: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is abnormalin the receive direction and therefore inserts AIS cells to the downstream.1. Check whether any alarm, such as the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, TU_AIS, TU_LOP,
AU_AIS or AU_LOP, occurs in an upstream SDH path.2. If yes, clear these alarms and then the AIS insertion stops.
Step 3 Cause 3: The board on the local NE is faulty.1. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board.2. If the alarm persists, replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
Unidirectional Connection
A complete bidirectional connection consists of two unidirectional connections: a forwardconnection and a backward connection. The direction of the forward and backward connectionsis based on the same node.
End and Segment
The end point refers to the termination point in the chain network, and it is used to monitor thewhole virtual connection.
The segment point is, generally, used to monitor a segment of the whole link.
Segment End Point
This is one of the segment end attributes. The segment end attributes include: segment point,end point, segment and end point, non segment and end point.
l If an NE is set with the segment end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that aregenerated at the segment and end.
l If an NE is set with the segment point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generatedat a segment.
l If an NE is set with the end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated atan end.
l If an NE is set with the non segment end point attribute, it fails to retrieve the alarms thatare generated at the segment and end.
A.3.279 VP_LOC
Description
The VP_LOC is an alarm indicating loss of connectivity on the virtual path (VP). This alarm isreported when the CC is enabled but no cell is received within 3.5s (±0.5s). When any cell isreceived, the alarm is cleared automatically.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
592
![Page 612: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/612.jpg)
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the direction of ATM connection.
l 0x01: forwardl 0x02: backward
Parameter 2 Indicates the status of ATM connection.
l 0x01: working connectionl 0x00: protection connection
Parameter 3 Indicates the segment and end attribute of ATM connection.
l 0x01: segmentl 0x02: endl 0x03: segment and end
Impact on the Systeml If the CC sink is enabled on the local NE but the local NE does not receive any CC cells,
the service connection, though not interrupted, is not loaded with any user service.
l In other cases, the service is interrupted when the alarm occurs.
l When this alarm occurs, the system automatically inserts AIS cells to the downstream.
l The VP_LOC is suppressed when the VP_AIS occurs.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The CC sink is enabled on the local NE, but no CC source is enabled on the
upstream NE.
l Cause 2: No bandwidth is available on the local NE.
l Cause 3: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path isabnormal in the receive direction.
l Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
593
![Page 613: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/613.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: The CC sink is enabled on the local NE, but no CC source is enabled on the upstreamNE.
1. Deactivate the CC function on the local NE.
Step 2 Cause 2: No bandwidth is available on the local NE.
1. On the NMS, check whether the bandwidth allocated to the tunnel is fully used.
2. If yes, increase the bandwidth or eliminate the sources that transmit a large amount ofinvalid data.
Step 3 Cause 3: On the local NE, the ATM port connected to a faulty upstream SDH path is abnormalin the receive direction.
1. Check whether any alarm, such as the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, TU_AIS, TU_LOP,AU_AIS or AU_LOP, occurs in an upstream SDH path.
2. If yes, clear these alarms.
Step 4 Cause 4: A certain board is faulty.
1. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board.
2. Check whether the alarm is cleared. If not, replace the alarmed board.
----End
Related Information
None.
A.3.280 VP_RDI
Description
The VP_RDI is an alarm indicating that defects occur at the remote end of the virtual path (VP)connection. This alarm occurs when a forward or backward VP connection that is set with thesegment end point attribute receives the RDI cells, indicating that the downstream services areabnormal.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Communication alarm
Parameters
When you view an alarm on the network management system, select the alarm. In the AlarmDetails field display the related parameters of the alarm. The alarm parameters are in thefollowing format: Alarm Parameters (hex): parameter1 parameter2...parameterN, for example,Alarm Parameters (hex): 0x01 0x08. For details about each parameter, refer to the followingtable.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
594
![Page 614: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/614.jpg)
Name Meaning
Parameter 1 Indicates the direction of ATM connection.
l 0x01: forwardl 0x02: backward
Parameter 2 Indicates the status of ATM connection.
l 0x01: working connectionl 0x00: protection connection
Parameter 3 Indicates the segment and end attribute of ATM connection.
l 0x01: segmentl 0x02: end
Impact on the Systeml When this alarm occurs, the services are not affected. This alarm just indicates that the
services in the receive direction of the downstream VP connection are abnormal. The AIScells are received in a segment point of the connection, and the RDI cells are returned tothe upstream VP connection.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: The VP_AIS occurs in the receive direction of the downstream VP connection.l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.
Procedure
l Cause 1: The VP_AIS occurs in the receive direction of the downstream VP connection.1. Check whether the VP_AIS occurs in the receive direction of the downstream VP
connection.2. If yes, clear the VP_AIS and then check whether the VP_RDI is cleared.
l Cause 2: A certain board is faulty.1. Perform a cold reset on the alarmed board. For details, see 8.7.1 Cold Reset.2. If the alarm persists, replace the alarmed board. For details, see 6.5 Replacing the
Smart E1 Board.
----End
Related Information
Unidirectional Connection
A complete bidirectional connection consists of two unidirectional connections: a forwardconnection and a backward connection. The direction of the forward and backward connectionsis based on the same node.
End and Segment
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
595
![Page 615: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/615.jpg)
The end point refers to the termination point in the chain network, and it is used to monitor thewhole virtual connection.
The segment point is, generally, used to monitor a segment of the whole link.
Segment End Point
This is one of the segment end attributes. The segment end attributes include: segment point,end point, segment and end point, non segment and end point.
l If an NE is set with the segment end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that aregenerated at the segment and end.
l If an NE is set with the segment point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generatedat a segment.
l If an NE is set with the end point attribute, it can retrieve the alarms that are generated atan end.
l If an NE is set with the non segment end point attribute, it fails to retrieve the alarms thatare generated at the segment and end.
A.3.281 WRG_BD_TYPE
Description
The WRG_BD_TYPE is an alarm indicating that the type of the board is incorrect.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Major Equipment alarm
Parameters
None.
Impact on the System
The board fails to work.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect.
l Cause 2: The board of an incorrect type is installed.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect.
1. See Configuring the Logical Board to check whether the board type complies with theplanning requirement.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
596
![Page 616: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/616.jpg)
If... Then...
The board type does not meet the planningrequirement
Change the configuration data.
The board type meets the planning requirement Go to Cause 2.
Step 2 Cause 2: The board of an incorrect type is installed.1. Replace the board of an incorrect type.
----End
Related InformationNone.
A.3.282 XPIC_LOS
DescriptionThe XPIC_LOS is an alarm indicating that the XPIC compensation signals are lost.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm
ParametersNone.
Impact on the SystemBit errors may occur in the service at the port, and the service may even be interrupted.
Possible Causesl Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect.l Cause 2: The radio link is faulty.l Cause 3: The XPIC cable is faulty.l Cause 4: The IF board or ODU is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Configuration data is incorrect.1. Check whether the XPIC function needs to be enabled. If not, see Setting IF Attributes to
disable the XPIC function, and then perform a self-loop at the XPIC port on the board byusing the XPIC cable.
Step 2 Cause 2: The radio link is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
597
![Page 617: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/617.jpg)
1. Check whether the paired board that is connected to the XPIC IF board through the XPICcable reports the MW_LOF alarm. If yes, first clear the MW_LOF alarm.
Step 3 Cause 3: The XPIC cable is faulty.1. Check the connection of the XPIC cable.
If... Then...
The cable is improperly connected Connect the XPIC cable properly.
The cable is properly connected Go to the next step.
2. Test the make and break of the XPIC cable by using the multimeter. If the XPIC cable is
damaged, replace it.
Step 4 Cause 4: The IF board or ODU is faulty.
Locate the fault by replacing the IF board or ODU.
1. Replace the paired board of the XPIC IF board.
The paired board of the XPIC IF board refers to the other XPIC IF board connected to thealarmed XPIC IF board through the XPIC cable.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the board isreplaced
End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists after the board isreplaced
Go to the next step.
2. Replace the ODU that is connected to the paired XPIC IF board.
If... Then...
The alarm is cleared after the ODU isreplaced
End the alarm handling.
The alarm persists after the ODU isreplaced
Replace the alarmed XPIC IF board.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) A Alarm Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
598
![Page 618: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/618.jpg)
B Abnormal Event Reference
Abnormal events are important indicators when abnormalities occur on the equipment. Thischapter describes all the possible important abnormal events on the OptiX RTN 980 and how tohandle these events.
B.1 Major Abnormal Performance Event ListAbnormal events are important indicators when abnormalities occur on the equipment. Thischapter describes all the possible important abnormal events on the OptiX RTN 980 and how tohandle these events.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
599
![Page 619: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/619.jpg)
B.1 Major Abnormal Performance Event ListAbnormal events are important indicators when abnormalities occur on the equipment. Thischapter describes all the possible important abnormal events on the OptiX RTN 980 and how tohandle these events.
Table B-1 Major performance event list
Event Name Source
B.2.1 IF 1+1 Protection Switching CSHN
B.2.2 N+1 Protection Switching
B.2.3 SNCP Switching
B.2.4 Linear MSP Switching
B.2.6 Status Change of an APS ProtectionGroup
B.2.7 Reporting of PW APS SwitchingEvents
B.2.5 Ring MSP Switching
B.2.8 System Control Board Switching
B.2.9 RMON Performance Value Belowthe Lower Limit
EM6FA, EM6TA, EFP8, EMS6, EM6F,EG2D, and EM6T
B.2.10 RMON Performance Value Abovethe Upper Limit
B.2 Abnormal Performance Events and HandlingProcedures
This chapter describes all the important abnormal performance events on the OptiX RTN 980in an alphabetical order and how to handle these abnormal performance events.
B.2.1 IF 1+1 Protection Switching
DescriptionThis abnormal event indicates that the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD switching occurs on the equipment.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
600
![Page 620: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/620.jpg)
AttributeSeverity Type
Major Service
ParametersName Meaning
Protection Group ID Indicates the ID of the protection group wherethe IF 1+1 protection switching occurs.
Current Working Board Slot Indicates the slot ID of the current workingboard.
Current Working Board Sub Slot Indicates the sub slot ID of the currentworking board.The value is always 0xff.
Current Working Port No. Indicates the ID of the working port.
Current Active Board Indicates the current working board.l Active on working boardl Active on protection board
Active Board Status Indicates the current state of the workingboard.l Normall Failedl MW_RDIl Unknown
Standby Board Status Indicates the current status of the protectionboard.l Normall Failedl MW_RDIl Unknown
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
601
![Page 621: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/621.jpg)
Name Meaning
Switching Request Indicates the type of an IF 1+1 protectionswitching request.l No requestl Automatic switchingl Manual switchingl Forced switchingl Lockout of switchingl Wait-to-restorel RDI switching
NOTEThe parameter names and parameter values may vary with the version of the NMS.
Impact on Systeml During the HSB protection switching, services are interrupted. After the HSB switching is
complete, the services are restored to normal.l During the HSM protection switching, no bit errors occur and the services are not affected.
Related AlarmsWhen the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs, the RPS_INDI alarm is reported.
Possible Causesl The possible causes of the HSB protection switching are as follows:
– The hardware of the ODU or IF unit at the local end is faulty.– The working channel of the local end receives the MW_RDI alarm.– The external switching, which is triggered by the switching command issued from the
NMS software, occurs. The external switching includes lockout of switching, forcedswitching, and manual switching.
l The possible causes of the HSM protection switching are as follows:The quality of the main channel degrades.– In the case of Hybrid radio, the quality of the main channel degrades.– In the case of SDH/PDH radio, an alarm that triggers the HSM switching is reported on
the radio link. These alarms include R_LOC, R_LOF, R_LOS, MW_LOF,MW_FEC_UNCOR, B1_SD(IF1).
Procedure
Step 1 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type indicated by the parameter and thedescription in RPS_INDI.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
602
![Page 622: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/622.jpg)
B.2.2 N+1 Protection Switching
DescriptionThis abnormal event indicates that the N+1 protection switching occurs on the equipment.
AttributeSeverity Type
Major Service
ParametersName Meaning
Protection Group ID Indicates the ID of the protection group wherethe IF N+1 protection switching occurs.
Path Name ID Indicates the ID of the path where the IF N+1protection switching occurs.
Switching Request Indicates the type of an IF N+1 protectionswitching request.l Lockout of protection channell Forced switchingl SF switchingl SD switchingl Manual switchingl Wait-to-restorel Exercisel Reverse requestl No request
Switching Status Indicates the state of an N+1 protectiongroup.l Protocol unstartedl Idle statusl Switching statusl Protocol starting
Protected Unit Indicates the ID of the protected channel.The ID is 0xff if no switching is performed.
Switching Local/Remote End Indication Indicates the local or remote switching.l Local endl Remote end
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
603
![Page 623: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/623.jpg)
Name Meaning
The switching status reason is changed Indicates the cause of the IF N+1 protectionswitching.l Local requestl External commandl K-byte requestl Timer expiry
NOTEThe parameter names and parameter values may vary with the version of the NMS.
Impact on SystemDuring the N+1 protection switching (not more than 50 ms), the services are interrupted. Afterthe N+1 switching is complete, the services are restored to normal. After the switching startsand before the switching is complete, the extra services are interrupted.
NOTEIf the IF N+1 protection switching is caused by exercise switching, service signals are not switched actuallybecause the exercise switching is used to check whether the NE can run the N+1 protocol normally.
Related Alarms
When the IF N+1 protection switching occurs, the NP1_SW_INDI alarm is reported.
Possible Causesl The external switching occurs.
– Lockout of protection channel
– Forced switching
– Manual switchingl An automatic switching occurs.
– The hardware of the IDU or IF board is faulty. Focus on checking whether theHARD_BAD or BD_STATUS alarm is reported.
– The MW_LOF, R_LOC, R_LOF, R_LOS, MS_AIS, or B2_EXC alarm is reportedon the working path.
Procedure
Step 1 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type and the switching cause indicated bythe parameters.
If... Then...
The switching is caused by the externalswitching
Find the cause of the external switching, andthen release the external switchingimmediately.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
604
![Page 624: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/624.jpg)
If... Then...
The switching is caused by the automaticswitching
Clear the alarm that triggers the automaticswitching.
----End
B.2.3 SNCP Switching
DescriptionThis abnormal event indicates that the SDH SNCP switching occurs in the service that isconfigured with the SNCP.
AttributeSeverity Type
Major Service
ParametersName Meaning
Source Indicates the service source of the SNCPprotection group.
Sink Indicates the service sink of the SNCPprotection group.
Status Indicates the current working path.l Working at protection channell Working at working channel
Switching Status Indicates the switching status.l Manual to standbyl Force to activel Force to standbyl Lockout switchingl SF switchingl SD switchingl Wait-to-restorel Idle
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
605
![Page 625: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/625.jpg)
Name Meaning
Working Channel Current Status Indicates the current status of the SNCPworking path.l Normall SDl SF
Protection Channel Current Status Indicates the current status of the SNCPprotection path.l Normall SDl SF
NOTEThe parameter names and parameter values may vary with the version of the NMS.
Impact on SystemWhen the SNCP switching occurs, you must find the cause. If the related link is faulty, recoverthe link immediately. Ensure that the states of the SNCP working path and the SNCP protectionpath are normal.
Possible Causesl The SDH SNCP switching is automatically triggered.
– The hardware of the line board is faulty.– The R_LOS, R_LOF, R_LOC, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, AU_LOP, AU_AIS,
HP_LOM, MW_LOF (only when the IF board functions as the line board),MW_LIM (only when the IF board functions as the line board), B3_EXC, B3_SD,HP_TIM (in the case of VC-4 services), HP_UNEQ (in the case of VC-4 services),TU_AIS (in the case of VC-12 services) or TU_LOP (in the case of VC-12 services),LP_UNEQ (Optional condition), LP_TIM (Optional condition), BIP_SD (Optionalcondition), BIP_EXC (Optional condition), or MW_BER_EXC.
l The SDH SNCP switching is manually triggered.– Forced switching– Manual switching
Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, query the type of the SDH SNCP switching request.
Step 2 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
606
![Page 626: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/626.jpg)
If... Then...
The SDH SNCP switching is automaticallytriggered
Rectify the fault according to the relatedalarm, and eliminate the conditions of theautomatic switching.
The SDH SNCP switching is manuallytriggered
Find the cause of the manual switching, andthen release the manual switchingimmediately.
----End
B.2.4 Linear MSP Switching
Abnormal Event DescriptionThis abnormal event indicates that a linear MSP switching occurs in the service that is configuredwith the MSP.
Abnormal Event AttributesLevel Type
Major Service
Abnormal Event ParametersParameter Name Definition
Indicates the ID of the protection group. Indicates the ID of the protection group wherea linear MSP switching occurs.
Current working path Indicates the current working path of thelinear MSP group.l Working unitl Protection unit
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
607
![Page 627: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/627.jpg)
Parameter Name Definition
Switching request type Indicates the type of a linear MSP switchingrequest.l Locked switchingl Forced switchingl SF switchingl SD switchingl Manual switchingl Wait-to-restorel Exercisel Reverse requestl Non-revertive requestl No request
Switching status Indicates the switching status.l Protocol not startedl Idlel Switchingl Protocol being started
Remote/local end indication Indicates the remote or local end.l No remote/local endl Local endl Remote end
Cause of switching status change Indicates the cause of switching statuschange.l Local requestl External commandl K-byte requestl Timer expiry
NOTEThe parameter names and parameter values may vary with the version of the NMS.
Impact on Systeml During the switching time (not more than 50 ms), the services are interrupted. After the
switching is complete, the services are restored to normal. After the switching starts andbefore the switching is complete, the extra services are interrupted.
l Troubleshooting measures need to be taken immediately when an MSP switching occursbecause the possible causes are fiber cuts and failures of terminal nodes.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
608
![Page 628: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/628.jpg)
Relevant Alarms
When a linear MSP switching occurs, the APS_INDI alarm may be reported.
Possible Causesl An external switching command is issued to trigger manual, forced, or exercise switching.
l An automatic switching occurs.After the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, B2_SD, B3_EXC, B3_SD, HP_TIM (inthe case of VC-4 services), HP_UNEQ (in the case of VC-4 services), TU_AIS (in thecase of VC-12 services), or TU_LOP (in the case of VC-12 services) alarm is reported,the MSP protection group changes to the switching status, and an automatic switching alarmis reported.
l The hardware or line is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, query the switching type and the protection group ID.
Step 2 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type.
If... Then...
The switching is caused by externalswitching
Find out the cause and clear the switchingimmediately.
The switching is an automatic switching Clear the relevant alarm, and rectify thehardware or line fault first.
----End
B.2.5 Ring MSP Switching
Description
This abnormal event indicates that a ring MSP switching occurs on the equipment that isconfigured with services.
Attribute
Severity Type
Major Service
Parameters
Name Meaning
Indicates the ID of the protection group. Indicates the ID of the protection group wherea ring MSP switching occurs.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
609
![Page 629: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/629.jpg)
Name Meaning
West switching request Current switching request in the westdirection of the MSP ring:l Lock in the section where fiber cuts occurl Lock in the protected sectionl Forced section switchingl Forced ring switchingl SF section switchingl SF ring switchingl SD section lockl SD section switchingl SD ring switchingl Manual section switchingl Manual ring switchingl Wait-to-restorel Exercise section switchingl Exercise ring switchingl No request
West switching status Current switching status in the west directionof the MSP ring:l Protocol not startedl Idlel Switchingl Protocol being startedl Pass-through
West service switching flag Current service switching flag in the westdirection of the MSP ring:l Full pass-throughl No service switchingl Service switching
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
610
![Page 630: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/630.jpg)
Name Meaning
East and west switching request Current switching request in the east directionof the MSP ring:l Lock in the section where fiber cuts occurl Lock in the protected sectionl Forced section switchingl Forced ring switchingl SF section switchingl SF ring switchingl SD section lockl SD section switchingl SD ring switchingl Manual section switchingl Manual ring switchingl Wait-to-restorel Exercise section switchingl Exercise ring switchingl No request
East switching status Current switching status in the east directionof the MSP ring:l Protocol unstartedl Idlel Switchingl Protocol being startedl Pass-through
East service switching flag Current service switching flag in the eastdirection of the MSP ring:l Full pass-throughl No service switchingl Service switching
West remote/local end indication Trigger condition of the status change in thewest direction:l Remote endl Local end
East remote/local end indication Trigger condition of the status change in theeast direction:l Remote endl Local end
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
611
![Page 631: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/631.jpg)
Name Meaning
Cause of switching Cause of the current switching:l Request indicated by K bytesl External command
Reserved parameter 0xff
NOTEThe parameter names and parameter values may vary according to the version of the NMS.
Impact on the Systeml During the switching time (not more than 50 ms), the services are interrupted. After the
switching is complete, the services are restored. After the switching starts and before theswitching is complete, the extra services are interrupted.
l When a ring MSP switching occurs, a fiber cut may occur or the terminal node may befaulty. In this case, you must rectify the fault immediately.
Related Alarms
When a ring MSP switching occurs, the APS_INDI alarm may be reported.
Possible Causesl An external switching command such as manual, forced, or excise switching command is
issued.
l An automatic switching occurs.
After the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, B2_EXC, or B2_SD alarm is reported, the MSPgroup changes to the switching state, and an automatic switching alarm is reported.
l The hardware or line is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, query the switching type and the protection group ID.
Step 2 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type.
If... Then...
The switching is an external switching Find the cause of the external switching, and thenclear manual switching immediately.
The switching is an automatic switching Clear the relevant alarm, and rectify the hardwareor line fault immediately.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
612
![Page 632: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/632.jpg)
B.2.6 Status Change of an APS Protection Group
DescriptionThis abnormal event indicates that an APS protection group switches.
AttributeSeverity Type
Major Service
ParametersName Meaning
Protection Group ID ID of the protection group whose APS statusis changed
APS Protection Group Switching Status Current working status of the APS protectiongroupl Working pathl Protection path
APS Protection Group Protocol Status APS protection group protocol status
Working Path Status of the APS ProtectionGroup
Working path status of the APS protectiongroup:l Validl Invalid
Protection Path Status of the APS ProtectionGroup
Protection path status of the APS protectiongroup:l Validl Invalid
NOTEThe parameter names and parameter values may vary according to the version of the NMS.
Impact on the SystemDuring the switching, the services are interrupted. After the switching is complete, the servicesare restored. After the switching starts and before the switching is complete, the extra servicesare interrupted.
Related AlarmsNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
613
![Page 633: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/633.jpg)
Possible Causesl An external switching command (for example, manual switching) is issued.
l An automatic switching occurs.
When an MPLS link is faulty, the MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV, MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI,MPLS_TUNNEL_SD, MPLS_TUNNEL_SF, MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMATCH,MPLS_TUNNEL_MISMERGE, MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess, orMPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN alarm occurs on the working path.
Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, query the switching type and the protection group ID.
Step 2 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type and the switching cause indicated bythe parameters.
If... Then...
The switching is an external switching Find the cause of the external switching, and thenclear manual switching immediately.
The switching is an automatic switching Handle the relevant alarms first.
----End
B.2.7 Reporting of PW APS Switching Events
Description
This abnormal event indicates that a PW APS protection group switches.
Attribute
Severity Type
Major Service
Parameters
Name Meaning
Protection Group ID ID of the protection group whose APS statusis changed
APS Protection Group Switching Status Current working status of the APS protectiongroupl Working pathl Protection path
APS Protection Group Protocol Status APS protection group protocol status
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
614
![Page 634: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/634.jpg)
Name Meaning
Working Path Status of the APS ProtectionGroup
Working path status of the APS protectiongroup:l Validl Invalid
Protection Path Status of the APS ProtectionGroup
Protection path status of the APS protectiongroup:l Validl Invalid
NOTEThe parameter names and parameter values may vary according to the version of the NMS.
Impact on the System
During the switching, the services are interrupted. After the switching is complete, the servicesare restored. After the switching starts and before the switching is complete, the extra servicesare interrupted.
Related Alarms
None.
Possible Causesl An external switching command (for example, manual switching) is issued.
l An automatic switching occurs.
When an MPLS link is faulty, the MPLS_PW_LOCV, MPLS_PW_MISMATCH,MPLS_PW_SD, MPLS_PW_SF, MPLS_PW_MISMERGE, MPLS_PW_Excess, orMPLS_PW_UNKNOWN alarm occurs on the working path.
Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, query the switching type and the protection group ID.
Step 2 Rectify the fault according to the switching request type and the switching cause indicated bythe parameters.
If... Then...
The switching is an external switching Find the cause of the external switching, and thenclear manual switching immediately.
The switching is an automatic switching Handle the relevant alarms first.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
615
![Page 635: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/635.jpg)
B.2.8 System Control Board Switching
Description
This abnormal event indicates that the system control boards are switched when the workingsystem control board on the equipment that is configured with the 1+1 protection becomes faulty.
Attribute
Severity Type
Major Equipment
Parameters
Name Meaning
Group ID Indicates the group ID.
Protection Type Cross-connect board protection.
Working Unit Indicates the slot ID of the current workingboard.
Protection Unit Indicates the slot ID of the current protectionboard.
Current Working Unit Indicates the current status of the board.l Work at protection unitl Work at working unit
Switching Type Indicates the switching type.Manual Switching
NOTEThe parameter names and parameter values may vary with the version of the NMS.
Impact on SystemIf the system control boards are switched because the original working system control board isfaulty, rectify the fault on the original working system control board immediately. Otherwise,the services are interrupted if the current working system control board becomes faulty.
Possible Causesl The switching is manually triggered.
l The switching is automatically triggered.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
616
![Page 636: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/636.jpg)
Generally, the switching is automatically triggered when the hardware of the board becomesfaulty. Hence, focus on the following alarms reported on the original working systemcontrol board: HARD_BAD.
Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, check whether the manual switching operation is performed.
If... Then...
The manual switching operation isperformed on the NMS
Find the cause of the manual switching, andthen release the manual switching immediately.
No manual switching operations areperformed on the NMS
Go to the next step.
Step 2 On the NMS, check whether any alarms indicating the board hardware fault are reported. If yes,clear the alarms and rectify the fault.
----End
B.2.9 RMON Performance Value Below the Lower Limit
DescriptionThis abnormal event indicates that the current RMON performance value is lower than the presetlower limit.
AttributeSeverity Type
Minor Communication
ParametersName Meaning
Performance ID Indicates the ID of the current RMONperformance event.
Current Performance Value Indicates the value of the current RMONperformance event.
Lower Limit Indicates the lower limit of the currentRMON performance event.
Impact on SystemDifferent abnormal performance events have different impacts on the system. For details, seeD.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
617
![Page 637: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/637.jpg)
Related AlarmsDifferent alarms are reported when different RMON performance values are lower than thelower limits. For details, see D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures.
Possible CausesThe lower limit of a performance event is set to a non-zero value.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the lower limit of the performance event to 0.
----End
B.2.10 RMON Performance Value Above the Upper Limit
DescriptionThis abnormal event indicates that the current RMON performance value is higher than the presetupper limit.
AttributeSeverity Type
Minor Communication
ParametersName Meaning
Performance ID Indicates the ID of the current RMONperformance event.
Current Performance Value Indicates the value of the current RMONperformance event.
Upper Limit Indicates the upper limit of the currentRMON performance event.
Impact on SystemDifferent abnormal performance events have different impacts on the system. For details, seeD.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures.
Related AlarmsDifferent alarms are reported when different RMON performance values are higher than theupper limits. For details, see D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
618
![Page 638: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/638.jpg)
Possible CausesWhen the performance values of different abnormal RMON performance events are higher thanthe upper limits, the causes are different. For details, see D.4 RMON Events and HandlingProcedures.
Procedure
Step 1 See D.4 RMON Events and Handling Procedures to handle different abnormal performanceevents.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) B Abnormal Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
619
![Page 639: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/639.jpg)
C Performance Event Reference
Performance events are important indicators when the equipment performance changes. Thischapter describes all the possible performance events on the OptiX RTN 980 and how to handlethese performance events.
C.1 Performance Events (by Event Type)The list is categorized based on the performance event type, and includes all the events of theOptiX RTN 980.
C.2 Performance Events (by Logical Board)This part lists all the performance events that are reported by each board.
C.3 Performance Events and Handling ProceduresBased on the type of a performance event, this chapter describes all the performance events onthe OptiX RTN 980 and how to handle these performance events.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
620
![Page 640: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/640.jpg)
C.1 Performance Events (by Event Type)The list is categorized based on the performance event type, and includes all the events of theOptiX RTN 980.
C.1.1 SDH/PDH Performance Event ListSDH/PDH performance events are classified into six categories: pointer justification,regenerator section error, multiplex section error, higher order path error, lower order path error,and E1 line side code violation.
Table C-1 Pointer Justification Performance Events
Event Name Description
AUPJCHIGH Indicates the count of positive AU pointerjustifications.
AUPJCLOW Indicates the count of negative AU pointerjustifications.
AUPJCNEW Indicates the count of new AU pointerjustifications.
TUPJCHIGH Indicates the count of positive TU pointerjustifications.
TUPJCLOW Indicates the count of negative TU pointerjustifications.
TUPJCNEW Indicates the count of new TU pointerjustifications.
Table C-2 Regenerator Section Error Performance Events
Event Name Description
RSBBE Indicates the regenerator section backgroundblock error.
RSES Indicates the regenerator section erroredsecond.
RSSES Indicates the regenerator section severelyerrored second.
RSUAS Indicates the regenerator section unavailablesecond.
RSCSES Indicates the regenerator section consecutiveseverely errored second.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
621
![Page 641: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/641.jpg)
Event Name Description
RSOFS Indicates the regenerator section out-of-frame second.
RSOOF Indicates the count of regenerator section out-of-frame events.
NOTE
In the case of PDH radio, regenerator section bit error performance events also exist and they are detectedaccording to the overheads used for detecting frame alignment and bit errors in the PDH microwave frames.
Table C-3 Multiplex Section Error Performance Events
Event Name Description
MSBBE Indicates the multiplex section backgroundblock error.
MSES Indicates the multiplex section erroredsecond.
MSSES Indicates the multiplex section severelyerrored second.
MSCSES Indicates the multiplex section consecutiveseverely errored second.
MSUAS Indicates the multiplex section unavailablesecond.
MSFEBBE Indicates the multiplex section far endbackground block error.
MSFEES Indicates the multiplex section far end erroredsecond.
MSFESES Indicates the multiplex section far endseverely errored second.
MSFECSES Indicates the multiplex section far endconsecutive severely errored second.
MSFEUAS Indicates the multiplex section far endunavailable second.
Table C-4 Higher Order Path Error Performance Events
Event Name Description
HPBBE Indicates the higher order path backgroundblock error.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
622
![Page 642: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/642.jpg)
Event Name Description
HPES Indicates the higher order path erroredsecond.
HPSES Indicates the higher order path severelyerrored second.
HPCSES Indicates the higher order path consecutiveseverely errored second.
HPUAS Indicates the higher order path unavailablesecond.
HPFEBBE Indicates the higher order path far endbackground block error.
HPFEES Indicates the higher order path far end erroredsecond.
HPFESES Indicates the higher order path far endseverely errored second.
HPFECSES Indicates the higher order path far endconsecutive severely errored second.
HPFEUAS Indicates the higher order path far endunavailable second.
Table C-5 Lower Order Path Error Performance Events
Event Name Description
LPBBE Indicates the lower order path backgroundblock error.
LPES Indicates the lower order path errored second.
LPSES Indicates the lower order path severelyerrored second.
LPCSES Indicates the lower order path consecutiveseverely errored second.
LPUAS Indicates the lower order path unavailablesecond.
LPFEBBE Indicates the lower order path far endbackground block error.
LPFEES Indicates the lower order path far end erroredsecond.
LPFESES Indicates the lower order path far endseverely errored second.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
623
![Page 643: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/643.jpg)
Event Name Description
LPFECSES Indicates the lower order path far endconsecutive severely errored second.
LPFEUAS Indicates the lower order far end unavailablesecond.
Table C-6 E1 Line Side Code Violation Performance Events
Event Name Description
E1_LCV_SDH Indicates the count of E1 line side codeviolations.
E1_LLOSS_SDH Indicates the E1 line side loss-of-signalsecond.
E1_LES_SDH Indicates the E1 line side code violationerrored second.
E1_LSES_SDH Indicates the E1 line side code violationseverely errored second.
Table C-7 E1 Error Performance Events
Event Name Description
E1_BBE Indicates the E1 background block error.
E1_ES Indicates the E1 errored second.
E1_SES Indicates the E1 severely errored second.
E1_CSES Indicates the E1 consecutive severely erroredsecond.
E1_UAS Indicates the E1 unavailable second.
C.1.2 Radio Performance EventsThe radio performance events are performance events of the radio link bit errors, ATPC, AM,and power.
Table C-8 Radio power performance events
Event Name Description
TSL_MAX Maximum value of radio transmit signal level
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
624
![Page 644: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/644.jpg)
Event Name Description
TSL_MIN Minimum value of radio transmit signal level
TSL_CUR Current value of radio transmit signal level
TSL_AVG Average value of radio transmit signal level
RSL_MAX Maximum value of radio receive signal level
RSL_MIN Minimum value of radio receive signal level
RSL_CUR Current value of radio receive signal level
RSL_AVG Average value of radio receive signal level
TLHTT The duration when the ODU at the local endhas a transit power higher than the upperthreshold
TLLTT The duration when the ODU at the local endhas a transit power higher than the lowerthreshold
RLHTT The duration when the ODU at the local endhas a receive power lower than the upperthreshold
RLLTT The duration when the ODU at the local endhas a receive power lower than the lowerthreshold
Table C-9 FEC performance events
Event Name Description
FEC_BEF_COR_ER FEC bit error rate before correction
FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT FEC uncorrected block count
FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT The number of bytes that are correctedthrough the FEC
Table C-10 Radio link error performance events
Event Name Description
IF_BBE Radio link background block errors
IF_ES Radio link errored seconds
IF_SES Radio link severely errored seconds
IF_UAS Radio link unavailable second
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
625
![Page 645: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/645.jpg)
Event Name Description
IF_CSES Radio link consecutive severely erroredseconds
Table C-11 ATPC performance events
Event Name Description
ATPC_P_ADJUST Positive ATPC adjustment
ATPC_N_ADJUST Negative ATPC adjustment
Table C-12 AM performance events
Event Name Description
QPSKWS Working time of the QPSK mode
QAMWS16 Working time of the 16QAM mode
QAMWS32 Working time of the 32QAM mode
QAMWS64 Working time of the 64QAM mode
QAMWS128 Working time of the 128QAM mode
QAMWS256 Working time of the 256QAM mode
FB_AMDCNT Count of the downshift of the AM scheme
FB_AMUCNT Count of the upshift of the AM scheme
Table C-13 XPIC performance events
Event Name Description
XPIC_XPD_VALUE XPIC XPD value
Table C-14 IF 1+1 protection group error performance events
Event Name Description
PG_IF_BBE IF 1+1 protection group background blockerrors
PG_IF_ES IF 1+1 protection group errored seconds
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
626
![Page 646: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/646.jpg)
Event Name Description
PG_IF_SES IF 1+1 protection group severely erroredseconds
PG_IF_UAS IF 1+1 protection group unavailable second
PG_IF_CSES IF 1+1 protection group consecutive severelyerrored seconds
Table C-15 IF port error performance events
Event Name Description
IF_SNR_MAX Maximum signal to noise ratio
IF_SNR_MIN Minimum signal to noise ratio
IF_SNR_AVG Average signal to noise ratio
C.1.3 Other Performance EventsIn addition to the SDH and radio performance events, the OptiX RTN 980 supports performanceevents of the optical power and the temperature.
Table C-16 Optical power performance events
Event Name Description
TPLMAX Maximum value of transmit optical power
TPLMIN Minimum value of transmit optical power
TPLCUR Current value of transmit optical power
RPLMAX Maximum value of receive optical power
RPLMIN Minimum value of receive optical power
RPLCUR Current value of receive optical power
Table C-17 Board temperature performance events
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMAX Maximum value of board temperature
BDTEMPMIN Minimum value of board temperature
BDTEMPCUR Current value of board temperature
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
627
![Page 647: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/647.jpg)
Table C-18 Laser temperature performance events
Event Name Description
OSPITMPMAX Maximum temperature of a laser core
OSPITMPMIN Minimum temperature of a laser core
OSPITMPCUR Current temperature of a laser core
C.2 Performance Events (by Logical Board)This part lists all the performance events that are reported by each board.
NOTE
The NE software consider a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board.The NMS also considers a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the physical board.
For OptiX RTN 980, all physical boards, except the system control, switching, and timing board, correspond tological boards of the same names. Table C-19 shows the logical boards corresponding to the system control,switching, and timing board.
Table C-19 Logical boards corresponding to the system control, switching, and timing board
Physical Board Logical Board
CSHN l CSHN in slot 15 + SL4D in slot 16 +EG2D in slot 17
l CSHN in slot 20 + SL4D in slot 21 +EG2D in slot 22
C.2.1 CSHNThe CSHN board reports optical power performance events and board temperature performanceevents.
Table C-20 Board Temperature Performance Events
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMAX Indicates the maximum boardtemperature.
BDTEMPMIN Indicates the minimum boardtemperature.
BDTEMPCUR Indicates the current board temperature.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
628
![Page 648: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/648.jpg)
Table C-21 Optical Power Performance Events
Event Name Description
TPLMAX Indicates the maximum transmit opticalpower at an optical interface.
TPLMIN Indicates the minimum transmit opticalpower at an optical interface.
TPLCUR Indicates the current transmit power at anoptical interface.
RPLMAX Indicates the maximum receive optical powerat an optical interface.
RPLMIN Indicates the minimum receive optical powerat an optical interface.
RPLCUR Indicates the current receive power at anoptical interface.
Table C-22 IF 1+1 protection group error performance events
Event Name Description
PG_IF_BBE IF 1+1 protection group background blockerrors
PG_IF_ES IF 1+1 protection group errored seconds
PG_IF_SES IF 1+1 protection group severely erroredseconds
PG_IF_UAS IF 1+1 protection group unavailable second
PG_IF_CSES IF 1+1 protection group consecutive severelyerrored seconds
C.2.2 IF1The IF1 board reports three types of performance events: SDH/PDH performance events,microwave performance events, and temperature performance events.
SDH/PDH Performance Events
Table C-23 Pointer justification performance events
Event Name Description
AUPJCHIGH Count of positive AU pointer justification
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
629
![Page 649: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/649.jpg)
Event Name Description
AUPJCLOW Count of negative AU pointer justification
AUPJCNEW Count of new AU pointer justifications
Table C-24 Regenerator section error performance events
Event Name Description
RSBBE Regenerator section block of backgrounderror
RSES Regenerator section errored second
RSSES Regenerator section severely errored second
RSUAS Regenerator section unavailable second
RSCSES Regenerator section consecutive severelyerrored second
RSOFS Regenerator section out-of-frame second
RSOOF Regenerator section out of frame
NOTE
The regenerator section error performance events also occur in the case of the PDH radio. The PDH radioframe is detected through the overheads that are used for frame location and bit error detection.
Table C-25 Multiplex section error performance events
Event Name Description
MSBBE Multiplex section block of background error
MSES Multiplex section errored second
MSSES Multiplex section severely errored second
MSCSES Multiplex section consecutive severelyerrored second
MSUAS Multiplex section unavailable second
MSFEBBE Multiplex section far end block ofbackground error
MSFEES Multiplex section far end errored second
MSFESES Multiplex section far end severely erroredsecond
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
630
![Page 650: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/650.jpg)
Event Name Description
MSFECSES Multiplex section far end consecutiveseverely errored second
MSFEUAS Multiplex section far end unavailable second
Table C-26 Higher order path error performance events
Event Name Description
HPBBE Higher order path background block error
HPES Higher order path errored second
HPSES Higher order path severely errored second
HPCSES Higher order path consecutive severelyerrored second
HPUAS Higher order path unavailable second
HPFEBBE Higher order path far end background blockerror
HPFEES Higher order path far end errored second
HPFESES Higher order path far end severely erroredsecond
HPFECSES Higher order path far end consecutiveseverely errored second
HPFEUAS Higher order path far end unavailable second
Radio Performance Events
Table C-27 FEC performance events
Event Name Description
FEC_BEF_COR_ER FEC bit error rate before correction
FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT Frame count incorrect by FEC
Table C-28 IF port error performance events
Event Name Description
IF_SNR_MAX Maximum signal to noise ratio
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
631
![Page 651: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/651.jpg)
Event Name Description
IF_SNR_MIN Minimum signal to noise ratio
IF_SNR_AVG Average signal to noise ratio
Other Performance Events
Table C-29 Board temperature performance events
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMAX Maximum value of board temperature
BDTEMPMIN Minimum value of board temperature
BDTEMPCUR Current value of board temperature
C.2.3 IFU2/ISU2The IFU2/ISU2 board reports three types of performance events: PDH performance events, radioperformance events, and board temperature performance events.
SDH Performance Events (Only reported by ISU2)
Table C-30 Pointer justification performance events
Event Name Description
AUPJCHIGH Count of positive AU pointer justification
AUPJCLOW Count of negative AU pointer justification
AUPJCNEW Count of new AU pointer justifications
Table C-31 Regenerator section error performance events
Event Name Description
RSBBE Regenerator section block of backgrounderror
RSES Regenerator section errored second
RSSES Regenerator section severely errored second
RSUAS Regenerator section unavailable second
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
632
![Page 652: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/652.jpg)
Event Name Description
RSCSES Regenerator section consecutive severelyerrored second
RSOFS Regenerator section out-of-frame second
RSOOF Regenerator section out of frame
Table C-32 Multiplex section error performance events
Event Name Description
MSBBE Multiplex section block of background error
MSES Multiplex section errored second
MSSES Multiplex section severely errored second
MSCSES Multiplex section consecutive severelyerrored second
MSUAS Multiplex section unavailable second
MSFEBBE Multiplex section far end block ofbackground error
MSFEES Multiplex section far end errored second
MSFESES Multiplex section far end severely erroredsecond
MSFECSES Multiplex section far end consecutiveseverely errored second
MSFEUAS Multiplex section far end unavailable second
Table C-33 Higher order path error performance events
Event Name Description
HPBBE Higher order path background errored block
HPES Higher order path errored second
HPSES Higher order path severely errored second
HPCSES Higher order path consecutive severelyerrored second
HPUAS Higher order path unavailable second
HPFEBBE Higher order path far end background erroredblock
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
633
![Page 653: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/653.jpg)
Event Name Description
HPFEES Higher order path far end errored second
HPFESES Higher order path far end severely erroredsecond
HPFECSES Higher order path far end consecutiveseverely errored second
HPFEUAS Higher order path far end unavailable second
PDH Performance Events
Table C-34 Lower order path error performance events
Event Name Description
LPBBE Lower order path block of background error
LPES Lower order path errored second
LPSES Lower order path severely errored second
LPCSES Lower order path continuous severe bit errorsecond
LPUAS Lower order path unavailable second
LPFEBBE Lower order path far end block of backgrounderror
LPFEES Lower order path far end errored second
LPFESES Lower order path far end severely erroredsecond
LPFECSES Lower order path far end consecutiveseverely errored second
LPFEUAS Lower order far end unavailable second
Radio Performance Events
Table C-35 FEC performance events
Event Name Description
FEC_BEF_COR_ER FEC bit error rate before correction
FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT FEC uncorrected block count
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
634
![Page 654: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/654.jpg)
Table C-36 Radio link error performance events
Event Name Description
IF_BBE Radio link background block errors
IF_ES Radio link errored seconds
IF_SES Radio link severely errored seconds
IF_UAS Radio link unavailable second
IF_CSES Radio link consecutive severely erroredseconds
Table C-37 AM performance events
Event Name Description
QPSKWS Working time of the QPSK mode
QAMWS16 Working time of the 16QAM mode
QAMWS32 Working time of the 32QAM mode
QAMWS64 Working time of the 64QAM mode
QAMWS128 Working time of the 128QAM mode
QAMWS256 Working time of the 256QAM mode
FB_AMDCNT Count of the downshift of the AM scheme
FB_AMUCNT Count of the upshift of the AM scheme
Table C-38 IF port error performance events
Event Name Description
IF_SNR_MAX Maximum signal to noise ratio
IF_SNR_MIN Minimum signal to noise ratio
IF_SNR_AVG Average signal to noise ratio
Other Performance Events
Table C-39 Board temperature performance events
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMAX Maximum value of board temperature
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
635
![Page 655: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/655.jpg)
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMIN Minimum value of board temperature
BDTEMPCUR Current value of board temperature
C.2.4 IFX2/ISX2The IFX2/ISX2 board reports three types of performance events: PDH performance events,radio performance events, and board temperature performance events.
SDH Performance Events (Only reported by ISX2)
Table C-40 Pointer justification performance events
Event Name Description
AUPJCHIGH Count of positive AU pointer justification
AUPJCLOW Count of negative AU pointer justification
AUPJCNEW Count of new AU pointer justifications
Table C-41 Regenerator section error performance events
Event Name Description
RSBBE Regenerator section block of backgrounderror
RSES Regenerator section errored second
RSSES Regenerator section severely errored second
RSUAS Regenerator section unavailable second
RSCSES Regenerator section consecutive severelyerrored second
RSOFS Regenerator section out-of-frame second
RSOOF Regenerator section out of frame
Table C-42 Multiplex section error performance events
Event Name Description
MSBBE Multiplex section block of background error
MSES Multiplex section errored second
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
636
![Page 656: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/656.jpg)
Event Name Description
MSSES Multiplex section severely errored second
MSCSES Multiplex section consecutive severelyerrored second
MSUAS Multiplex section unavailable second
MSFEBBE Multiplex section far end block ofbackground error
MSFEES Multiplex section far end errored second
MSFESES Multiplex section far end severely erroredsecond
MSFECSES Multiplex section far end consecutiveseverely errored second
MSFEUAS Multiplex section far end unavailable second
Table C-43 Higher order path error performance events
Event Name Description
HPBBE Higher order path background errored block
HPES Higher order path errored second
HPSES Higher order path severely errored second
HPCSES Higher order path consecutive severelyerrored second
HPUAS Higher order path unavailable second
HPFEBBE Higher order path far end background erroredblock
HPFEES Higher order path far end errored second
HPFESES Higher order path far end severely erroredsecond
HPFECSES Higher order path far end consecutiveseverely errored second
HPFEUAS Higher order path far end unavailable second
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
637
![Page 657: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/657.jpg)
PDH Performance Events
Table C-44 Lower order path error performance events
Event Name Description
LPBBE Lower order path block of background error
LPES Lower order path errored second
LPSES Lower order path severely errored second
LPCSES Lower order path continuous severe bit errorsecond
LPUAS Lower order path unavailable second
LPFEBBE Lower order path far end block of backgrounderror
LPFEES Lower order path far end errored second
LPFESES Lower order path far end severely erroredsecond
LPFECSES Lower order path far end consecutiveseverely errored second
LPFEUAS Lower order far end unavailable second
Radio Performance Events
Table C-45 FEC performance events
Event Name Description
FEC_BEF_COR_ER FEC bit error rate before correction
FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT FEC uncorrected block count
Table C-46 Radio link error performance events
Event Name Description
IF_BBE Radio link background block errors
IF_ES Radio link errored seconds
IF_SES Radio link severely errored seconds
IF_UAS Radio link unavailable second
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
638
![Page 658: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/658.jpg)
Event Name Description
IF_CSES Radio link consecutive severely erroredseconds
Table C-47 AM performance events
Event Name Description
QPSKWS Working time of the QPSK mode
QAMWS16 Working time of the 16QAM mode
QAMWS32 Working time of the 32QAM mode
QAMWS64 Working time of the 64QAM mode
QAMWS128 Working time of the 128QAM mode
QAMWS256 Working time of the 256QAM mode
FB_AMDCNT Count of the downshift of the AM scheme
FB_AMUCNT Count of the upshift of the AM scheme
Table C-48 IF port error performance events
Event Name Description
IF_SNR_MAX Maximum signal to noise ratio
IF_SNR_MIN Minimum signal to noise ratio
IF_SNR_AVG Average signal to noise ratio
Table C-49 XPIC performance events
Event Name Description
XPIC_XPD_VALUE XPIC XPD value
Other Performance Events
Table C-50 Board temperature performance events
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMAX Maximum value of board temperature
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
639
![Page 659: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/659.jpg)
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMIN Minimum value of board temperature
BDTEMPCUR Current value of board temperature
C.2.5 SL4DThe SL4D board reports SDH performance events and optical power performance events.
SDH Performance Events
Table C-51 Pointer Justification Performance Events
Event Name Description
AUPJCHIGH Indicates the count of positive AU pointerjustifications.
AUPJCLOW Indicates the count of negative AU pointerjustifications.
AUPJCNEW Indicates the count of new AU pointerjustifications.
Table C-52 Regenerator Section Error Performance Events
Event Name Description
RSBBE Indicates the regenerator section backgroundblock error.
RSES Indicates the regenerator section erroredsecond.
RSSES Indicates the regenerator section severelyerrored second.
RSUAS Indicates the regenerator section unavailablesecond.
RSCSES Indicates the regenerator section consecutiveseverely errored second.
RSOFS Indicates the regenerator section out-of-frame second.
RSOOF Indicates the count of regenerator section out-of-frame events.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
640
![Page 660: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/660.jpg)
Table C-53 Multiplex Section Error Performance Events
Event Name Description
MSBBE Indicates the multiplex section backgroundblock error.
MSES Indicates the multiplex section erroredsecond.
MSSES Indicates the multiplex section severelyerrored second.
MSCSES Indicates the multiplex section consecutiveseverely errored second.
MSUAS Indicates the multiplex section unavailablesecond.
MSFEBBE Indicates the multiplex section far endbackground block error.
MSFEES Indicates the multiplex section far end erroredsecond.
MSFESES Indicates the multiplex section far endseverely errored second.
MSFECSES Indicates the multiplex section far endconsecutive severely errored second.
MSFEUAS Indicates the multiplex section far endunavailable second.
Table C-54 Higher Order Path Error Performance Events
Event Name Description
HPBBE Indicates the higher order path backgroundblock error.
HPES Indicates the higher order path erroredsecond.
HPSES Indicates the higher order path severelyerrored second.
HPCSES Indicates the higher order path consecutiveseverely errored second.
HPUAS Indicates the higher order path unavailablesecond.
HPFEBBE Indicates the higher order path far endbackground block error.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
641
![Page 661: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/661.jpg)
Event Name Description
HPFEES Indicates the higher order path far end erroredsecond.
HPFESES Indicates the higher order path far endseverely errored second.
HPFECSES Indicates the higher order path far endconsecutive severely errored second.
HPFEUAS Indicates the higher order path far endunavailable second.
Other Performance Events
Table C-55 Optical Power Performance Events
Event Name Description
TPLMAX Indicates the maximum transmit opticalpower at an optical interface.
TPLMIN Indicates the minimum transmit opticalpower at an optical interface.
TPLCUR Indicates the current transmit power at anoptical interface.
RPLMAX Indicates the maximum receive optical powerat an optical interface.
RPLMIN Indicates the minimum receive optical powerat an optical interface.
RPLCUR Indicates the current receive power at anoptical interface.
C.2.6 SL1D/SL1DAThe SL1D/SL1DA board reports three types of performance events: SDH performance events,and optical power performance events.
SDH Performance Events
Table C-56 Pointer justification performance events
Event Name Description
AUPJCHIGH Count of positive AU pointer justification
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
642
![Page 662: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/662.jpg)
Event Name Description
AUPJCLOW Count of negative AU pointer justification
AUPJCNEW Count of new AU pointer justifications
Table C-57 Regenerator section error performance events
Event Name Description
RSBBE Regenerator section block of backgrounderror
RSES Regenerator section errored second
RSSES Regenerator section severely errored second
RSUAS Regenerator section unavailable second
RSCSES Regenerator section consecutive severelyerrored second
RSOFS Regenerator section out-of-frame second
RSOOF Regenerator section out of frame
Table C-58 Multiplex section error performance events
Event Name Description
MSBBE Multiplex section block of background error
MSES Multiplex section errored second
MSSES Multiplex section severely errored second
MSCSES Multiplex section consecutive severelyerrored second
MSUAS Multiplex section unavailable second
MSFEBBE Multiplex section far end block ofbackground error
MSFEES Multiplex section far end errored second
MSFESES Multiplex section far end severely erroredsecond
MSFECSES Multiplex section far end consecutiveseverely errored second
MSFEUAS Multiplex section far end unavailable second
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
643
![Page 663: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/663.jpg)
Table C-59 Higher order path error performance events
Event Name Description
HPBBE Higher order path background errored block
HPES Higher order path errored second
HPSES Higher order path severely errored second
HPCSES Higher order path consecutive severelyerrored second
HPUAS Higher order path unavailable second
HPFEBBE Higher order path far end background erroredblock
HPFEES Higher order path far end errored second
HPFESES Higher order path far end severely erroredsecond
HPFECSES Higher order path far end consecutiveseverely errored second
HPFEUAS Higher order path far end unavailable second
Other Performance Events
Table C-60 Optical power performance events
Event Name Description
TPLMAX Maximum value of transmit optical power
TPLMIN Minimum value of transmit optical power
TPLCUR Current value of transmit optical power
RPLMAX Maximum value of receive optical power
RPLMIN Minimum value of receive optical power
RPLCUR Current value of receive optical power
C.2.7 EM6TThe EM6T board reports only the board temperature performance events.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
644
![Page 664: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/664.jpg)
Table C-61 Board temperature performance events
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMAX Maximum value of board temperature
BDTEMPMIN Minimum value of board temperature
BDTEMPCUR Current value of board temperature
C.2.8 EM6TAThe EM6TA board reports only the board temperature performance events.
Table C-62 Board temperature performance events
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMAX Maximum value of board temperature
BDTEMPMIN Minimum value of board temperature
BDTEMPCUR Current value of board temperature
C.2.9 EM6FThe EM6F board reports optical power performance events and board temperature performanceevents.
Table C-63 Optical power performance events
Event Name Description
TPLMAX Maximum value of transmit optical power
TPLMIN Minimum value of transmit optical power
TPLCUR Current value of transmit optical power
RPLMAX Maximum value of receive optical power
RPLMIN Minimum value of receive optical power
RPLCUR Current value of receive optical power
Table C-64 Board temperature performance events
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMAX Maximum value of board temperature
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
645
![Page 665: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/665.jpg)
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMIN Minimum value of board temperature
BDTEMPCUR Current value of board temperature
C.2.10 EM6FAThe EM6FA board reports optical power performance events and board temperatureperformance events.
Table C-65 Optical power performance events
Event Name Description
TPLMAX Maximum value of transmit optical power
TPLMIN Minimum value of transmit optical power
TPLCUR Current value of transmit optical power
RPLMAX Maximum value of receive optical power
RPLMIN Minimum value of receive optical power
RPLCUR Current value of receive optical power
Table C-66 Board temperature performance events
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMAX Maximum value of board temperature
BDTEMPMIN Minimum value of board temperature
BDTEMPCUR Current value of board temperature
C.2.11 EFP8The EFP8 board reports the temperature and PDH performance events.
Table C-67 Board temperature performance events
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMAX Maximum value of board temperature
BDTEMPMIN Minimum value of board temperature
BDTEMPCUR Current value of board temperature
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
646
![Page 666: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/666.jpg)
Table C-68 Lower order path error performance events
Event Name Description
LPBBE Lower order path block of background error
LPES Lower order path errored second
LPSES Lower order path severely errored second
LPCSES Lower order path continuous severe bit errorsecond
LPUAS Lower order path unavailable second
LPFEBBE Lower order path far end block of backgrounderror
LPFEES Lower order path far end errored second
LPFESES Lower order path far end severely erroredsecond
LPFECSES Lower order path far end consecutiveseverely errored second
LPFEUAS Lower order far end unavailable second
C.2.12 EMS6The EMS6 board reports the SDH performance events, board temperature performance events,laser temperature performance events, and optical power performance events.
Table C-69 Lower order path error performance events
Event Name Description
LPBBE Lower order path block of background error
LPES Lower order path errored second
LPSES Lower order path severely errored second
LPCSES Lower order path continuous severe bit errorsecond
LPUAS Lower order path unavailable second
LPFEBBE Lower order path far end block of backgrounderror
LPFEES Lower order path far end errored second
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
647
![Page 667: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/667.jpg)
Event Name Description
LPFESES Lower order path far end severely erroredsecond
LPFECSES Lower order path far end consecutiveseverely errored second
Table C-70 Higher order path error performance events
Event Name Description
HPBBE Higher order path background errored block
HPES Higher order path errored second
HPSES Higher order path severely errored second
HPCSES Higher order path consecutive severelyerrored second
HPUAS Higher order path unavailable second
HPFEBBE Higher order path far end background erroredblock
HPFEES Higher order path far end errored second
HPFESES Higher order path far end severely erroredsecond
HPFECSES Higher order path far end consecutiveseverely errored second
Table C-71 Board temperature performance events
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMAX Maximum value of board temperature
BDTEMPMIN Minimum value of board temperature
BDTEMPCUR Current value of board temperature
Table C-72 Laser temperature performance events
Event Name Description
OSPITMPMAX Maximum temperature of a laser core
OSPITMPMIN Minimum temperature of a laser core
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
648
![Page 668: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/668.jpg)
Event Name Description
OSPITMPCUR Current temperature of a laser core
Table C-73 Optical power performance events
Event Name Description
TPLMAX Maximum value of transmit optical power
TPLMIN Minimum value of transmit optical power
TPLCUR Current value of transmit optical power
RPLMAX Maximum value of receive optical power
RPLMIN Minimum value of receive optical power
RPLCUR Current value of receive optical power
C.2.13 SP3S/SP3DThe SP3S/SP3D board reports only the PDH performance events.
Table C-74 Pointer justification performance events
Event Name Description
TUPJCHIGH Count of positive TU pointer justifications
TUPJCLOW Count of negative TU pointer justifications
TUPJCNEW Count of new TU pointer justifications
Table C-75 Lower order path error performance events
Event Name Description
LPBBE Lower order path block of background error
LPES Lower order path errored second
LPSES Lower order path severely errored second
LPCSES Lower order path continuous severe bit errorsecond
LPUAS Lower order path unavailable second
LPFEBBE Lower order path far end block of backgrounderror
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
649
![Page 669: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/669.jpg)
Event Name Description
LPFEES Lower order path far end errored second
LPFESES Lower order path far end severely erroredsecond
LPFECSES Lower order path far end consecutiveseverely errored second
LPFEUAS Lower order far end unavailable second
Table C-76 E1 Error Performance Events
Event Name Description
E1_BBE Indicates the E1 background block error.
E1_ES Indicates the E1 errored second.
E1_SES Indicates the E1 severely errored second.
E1_CSES Indicates the E1 consecutive severely erroredsecond.
E1_UAS Indicates the E1 unavailable second.
C.2.14 EG2DThe EG2D board reports only the optical power performance events.
Table C-77 Optical power performance events
Event Name Description
TPLMAX Maximum value of transmit optical power
TPLMIN Minimum value of transmit optical power
TPLCUR Current value of transmit optical power
RPLMAX Maximum value of receive optical power
RPLMIN Minimum value of receive optical power
RPLCUR Current value of receive optical power
C.2.15 ML1/MD1The ML1/MD1 board reports E1 performance events and board temperature performance events.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
650
![Page 670: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/670.jpg)
E1 Performance Events
Table C-78 E1 Performance Event List
Event Name Description
E1_LCV_SDH Indicates the count of E1 line side codeviolations.
E1_LLOSS_SDH Indicates the E1 line side loss-of-signalsecond.
E1_LES_SDH Indicates the E1 line side code violationerrored second.
E1_LSES_SDH Indicates the E1 line side code violationseverely errored second.
Other Performance Events
Table C-79 Board Temperature Performance Events
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMAX Indicates the maximum boardtemperature.
BDTEMPMIN Indicates the minimum boardtemperature.
BDTEMPCUR Indicates the current board temperature.
C.2.16 ODUThe ODU reports radio performance events and board temperature performance events.
Table C-80 Radio power performance events
Event Name Description
TSL_MAX Maximum value of radio transmit signal level
TSL_MIN Minimum value of radio transmit signal level
TSL_CUR Current value of radio transmit signal level
TSL_AVG Average value of radio transmit signal level
RSL_MAX Maximum value of radio receive signal level
RSL_MIN Minimum value of radio receive signal level
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
651
![Page 671: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/671.jpg)
Event Name Description
RSL_CUR Current value of radio receive signal level
RSL_AVG Average value of radio receive signal level
TLHTT The duration when the ODU at the local endhas a transit power higher than the upperthreshold
TLLTT The duration when the ODU at the local endhas a transit power higher than the lowerthreshold
RLHTT The duration when the ODU at the local endhas a receive power lower than the upperthreshold
RLLTT The duration when the ODU at the local endhas a receive power lower than the lowerthreshold
Table C-81 ATPC performance events
Event Name Description
ATPC_P_ADJUST Positive ATPC adjustment
ATPC_N_ADJUST Negative ATPC adjustment
Table C-82 Board Temperature Performance Events
Event Name Description
BDTEMPMAX Indicates the maximum boardtemperature.
BDTEMPMIN Indicates the minimum boardtemperature.
BDTEMPCUR Indicates the current board temperature.
C.3 Performance Events and Handling ProceduresBased on the type of a performance event, this chapter describes all the performance events onthe OptiX RTN 980 and how to handle these performance events.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
652
![Page 672: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/672.jpg)
C.3.1 AUPJCHIGH, AUPJCLOW, and AUPJCNEW
Descriptionl AUPJCHIGH indicates the count of positive AU pointer justifications.
l AUPJCLOW indicates the count of negative AU pointer justifications.
l AUPJCNEW indicates the count of new AU pointer justifications.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell PPJE (AUPJCHIGH)NPJE (AUPJCLOW)NDF (AUPJCNEW)
Unit Block
Impact on System
Less than six AUPJCHIGH and AUPJCLOW events do not affect the system. If the pointer isjustified for many times, or the AUPJCNEW event occurs, bit errors may occur in the service.
Related Alarms
When the AUPJCHIGH, AUPJCLOW, or AUPJCNEW performance event crosses the presetthreshold, the MSAD_CROSSTR alarm is reported.
Performance Event Default 15-MinuteThreshold
Default 24-HourThreshold
AUPJCHIGH 1500 30000
AUPJCLOW 1500 30000
AUPJCNEW 1500 30000
Possible Causes
The NE clock is out-of-synchronization.
Procedure
Step 1 See 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications for handling.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
653
![Page 673: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/673.jpg)
C.3.2 TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW, and TUPJCNEW
Descriptionl TUPJCHIGH indicates the count of positive TU pointer justifications.
l TUPJCLOW indicates the count of negative TU pointer justifications.
l TUPJCNEW indicates the count of new TU pointer justifications.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell TUPPJE (TUPJCHIGH)TUNPJE (TUPJCLOW)TUNDF (TUPJCNEW)
Unit Block
Impact on System
Less than six TUPJCHIGH and TUPJCLOW events on each port do not affect the system. If thepointer is justified for many times, or the TUPJCNEW event occurs, bit errors may occur in theservice.
Related Alarms
When the TUPJCHIGH, TUPJCLOW, or TUPJCNEW performance event crosses the presetthreshold, the HPAD_CROSSTR alarm is reported.
Performance Event Default 15-MinuteThreshold
Default 24-HourThreshold
TUPJCHIGH 1500 30000
TUPJCLOW 1500 30000
TUPJCNEW 1500 30000
Possible Causes
The NE clock is out-of-synchronization.
Procedure
Step 1 See 5.5 Troubleshooting Pointer Justifications for handling.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
654
![Page 674: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/674.jpg)
C.3.3 RSBBE, RSES, RSSES, RSCSES, and RSUAS
Descriptionl RSBBE indicates the regenerator section background block error.
Background block error (BBE) refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks inthe unavailable and severely errored seconds.
l RSES indicates the regenerator section errored second.
Errored second (ES) refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected.
l RSSES indicates the regenerator section severely errored second.
Severely errored second (SES) refers to a second in which 30% or more than 30% erroredblocks exist or at least one severely disturbed period (SDP) exists. SDP is the period inwhich the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a period of less than four consecutive blocksor 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to or higher than 10-2 or the signal is lost.
l RSCSES indicates the regenerator section consecutive severely errored second.
Consecutive severely errored second (CSES) refers to a second in which the SES occurscontinuously for less than 10 seconds.
l RSUAS indicates the regenerator section unavailable second.
The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included.When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from theeleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.
NOTE
When the IF board works in PDH mode, these performance events may also be reported. These events aredetected through the self-defined overhead byte B1 in the PDH radio frame.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell B1CNT
Unit Block (RSBBE)Second (RSES, RSSES, RSCSES, andRSUAS)
Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service,and 10-6 for the data service).
Related Alarms
When the RSBBE, RSES, RSSES, RSCSES, or RSUAS performance event crosses the presetthreshold, the RS_CROSSTR alarm is reported.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
655
![Page 675: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/675.jpg)
Performance Event Default 15-MinuteThreshold
Default 24-HourThreshold
RSBBE 1500 15000
RSES 50 100
RSSES 20 50
RSUAS 20 50
RSCSES 4 (number of consecutive SESs)
Possible Causes
The system detects the regenerator section bit errors through the B1 byte.
Procedure
Step 1 See 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services for handling.
Step 2 When an RSUAS performance event is reported, check whether cross-connections areconfigured and whether fibers are properly connected at service ports. If cross-connections arenot configured, configure cross-connections again according to planning information; if fibersare incorrectly connected, connect the fibers again according to planning information.
----End
C.3.4 RSOOF and RSOFS
Descriptionl RSOOF indicates the regenerator section out of frame.
The out-of-frame (OOF) block refers to a data block in which incorrect A1 and A2 bytesare detected.
l RSOFS indicates the regenerator section out-of-frame second.
The out-of-frame second (OFS) refers to a second in which one or more OOF blocks aredetected.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell OOF
Unit Block (RSOOF)Second (RSOFS)
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
656
![Page 676: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/676.jpg)
Impact on System
The system discards OOF data blocks. Therefore, an RSOOF event is equivalent to a big error(if one RSOOF exists in a second, the BER is not less than 1.25 x 10-5).
Related Alarms
If RSOOF is received in five consecutive frames, the equipment changes to the OOF state. Ifthe OOF state lasts for 3 ms, the R_LOF alarm is reported and all the services are interrupted.
Possible Causes
The system detects incorrect A1 and A2 bytes.
Procedure
Step 1 If the R_LOF alarm, as well as the performance event, is reported, eliminate the errors accordingto the alarm. Otherwise, see 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services for handling.
----End
C.3.5 MSBBE, MSES, MSSES, MSCSES, and MSUAS
Descriptionl MSBBE indicates the multiplex section background block error.
BBE refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks in the unavailable andseverely errored seconds.
l MSES indicates the multiplex section errored second.
ES refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected.
l MSSES indicates the multiplex section severely errored second.
SES refers to a second in which 15% or more than 15% errored blocks exist or at least oneSDP exists. SDP is the period in which the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a periodof less than four consecutive blocks or 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to orhigher than 10-2 or the signal is lost.
l MSCSES indicates the multiplex section consecutive severely errored second.
CSES refers to a second in which the SES occurs continuously for less than 10 seconds.
l MSUAS indicates the multiplex section unavailable second.
The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included.When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from theeleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell B2CNT
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
657
![Page 677: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/677.jpg)
Attribute Description
Unit Block (MSBBE)Second (MSES, MSSES, MSCSES, andMSUAS)
Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service,and 10-6 for the data service).
Related Alarms
When the MSBBE, MSES, MSSES, MSCSES, or MSUAS performance event crosses the presetthreshold, the MS_CROSSTR alarm is reported.
Performance Event Default 15-MinuteThreshold
Default 24-HourThreshold
MSBBE 1500 15000
MSES 50 100
MSES 20 50
MSUAS 20 50
MSCSES 4 (number of consecutive SESs)
Possible Causes
The system detects multiplex section bit errors through the B2 byte.
Procedure
Step 1 See 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services for handling.
Step 2 When an MSUAS performance event is reported, check whether cross-connections areconfigured and whether fibers are properly connected at service ports. If cross-connections arenot configured, configure cross-connections again according to planning information; if fibersare incorrectly connected, connect the fibers again according to planning information.
----End
C.3.6 MSFEBBE, MSFEES, MSFESES, MSFECSES, and MSFEUAS
Descriptionl MSFEBBE indicates the multiplex section far end background block error.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
658
![Page 678: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/678.jpg)
Far end background block error (FEBBE) indicates that the BBE occurs at the oppositeend.
l MSFEES indicates the multiplex section far end errored second.Far end errored second (FEES) indicates that the ES occurs at the opposite end.
l MSFESES indicates the multiplex section far end severely errored second.Far end severely errored second (FESES) indicates that the SES occurs at the opposite end.
l MSFECSES indicates the multiplex section far end consecutive severely errored second.Far end consecutive severely errored second (FECSES) indicates that the CSES occurs atthe opposite end.
l MSFEUAS indicates the multiplex section far end unavailable second.Far end unavailable second (FEUAS) indicates that the UAS occurs at the opposite end.
AttributeAttribute Description
Performance event cell LFEBE
Unit Block (MSFEBBE)Second (MSFEES, MSFESES, MSFECSES,and MSFEUAS)
Impact on the System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service,and 10-6 for the data service).
Related AlarmsThe MS_REI alarm is reported at the local end.
Possible CausesThe system detects multiplex section far end bit errors through the M1 byte.
Procedure
Step 1 Clear the corresponding performance event at the opposite end.
----End
C.3.7 HPBBE, HPES, HPSES, HPCSES, and HPUAS
Descriptionl HPBBE indicates the higher order path background block error.
BBE refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks in the unavailable andseverely errored seconds.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
659
![Page 679: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/679.jpg)
l HPES indicates the higher order path errored second.
ES refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected.
l HPSES indicates the higher order path severely errored second.
SES refers to a second in which 30% or more than 30% errored blocks exist or at least oneSDP exists. SDP is the period in which the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a periodof less than four consecutive blocks or 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to orhigher than 10-2 or the signal is lost.
l HPCSES indicates the higher order path consecutive severely errored second.
CSES refers to a second in which the SES occurs continuously for less than 10 seconds.
l HPUAS indicates the higher order path unavailable second.
The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included.When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from theeleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell B3CNT
Unit Block (HPBBE)Second (HPES, HPSES, HPCSES, andHPUAS)
Impact on SystemExcessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service,and 10-6 for the data service).
Related Alarms
When the HPBBE, HPES, HPSES, HPCSES, or HPUAS performance event crosses the presetthreshold, the HP_CROSSTR alarm is reported.
Performance Event Default 15-MinuteThreshold
Default 24-HourThreshold
HPBBE 1500 15000
HPES 50 100
HPSES 20 50
HPUAS 20 50
HPCSES 4 (number of consecutive SESs)
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
660
![Page 680: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/680.jpg)
Possible CausesThe system detects higher order path bit errors through the B3 byte.
Procedure
Step 1 See 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services for handling.
----End
C.3.8 HPFEBBE, HPFEES, HPFESES, HPFECSES, and HPFEUAS
Descriptionl HPFEBBE indicates the higher order path far end background block error.
Far end background block error (FEBBE) indicates that the BBE occurs at the oppositeend.
l HPFEES indicates the higher order path far end errored second.FEES indicates that the ES occurs at the opposite end.
l HPFESES indicates the higher order path far end severely errored second.FESES indicates that the SES occurs at the opposite end.
l HPFECSES indicates the higher order path far end consecutive severely errored second.FECSES indicates that the CSES occurs at the opposite end.
l HPFEUAS indicates the higher order path far end unavailable second.FEUAS indicates that the UAS occurs at the opposite end.
AttributeAttribute Description
Performance event cell PFEBE
Unit Block (HPFEBBE)Second (HPFEES, HPFESES, HPFECSES,and HPFEUAS)
Impact on SystemExcessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service,and 10-6 for the data service).
Related AlarmsThe HP_REI alarm is reported at the local end.
Possible CausesThe system detects the higher order path far end bit errors through bits 1 to 4 in the G1 byte.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
661
![Page 681: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/681.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Clear the corresponding performance event at the opposite end.
----End
C.3.9 IF_BBE, IF_ES, IF_SES, IF_CSES, and IF_UAS
Descriptionl IF_BBE indicates the radio link background block error.
BBE refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks in the unavailable andseverely errored seconds.
l IF_ES indicates the radio link errored second.ES refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected.
l IF_SES indicates the radio link severely errored second.SES refers to a second in which 30% or more than 30% errored blocks exist or at least oneSDP exists. SDP is the period in which the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a periodof less than four consecutive blocks or 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to orhigher than 10-2 or the signal is lost.
l IF_CSES indicates the radio link consecutively severely errored second.CSES refers to a second in which the SES occurs continuously for less than 10 seconds.
l IF_UAS indicates the radio link unavailable second.The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included.When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from theeleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.
AttributeAttribute Description
Performance event cell IF_BIP8
Unit -
Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service,and 10-6 for the data service).
Related AlarmsThe MW_BER_SD or MW_BER_EXC alarm is reported when the BER crosses the specificthreshold.
Possible CausesThe system detects bit errors on the radio link through the bit error detection overheads in a radioframe.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
662
![Page 682: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/682.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 See 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services for handling.
----End
C.3.10 LPBBE, LPES, LPSES, LPCSES, and LPUAS
Descriptionl LPBBE indicates the lower order path background block error.
BBE refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks in the unavailable andseverely errored seconds.
l LPES indicates the lower order path errored second.
ES refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected.
l LPSES indicates the lower order path severely errored second.
SES refers to a second in which 30% or more than 30% errored blocks exist or at least oneSDP exists. SDP is the period in which the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a periodof less than four consecutive blocks or 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to orhigher than 10-2 or the signal is lost.
l LPCSES indicates the lower order path consecutive severely errored second.
CSES refers to a second in which the SES occurs continuously for less than 10 seconds.
l LPUAS indicates the lower order path unavailable second.
The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included.When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from theeleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell LPBIP2CNT
Unit Block (LPBBE)Second (LPES, LPSES, LPCSES, andLPUAS)
Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service,and 10-6 for the data service).
Related Alarms
When the LPBBE, LPES, LPSES, LPCSES, or LPUAS performance event crosses the presetthreshold, the LP_CROSSTR alarm is reported.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
663
![Page 683: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/683.jpg)
Performance Event Default 15-MinuteThreshold
Default 24-HourThreshold
LPBBE 1500 15000
LPES 50 100
LPSES 20 50
LPUAS 20 50
LPCSES 4 (number of consecutive SESs)
Possible CausesThe system detects lower order path bit errors through the BIP2 in the V5 byte (E1 interfaceboard or Hybrid IF board).
Procedure
Step 1 See 5.4 Troubleshooting Bit Errors in TDM Services for handling.
----End
C.3.11 LPFEBBE, LPFEES, LPFESES, LPFECSES, and LPFEUAS
Descriptionl LPFEBBE indicates the lower order path far end background block error.
FEBBE indicates that the BBE occurs at the opposite end.l LPFEES indicates the lower order path far end errored second.
FEES indicates that the ES occurs at the opposite end.l LPFESES indicates the lower order path far end severely errored second.
FESES indicates that the SES occurs at the opposite end.l LPFECSES indicates the lower order path far end consecutive severely errored second.
FECSES indicates that the CSES occurs at the opposite end.l LPFEUAS indicates the lower order path far end unavailable second.
FEUAS indicates that the UAS occurs at the opposite end.
AttributeAttribute Description
Performance event cell LPFEBE
Unit Block (LPFEBBE)Second (LPFEES, LPFESES, LPFECSES,and LPFEUAS)
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
664
![Page 684: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/684.jpg)
Impact on SystemExcessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than 10-3 for the voice service,and 10-6 for the data service).
Related AlarmsThe LP_REI alarm is reported at the local end.
Possible CausesThe system detects the lower order path far end bit errors through bit 3 in the V5 byte.
ProcedureStep 1 Clear the corresponding performance event at the opposite end.
----End
C.3.12 E1_LCV_SDH, E1_LLOSS_SDH, E1_LES_SDH, andE1_LSES_SDH
Descriptionl The E1_LCV_SDH is a performance event indicating the E1 line side code violation count.l The E1_LLOSS_SDH is a performance event indicating the E1 line side loss-of-signal
seconds.l The E1_LES_SDH is a performance event indicating the E1 line side code violation errored
second.ES refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected.
l The E1_LSES_SDH is a performance event indicating the E1 line side code violationseverely errored second.An SES refers to a certain second in which 30% or more errored blocks are detected or atleast one serious disturbance period (SDP) exists. The SDP refers to a period of at leastfour consecutive blocks or 1 ms (taking the longer one) in which the BER of all theconsecutive blocks is equal to or higher than 10-2 or the signal is lost.
AttributeAttribute Description
Performance event cell LCV_BPVCNT
Unit NoneSecond
Impact on the SystemIf bit errors occur in the services, you need to find out the causes and troubleshoot the problemin a timely manner. Otherwise, the signal transmission quality will be affected.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
665
![Page 685: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/685.jpg)
Related AlarmsNone.
Possible Causesl External causes:
– The fiber performance is degraded, and the fiber has extremely high attenuation.– The fiber connector is dirty or incorrect.– The equipment is improperly grounded.– A strong interference source is present near the equipment.– The working temperature is extremely high or extremely low, and the opposite
equipment cannot tolerate such temperature.l Equipment problems:
– The service code types are incorrect.– The board becomes faulty, or the performance of the board is degraded.
Procedure
Step 1 First eliminate external causes, such as poor grounding, too high operating temperature, too lowor too high the receiving optical power of the line board.
Step 2 Check whether the correct E1 service code is selected. If not, modify the code of the servicesreceived by a board by setting the code type of the board.
----End
C.3.13 TSL_MAX, TSL_MIN, TSL_CUR, and TSL_AVG
Descriptionl TSL_MAX indicates the maximum radio transmitted signal level.l TSL_MIN indicates the minimum radio transmitted signal level.l TSL_CUR indicates the current radio transmitted signal level.l TSL_AVG indicates the average radio transmitted signal level.
AttributeAttribute Description
Performance event cell TSL
Unit 0.1dBm
Impact on SystemWhen the radio transmitted signal level is very low or very high, the radio received signal levelat the opposite site is very low or very high. As a result, bit errors occur and even services areinterrupted.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
666
![Page 686: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/686.jpg)
Related Alarms
If the radio transmitted signal level is not within the range supported by the ODU, theRADIO_TSL_HIGH or RADIO_TSL_LOW alarm is reported.
C.3.14 RSL_MAX, RSL_MIN, RSL_CUR, and RSL_AVG
Descriptionl RSL_MAX indicates the maximum radio received signal level.
l RSL_MIN indicates the minimum radio received signal level.
l RSL_CUR indicates the current radio received signal level.
l RSL_AVG indicates the average radio received signal level.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell RSL
Unit 0.1dBm
Impact on SystemWhen the radio received signal level is very low or very high, bit errors occur and even servicesare interrupted.
Related Alarms
If the radio received signal level crosses the specific threshold, the RADIO_RSL_HIGH orRADIO_RSL_LOW alarm is reported.
C.3.15 FEC_BEF_COR_ER, FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT andFEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT
Descriptionl FEC_BEF_COR_ER indicates the BER before the FEC is performed.
This event indicates the impact of the external environment on the transmission.
l FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT indicates the number of bytes corrected through the FEC.
This event indicates the impact of the FEC.
l FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT indicates the number of frames that cannot be correctedthrough the FEC.
This event indicates the number of blocks that cannot be corrected through the FEC.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
667
![Page 687: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/687.jpg)
AttributeAttribute Description
Performance event cell FECBEFCORER (FEC_BEF_COR_ER)FECCORBYTECNT(FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT)FECUNCORBLOCKCNT(FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT)
Unit None (FEC_BEF_COR_ER)None (FEC_COR_BYTE_CNT)Block (FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT)
Impact on SystemIf the value of FEC_BEF_COR_ER is very high, residual bit errors exist in the service after theFEC is performed.
If the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT is not zero, it can be inferred that bit errors thatcannot be corrected exist on a radio link. Bit errors exist in the service accordingly.
Related AlarmsIf a byte cannot be corrected, the MW_FEC_UNCOR alarm is reported.
C.3.16 QPSKWS, QAMWS16, QAMWS32, QAMWS64,QAMWS128, and QAMWS256
Descriptionl QPSKWS indicates the working duration of the QPSK modulation scheme.l QAMWS16 indicates the working duration of the 16QAM modulation scheme.l QAMWS32 indicates the working duration of the 32QAM modulation scheme.l QAMWS64 indicates the working duration of the 64QAM modulation scheme.l QAMWS128 indicates the working duration of the 128QAM modulation scheme.l QAMWS256 indicates the working duration of the 256QAM modulation scheme.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
668
![Page 688: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/688.jpg)
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell QPSKWSSECOND (QPSKWS)QAMWS16SECOND (16QAMWS)QAMWS32SECOND (32QAMWS)QAMWS64SECOND (64QAMWS)QAMWS128SECOND (128QAMWS)QAMWS256SECOND (256QAMWS)
Unit Second
Impact on System
When the AM function is disabled, the performance event does not affect the system.
When the AM function is enabled, in normal cases, the seconds of the modulation scheme formaximum capacity should account for a larger percentage. In the duration set for good weather,if the seconds of the low-efficiency modulation scheme account for a larger percentage, theperformance of the radio link is abnormal.
Related Alarms
None.
C.3.17 ATPC_P_ADJUST and ATPC_N_ADJUST
Descriptionl ATPC_P_ADJUST indicates the positive ATPC adjustment event.
This performance event indicates that the quality of a communication link declines.Therefore, you must increase the transmit power of the ODU to maintain thecommunication quality.
l ATPC_N_ADJUST indicates the negative ATPC adjustment event.
This performance event indicates that the quality of a communication link becomes wellor the transmit power of the ODU is very large. Therefore, you can decrease the transmitpower of the ODU.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell ATPCPADJUST (ATPC_P_ADJUST) andATPCNADJUST (ATPC_N_ADJUST)
Unit times
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
669
![Page 689: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/689.jpg)
Impact on the SystemThe ATPC adjustment indicates only the stability of a communication link and it does not affectservices. When the value of the performance event is larger, more adjustments are made.
When the factors that affect a communication link, such as sudden change of the weather, donot exist, and when the ATPC adjustment count is very large, the communication link may befaulty. You must check the communication link to prevent it from failure.
Related AlarmsNone.
C.3.18 FB_AMDCNT and FB_AMUCNT
Descriptionl FB_AMDCNT indicates the count of the AM downshifts on a board in the current
performance statistics period.l FB_AMUCNT indicates the count of the AM upshifts on a board in the current performance
statistics period.
AttributeAttribute Description
Performance event cell ACMDCNT(FB_AMDCNT) andACMUCNT(FB_AMUCNT)
Unit times
Impact on Systeml When the value of the performance event is larger, more AM scheme are made.l When the factors that affect a communication link, such as sudden change of the weather,
do not exist, and when the AM scheme count is very large, the communication link maybe faulty. You must check the communication link to prevent it from failure.
Related AlarmsAM_DOWNSHIFT
Possible CausesWhen the AM function is enabled, the transmission modulation scheme that the IF port on theIF board uses varies according to the quality of the link. Accordingly, the system counts theperformance events of the modulation scheme shift. When the low-efficiency modulationscheme is shifted to the high-efficiency modulation scheme, an upshift is recorded and oneFB_AMUCNT event is counted. Similarly, when the high-efficiency modulation scheme isshifted to the low-efficiency modulation scheme, a downshift is recorded and one FB_AMDCNTevent is counted.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
670
![Page 690: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/690.jpg)
C.3.19 RLHTT, RLLTT, TLHTT, TLLTT
Descriptionl The RLHTT indicates the duration when the ODU at the local end has a receive power
lower than the upper threshold.
l The RLLTT indicates the duration when the ODU at the local end has a receive powerlower than the lower threshold.
l The TLHTT indicates the duration when the ODU at the local end has a transit power higherthan the upper threshold.
l The TLLTT indicates the duration when the ODU at the local end has a transit power higherthan the lower threshold.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell RLHTS(RLHTT), RLLTS(RLLTT), TLHTS(TLHTT), and TLLTS(TLLTT)
Unit Second
Impact on System
None.
Related Alarms
None.
C.3.20 TPLMAX, TPLMIN, and TPLCUR
Descriptionl TPLMAX indicates the maximum transmit optical power at an optical interface.
l TPLMIN indicates the minimum transmit optical power at an optical interface.
l TPLCUR indicates the current transmit optical power at an optical interface.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell OPM
Unit 0.1dBm
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
671
![Page 691: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/691.jpg)
Impact on System
In normal cases, the receive optical power should be 3 dB higher than the receiver sensitivity,and 5 dB lower than the overload power.
If the transmit optical power is very low or very high, the receive optical power at the oppositesite is accordingly very low or very high. As a result, bit errors occur and even services areinterrupted.
Related Alarmsl If the transmit optical power at the opposite site is lower than the receiver sensitivity, the
IN_PWR_LOW alarm is reported.
l If the receive optical power at the opposite site is higher than the overload power, theIN_PWR_HIGH alarm is reported.
C.3.21 RPLMAX, RPLMIN, and RPLCUR
Descriptionl RPLMAX indicates the maximum receive optical power at an optical interface.
l RPLMIN indicates the minimum receive optical power at an optical interface.
l RPLCUR indicates the current receive optical power at an optical interface.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell IPM
Unit 0.1dBm
Impact on System
In normal cases, the receive optical power should be 3 dB higher than the receiver sensitivity,and 5 dB lower than the overload power.
If the receive optical power is very low or very high, bit errors occur and even services areinterrupted.
Related Alarmsl If the transmit optical power is lower than the receiver sensitivity, the IN_PWR_LOW
alarm is reported.
l If the receive optical power is higher than the overload power, the IN_PWR_HIGH alarmis reported.
C.3.22 BDTEMPMAX, BDTEMPMIN, and BDTEMPCUR
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
672
![Page 692: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/692.jpg)
Descriptionl BDTEMPMAX indicates the maximum temperature of a board.l BDTEMPMIN indicates the minimum temperature of a board.l BDTEMPCUR indicates the current temperature of a board.
AttributeAttribute Description
Performance event cell XCS_TEMP
Unit 0.1°C
Impact on SystemIf the temperature of a board is very high or very low, the performance of the board declines,and bit errors or other faults occur.
Related AlarmsIf the temperature of a board crosses the specific threshold, the TEMP_ALARM alarm isreported.
C.3.23 XPIC_XPD_VALUE
DescriptionThe XPIC_XPD_VALUE indicates the XPD value after the XPIC function is enabled.
AttributeAttribute Description
Performance event cell XPD
Unit dB
Impact on Systeml When the XPIC function is disabled, the performance event does not affect the system.l When the XPIC function is enabled, a greater XPD value indicates less interference between
H and V polarization directions and better signaling environment; a smaller XPD valueindicates more interference and worse signaling environment. If the XPD value is smallerthan a specific threshold, errors and even interruptions occur on the radio link.
Related AlarmsNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
673
![Page 693: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/693.jpg)
C.3.24 PG_IF_BBE, PG_IF_ES, PG_IF_SES, PG_IF_CSES, andPG_IF_UAS
Descriptionl PG_IF_BBE indicates the protection group background block error.
Background block error (BBE) refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks inthe unavailable and severely errored seconds.
l PG_IF_ES indicates the protection group errored second.Errored second (ES) refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected.
l PG_IF_SES indicates the protection group severely errored second.Severely errored second (SES) refers to a second in which 30% or more than 30% erroredblocks exist or at least one severely disturbed period (SDP) exists. SDP is the period inwhich the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a period of less than four consecutive blocksor 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to or higher than 10-2 or the signal is lost.
l PG_IF_CSES indicates the protection group consecutive severely errored second.Consecutive severely errored second (CSES) refers to a second in which the SES occurscontinuously for less than 10 seconds.
l PG_IF_UAS indicates the protection group unavailable second.The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included.When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from theeleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell IF_BIP8
Unit Block (PG_IF_BBE)Second (PG_IF_ES, PG_IF_SES,PG_IF_CSES, and PG_IF_UAS)
Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than -3 for the voice service,and 10-6 for the data service).
Related Alarms
None.
Performance Event Default 15-MinuteThreshold
Default 24-HourThreshold
PG_IF_BBE 1500 15000
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
674
![Page 694: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/694.jpg)
Performance Event Default 15-MinuteThreshold
Default 24-HourThreshold
PG_IF_ES 50 100
PG_IF_SES 20 50
PG_IF_UAS 20 50
PG_IF_CSES 4 (number of consecutive SESs)
Possible Causes
The system detects the protection group bit errors.
Related Alarms
PG_LINK_FAIL, PG_PRT_DEGRADED
Procedure
Step 1 See PG_LINK_FAIL, PG_PRT_DEGRADED.
----End
C.3.25 E1_BBE, E1_ES, E1_SES, E1_CSES, and E1_UAS
Descriptionl E1_BBE indicates the E1 background block error.
Background block error (BBE) refers to the errored blocks excluding the errored blocks inthe unavailable and severely errored seconds. This performance event can be detected onlywhen the E1 frame format is CRC-4.
l E1_ES indicates the E1 errored second.
Errored second (ES) refers to a second in which one or more errored blocks are detected.
l E1_SES indicates the E1 severely errored second.
Severely errored second (SES) refers to a second in which 30% or more than 30% erroredblocks exist or at least one severely disturbed period (SDP) exists. SDP is the period inwhich the BER of all the consecutive blocks in a period of less than four consecutive blocksor 1 ms (the longer period is applied) is equal to or higher than 10-2 or the signal is lost.
l E1_CSES indicates the E1 consecutive severely errored second.
Consecutive severely errored second (CSES) refers to a second in which the SES occurscontinuously for less than 10 seconds.
l E1_UAS indicates the E1 unavailable second.
The unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs, with the 10 SESs included.When SESs disappear for 10 consecutive seconds, the available time begins from theeleventh second, with the previous 10 seconds included.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
675
![Page 695: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/695.jpg)
AttributeAttribute Description
Performance event cell E1CRC_ERR_CNT
Unit Block (E1_BBE)Second (E1_ES, E1_SES, E1_CSES, andE1_UAS)
Impact on System
Excessive bit errors interrupt the service (the BER should be less than -3 for the voice service,and 10-6 for the data service).
Related AlarmsNone.
Performance Event Default 15-MinuteThreshold
Default 24-HourThreshold
E1_BBE 1500 15000
E1_ES 50 100
E1_SES 20 50
E1_UAS 20 50
E1_CSES 4 (number of consecutive SESs)
Possible CausesThe system detects the E1 bit errors.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the frame format of the local E1 port is the same as that of the opposite port.
Step 2 Check whether the E1 cable is intact. If it is damaged, replace it.
Step 3 Use another E1 port.
Step 4 Troubleshoot the interconnected equipment.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
676
![Page 696: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/696.jpg)
C.3.26 IF_SNR_MAX, IF_SNR_MIN, and IF_SNR_AVG
Descriptionl IF_SNR_MAX indicates the maximum signal to noise ratio.l IF_SNR_MIN indicates the minimum signal to noise ratio.l IF_SNR_AVG indicates the average signal to noise ratio.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell IF_SNR(IF_SNR_MAX, IF_SNR_MIN)IF_SNR_AVG_15M, andIF_SNR_AVG_24H(IF_SNR_AVG)
Unit dB
Impact on System
A greater SNR value indicates a steady radio link; a smaller SNR value indicates a worse radiolink, errors and even interruptions occur on the radio link.
Related Alarms
None.
C.3.27 OSPITMPMAX, OSPITMPMIN, and OSPITMPCUR
Descriptionl OSPITMPMAX indicates the maximum temperature of a laser core.l OSPITMPMIN indicates the minimum temperature of a laser core.l OSPITMPCUR indicates the current temperature of a laser core.
Attribute
Attribute Description
Performance event cell TMP
Unit °C
Impact on SystemIf the temperature of a laser core is very high or very low, the performance of the laser degrades,and bit errors or other faults occur.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
677
![Page 697: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/697.jpg)
Relevant AlarmsNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) C Performance Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
678
![Page 698: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/698.jpg)
D RMON Event Reference
RMON events reflect the running of the Ethernet services. This chapter describes the possibleRMON events on the OptiX RTN 980 and how to handle these events.
D.1 List of RMON Alarm EntriesThe RMON alarm entries refer to the table entries in the RMON alarm group.
D.2 List of RMON Performance Entries on the Packet-PlaneThe RMON performance entries on the packet plane refer to the table entries in the RMONstatistics group or history group.
D.3 List of RMON Performance Entries on the EoS/EoPDH PlaneThe ports that report RMON performance events on the EoPDH plane include PORT1 to PORT9,and VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16 on the EFP8 board. The ports that report RMONperformance events on the EoPDH plane include PORT1 to PORT8, and VCTRUNK1 toVCTRUNK8 on the EMS6 board.
D.4 RMON Events and Handling ProceduresThis chapter describes the RMON events that indicate Ethernet service abnormalities and howto handle these events.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
679
![Page 699: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/699.jpg)
D.1 List of RMON Alarm EntriesThe RMON alarm entries refer to the table entries in the RMON alarm group.
Table D-1 List of RMON alarm entries
AlarmName
Description Source
ETHDROP The number of packet loss eventscrosses the threshold.
ISU2, ISX2, IFU2 and IFX2
RXBBAD The number of bytes in received badpackets crosses the threshold.
ETHFCS The number of frames that have FCScheck errors crosses the threshold.
Table D-2 List of RMON alarm entries
Alarm Name Description Source
ETHDROP The number of packet loss eventscrosses the threshold.
EM6T, EM6F, EG2D, EM6FA,EM6TA
ETHEXCCOL
The number of frames that fail to betransmitted after continuouscollisions crosses the threshold.
ETHLATECOL
The number of collisions that aredetected after a timeslot periodelapses crosses the threshold.
RXBBAD The number of bytes in received badpackets crosses the threshold.
TXDEFFRM The number of frames whosetransmission is delayed crosses thethreshold.
ETHUNDER The number of received undersizedpackets crosses the threshold.
ETHOVER The number of received oversizedpackets crosses the threshold.
ETHFRG The number of received fragmentedpackets crosses the threshold.
ETHJAB The number of received erroredoversized packets crosses thethreshold.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
680
![Page 700: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/700.jpg)
Alarm Name Description Source
ETHFCS The number of frames that have FCScheck errors crosses the threshold.
PORT_RX_BW_UTILIZATION
Indicates the bandwidth utilizationat a port in the receive direction.
ISU2, ISX2, EM6T, EM6F, EG2D,EM6FA, EM6TA, IFU2 and IFX2
PORT_TX_BW_UTILIZATION
Indicates the bandwidth utilizationat a port in the transmit direction.
Table D-3 List of EMS6\EFP8 RMON alarm entries
Alarm Name Description Source
ETHDROP The number of packet loss eventscrosses the threshold.
EMS6, EFP8
RXBBAD The number of bytes in received badpackets crosses the threshold.
ETHUNDER The number of received undersizedpackets crosses the threshold.
ETHOVER The number of received oversizedpackets crosses the threshold.
ETHFRG The number of received fragmentedpackets crosses the threshold.
ETHJAB The number of received erroredoversized packets crosses thethreshold.
ETHFCS The number of frames that have FCScheck errors crosses the threshold.
ETHALI The number of alignment errorframes
D.2 List of RMON Performance Entries on the Packet-PlaneThe RMON performance entries on the packet plane refer to the table entries in the RMONstatistics group or history group.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
681
![Page 701: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/701.jpg)
Table D-4 Packet-Plane RMON Performance Entry List
PerformanceType
Performance Name Description Source
Basicperformance
RXPKTS Indicates the packetsreceived (packets).
EM6T, EM6F, EFP8,IFU2, IFX2, ISU2, ISX2,EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA,EMS6ETHDROP Indicates the packet loss
events (times).
RXOCTETS Indicates the bytesreceived (bytes).
RXMULCAST Indicates the multicastpackets received(packets).
RXBRDCAST Indicates the broadcastpackets received(packets).
ETHOVER Indicates the oversizedpackets received(packets).
EM6T, EM6F, EFP8,EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA,EMS6
ETHJAB Indicates the oversizederror packets received(packets).
ETHUNDER Indicates the undersizedpackets received(packets).
EM6T, EM6F, EG2D,EM6FA, EM6TA
ETHFRG Indicates the fragmentsreceived (packets).
ETHCOL Indicates the collisions(times).
PORT_RX_BW_UTI-LIZATION
Indicates the bandwidthutilization at a port in thereceive direction.
EM6T, EM6F, EG2D,EM6FA, EM6TA, ISU2,ISX2, IFU2, IFX2
PORT_TX_BW_UTI-LIZATION
Indicates the bandwidthutilization at a port in thetransmit direction.
RXPKT64 Packets received (64bytes in length) (packets)
ISU2, ISX2
RXPKT65 Packets received (65-127bytes in length) (packets)
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
682
![Page 702: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/702.jpg)
PerformanceType
Performance Name Description Source
RXPKT128 Packets received(128-255 bytes in length)(packets)
RXPKT256 Packets received(256-511 bytes in length)(packets)
RXPKT512 Packets received(512-1023 bytes inlength) (packets)
RXPKT1024 Packets received(1024-1518 bytes inlength) (packets)
Extendedperformance
ETHFCS Indicates the FCS erroredframes (frames).
EM6T, EM6F, EFP8,IFU2, IFX2, ISU2, ISX2,EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA,EMS6RXBGOOD Indicates the bytes in
received good packets(bytes).
TXBGOOD Indicates the bytes intransmitted good packets(bytes).
RXBBAD Indicates the bytes inreceived bad packets(bytes).
TXUNICAST Indicates the unicastpackets transmitted(packets).
RXUNICAST Indicates the unicastpackets received(packets).
TXMULCAST Indicates the multicastpackets transmitted(packets).
TXBRDCAST Indicates the broadcastpackets transmitted(packets).
RXGOODFULLFRAMESPEED
Indicates the rate of goodfull-frame bytes received(bytes/second).
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
683
![Page 703: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/703.jpg)
PerformanceType
Performance Name Description Source
TXGOODFULLFRAMESPEED
Indicates the rate of goodfull-frame bytestransmitted (bytes/second).
RXFULLBGOOD Indicates the good full-frame bytes received(bytes).
TXFULLBGOOD Indicates the good full-frame bytes transmitted(bytes).
RXPAUSE Indicates the pauseframes received (frames).
EM6T, EM6F, EFP8,EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA,EMS6
TXPAUSE Indicates the pauseframes transmitted(frames).
ETHLATECOL Indicates the latecollisions (times).
EM6T, EM6F, EG2D,EM6FA, EM6TA
ETHEXCCOL Indicates the framesunsuccessfullytransmitted afterconsecutive collisions(frames).
TXDEFFRM Indicates the frames thatare deferred intransmission (frames).
RXPKT1519 Indicates the count ofreceived packets with alength of 1519 to MTUbytes (errored packetsincluded)
ISU2, ISX2
TXPKT64 Indicates the count oftransmitted 64-bytepackets (errored packetsincluded)
TXPKT65 Indicates the count oftransmitted packets with alength of 65 to 127 bytes(errored packetsincluded)
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
684
![Page 704: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/704.jpg)
PerformanceType
Performance Name Description Source
TXPKT128 Indicates the count oftransmitted packets with alength of 128 to 255 bytes(errored packetsincluded)
TXPKT256 Indicates the count oftransmitted packets with alength of 256 to 511 bytes(errored packetsincluded)
TXPKT512 Indicates the count oftransmitted packets with alength of 512 to 1023bytes (errored packetsincluded)
TXPKT1024 Indicates the count oftransmitted packets with alength of 1024 to 1518bytes (errored packetsincluded)
TXPKT1519 Indicates the count oftransmitted packets with alength of 1519 to MTUbytes (errored packetsincluded)
ATMPWE3performance
ATMPW_SNDCELLS Indicates the count oftransmitted cells.
ML1, MD1
ATMPW_RCVCELLS Indicates the count ofreceived cells.
ATMPW_UNKNOWN-CELLS
Indicates the count ofunknown cells.
ATM/IMAperformanceeventson theaccessside
PORT_RX_BW_UTI-LIZATION
Indicates the bandwidthutilization at a port in thereceive direction.
PORT_TX_BW_UTI-LIZATION
Indicates the bandwidthutilization at a port in thetransmit direction.
ATM_CORRECTED_HCSERR
Indicates the number ofcorrectable HCS errorcells received.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
685
![Page 705: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/705.jpg)
PerformanceType
Performance Name Description Source
ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR
Indicates the number ofuncorrectable HCS errorcells received.
ATM_RCVCELLS Indicates the total numberof received cells.
ATM_RCVIDLECELLS Indicates the total numberof received idle cells.
ATM_SNDCELLS Indicates the total numberof transmitted cells.
ATM_IF_INRATE_MAX
Indicates the maximumrate of normal cellsreceived on the port.
ATM_IF_INRATE_MIN Indicates the minimumrate of normal cellsreceived on the port.
ATM_IF_INRATE_AVG
Indicates the average rateof normal cells receivedon the port.
ATM_IF_OUTRATE_MAX
Indicates the maximumrate of normal cellstransmitted on the port.
ATM_IF_OUTRATE_MIN
Indicates the minimumrate of normal cellstransmitted on the port.
ATM_IF_OUTRATE_AVG
Indicates the average rateof normal cellstransmitted on the port.
ATM_CELL_AVAILA-BILITY
Indicates the percentageof valid cells.
PORT_RX_BW_UTI-LIZATION
Indicates the bandwidthutilization rate (0.01%) ofthe port in the receivedirection.
PORT_TX_BW_UTI-LIZATION
Indicates the bandwidthutilization rate (0.01%) ofthe port in the transmitdirection.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
686
![Page 706: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/706.jpg)
PerformanceType
Performance Name Description Source
ATM_UNI1_INRATE_MAX
Indicates the maximumrate of receiving correctcells on the UNI1 side ofATM connections.
ATM_UNI1_INRATE_MIN
Indicates the minimumrate of receiving correctcells on the UNI1 side ofATM connections.
ATM_UNI1_INRATE_AVG
Indicates the average rateof receiving correct cellson the UNI1 side of ATMconnections.
ATM_UNI1_OUTRATE_MAX
Indicates the maximumrate of transmittingcorrect cells on the UNI1side of ATM connections.
ATM_UNI1_OUTRATE_MIN
Indicates the minimumrate of transmittingcorrect cells on the UNI1side of ATM connections.
ATM_UNI1_OUTRATE_AVG
Indicates the average rateof transmitting correctcells on the UNI1 side ofATM connections.
ATM_UNI2_INRATE_MAX
Indicates the maximumrate of receiving correctcells on the UNI2 side ofATM connections.
ATM_UNI2_INRATE_MIN
Indicates the minimumrate of receiving correctcells on the UNI2 side ofATM connections.
ATM_UNI2_INRATE_AVG
Indicates the average rateof receiving correct cellson the UNI2 side of ATMconnections.
ATM_UNI2_OUTRATE_MAX
Indicates the maximumrate of transmittingcorrect cells on the UNI2side of ATM connections.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
687
![Page 707: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/707.jpg)
PerformanceType
Performance Name Description Source
ATM_UNI2_OUTRATE_MIN
Indicates the minimumrate of transmittingcorrect cells on the UNI2side of ATM connections.
ATM_UNI2_OUTRATE_AVG
Indicates the average rateof transmitting correctcells on the UNI2 side ofATM connections.
ATM_UNI1_INCELLS Indicates the total numberof receiving correct cellson the UNI1 side of ATMconnections.
ATM_UNI1_OUT-CELLS
Indicates the total numberof transmitting correctcells on the UNI1 side ofATM connections.
ATM_UNI2_INCELLS Indicates the total numberof receiving correct cellson the UNI2 side of ATMconnections.
ATM_UNI2_OUT-CELLS
Indicates the total numberof transmitting correctcells on the UNI2 side ofATM connections.
CESperformanceevent
CES_MISORDERPKTS Indicates the number oflost disordered packets.
CES_STRAYPKTS Indicates the number ofmis-connected packets.
CES_MALPKTS Indicates the number ofdeformed frames.
CES_JTRUDR Indicates the number ofjitter buffer underflows.
CES_JTROVR Indicates the number ofjitter buffer overflows.
CES_LOSPKTS Indicates the number oflost packets.
CES_RX_PKTS Indicates the number ofreceived packets.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
688
![Page 708: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/708.jpg)
PerformanceType
Performance Name Description Source
PWperformanceofATM/CES
PW_RCVPKTS Indicates the number ofpackets received fromPWs.
PW_RCVBYTES Indicates the number ofbytes received from PWs.
L2VPNa
performance
VLAN_RCVPKTS Indicates the number ofpackets received at the V-UNI VLAN.
CSHN
VLAN_RCVBYTES Indicates the number ofbytes in the packetsreceived at the V-UNIVLAN.
VUNI_RCVPKTS Indicates the number ofpackets received on theV-UNI.
VUNI_RCVBYTES Indicates the number ofbytes received on the V-UNI.
Tunnelperformance
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RCVPKTS
Indicates the number ofpackets received in thereverse tunnel.
TUNNEL_REVERSE_RCVBYTES
Indicates the number ofbytes received in thereverse tunnel.
TUNNEL_RCVPKTS Indicates the number ofpackets received in thetunnel.
TUNNEL_RCVBYTES Indicates the number ofbytes received in thetunnel.
PWperformanceofL2VPN
PW_RCVPKTS Indicates the number ofpackets received on thePW.
PW_RCVBYTES Indicates the number ofbytes received on the PW.
PW_DROPPKTS Indicates the number ofpackets discarded on thePW.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
689
![Page 709: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/709.jpg)
PerformanceType
Performance Name Description Source
ETHOAM802.1ag
ETH_CFM_FLR Indicates the E_Lineservice packet loss ratio.
ETH_CFM_FL Indicates the number ofdiscarded E_Line servicepackets.
ETH_CFM_FD Indicates the E_Lineservice delay.
ETH_CFM_FDV Indicates the E_Lineservice delay variation.
Porttrafficclassification
QOS_PORTCAR_Mar-kedRedPKTS
Indicates the number ofred packets after trafficmonitoring is enabled.
EM6T, EM6F, IFU2,IFX2, ISU2, ISX2,EG2D, EM6FA, EM6TA
QOS_PORTCAR_Mar-kedYellowPKTS
Indicates the number ofyellow packets aftertraffic monitoring isenabled.
QOS_PORTCAR_Mar-kedGreenPKTS
Indicates the number ofgreen packets after trafficmonitoring is enabled.
QOS_PORTSTRM_RCVMATCHPKTS
Indicates the number ofpackets received in thematched flow.
QOS_PORTSTRM_SNDMATCHPKTS
Indicates the number ofpackets transmitted in thematched flow.
PORTSTRM_SHAPING_DROPPKTS
Indicates the number ofpackets discarded due tonetwork congestion whenthe traffic shapingfunction is enabled in theegress direction.
PORTSTRM_SHAPING_DROPRATIO
Indicates the ratio ofpacket loss due tonetwork congestion whenthe traffic shapingfunction is enabled in theegress direction.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
690
![Page 710: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/710.jpg)
PerformanceType
Performance Name Description Source
QOS_PORTCAR_Mar-kedRedRATIO
Indicates the proportionof packets marked in redwhen the traffic policingfunction is enabled.
Portpriority
QOS_PORTQUEUE_DROPRATIO
Indicates the ratio ofpacket loss due tocongestion in egressqueues with differentpriorities.
QOS_PRI_DROPPKTS Indicates the number ofpackets discarded in theservices with differentpriorities.
QOS_PRI_DROP-BYTES
Indicates the number ofbytes discarded in theservices with differentpriorities.
PORT_PRI_SNDPKTS Indicates the number ofpackets transmitted inegress queues withdifferent priorities.
PORT_PRI_SNDBYTES
Indicates the number ofbytes in the packetstransmitted in egressqueues with differentpriorities.
PortDSdomain
DS_CVLANPRI_PKTS Indicates the number ofpackets with matched C-VLAN priorities in theDS domain
DS_CVLANPRI_BYTES
Indicates the number ofbytes in the packets withmatched C-VLANpriorities in the DSdomain.
DS_SVLANPRI_PKTS Indicates the number ofpackets with matched S-VLAN priorities in theDS domain.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
691
![Page 711: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/711.jpg)
PerformanceType
Performance Name Description Source
DS_SVLANPRI_BYTES
Indicates the number ofbytes in the packets withmatched S-VLANpriorities in the DSdomain.
DS_DSCP_PKTS Indicates the number ofpackets with matched IPDSCP priorities in the DSdomain.
DS_DSCP_BYTES Indicates the number ofbytes in the packets withmatched IP DSCPpriorities in the DSdomain.
NOTE
l a: L2VPN services include a variety of E-Line and E-LAN services supported by the equipment.l VUNI represents virtual UNI, represents the sink or source of services on the UNI side.l The E-LAN services transmitted by the OptiX RTN 980 do not support the VUNI-based RMON performance
statistics.l Integrated IP radio ports support this parameter.
D.3 List of RMON Performance Entries on the EoS/EoPDHPlane
The ports that report RMON performance events on the EoPDH plane include PORT1 to PORT9,and VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16 on the EFP8 board. The ports that report RMONperformance events on the EoPDH plane include PORT1 to PORT8, and VCTRUNK1 toVCTRUNK8 on the EMS6 board.
Table D-5 List of RMON performance entries on the EoS/EoPDH plane
Category ofPerformanceEntries
Brief Name of aPerformance Entry
Full Name of aPerformance Entry
Source Port
Basicperformance
ETHUNDER Undersized packetsreceived (packets)
PORT1 to PORT8 on theEFP8 board
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
692
![Page 712: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/712.jpg)
Category ofPerformanceEntries
Brief Name of aPerformance Entry
Full Name of aPerformance Entry
Source Port
ETHFRG PORT1 to PORT6 on theEMS6 board
Fragments received(packets)
RXPKT64 Packets received (64bytes in length) (packets)
PORT1 to PORT9 on theEFP8 boardPORT1 to PORT7 on theEMS6 boardRXPKT65 Packets received (65-127
bytes in length) (packets)
RXPKT128 Packets received(128-255 bytes in length)(packets)
RXPKT256 Packets received(256-511 bytes in length)(packets)
RXPKT512 Packets received(512-1023 bytes inlength) (packets)
RXPKT1024 Packets received(1024-1518 bytes inlength) (packets)
Extendedperformance
RXCTLPKTS Control frames received(frames)
PORT1 to PORT9 on theEFP8 boardPORT1 to PORT7 on theEMS6 boardTXOCTETS Bytes transmitted (bytes)
TXPKTS Packets transmitted(packets)
TXCTLPKTS Control framestransmitted (frame)
TXPKT64 Packets transmitted (64bytes in length) (packets)
TXPKT65 Packets transmitted(65-127 bytes in length)(packets)
TXPKT128 Packets transmitted(128-255 bytes in length)(packets)
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
693
![Page 713: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/713.jpg)
Category ofPerformanceEntries
Brief Name of aPerformance Entry
Full Name of aPerformance Entry
Source Port
TXPKT256 Packets transmitted(256-511 bytes in length)(packets)
TXPKT512 Packets transmitted(512-1023 bytes inlength) (packets)
TXPKT1024 Packets transmitted(1024-1518 bytes inlength) (packets)
ETHALI Alignment error frames(frames)
PKT64 Packets received andtransmitted (64 bytes inlength) (packets)
PKT65 Packets received andtransmitted (65-127 bytesin length) (packets)
PKT128 Packets received andtransmitted (128-255bytes in length) (packets)
PKT256 Packets received andtransmitted (256-511bytes in length) (packets)
PKT512 Packets received andtransmitted (512-1023bytes in length) (packets)
PKT1024 Packets received andtransmitted (1024-1518bytes in length) (packets)
VCGperformance
VCG_TXGOODPACK-ETS
Good packets transmitted(packets)
VCTRUNK1 toVCTRUNK16 on theEFP8 boardVCTRUNK1 toVCTRUNK8 on theEMS6 board
VCG_TXPACKETS Packets transmitted(packets)
VCG_TXOCTETS Bytes transmitted (bytes)
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
694
![Page 714: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/714.jpg)
Category ofPerformanceEntries
Brief Name of aPerformance Entry
Full Name of aPerformance Entry
Source Port
VCG_RXGOODPACK-ETS
Good packets received(packets)
VCG_RXPACKETS Packets received(packets)
VCG_RXOCTETS Bytes received (bytes)
VCG_TXSPEED Speed of bytestransmitted (bytes)
VCG_RXSPEED Speed of bytes received(bytes)
D.4 RMON Events and Handling ProceduresThis chapter describes the RMON events that indicate Ethernet service abnormalities and howto handle these events.
D.4.1 ETHDROP
DescriptionETHDROP indicates the number of events in which packet loss occurs due to resource deficiencyof Ethernet chips. An RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number of packetloss events is higher than the upper threshold or lower than the lower threshold.
NOTE
ETHDROP counts only the packets that are lost due to resource deficiency of Ethernet chips.
Impact on SystemWhen packet loss occurs frequently, services are affected and the system is affected seriously.Hence, you must rectify the fault immediately.
Possible CausesThis performance event indicates packet loss due to the full MAC buffer, FIFO overflow, orbackward pressure.
l The lower threshold is not set to a non-zero value.l The hardware at the local end is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
695
![Page 715: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/715.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Handle this alarm according to the specific performance event.
If... Then...
The number is lower than the lowerthreshold
Change the lower threshold to 0.
The number is higher than the upperthreshold
Manually decrease the traffic transmitted fromthe opposite end. If the problem persists, go tothe next step.
Step 2 Replace the involved part.
----End
Reference
None.
D.4.2 ETHEXCCOL
Description
ETHEXCCOL indicates the number of frames that fail to be transmitted due to continuous portcollisions. An RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number of frames that failto be transmitted is higher than the upper threshold or lower than the lower threshold. Generally,the value indicates that 16 port collisions occur continuously when the same frame is transmitted.
Impact on System
The opposite equipment fails to normally receive services.
Possible Causes
Generally, this event is caused when the local port is connected to a large number of devicesthat work in half-duplex mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Handle this alarm according to the specific performance event.
If... Then...
The number is lower than the lower threshold Change the lower threshold to 0.
The number is higher than the upper threshold Go to the next step.
Step 2 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
696
![Page 716: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/716.jpg)
If... Then...
The ports on the equipment at both endswork in inconsistent modes, or any portworks in half-duplex mode
Set the working modes of the ports on theequipment at both ends to full-duplex or auto-negotiation, so that these ports work inconsistent modes.
The ports on the equipment at both endswork in consistent modes and no ports workin half-duplex mode
Go to the next step.
Step 3 Replace the involved part.
----End
Reference
None.
D.4.3 ETHLATECOL
Description
ETHLATECOL indicates the number of collisions detected within a timeslot period after apacket is transmitted. An RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number ofcollisions is higher than the upper threshold or lower than the lower threshold.
Impact on System
The opposite equipment fails to normally receive services.
Possible Causes
Generally, this performance event is caused by a large network diameter.
Procedure
Step 1 Handle this alarm according to the specific performance event.
If... Then...
The number is lower than the lower threshold Change the lower threshold to 0.
The number is higher than the upper threshold Go to the next step.
Step 2 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends.
If... Then...
The ports on the equipment at both endswork in inconsistent modes, or any portworks in half-duplex mode
Set the working modes of the ports on theequipment at both ends to full-duplex or auto-negotiation, so that these ports work inconsistent modes.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
697
![Page 717: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/717.jpg)
If... Then...
The ports on the equipment at both endswork in consistent modes and no ports workin half-duplex mode
Go to the next step.
Step 3 Check whether the network diameter of the LAN is very large according to the networkingplanning information.
If... Then...
The network diameter is very large Divide the network and deploy equipment todifferent buses or physically shared devices (such ashubs).NOTE
In the case of the 10 Mbit/s port rate, the maximum Ethernetdiameter is 2000 m. In the case of the 100 Mbit/s port rate,the maximum Ethernet diameter is 200 m.
The network diameter is appropriate Go to the next step.
Step 4 Replace the involved part.
----End
Reference
None.
D.4.4 RXBBAD
Description
RXBBAD indicates the total number of bytes in received bad packets, excluding the framingbit but including the FCS byte. An RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the totalnumber of bytes in received bad packets is higher than the upper threshold or lower than thelower threshold.
Impact on System
A port discards bad packets. This may even interrupt system services.
Possible Causes1. Errors occur when the opposite end transmits packets.
2. The transmission line is of the poor quality and bit errors exist.
3. The hardware at the local end is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Handle this alarm according to the specific performance event.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
698
![Page 718: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/718.jpg)
If... Then...
The number is lower than the lower threshold Change the lower threshold to 0.
The number is higher than the upper threshold Go to the next step.
Step 2 Correct the errors that occur when the opposite end transmits packets.
Step 3 Handle the problem of poor quality of the transmission line.Check whether the ETH_LOS alarm is reported at the local end because the external line isdamaged or over attenuated. If yes, see the related handling method to clear the alarm.
Step 4 Replace the involved part.
----End
Reference
None.
D.4.5 TXDEFFRM
Description
TXDEFFRM indicates the number of frames the first transmission of which is delayed due tothe congestion on the transmission media, excluding the number of frames the first transmissionof which is delayed due to collisions. An RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when thenumber of frames that fail to be transmitted is higher than the upper threshold and lower thanthe lower threshold.
Impact on System
The rate of frame transmission decreases, and therefore packets are congested at a port and thethroughput of the port decreases.
Possible Causes
Generally, this event is caused when the external port at the local end is connected to a largenumber of devices that work in half-duplex mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Handle this alarm according to the specific performance event.
If... Then...
The number is lower than the lower threshold Change the lower threshold to 0.
The number is higher than the upper threshold Go to the next step.
Step 2 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
699
![Page 719: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/719.jpg)
If... Then...
The ports on the equipment at both endswork in inconsistent modes, or any portworks in half-duplex mode
Set the working modes of the ports on theequipment at both ends to full-duplex or auto-negotiation, so that these ports work inconsistent modes.
The ports on the equipment at both endswork in consistent modes and no ports workin half-duplex mode
Go to the next step.
Step 3 Replace the involved part.
----End
ReferenceNone.
D.4.6 ETHUNDER
DescriptionETHUNDER indicates that an RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number ofpackets that are shorter than 64 bytes and are received on the line side crosses the preset threshold.
Impact on SystemThe data frames whose length is not within the specific range are discarded. As a result, thesystem services are affected.
Possible Causes1. The length of a data frame that is received at a port is shorter than 64 bytes.2. The hardware at the local end is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the opposite equipment transmits the packet that is shorter than 64 bytes.
If... Then...
The opposite equipment transmits the packetthat is shorter than 64 bytes
Rectify the fault on the opposite equipment.
The opposite end does not transmit thepacket that is shorter than 64 bytes
Go to the next step.
Step 2 Replace the involved part.
----End
ReferenceNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
700
![Page 720: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/720.jpg)
D.4.7 ETHOVER
DescriptionETHOVER indicates that an RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number ofpackets that are longer than 1518 bytes and are received at a port crosses the preset threshold.
Impact on SystemIf the length of the data frame received at a port is more than the preset maximum frame length,the data frame is discarded and therefore the system services are affected.
Possible Causes1. The preset maximum frame length is less than the length of the frame that is received at a
port.2. The hardware at the local end is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the opposite equipment transmits the packet that is longer than the maximumframe length set for the local equipment.
If... Then...
The opposite equipment transmits thepacket that is longer than the maximumframe length set for the local equipment
Notify the opposite equipment that the lengthof transmitted frames should be changed.
The opposite equipment does not transmitthe packet that is longer than the maximumframe length set for the local equipment
Go to the next step.
Step 2 Replace the involved part.
----End
ReferenceNone.
D.4.8 ETHFRG
DescriptionETHFRG indicates that an RMON threshold-crossing event is reported when the number ofreceived packets that are shorter than 64 bytes and have FCS or alignment errors exceeds thepreset upper threshold.
Impact on SystemData transmission is delayed or packet loss occurs.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
701
![Page 721: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/721.jpg)
Possible Causesl The working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are not consistent.
l The hardware at the local end is faulty.
l The ports on the equipment at both ends work in half-duplex mode, and the data traffic isvery heavy.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are consistent.
If... Then...
The working modes are consistent Go to the next step.
The working modes are not consistent Change the working mode of the local port so thatthe ports on the equipment at both ends work inconsistent modes.
Step 2 Check whether the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are set to the half-duplex mode.
If... Then...
The working modes are not set to the half-duplex mode
Go to the next step.
The working modes are set to the half-duplex mode
Change the working modes of the ports on theequipment at both ends to the full-duplex modeor adaptive mode.
Step 3 Replace the involved part.
----End
D.4.9 ETHJAB
Description
ETHJAB indicates that an RMON threshold-crossing alarm is reported when the number ofreceived packets that are longer than 1518 bytes and have FCS or alignment errors is higher thanthe upper threshold.
Impact on the System
Data transmission is delayed or packet loss occurs.
Possible Causesl The working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are not consistent.
l The hardware at the local end is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
702
![Page 722: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/722.jpg)
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends are consistent.
If... Then...
The working modes are consistent Go to the next step.
The working modes are not consistent Change the working mode of the local port so thatthe ports on the equipment at both ends work inconsistent modes.
Step 2 Replace the involved part.
----End
D.4.10 ETHCOL
DescriptionETHCOL indicates the number of detected packet collisions. An RMON threshold-crossingevent is reported when the number of collisions is higher than the upper threshold or lower thanthe lower threshold.
Impact on SystemThe opposite equipment fails to normally receive services.
Possible CausesGenerally, this event is caused when the local port is connected to a large number of devicesthat work in half-duplex mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Handle this alarm according to the specific performance event.
If... Then...
The number is lower than the lower threshold Change the lower threshold to 0.
The number is higher than the upper threshold Go to the next step.
Step 2 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends.
If... Then...
The ports on the equipment at both endswork in inconsistent modes, or any portworks in half-duplex mode
Set the working modes of the ports on theequipment at both ends to full-duplex or auto-negotiation, so that these ports work inconsistent modes.
The ports on the equipment at both endswork in consistent modes and no ports workin half-duplex mode
Go to the next step.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
703
![Page 723: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/723.jpg)
Step 3 Replace the involved part.
----End
Reference
None.
D.4.11 ETHFCS
Description
ETHFCS indicates the number of received Ethernet data frames with FCS check errors at thelocal end (excluding the oversized and undersized frames). An RMON threshold-crossing eventis reported when the number is higher than the upper threshold or lower than the lower threshold.
Impact on System
Most ports discard the packets with FCS check errors. The system services are interrupted inthe worst case.
Possible Causes1. The local port and opposite port work in inconsistent modes. For example, one port works
in full-duplex mode, and the opposite port works in half-duplex mode.
2. The transmission line is of the poor quality and bit errors exist.
3. The hardware at the local end is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Therefore, handle the alarm according to the specific performance event.
If... Then...
The number is lower than the lower threshold Change the lower threshold to 0.
The number is higher than the upper threshold Go to the next step.
Step 2 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends.
If... Then...
The ports on the equipment at both endswork in inconsistent modes
Change the working modes of the ports on theequipment at both ends so that they can workin consistent modes
The ports on the equipment at both endswork in consistent modes
Go to the next step.
Step 3 Replace the involved part.
----End
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
704
![Page 724: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/724.jpg)
Reference
None.
D.4.12 ATMPW_LOSPKTS
Description
The ATMPW_LOSPKTS is a performance event indicating the number of lost ATM PWpackets.
Impact on the System
None.
Possible Causes1. Signals on the radio link deteriorate.2. A strong interference source is present near the equipment.3. A board at the transmit or receive end is faulty.4. The operating temperature of the equipment is very high.
Procedure
Step 1 Handle the fault on the radio link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Remove the interference source near the equipment and then check whether the performanceevent is cleared.
Step 3 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends.
Step 4 Replace the faulty board and then check whether the performance event is cleared.
Step 5 Rectify the fault in the fan so that the fan lowers the operating temperature of the equipment.
----End
Related Information
None.
D.4.13 ATMPW_MISORDERPKTS
Description
The ATMPW_MISORDERPKTS is a performance event indicating the number of disorderedATM PW packets.
Impact on the System
None.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
705
![Page 725: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/725.jpg)
Possible Causes1. Signals on the radio link deteriorate.2. A strong interference source is present near the equipment.3. A board at the transmit or receive end is faulty.4. The operating temperature of the equipment is very high.
Procedure
Step 1 Handle the fault on the radio link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Remove the interference source near the equipment and then check whether the performanceevent is cleared.
Step 3 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends.
Step 4 Replace the faulty board and then check whether the performance event is cleared.
Step 5 Rectify the fault in the fan so that the fan lowers the operating temperature of the equipment.
----End
Related InformationNone.
D.4.14 ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS
DescriptionThe ATMPW_UNKNOWNCELLS a performance event indicating the number of unknowncells in an ATM PW service.
Impact on the SystemNone.
Possible Causes1. Signals on the radio link deteriorate.2. A strong interference source is present near the equipment.3. A board at the transmit or receive end is faulty.4. The operating temperature of the equipment is very high.
Procedure
Step 1 Handle the fault on the radio link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Remove the interference source near the equipment and then check whether the performanceevent is cleared.
Step 3 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
706
![Page 726: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/726.jpg)
Step 4 Replace the faulty board and then check whether the performance event is cleared.
Step 5 Rectify the fault in the fan so that the fan lowers the operating temperature of the equipment.
----End
Related InformationNone.
D.4.15 ATM_CORRECTED_HCSERR
DescriptionThe ATM_CORRECTED_HCSERR is a performance event indicating the number of cells thatare received by an ATM port and contain correctable header check sequence (HCS) errors.
Impact on the SystemNone.
Possible Causes1. A strong interference source is present near the equipment.2. A board at the transmit or receive end is faulty.3. The operating temperature of the equipment is very high.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the interference source near the equipment and then check whether the performanceevent is cleared.
Step 2 On the NMS, query the working modes of the ports on the equipment at both ends.
Step 3 Replace the faulty board and then check whether the performance event is cleared.
Step 4 Rectify the fault in the fan so that the fan lowers the operating temperature of the equipment.
----End
Related InformationNone.
D.4.16 ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR
DescriptionThe ATM_UNCORRECTED_HCSERR is a performance event indicating the number of cellsthat are received by an ATM port and contain uncorrectable header check sequence (HCS) errors.
Impact on the SystemNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
707
![Page 727: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/727.jpg)
Possible Causes1. Signals on the radio link deteriorate.
2. A strong interference source is present near the equipment.
3. A board at the transmit or receive end is faulty.
4. The operating temperature of the equipment is very high.
Procedure
Step 1 Refer to 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link and handle the fault on the radio link.
Step 2 Remove the interference source near the equipment and then check whether the performanceevent is cleared.
Step 3 Replace the faulty board and then check whether the performance event is cleared.
Step 4 Rectify the fault in the fan so that the fan lowers the operating temperature of the equipment.
----End
Related Information
None.
D.4.17 CES_MISORDERPKTS
Description
The CES_MISORDERPKTS is a performance event indicating the count of lost disordered CESPW packets.
Impact on the System
The packets are disordered. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.
Possible Causes1. Signals degrade on the link.
2. The link is looped.
3. The link is congested.
Related Alarms
CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC
Procedure
Step 1 See 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Release the loop.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
708
![Page 728: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/728.jpg)
Step 3 Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth oreliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
----End
Related InformationNone.
D.4.18 CES_STRAYPKTS
DescriptionThe CES_STRAYPKTS is a performance event indicating the number of misconnected packetsin a period.
Impact on the SystemThe packets are discarded. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.
Possible Causes1. Links are misconnected.
Related AlarmsCES_STRAYPKT_EXC
Procedure
Step 1 Check the link configuration and rectify the fault.
----End
Related InformationNone.
D.4.19 CES_MALPKTS
DescriptionThe CES_MALPKTS is a performance event indicating the number of deformed CES packetsin a period.
Impact on the SystemThe packets are discarded. As a result, the packet loss rate increases and services are affected.
Possible Causes1. The RTP head enabling status is different between the two ends of the PW.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
709
![Page 729: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/729.jpg)
2. Bit errors occur on the link.
Related AlarmsCES_MALPKT_EXC
Procedure
Step 1 Set the RTP head enabling status to the same on the two ends of the PW. For details, seeModifying CES Service Parameters.
----End
Related InformationNone.
D.4.20 CES_JTRUDR
DescriptionThe CES_JTRUDR is a performance event indicating the number of jitter buffer underflows.
Impact on the SystemWhen no packets are transmitted from the jitter buffer, the buffer underflows.
Possible Causes1. Signals degrade on the link.2. The PSN network clocks used for the transmission of CES services are not synchronized.3. The link is looped.4. The link is congested.5. The size of buffer area is set to a low value.
Related AlarmsCES_JTRUDR_EXC
Procedure
Step 1 Troubleshoot the link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Synchronize the PSN network clock by setting clock synchronization, reducing transmissionnodes, and optimizing transmission routes.
Step 3 Release the loop.
Step 4 Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth oreliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
Step 5 Query the size of buffer area. For details, see Querying CES Service Information.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
710
![Page 730: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/730.jpg)
Step 6 Determine whether the size can be increased according to network planning. If yes, change thesize to a greater value. For details, see Managing CES Services.
----End
Related InformationNone.
D.4.21 CES_JTROVR
DescriptionThe CES_JTROVR is a performance event indicating the number of jitter buffer overflows.
Impact on the SystemThe jitter buffer is insufficient. As a result, the buffer overflows.
Possible Causes1. The jitter buffer area is too small.2. The clocks are not synchronous.3. Link quality deteriorates, causing more jitters.4. There are too many hops of radio link on the network side, causing a large number of jitters.
Related AlarmsCES_JTROVR_EXC
Procedure
Step 1 Allocate a larger jitter buffer area.
Step 2 Check whether the LTI and other clock-related alarms are reported.
Step 3 Handle the fault on the radio link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 4 Determine whether the hops can be reduced according to network planning. If yes, reduce thehops of radio link on the network side.
----End
Related InformationNone.
D.4.22 CES_LOSPKTS
DescriptionThe CES_LOSPKTS is a performance event indicating the number of CES packets lost in aperiod.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
711
![Page 731: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/731.jpg)
Impact on the SystemWhen this alarm occurs, all 1s are inserted and services are interrupted.
Possible Causes1. The link transmission quality is poor.2. The link is configured as a loop.3. Link congestion occurs.
Related AlarmsCES_LOSPKT_EXC
Procedure
Step 1 Handle the fault on the radio link. For details, see 5.3 Troubleshooting the Radio Link.
Step 2 Release the loop.
Step 3 Check the bandwidth utilization. If the bandwidth is exhausted, increase the bandwidth oreliminate any source that transmits a large amount of invalid data.
----End
Related InformationNone.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) D RMON Event Reference
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
712
![Page 732: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/732.jpg)
E Alarm Management
The alarm management on the OptiX RTN 980 is classified into the NE alarm management andboard alarm management.
E.1 NE Alarm ManagementThe NE alarm management function set by user is applicable to all the boards on the NE.
E.2 Board Alarm ManagementThe board alarm management function is only applicable to the board on which users haveconfigured this function.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) E Alarm Management
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
713
![Page 733: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/733.jpg)
E.1 NE Alarm ManagementThe NE alarm management function set by user is applicable to all the boards on the NE.
The equipment supports the following NE alarm management functions:
l Settings of the alarm storage model Setting of the alarm delayl Setting of the alarm reversion mode
For details about these functions, see the manuals or online Help of the NMS.
E.2 Board Alarm ManagementThe board alarm management function is only applicable to the board on which users haveconfigured this function.
E.2.1 Setting the Alarm SeverityAlarms are classified into four levels: critical, major, minor, and warning, according to theirseverities. The maintenance personnel can change the alarm severity by using the NMS.
This function is supported by all the boards.
l Critical alarm: A critical alarm indicates a critical problem with the network. A criticalproblem can be the failure, overload, or system restart of mission-critical boards. It mustbe cleared immediately. Otherwise, system breakdown may occur.
l Major alarm: A major alarm indicates failure of certain boards or links, such ascommunication links. Urgent action is required to rectify the fault as this type of alarmsaffects the QoS of the system.
l Minor alarm: A minor alarm indicates a non-service affecting problem that needs to besolved, for example, fan speed exceeds threshold alarm. This type of alarms does not affectthe QoS of the system, but you need to locate and remove these faults in time.
l Warning alarm: A warning alarm indicates a potential error that may affect the QoS of thesystem, for example, License file expiring precaution alarm. This type of alarms needs tobe handled based on actual conditions.
Critical alarms and major alarms need to be handled immediately to avoid system failures andservice interruptions.
E.2.2 Alarm SuppressionThe maintenance personnel can change the alarm monitoring attribute by setting the alarmsuppression function. A board detects only the alarms that are not suppressed. The alarmsuppression function helps users to ignore their unconcerned alarms.
This function is supported by all the boards.
E.2.3 Alarm Auto-ReportIf Alarm Auto-Report is set to Reported, all the detected alarms are reported to the NMS in atimely manner. If Alarm Auto-Report is set to Not Report, the alarms are reported only when
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) E Alarm Management
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
714
![Page 734: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/734.jpg)
alarm query is performed on the NMS. The maintenance personnel can change the setting onthe NMS.
This function is supported by all the boards.
E.2.4 Alarm ReversionIn the case of a port that is not configured with services, certain alarms may be reported. To filterthe alarms that users are not concerned, set these alarms to be reversed. In this manner, the alarmstatus at this port is the opposite to the actual case. That is, the status is displayed as normalwhen an alarm is actually reported.
The alarm reversion function is available in three modes, namely, non-reversion, automaticreversion, and manual reversion.
l Non-revertiveIn this mode, the alarms are monitored by default and alarm reversion cannot be enabledfor a port.
l Auto reversionIn this mode, alarm reversion can be enabled for a port where alarms are reported. Afteralarm reversion is enabled at a port, alarms are not reported. When the current alarm iscleared, the alarm reversion automatically changes to the disabled status. That is, it changesto the non-reversion mode. Then, the alarm reporting status at the port is the same as theactual status.
l Manual reversionIn this mode, alarm reversion can be enabled for a port regardless of whether any alarmsare reported at the port. After alarm reversion is enabled, the alarm reporting status at theport is opposite to the actual status. After alarm reversion is manually disabled, the alarmreversion status changes to the non-reversion mode. Then, the alarm reporting status at theport is the same as the actual status.
Pay attention to the following points when you set the alarm reversion function:
l Alarm reversion does not change the actual status of alarms on the board, as well as theindication status of the alarm indicators.
l Alarm reversion is realized on the NE software. The alarm data is the same on the NE andthe NMS, which indicates the status after the alarm reversion. If you directly query thealarm data of a board, however, the actual alarm status is returned.
l Alarm reversion is set based on ports. It is supported by each port on the SL1D, SP3S,SP3D, IFX2, IFU2, IF1, ISU2, ISX2, SL4D, EM6TA, EM6FA, SL1DA, EG2D, EM6T,and EM6F boards.
E.2.5 Setting of the Bit Error Alarm ThresholdWhen the number of bit errors detected by a board exceeds a specified number, the boardgenerates a bit error alarm. This specific number is the bit error alarm threshold, and the settingof this threshold is supported by all the bit error threshold-crossing and degrading alarms on theNE.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) E Alarm Management
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
715
![Page 735: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/735.jpg)
Table E-1 Setting of the bit error alarm threshold
Alarm Name Default Alarm Threshold Applicable Board
B1_EXC 10-3 SL4D, SL1DA, SL1D andIF1
B1_SD 10-6
B2_EXC 10-3 SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D andIF1
B2_SD 10-6
B3_EXC 10-3 SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D andIF1
B3_SD 10-6
BIP_EXC 10-3 ISU2, ISX2, EFP8, EMS6,SP3S, SP3D, IFU2, and IFX2
BIP_SD 10-6
MW_BER_EXC 10-3 ISU2, ISX2, IFU2 and IFX2
MW_BER_SD 10-6
E.2.6 AIS InsertionAIS insertion can be set for certain alarms reported on a board. When the board detects thealarms, it inserts all 1s into the lower level service to indicate the remote end that the service isunavailable.
Table E-2 Setting of the AIS insertion
Trigger Condition Default Value Applicable Board
B1_EXC Enabled SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D andIF1
B2_SD Disabled SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D andIF1
B2_EXC Disabled SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D andIF1
HP_LOM Enabled
HP_TIM Disabled
HP_SLM Disabled
HP_UNEQ Disabled
B3_EXC Enabled SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D andIF1
B3_SD Disabled
B1_SD Disabled SL1DA, SL4D, SL1D andIF1
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) E Alarm Management
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
716
![Page 736: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/736.jpg)
Trigger Condition Default Value Applicable Board
LP_TIM Disabled SP3S and SP3D
LP_UNEQ Disabled
LP_SLM Disabled
T_ALOS Enabled
BIP_EXC Disabled
BIP_SD Disabled
MW_BER_EXC Enabled ISU2, ISX2, IFX2 and IFU2
MW_BER_SD Disabled
NOTE
l When the SL1D/SL4D/SL1DA, board detects the R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, AU_AIS, orAU_LOP alarm, it forcibly inserts the AIS.
l When the IF1 board detects the MW_LOF, MW_LIM, R_LOF, MS_AIS, AU_AIS, or AU_LOPalarm, it forcibly inserts the AIS.
l When the ISU2, ISX2, IFX2 and IFU2 board detect the MW_LOF, MW_LIM, or R_LOF alarm, itforcibly inserts the AIS.
E.2.7 UNEQ InsertionWhen a board detects that the service path is not in use or that the LOS alarm exists, it insertsall 0s into the service signal to notify the remote end that this signal is unavailable.
Table E-3 Setting of the UNEQ insertion
Trigger Condition Default Value Applicable Board
T_ALOS Disabled SP3S and SP3D
Service path being not in use Disabled
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) E Alarm Management
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
717
![Page 737: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/737.jpg)
F Performance Event Management
The performance event management is classified into the NE performance event managementand board performance event management.
F.1 NE Performance Event ManagementThe NE performance event management function set by user is applicable to all the boards onthe NE.
F.2 Board Performance Event ManagementThe performance event management function is only applicable to the board on which usershave configured this function.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) F Performance Event Management
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
718
![Page 738: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/738.jpg)
F.1 NE Performance Event ManagementThe NE performance event management function set by user is applicable to all the boards onthe NE.
The OptiX RTN 980 supports the following NE performance event management functions:
l Setting NE performance event monitoringl Setting the start/end time of performance eventsl Enabling/Disabling the reporting of UAT events
For details about these functions, see the manuals or online Help of the NMS.
F.2 Board Performance Event ManagementThe performance event management function is only applicable to the board on which usershave configured this function.
Table F-1 Board performance event management function
Function Applicable Board
Setting 15-minute/24-hour performancemonitoring
SL1DA, EMS6, SL1D, SP3S, SP3D, SL4D, CSHN, ODU, IFX2,IFU2, ISU2, ISX2, ML1, MD1, EFP8, and IF1
Setting 15-minute/24-hour performance eventauto-reporting
SL1DA, EMS6, SL1D, SP3S, SP3D, SL4D, CSHN, ODU, IFX2,IFU2, ISU2, ISX2, ML1, MD1, EFP8, and IF1
Setting performancethresholds
SL1DA, EMS6, SL1D, SL4D, SP3S, SP3D, IFX2, IFU2, ISU2,ISX2, ML1, MD1, EFP8, CSHN, MP1, and IF1
Resetting theperformance register
SL1DA, SL1D, SL4D, SP3S, SP3D, ODU, IFX2, IFU2, ISU2,ISX2, and IF1
Generating performancethreshold-crossingalarms
SL1DA, EMS6, SL1D, SL4D, SP3S, SP3D, ODU, IFX2, IFU2,ISU2, ISX2, ML1, MD1, EFP8, and IF1
Monitoring UAT events SL1DA, EMS6, SL1D, SL4D, SP3S, SP3D, IFX2, IFU2, ISU2,ISX2, EFP8, and IF1
Monitoring CSESperformance events
SL1DA, EMS6, SL1D, SL4D, SP3S, SP3D, IFX2, IFU2, ISU2,ISX2, EFP8, and IF1
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) F Performance Event Management
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
719
![Page 739: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/739.jpg)
G Alarm Suppression Relationship
When the alarm suppression function is disabled on an NE, the root alarm and certain correlatedalarms are reported if a fault occurs on this NE. After the alarm suppression function is enabled,the reporting of the correlated alarms is suppressed according to the relationship between alarmswhen the root alarm is reported. The alarm suppression relationship can be classified into thesuppression relationship between intra-board alarms and suppression relationship between inter-board alarms.
Table G-1 Suppression relationship between intra-board alarms
Alarm Identifier Identifier of the Suppressed Alarm
MW_LOF R_LOS, R_LOF, R_LOC,MW_FEC_UNCOR, MW_RDI,MW_LIM, MS_AIS, B1_EXC, B1_SD,MS_RDI, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_REI,AU_AIS, AU_LOP, B3_EXC, B3_SD,HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ, HP_SLM,HP_RDI, HP_LOM, HP_REI,MW_BER_EXC, and MW_BER_SD
MW_LIM MW_RDI
MW_BER_EXC MW_BER_SD
LSR_NO_FITED R_LOS, R_LOC, R_LOF, J0_MM,B1_EXC, B1_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_REI, AU_AIS,AU_LOP, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ,HP_SLM, HP_RDI, B3_EXC, B3_SD,HP_LOM, HP_REI, IN_PWR_LOW,MW_RDI, and MW_LIM
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) G Alarm Suppression Relationship
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
720
![Page 740: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/740.jpg)
Alarm Identifier Identifier of the Suppressed Alarm
R_LOS or R_LOC R_LOF, J0_MM, B1_EXC, B1_SD,MS_AIS, MS_RDI, B2_EXC, B2_SD,MS_REI, AU_AIS, AU_LOP, HP_TIM,HP_UNEQ, HP_SLM, HP_RDI, B3_EXC,B3_SD, HP_LOM, HP_REI,IN_PWR_LOW, MW_RDI, andMW_LIM
R_LOF J0_MM, B1_EXC, B1_SD, MS_AIS,MS_RDI, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_REI,AU_AIS, AU_LOP, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ,HP_SLM, HP_RDI, B3_EXC, B3_SD,HP_LOM, HP_REI, MW_RDI,MW_LIM, MW_BER_EXC, andMW_BER_SD
MS_AIS B2_SD, MS_REI, MS_RDI, AU_AIS,AU_LOP, HP_TIM, HP_UNEQ,HP_SLM, HP_RDI, B3_EXC, B3_SD,HP_LOM, HP_REI, and B2_EXC
MS_RDI MS_REI
AU_AIS AU_LOP, B3_EXC, B3_SD, HP_TIM,HP_SLM, HP_UNEQ, HP_RDI,HP_LOM, and HP_REI
AU_LOP B3_EXC, B3_SD, HP_TIM, HP_SLM,HP_UNEQ, HP_RDI, HP_LOM, andHP_REI
HP_UNEQ HP_TIM, HP_LOM, and HP_RDI
HP_RDI HP_REI
LP_UNEQ LP_TIM, LP_RDI, LP_RFI, LP_REI,BIP_SD, and BIP_EXC
LP_RDI LP_REI
B1_EXC B1_SD, and MS_REI
B2_EXC B2_SD, and MS_REI
B3_EXC B3_SD
TU_AIS LP_TIM, LP_UNEQ, LP_RDI, LP_REI,LP_RFI, LP_R_FIFO, BIP_EXC,BIP_SD, LP_SLM, TU_LOP, andDOWN_E1_AIS
TU_LOP LP_TIM, LP_UNEQ, LP_RDI, LP_REI,LP_RFI, LP_R_FIFO, BIP_EXC,BIP_SD, LP_SLM, and DOWN_E1_AIS
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) G Alarm Suppression Relationship
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
721
![Page 741: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/741.jpg)
Alarm Identifier Identifier of the Suppressed Alarm
T_ALOS E1_LOS, DDN_LFA and UP_E1_AIS
E1_LOS UP_E1_AIS
BIP_EXC BIP_SD
LASER_MOD_ERR ETH_LOS
UP_E1_AIS LFA, DDN_LFA, and ALM_E1RAI
LFA LMFA, ALM_IMA_LIF, andALM_E1RAI
LMFA ALM_IMA_LIF
ALM_E1RAI ALM_IMA_RFI, andALM_IMA_RE_RX_UNUSABLE
ETH_EFM_DF ETH_EFM_REMFAULT
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT ETH_EFM_EVENT
ALM_IMA_LIF ALM_IMA_LODS
IMA_GROUP_LE_DOWN VC_LOC, and VP_LOC
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV MPLS_TUNNEL_UNKNOWN,MPLS_TUNNEL_Excess, andMPLS_TUNNEL_SF
MPLS_TUNNEL_SF MPLS_TUNNEL_SD
MPLS_TUNNEL_FDI MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV
ETH_APS_PATH_MISMATCH ETH_APS_LOST,ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH, andETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL
ETH_APS_LOST ETH_APS_TYPE_MISMATCH, andETH_APS_SWITCH_FAIL
MPLS_PW_LOCV MPLS_PW_UNKNOWN,MPLS_PW_Excess, and MPLS_PW_SF
MPLS_PW_SF MPLS_PW_SD
PWAPSAPS_PATH_MISMATCH PWAPS_LOST, PWAPS_TYPE_MIS-MATCH, and PWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL
PWAPS_LOST PWAPS_TYPE_MISMATCH, andPWAPS_SWITCH_FAIL
ETH_CFM_MISMERGE ETH_CFM_LOC
CES_LOSPKT_EXC CES_STRAYPKT_EXC,CES_JTROVR_EXC, andCES_JTRUDR_EXC
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) G Alarm Suppression Relationship
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
722
![Page 742: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/742.jpg)
Alarm Identifier Identifier of the Suppressed Alarm
CES_STRAYPKT_EXC CES_MISORDERPKT_EXC, andCES_MALPKT_EXC
PG_LINK_FAIL PG_PRT_DEGRADED
Table G-2 Suppression relationship between intra-board alarms
Alarm Identifier Identifier of the Suppressed Alarm
R_LOS, R_LOC, MS_AIS, AU_AIS, orAU_LOP
TU_AIS
MW_LOF or MW_LIM TU_AIS
ETH_LOS MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV,MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV MPLS_PW_LOCV
MPLS_TUNNEL_BDI MPLS_PW_BDI
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) G Alarm Suppression Relationship
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
723
![Page 743: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/743.jpg)
H Indicators of Boards
Indicators of Boards
Table H-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working properly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the boardduring the power-on or resetting processof the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot stateduring the power-on or resetting processof the board.
On (green) l When the board is being powered onor being reset, the upper layersoftware is being initialized.
l When the board is running, thesoftware is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at100 ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails duringthe power-on or resetting process of theboard.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
724
![Page 744: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/744.jpg)
Indicator State Meaning
On (red) The memory self-check fails or loadingupper layer software fails during thepower-on or resetting process of theboard.The logic file or upper layer software islost during the running process of theboard.The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.
On (red) The clock source is lost or a clockswitchover occurs.
SRV On (green) The system is working properly.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in thesystem.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in thesystem.
Off There is no power supplied to the system.
ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the boardworks as the active one.In an unprotected system, the board hasbeen activated.
Off In a 1+1 protected system, the boardworks as the standby one.In an unprotected system, the board is notactivated.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical port on the line isreporting the R_LOS alarm.
Off The first optical port on the line is free ofR_LOS alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical port on the line isreporting the R_LOS alarm.
Off The second optical port on the line is freeof R_LOS alarms.
LINK1 On (green) The connection at the GE1 port isworking properly.
Off The connection at the GE1 port isinterrupted.
ACT1 On or blinking (yellow) Data is being transmitted or received atthe GE1 port.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
725
![Page 745: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/745.jpg)
Indicator State Meaning
Off No data is being transmitted or receivedat the GE1 port.
LINK2 On (green) The connection at the GE2 port isworking properly.
Off The connection at the GE2 port isinterrupted.
ACT2 On or blinking (yellow) Data is being transmitted or received atthe GE2 port.
Off No data is being transmitted or receivedat the GE2 port.
CRIT On (red) A critical alarm occurs on the NE.
MAJ On (orange) A major alarm occurs on the NE.
MIN On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs on the NE.
Table H-2 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is workingproperly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.
LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.
On (red) The radio link is faulty.
ODU On (green) The ODU is workingproperly.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
726
![Page 746: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/746.jpg)
Indicator State Meaning
On (red) l The ODU is reportingcritical or major alarms.
l There is no powersupplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minoralarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment isreporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is freeof defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,the board works as theactive one.
l In an unprotected system,the board has beenactivated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system,the board works as thestandby one.
l In an unprotected system,the board is not activated.
Table H-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working properly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in theservices.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in theservices.
LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
727
![Page 747: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/747.jpg)
Indicator State Meaning
On (red) The radio link is faulty.
ODU On (green) The ODU is working properly.
On (red) l The ODU is reporting critical or majoralarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow)and off at 300 msintervals
The antennas are not aligned.
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is free of defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system, the boardworks as the active one.
l In an unprotected system, the board hasbeen activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system, the boardworks as the standby one.
l In an unprotected system, the board is notactivated.
Table H-4 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is workingproperly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.
LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
728
![Page 748: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/748.jpg)
Indicator State Meaning
On (red) The radio link is faulty.
ODU On (green) The ODU is workingproperly.
On (red) l The ODU is reportingcritical or major alarms.
l There is no powersupplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minoralarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment isreporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is freeof defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,the board works as theactive one.
l In an unprotected system,the board has beenactivated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system,the board works as thestandby one.
l In an unprotected system,the board is not activated.
Table H-5 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2
Indicator State Meaning
XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal isnormal.
On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.
Off The XPIC function isdisabled.
STAT On (green) The board is workingproperly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
729
![Page 749: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/749.jpg)
Indicator State Meaning
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.
LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.
On (red) The radio link is faulty.
ODU On (green) The ODU is workingproperly.
On (red) l The ODU is reportingcritical or major alarms.
l There is no powersupplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minoralarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment isreporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is freeof defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,the board works as theactive one.
l In an unprotected system,the board has beenactivated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system,the board works as thestandby one.
l In an unprotected system,the board is not activated.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
730
![Page 750: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/750.jpg)
Table H-6 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2
Indicator State Meaning
XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal isnormal.
On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.
Off The XPIC function isdisabled.
STAT On (green) The board is workingproperly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.
LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.
On (red) The radio link is faulty.
ODU On (green) The ODU is workingproperly.
On (red) l The ODU is reportingcritical or major alarms.
l There is no powersupplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minoralarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment isreporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is freeof defects.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
731
![Page 751: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/751.jpg)
Indicator State Meaning
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,the board works as theactive one.
l In an unprotected system,the board has beenactivated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system,the board works as thestandby one.
l In an unprotected system,the board is not activated.
Table H-7 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working properly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The system is working properly.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in thesystem.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board duringthe power-on or resetting process of theboard.
Blinks on (green) and off at300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot stateduring the power-on or resetting process ofthe board.
On (green) l When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the upper layer software isbeing initialized.
l When the board is running, the softwareis running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during thepower-on or resetting process of the board.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
732
![Page 752: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/752.jpg)
Indicator State Meaning
On (red) l The memory self-check fails or loadingupper layer software fails during thepower-on or resetting process of theboard.
l The logic file or upper layer software islost during the running process of theboard.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
LINK1a On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly and isnot receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (green) The GE1 port is receiving or transmittingdata.
Off The GE1 port is not connected or isconnected incorrectly.
LINK2a On (green) The GE2 port is connected correctly and isnot receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (green) The GE2 port is receiving or transmittingdata.
Off The GE2 port is not connected or isconnected incorrectly.
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of thecorresponding GE ports.
Table H-8 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working properly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The system is working properly.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in thesystem.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
733
![Page 753: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/753.jpg)
Indicator State Meaning
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board duringthe power-on or resetting process of theboard.
Blinks on (green) and off at300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot stateduring the power-on or resetting process ofthe board.
On (green) l When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the upper layer software isbeing initialized.
l When the board is running, the softwareis running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during thepower-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red) The memory self-check fails or loadingupper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.The logic file or upper layer software is lostduring the running process of the board.The pluggable storage card is faulty.
L/A1a On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly and isnot receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow) The GE1 port is receiving or transmittingdata.
Off The GE1 port is not connected or isconnected incorrectly.
L/A2a On (green) The GE2 port is connected correctly and isnot receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow) The GE2 port is receiving or transmittingdata.
Off The GE2 port is not connected or isconnected incorrectly.
NOTE
a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of thecorresponding GE ports.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
734
![Page 754: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/754.jpg)
Table H-9 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working properly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power supplied to the board.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board duringthe power-on or resetting process of theboard.
Blinks on (green) and off at300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot stateduring the power-on or resetting process ofthe board.
On (green) l The upper layer software is beinginitialized during the power-on orresetting process of the board.
l The software is running properly duringthe running process of the board.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during thepower-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red) l The memory self-check fails or loadingupper layer software fails during thepower-on or resetting process of theboard.
l The logic file or upper layer software islost during the running process of theboard.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in thesystem.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system.
LINK1 On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly.
Blinks on (red) and off at 300ms intervals
The receive optical power at the GE1 opticalport is higher than the upper threshold.
Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700ms off
The receive optical power at the GE1 opticalport is lower than the lower threshold.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
735
![Page 755: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/755.jpg)
Indicator State Meaning
Off The GE1 port is not connected or isconnected incorrectly.
ACT1 Blinking (yellow) The GE1 port is receiving or transmittingdata.
Off The GE1 port is not receiving ortransmitting data.
LINK2 On (green) The GE2 port is connected correctly.
Blinks on (red) and off at 300ms intervals
The receive optical power at the GE2 opticalport is higher than the upper threshold.
Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700ms off
The receive optical power at the GE2 opticalport is lower than the lower threshold.
Off The GE1 port is not connected or isconnected incorrectly.
ACT2 Blinking (yellow) The GE2 port is receiving or transmittingdata.
Off The GE2 port is not receiving ortransmitting data.
Table H-10 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working properly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power supplied to the board.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board duringthe power-on or resetting process of theboard.
Blinks on (green) and off at300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot stateduring the power-on or resetting process ofthe board.
On (green) l When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the upper layer software isbeing initialized.
l When the board is running, the softwareis running normally.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
736
![Page 756: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/756.jpg)
Indicator State Meaning
Blinks on (red) and off at 100ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during thepower-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red) l The memory self-check fails or loadingupper layer software fails during thepower-on or resetting process of theboard.
l The logic file or upper layer software islost during the running process of theboard.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SRV On (green) The system is working properly.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in thesystem.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system.
Table H-11 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is workingproperly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.
Off The services are notconfigured.
LOS1 On (red) The first port of the SL1D/SL1DA is reporting theR_LOS alarm.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
737
![Page 757: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/757.jpg)
Indicator State Meaning
Off The first port of the SL1D/SL1DA is free of R_LOSalarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second port of theSL1D/SL1DA is reportingthe R_LOS alarm.
Off The second port of theSL1D/SL1DA is free ofR_LOS alarms.
Table H-12 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is workingproperly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.
Off The services are notconfigured.
Table H-13 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is workingproperly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
738
![Page 758: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/758.jpg)
Indicator State Meaning
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.
Off The services are notconfigured.
Table H-14 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working properly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power supplied to the
board.
SRV On (green) The system is working properly.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in thesystem.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in thesystem.
Off There is no power supplied to the system.
Table H-15 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU
Indicator Status Description
PWR On (green) The power supply is normal.
Off There is no power supply.
ALM On (orange) The board is in the initialization state.
On (red) An alarm is reported on the PIU.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
739
![Page 759: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/759.jpg)
Indicator Status Description
Off No alarm occurs.
Table H-16 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN
Indicator State Meaning
FAN On (green) The fan is working properly.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) H Indicators of Boards
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
740
![Page 760: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/760.jpg)
I Glossary
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.
I.1 0-9This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
I.2 A-EThis section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
I.3 F-JThis section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
I.4 K-OThis section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
I.5 P-TThis section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
I.6 U-ZThis section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
741
![Page 761: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/761.jpg)
I.1 0-9This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
I.2 A-EThis section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
A
ABR See available bit rate
ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have accessto a resource.
ACL See access control list
adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme according tothe channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation scheme to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrumutilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adoptsthe low-efficiency modulation scheme to improve the anti-interference capability of thelink that carries high-priority services.
ADC See analog to digital converter
add/drop multiplexer Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signalscontained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
Address ResolutionProtocol
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses toMAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses throughARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the hostconverts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipmentthrough its IP address.
adjacent channelalternate polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontalpolarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
ADM See add/drop multiplexer
administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layerand the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher orderVC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative tothe multiplex section frame start.
AF See assured forwarding
aggregation A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete orconceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
742
![Page 762: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/762.jpg)
AIS See alarm indication signal
alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the NetworkManagement System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view thedetails of the alarm.
alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.
Alarm Filtering An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based onthe filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarminformation. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed orstored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failurehas been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be thenetworkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific functionmodule of a specific board.
AM See adaptive modulation
analog to digitalconverter
An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. Thereverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
APS See automatic protection switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic thatexceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward thetraffic instead of discarding the packets.
AsynchronousTransfer Mode
A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous inthe sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM PVC ATM permanent virtual circuit
ATPC See automatic transmit power control
attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used toensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
AU See administrative unit
automatic protectionswitching
Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switchto a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatic transmitpower control
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detectedat the receiver
available bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possibleforwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-timequality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
743
![Page 763: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/763.jpg)
B
backward defectindication
When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in anetwork. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies thetransmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworkswith the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It providesthe following functions: radio resource management, base station management, powercontrol, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages oneor more BTSs in an actual network.
base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of trafficand signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radioequipment, and the antenna.
basic input/outputsystem
A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output controlprograms, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system settinginformation. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
BDI See backward defect indication
BE See best effort
BER See bit error rate
best effort A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwardedfollowing the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of thenetwork and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the timeit reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet lossratio, and high reliability.
binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparentpolypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
BIOS See basic input/output system
BIP See bit interleaved parity
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the correspondingbit in the received digital signal.
bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure thecommunications quality of a network.
bit interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by thetransmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that thefirst bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in thecovered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit ofall X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by settingthe BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of thesignal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position withinthe X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includesthe BIP-X.
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
744
![Page 764: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/764.jpg)
bridge protocol dataunit
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN thatuses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information onports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it wasintended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in anetwork topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridgesinterfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range isdetermined by the broadcast address.
BSC See base station controller
BTS See base transceiver station
buffer A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in inter-networking tocompensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of datacan be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In aprogram, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that willbe read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to storean advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.
C
cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.
cable tray N/A
cable trough N/A
CAR See committed access rate
CBR See constant bit rate
CBS See committed burst size
CC See connectivity check
CCC See circuit cross connect
CCDP See co-channel dual polarization
CCM See continuity check message
CE See customer edge
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interpretsand executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and executeinstructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer'smain data-transfer path, the bus.
CES See circuit emulation service
CF See compact flash
CGMP See Cisco Group Management Protocol
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between twoor more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmittedper second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits persecond. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
745
![Page 765: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/765.jpg)
CIR See committed information rate
circuit cross connect An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels.
circuit emulationservice
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At thetransmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATMcells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, theinterface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CEStechnology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the originalsequence at the reception end.
Cisco GroupManagement Protocol
N/A
CIST See common and internal spanning tree
CIST root A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.
clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in anetwork.
co-channel dualpolarization
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a verticalpolarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twicethe transmission capacity of the single polarization.
coarse wavelengthdivision multiplexing
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels intothe same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDMdoes not support optical amplifiers and is applied in a short-distance chain network.
colored packet A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.
committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classifiedinto QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission ratecan be defined.
committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committedinformation rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that thisparameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might beforwarded.
committed informationrate
The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normalconditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred tothe leaky bucket.
common and internalspanning tree
The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logicalcontinuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTPto ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used inportable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory ina standardized enclosure.
concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can beused a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved byeach MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
746
![Page 766: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/766.jpg)
constant bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based onthe constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on preciseclocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity checkmessage
CCM is used to detect the link status.
corrugated pipe Used to protect optical fibers.
CPU See central processing unit
CRC See cyclic redundancy check
cross polarizationinterferencecancellation
A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminatethe cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to theService Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing
cyclic redundancycheck
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking usesa complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sendingdevice performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that itsends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation aftertransmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmissionwas error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmissionincludes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
data communicationnetwork
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the DataCommunication Function (DCF).
data communicationschannel
The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal totransmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
Datagram A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram,UDP datagram.
DC See direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground)
DC-return common(with ground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line betweenthe output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return common(with ground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line betweenthe output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
747
![Page 767: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/767.jpg)
DC-return isolate (withground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGNDon the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See data communications channel
DCN See data communication network
DDF See digital distribution frame
DDN See digital data network
DE See discard eligible
differentiated services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a seriesof functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioningfunctions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.
differentiated servicescode point
A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to applydifferentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServpolicy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet andother IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.
DiffServ See differentiated services
digital data network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiberchannel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplextechnology.
digital distributionframe
A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange withtransmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital modulation A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of thecarrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, theinformation can be transmitted by the carrier.
direct current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop orchange amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
discard eligible A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supportsthe FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet trafficexceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In thecase of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.
Distance VectorMulticast RoutingProtocol
An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typicaldense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routingdatagrams with its neighbors.
DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in adomain that is not DS-capable.
DS domain In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group ofnetwork nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It providespoint-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.
DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP See differentiated services code point
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
748
![Page 768: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/768.jpg)
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio wavesorthogonally polarized.
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E
E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation
E-LAN See Ethernet LAN
E-Line See Ethernet line
E-Tree See Ethernet-tree
EBS See excess burst size
ECC See embedded control channel
EF See expedited forwarding
electromagneticcompatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunicationsequipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagneticenvironment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentionalelectromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagneticinterference
Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades orlimits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at differentelectrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
embedded controlchannel
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)information between NEs.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI See electromagnetic interference
Engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
EPL See Ethernet private line
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service
equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate forthe changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
ERPS See Ethernet ring protection switching
ESD See electrostatic discharge
ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf orcabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/CollisionDetection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/CollisionDetection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
749
![Page 769: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/769.jpg)
Ethernet aggregation A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtualconnection).
Ethernet LAN A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernetvirtual connection).
Ethernet line A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtualconnection).
Ethernet private LANservice
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over adedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, orMPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-pointconnections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet ringprotection switching
protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.
Ethernet virtualprivate LAN service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a sharedbridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.
Ethernet virtualprivate line
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over sharedbandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.
Ethernet-tree An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet VirtualConnection.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EuropeanTelecommunicationsStandards Institute
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, thetraffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameterused to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet sizewhen the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parametermust be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than themaximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. Theprotection switching is not really performed.
expansion Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables,expanding the capacity of the storage system.
expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services thatdemand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EFtraffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCPvalue of EF PHB is "101110".
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
750
![Page 770: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/770.jpg)
I.3 F-JThis section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
F
failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required functionto be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now beendetected.
fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 timesfaster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and soon. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the followingthree types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core opticalfibers).
fast link pulse The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.
FD See frequency diversity
FDI See forward defect indication
FE See fast Ethernet
FEC See forward error correction
FFD fast failure detection
fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and forconnections between subracks or inside a subrack.
field programmablegate array
A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as thePAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but alsoovercomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of thelimited number of gate arrays.
FIFO See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computerson the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be anFTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
Forced switch For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unlessan equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on theprotection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.
forward defectindication
Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of theLSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of thedefect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affectedhigher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward errorcorrection
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload atthe transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated duringtransmission are corrected at the receive end.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
751
![Page 771: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/771.jpg)
Forwarding plane Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and canbe used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.
FPGA See field programmable gate array
fragment Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.
Fragmentation Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network mediumthat cannot support the original size of the packet.
frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame lengthis represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-specified by the sending and receiving parties.
frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certainfrequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is thenperformed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP See File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in bothdirections, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-linetelephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heardat the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road withone lane for each direction.
G
gateway networkelement
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer andthe NM application layer
GE See gigabit Ethernet
generic framingprocedure
A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has beenstandardized by ITU-T SG15.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This isto adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream routerto avoid packet discarding and congestion.
GFP See generic framing procedure
gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not supportcoaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. IfGigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causingthe length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global PositioningSystem
A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, andtiming services to worldwide users.
GNE See gateway network element
GPS See Global Positioning System
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
752
![Page 772: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/772.jpg)
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options withgraphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
GTS See generic traffic shaping
GUI See graphical user interface
guide rail Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.
H
HA See high availability
half-duplex A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in bothdirections, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a partybegins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, beforereplying.
HDLC See high level data link control
hierarchical quality ofservice
A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling accordingto the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and theadministrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidthcan be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high availability Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achievehigh availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takesover the system functions of the active module.
high level data linkcontrol
The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layerof the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame byadding a trailer and a header.
High Speed DownlinkPacket Access
A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirementfor asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables themaximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing theWCDMA network topology.
higher order path In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lowerorder path layers.
Hold priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicatesthe highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by thetunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.
hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop representsa small step on the route from one main computer to another.
hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables andstorage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. Whenthe faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services inthe faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entiresystem.
HP See higher order path
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service
HSB See hot standby
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
753
![Page 773: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/773.jpg)
HSM hitless switch mode
HTB high tributary bus
hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supportsthe AM function.
I
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol
IDU See indoor unit
IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force
IF See intermediate frequency
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol managesand controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet GroupManagement Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM
indoor unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Inloop A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connectunit.
Institute of Electricaland ElectronicsEngineers
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States butboasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RFsignal.
Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generateroutes.
Intermediate System toIntermediate Systemrouting protocol
A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forwarddatagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing.
internal spanning tree A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
InternationalElectrotechnicalCommission
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards.
InternationalOrganization forStandardization
An international association that works to establish global standards for communicationsand information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely acceptedISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computersconnected by communications networks.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
754
![Page 774: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/774.jpg)
InternationalTelecommunicationUnion-TelecommunicationStandardization Sector
An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunicationstechnologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with aletter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. Forexample, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and opensystem communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet ControlMessage Protocol
A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction andother information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP softwareon one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See alsocommunications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet EngineeringTask Force
A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged withstudying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the InternetArchitecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groupsthat concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisherof the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet GroupManagement Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups amongthe TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establishand maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sentacross an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet deliveryservice. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. Theentire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the twofundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
Internet protocolversion 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specificationsand standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering TaskForce (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designedas the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 addresshas 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet protocolversion 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specificationsand standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering TaskForce (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designedas the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 addresshas 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
inverse multiplexingover ATM
The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higherbandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This isreferred to as an IMA group.
IP See Internet Protocol
IPV6 See Internet protocol version 6
IPv6 See Internet protocol version 6
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol
ISO See International Organization for Standardization
IST See internal spanning tree
ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication StandardizationSector
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
755
![Page 775: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/775.jpg)
J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control systeminstability.
I.4 K-OThis section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
L
L2VPN See Layer 2 virtual private network
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through labelswitching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based onnormal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
label switching router Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR iscomposed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible forallocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating andremoving the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groupsreceived in the label forwarding table.
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG See link aggregation group
LAN See local area network
LAN See local area network
LAPS link access protocol-SDH
Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laserlight has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductorlaser as the light source.
layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmitsand distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is thesecond layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
Layer 2 virtual privatenetwork
A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packetswitched (IP/MPLS) network.
LB See loopback
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme
LCT local craft terminal
line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals themaximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
line rate forwarding The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
Link AggregationControl Protocol
A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface toincrease bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE802.3ad.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
756
![Page 776: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/776.jpg)
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a linkaggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it werea single link.
link capacityadjustment scheme
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides acontrol mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet thebandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member linksthat have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is theresponsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.
Link Protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link isa downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,the link protection should be provided.
LMSP linear multiplex section protection
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few squarekilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANsare generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few squarekilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANsare generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from beingswitched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has beenswitched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel tothe working channel.
LOF See Loss Of Frame
LOM loss of multiframe
loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that thesignal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOP See loss of pointer
LOS See Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Frame A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overheadindicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitorthe performance of the PHY layer.
loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in thePHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start ofcell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the receivedsignal.
LP lower order path
LPT link-state pass through
LSP See label switched path
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
757
![Page 777: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/777.jpg)
LSR See label switching router
M
MA See maintenance association
MAC See media access control
MAC See media access control
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
main topology A interface that displays the connection relationships of NEs on the NMS (screendisplay). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network,the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well asthe basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessedhere.
maintenanceassociation
That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, theconnectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of MaintenanceEntities.
maintenanceassociation end point
A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a ServiceInstance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is anend point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate MaintenanceEntity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. Thedevices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
managementinformation base
A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. Itcomprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such asrouters and switches) in a network.
manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition existson other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switchcommand is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
maximum transmissionunit
The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes onEthernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining thesize of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmittedacross networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the onethat all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networksinvolved.
MBS maximum burst size
MCF See message communication function
MD See maintenance domain
MDI See medium dependent interface
Mean Time BetweenFailures
The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measureof the reliability of the system.
Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
758
![Page 778: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/778.jpg)
media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of thedata link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connectingthe physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocolchecks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain controlinformation is added to the data, and then the data and the control information aretransmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MACprotocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmittedcorrectly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the controlinformation is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of thedata link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connectingthe physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocolchecks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain controlinformation is added to the data, and then the data and the control information aretransmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MACprotocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmittedcorrectly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the controlinformation is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
medium dependentinterface
The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the mediatransmission.
MEP See maintenance association end point
MEP maintenance end point
messagecommunicationfunction
The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of managementinformation with their prs.
MIB See management information base
MIP maintenance intermediate point
mounting ear A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements orcomponents.
MP See maintenance point
MPID maintenance point identification
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching
MPLS L2VPN The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. Inthis case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs ofdifferent media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.
MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of faultdetection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM andrelevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CR-LSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.
MPLS TE See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
759
![Page 779: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/779.jpg)
MPLS TE tunnel In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported throughmultiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a groupof LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has twoidentifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquelydefine the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE orFILTER_SPEC object.
MS See multiplex section
MSP See multiplex section protection
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR See Mean Time To Repair
MTU See maximum transmission unit
Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. Thedestination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP addressranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicastgroup rather than a host.
Multiple SpanningTree Protocol
Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using analgorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmedas a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoidedin the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs andmultiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwardedin a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.
multiplex sectionprotection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between andincluding two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a"protection" channel.
Multiprotocol LabelSwitching
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different linklayers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis ofIP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability ofnetworks, and is beneficial to routing.
multiprotocol labelswitching trafficengineering
N/A
N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protectionchannel.
NE See network element
NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage thetelecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage andmaintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
760
![Page 780: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/780.jpg)
network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. OneNE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board whichmanages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCCboard.
Network ManagementSystem
A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
network service accesspoint
A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer canaccess OSI network services.
network to networkinterface
An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.
next hop The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a networkon its journey to its final destination.
NLP normal link pulse
NMS See Network Management System
NNI See network to network interface
node A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame,one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands forone frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.
Node Protection A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able toprotect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to thePLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able toprotect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to thePLR.
non-gateway networkelement
A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must betransferred by the gateway network element application layer.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element
NSAP See network service access point
NSF not stop forwarding
O
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance
ODF See optical distribution frame
ODU See outdoor unit
OM Operation and maintenance
One-to-One Backup A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protectedtunnel at a PLR.
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra'salgorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. Alink state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routersin the area.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
761
![Page 781: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/781.jpg)
Open SystemsInterconnection
A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made bydifferent vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven differentcategories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message sourceand destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
operation,administration andmaintenance
A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in anoperational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriberaccess network to users/subscribers.
optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couplethe optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. Aconnector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source(or a detector).+
optical distributionframe
A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers ormaintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI See Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF See open shortest path first
outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequencyconversion and amplification for RF signals.
Outloop A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port withoutchanging the structure of the signals.
Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
I.5 P-TThis section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
P
packet switchednetwork
A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.
Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.
Path A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left endof a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path isa certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in thenetwork management system, a user can test the performance of a network path betweena device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packetloss ratio or other aspects.
PBS See peak burst size
PCB See printed circuit board
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
762
![Page 782: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/782.jpg)
PCI bus PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bitfor interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy
PDU See protocol data unit
PE See provider edge
peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burstIP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. Thisparameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be notless than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
peak information rate A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committedinformation rate.
penultimate hoppopping
Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLSenabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS taggedpacket is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to anadjacent Label Edge Router (LER).
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hopbehaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network shouldselect the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETFdefines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
PHB See per-hop behavior
PHP See penultimate hop popping
PIR See peak information rate
PLA physical link aggregation
plesiochronous digitalhierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimumrate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulatesdata packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed orrotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave isperpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called verticallypolarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to theplane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if thetip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, thiselectromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which suppliespower for the subracks in the cabinet.
PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol
PQ See priority queue
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence
PRC primary reference clock
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
763
![Page 783: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/783.jpg)
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic componentsusing conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated ontoa non-conductive substrate.
priority queue An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following threeoperations: (1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associatedpriority (2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority,and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") (3) PeekAtNext(optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it
protection groundcable
A cable which connects the equipment and the protection ground bar. Usually, one halfof the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
protocol data unit It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.
provider edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE isresponsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, andexchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, aPE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network andthe public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binarysequence
A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of thevalues of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is establishedand maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW ismaintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulationedge-to-edge
A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributesof a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet SwitchedNetwork (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time DivisionMultiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the realsituation.
PSN See packet switched network
PTN packet transport network
PW See pseudo wire
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
Q
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tagof the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of thecarrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
QoS See quality of service
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying
quadrature phase shiftkeying
A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation andthe phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth periodor 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots areevenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
764
![Page 784: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/784.jpg)
quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet lossratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of thetransmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of aservice provider to meet the demands of users.
R
radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create anelectromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The ACwith frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classifiedinto such high-frequency current.
radio networkcontroller
A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of theradio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet accordingto the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronizationresulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.
Rapid Spanning TreeProtocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning treeconvergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible withthe STP protocol.
RDI See remote defect indication
received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
Received SignalStrength Indicator
The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in thereceiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDDwithin a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average receivedpower at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).
RED See random early detection
Reed-Solomon-Code A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction oferrors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmissionerrors at the receiver site.
REI See remote error indication
remote defectindication
A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminaldetects specific defects in the incoming signal.
remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There aretwo types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstreamLTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) issent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.
Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to theoperation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control ofthe IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sourcessuch as InterNIC.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
765
![Page 785: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/785.jpg)
Resource ReservationProtocol
The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and isused to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transportlayer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network controlprotocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
reverse pressure A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit endtransmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit endto slow down the transmission rate.
RF See radio frequency
RFC See Request For Comments
RIP See Routing Information Protocol
RMON remote network monitoring
RMON remote network monitoring
RNC See radio network controller
Root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-levelalarms always accompany a root alarm.
route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
route table A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destinationaddress, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM tothe designated account according to the information set in the route table.
Routing InformationProtocol
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a routebased on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vectorprotocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and isknown to waste bandwidth.
routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routersregularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on thedestination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--inhops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.
RSL See received signal level
RSSI See Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol
RTN radio transmission node
S
SD See space diversity
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy
SEMF See synchronous equipment management function
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
766
![Page 786: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/786.jpg)
service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies theforwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLAmay include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreementas a whole or partially.
Service LevelAgreement *
A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between serviceprovider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information aboutmeasuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operatingand support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider andcustomer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved thedocumented target measure.
SES See severely errored second
Setup Priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicatesthe highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt theresources required by other backup tunnels.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio ≥ X 10-3 or at least one defect. Timeinterval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratiogreater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction).
SF See signal fail
SFP See small form-factor pluggable
side trough The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix thecabinet.
signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscribersignal cable.
signal fail A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defectcondition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal to noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at agiven point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio andis usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple NetworkManagement Protocol
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modifythe management information of a network element. This protocol ensures thetransmission of management information between any two points. The pollingmechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, whichcan be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on thenetwork and report these activities to the network console workstation. Controlinformation about each device is maintained by a management information block.
simplex Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can betransmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points.
SLA See service level agreement
SLA* See Service Level Agreement *
Slicing To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.
small form-factorpluggable
A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
SNC See subnetwork connection
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
767
![Page 787: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/787.jpg)
SNCP See subnetwork connection protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR See signal to noise ratio
space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distanceto transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the twosignals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundantnetwork to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prunea loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message
static virtual circuit Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPNinformation by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can betransmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only toactive input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devicesto be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.
STM See Synchronous Transport Module
STM-1 See synchronous transport mode-1
STM-N See synchronous transport module of order N
STP See Spanning Tree Protocol
sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group ofnetwork management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected orcorrelated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clocksubnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, asub-network is used to contain the equipment located in adjacent regions and closelyrelated with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topologicalview. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning canbetter the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved,on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipmentunder their management.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets aredestined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,server or router and is matched with the IP address.
subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by theassociation of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.
subnetwork connectionprotection
A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protectionsubnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performancefalls below a required level.
SVC See static virtual circuit
switch To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. Thisbehavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
768
![Page 788: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/788.jpg)
Synchronization StatusMessage
A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clockinformation through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on theirclocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward thesynchronization information to downstream nodes.
synchronous digitalhierarchy
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines thetransmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speedcounterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitablefor the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it usessynchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronousequipmentmanagement function
The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms intoobject-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.
synchronous transportmode-1
Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.
SynchronousTransport Module
An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in theSDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fieldsorganized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitablyconditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronizedto the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Highercapacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacitiesfor N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
synchronous transportmodule of order N
A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH.See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64.
T
tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length,packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such asTCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced,thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets aredropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.
Tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded whenthe queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-widesynchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
TCI tag control information
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol
TDM See time division multiplexing
TE See traffic engineering
TEDB See traffic engineering database
TelecommunicationManagement Network
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communicationsnetwork. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networksand services.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
769
![Page 789: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/789.jpg)
TIM trace identifier mismatch
time divisionmultiplexing
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3, ...), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross timeslots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmittedover one channel.
time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in thenetwork. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
TMN See Telecommunication Management Network
ToS priority A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.
TPS See tributary protection switch
traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the loadof the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic managementparameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize theutilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused byunbalanced loads.
traffic engineeringdatabase
TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to knowthe features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which usesthe link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS containsome TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reservedbandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are ratherimportant. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area andgenerates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLSTE network.
Traffic shaping It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guaranteethe performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of trafficin the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layerdevices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.
Transmission ControlProtocol
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets tobe sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the completemessages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliablein the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer inthe ISO/OSI reference model.
tributary protectionswitch
Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended toprotect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
trTCM See two rate three color marker
TTL See time to live
TU tributary unit
Tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnelensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnelis an MPLS tunnel.
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
770
![Page 790: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/790.jpg)
two rate three colormarker
The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, PeakInformation Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associatedburst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds thePIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds ordoesn't exceed the CIR.
I.6 U-ZThis section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
U
U-VLAN A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN.Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.
UAS unavailable second
UBR See unspecified bit rate
UDP See User Datagram Protocol
underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI See user network interface
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unspecified bit rate No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is idealfor the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded,and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.
upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(NetworkManagement system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data storedat the NMS side.
User DatagramProtocol
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send adatagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IPto deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliableconnectionless packet delivery service. Therefore, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet isreceived.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (forexample, ATM switches).
V
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface
variable bit rate One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike apermanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidthand is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
VBR See variable bit rate
VC See virtual container
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
771
![Page 791: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/791.jpg)
VCC See virtual channel connection
VCG See virtual concatenation group
VCI See virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internalport of a data service processing board
virtual channelconnection
The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. Alogical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.
virtual channelidentifier
A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used toidentify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches onits way to its destination.
virtual concatenationgroup
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the samevirtual concatenation link
virtual container The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consistsof information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a blockframe structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.
virtual local areanetwork
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physicalnetwork segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associatedwith switched Ethernet.
virtual path identifier The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to whichvirtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private LANservice
A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLSenables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through theMAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network viaconnections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
virtual route forward VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actualrouting device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs,performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances onthe device.
virtual user-networkinterface
A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform serviceclassification and traffic control in HQoS.
VLAN See virtual local area network
voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voiceinformation over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital formin discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of thepublic switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP See voice over IP
VPI See virtual path identifier
VPLS See virtual private LAN service
VPN See virtual private network
VRF See virtual route forward
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
772
![Page 792: RTN 980 Maintenance Guide(U2000)-(V100R003C03_02)](https://reader034.vdocuments.mx/reader034/viewer/2022050711/55cf9bc7550346d033a75a11/html5/thumbnails/792.jpg)
W
wait to restore The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
WAN See wide area network
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NEmanagement layer of the transport network
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. Thisscheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, accordingto their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priorityqueues can be scheduled.
weighted random earlydetection
A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCPsynchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-prioritypacket when calculating the packet loss ratio.
weighted round Robin N/A
WFQ See weighted fair queuing
wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which arephysically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as aprovince, a state or even a country.
winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
WRED See weighted random early detection
WRR See weighted round Robin
WTR See wait to restore
X
XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation
OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide (U2000) I Glossary
Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
773